ILPA Introduction
If you are looking for affordable, custom-written, high-quality, and non-plagiarized papers, your student life just became easier with us. We are the ideal place for all your writing needs.
Order a Similar Paper
Order a Different Paper
Using the attachments and a minimum of two scholarly articles (references) write the Introduction section of your Integrative Learning Project (ILP), you will write two to three paragraphs that contain the recommended components from the APA Publication Manual, 7th edition, section 3.4. It must be formatted according to section 2.27 of the APA Publication Manual, 7th edition. Do not exceed 3/4 page in length for your introduction.
6
Interactive Learning Project Outline
Sha-Nicca White
School of Business Liberty University
BUSI 650 –Operations Management (B04)
Sha-Nicca A. White (ID # L29442727)
I have no known conflict of interest to disclose.
Correspondence concerning this article should be addressed to Sha-Nicca. A. White
Email: [email protected]
1.
Mission of Company A:
1.1
Client Satisfaction and Quality Public Relations Consulting
Company A’s public relations consulting services are of the highest caliber, with a particular focus on client pleasure. They wish to give their clients the best legal counsel possible for better relationship management. The organization primarily focuses on looking at current practices to encourage increased market awareness. They do this to increase the value of all types of risks and to ensure that the communication needs of their clients are efficiently satisfied.
1.2 Significance of Education in Evaluating and Managing Risks
The importance of education in the process of assessing and managing risks is heavily emphasized by Company A. Employees are then able to make decisions based on reliable information and come up with appropriate solutions. Employees are able to make decisions based on reliable information and come up with appropriate solutions. Recognizing and understanding various types of hazards can help employees become better problem-solvers and decision-makers.
1.2.1 The Value of the Education
The training courses provided by Company A help participants comprehend typical human behavior in hazardous circumstances, enabling them to determine the root reasons and assess their problem-solving skills. Focusing on risk detection is the cornerstone of successful management strategies, which ultimately benefit clients.
2.
Customers of Company A:
2.1 Clientele
Some of Company A’s external clientele include social networking websites, healthcare facilities, academic institutions, and manufacturing companies. These numerous businesses require skilled, practical services that consistently generate revenues. By providing cutting-edge techniques and expertise on risk solutions in the current environment, Company A helps its clients manage risks effectively (Sutherland et al., 2020). The business strives to increase its clients’ capacity to recognize the root causes of problems and devise practical solutions.
3.
Value Added by Company A:
3.1 Actions Taken to Add Value
Excellent customer service is a strength of Company A and adds to its overall worth. Utilizing the workforce’s skills and knowledge allows the organization to achieve its goals. Today, it is more crucial than ever to communicate clearly and succinctly, and Company A is well aware of the necessity to employ cutting-edge communication strategies. By utilizing the developing skill sets of its staff, the organization makes sure that its PR strategies are current and consistent with industry trends. As a result of their actions, they help the company operate better overall and improve its reputation (Wiyono et al., 2023).
3.2 Solutions
Company A places a high value on the necessity of making moral decisions, remaining objective, and having the ability to severe emotional attachments to potential dangers when it comes to providing meaningful solutions for its consumers.
4.
Role of Christianity in Company A:
4.1 Secular Company with Christian Principles
Despite being a secular organization, Company A respects its employees’ adherence to the Christian faith. Employees who practice their Christian faith in both their personal and professional lives are rewarded by the organization. As part of the hiring process for executive roles, the corporation assesses each applicant’s level of religiosity (Askeland et al., 2019).
4.2 Creating an Ethical Atmosphere Based on Christian Ideals
The objective of this thorough selection process is to incorporate the fundamental ethical principles of the organization. It is crucial to remember that this recruiting process is not designed to be discriminatory but rather to determine how well a candidate aligns with the company’s values (Wiyono et al., 2023). By upholding Christian ideas, Company A aims to foster an environment where moral decision-making and values-based behavior are encouraged among its employees. Employees are urged to judge based on Christian principles and consider ethics when guiding clients. When objectivity is valued, employees can let go of emotional ties to risk, enabling them to approach problem-solving logically and objectively. This tactic improves the company’s capacity to provide reliable and beneficial services. It is essential to keep in mind that Company A does not engage in discriminatory behavior while respecting and supporting Christian ideas among its employees. The selection process is meant to determine whether an applicant’s personal values align with the organization’s ethical standards rather than to discriminate against people based on their religious beliefs.
5.
Conclusion
In summary, Company A’s objective is to enhance client management through the provision of first-rate public relations consulting services. They offer innovative techniques and risk management solutions to outside clients in various industries. By utilizing cutting-edge communication methods and the expertise of its team to deliver first-rate client services, the organization adds value. Despite being a secular organization, Company A values employees who apply their Christian beliefs to uphold ethical behavior and decision-making within the organization.
References
Askeland, H., Espedal, G., & Sirris, S. (2019). Values as vessels of religion? The role of values in everyday work at faith-based organizations.
Diaconia,
10(1), 27–49. https://doi.org/10.13109/diac.2019.10.1.27
Sutherland, K., Freberg, K., Driver, C., & Khattab, U. (2020). Public relations and customer service: Employer perspectives of social media proficiency.
Public Relations Review,
46(4), 101954. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.pubrev.2020.101954
Wiyono, B. B., Komariah, A., Alghamdi, A. A., Fahlevi, M., & Sultoni. (2023). The influence of principals’ e-leadership on the effectiveness of schools’ public relations and Organizational Improvement.
Sustainability,
15(2), 1296. https://doi.org/10.3390/su15021296
13
Human Resource Management ILPA Annotated Bibligraphy
Sha-Nicca White
School of Business Liberty University
BUSI 650 –Operations Management (B04)
Sha-Nicca A. White (ID # L29442727)
I have no known conflict of interest to disclose.
Correspondence concerning this article should be addressed to Sha-Nicca. A. White
Email: [email protected]
Askeland, H., Espedal, G., & Sirris, S. (2019). Values as vessels of religion? The role of values in everyday work at faith-based organizations.
Diaconia,
10(1), 27–49. https://doi.org/10.13109/diac.2019.10.1.27
The article “Values as vessels of religion? The role of values in everyday work at faith-based organizations” by Askeland, Espedal, and Sirris (2019) explores the significance of values in the context of everyday work within faith-based organizations. Key findings show that values influence work culture, employee engagement, and ethical challenges in faith-based businesses. According to the essay, purpose, and loyalty are fostered when organizational ideals and employee values are comprehended and in line. This article expands on organizational culture and staff behavior in operations management. It is vital to embrace and promote values that align with an organization’s goal and vision since they influence the workplace. Values encourage moral decision-making and employee participation.
Casey, T., Turner, N., Hu, X., & Bancroft, K. (2021). Making safety training stickier: A richer model of safety training engagement and transfer.
Journal of Safety Research,
78, 303–313. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jsr.2021.06.004
Enhancing the effectiveness of safety training programs in businesses is the primary goal of the essay “Making safety training stickier: A richer model of safety training engagement and transfer” by Casey, Turner, Hu, and Bancroft (2021). The study offers a comprehensive strategy examining workplace transfer and employee safety training participation. The primary outcomes are supervisor support, practical safety education exercises, and learner motivation. The essay suggests enhancing safety training’s engagement and transfer by utilizing experiential learning, social support, and reinforcement. Operations management values employee training and development. It contributes to creating safer safety training programs that involve staff members and transfer knowledge and skills to the workplace. The outcomes might enhance performance and safety instruction.
Di Gregorio, A., Maggioni, I., Mauri, C., & Mazzucchelli, A. (2019). Employability skills for future marketing professionals.
European Management Journal,
37(3), 251–258. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.emj.2019.03.004
Di Gregorio, Maggioni, Mauri, and Mazzucchelli’s article “Employability skills for future marketing professionals” (2019) looks at the abilities required of future marketers. The study examines what marketing specialists need to succeed in a shifting business environment. The findings indicate that marketing professionals need communication, digital literacy, creativity, adaptability, and analytical thinking. The article places a lot of emphasis on being current with technology and becoming an expert in digital marketing, which is crucial in this situation. Marketing management and workforce development are informed by operations management. Marketers need a broad skill set to meet industry demands. The findings assist educators and practitioners in developing marketing curricula and professional development programs that instruct upcoming marketers.
Keiningham, T., Aksoy, L., Bruce, H. L., Cadet, F., Clennell, N., Hodgkinson, I. R., & Kearney, T. (2020). Customer experience driven business model innovation.
Journal of Business Research,
116, 431–440. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2019.08.003
The 2020 article “Customer experience driven business model innovation” by Keiningham, Aksoy, Bruce, Cadet, Clennell, Hodgkinson, and Kearney examines this topic. The study examines how businesses leverage customer experience to develop original business strategies that increase customer satisfaction, loyalty, and profitability. Understanding customer demands, preferences, and emotions is essential for differentiating customer experiences. The importance of client-centricity and consumer input in innovation is emphasized in the article. It also underlines the connection between the company’s core values, strengths, and business model innovation. In operations management, this article offers ideas for innovation management and customer-centricity. It highlights how the customer experience drives the creation of business models and offers suggestions on how businesses may create and deliver outstanding customer experiences to gain a competitive advantage.
Lee, S. M., & Lee, D. (2020). “Untact”: a new customer service strategy in the digital age.
Service Business,
14(1), 1–22. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-019-00408-2
“Untact: a new customer service strategy in the digital age” by Lee and Lee (2020) explores “untact” as a digital customer service strategy. “Untact” customer service interactions are made possible by technology. According to the study, unattended procedures increase comfort, effectiveness, and cost-effectiveness. The research claims that chatbots, self-help kiosks, and mobile applications offer uncontactable customer support. Customer satisfaction in an untouchable world depends on customization and reliability. Operations management communicates with the customer service and technology departments, which is crucial in this situation. It clarifies customer service ideas and how digital technology makes contactless services possible. In the digital age, technology may enhance customer experiences and operational effectiveness.
Lee, Y., & Queenie Li, J.-Y. (2020). The value of internal communication in enhancing employees’ health information disclosure intentions in the workplace.
Public Relations Review,
46(1), 101872. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.pubrev.2019.101872
“The value of internal communication in enhancing employees’ health information disclosure intentions in the workplace” by Lee and Queenie Li (2020) examines the contribution of internal communication to the improvement of employees’ intentions to disclose health information in the workplace. The article, printed in the Public Relations Review, emphasizes how vital effective internal communication methods are for developing a welcoming environment. The research demonstrates how communication channels like employee newsletters and team meetings can boost employee trust and comfort in sharing health information. The findings emphasize the value of internal communication in expanding employee wellness and creating an open culture within organizations.
Leitão, J., Pereira, D., & Gonçalves, Â. (2019). Quality of work life and organizational performance: Workers’ feelings of contributing, or not, to the organization’s productivity.
International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health,
16(20), 3803. https://doi.org/10.3390/ijerph16203803
The relationship between quality of work life and organizational performance is analyzed in “Quality of work life and organizational performance: Workers’ feelings of contributing, or not, to the organization’s productivity” by Leito, Pereira, and Gonçalves (2019). Employee perceptions of their productivity contributions impact the quality of work life and organizational performance. The key findings indicate that the quality of work life affects employees’ feelings and productivity. The essay stresses that when employees believe their work has a purpose and a positive influence, their quality of life increases, which enhances organizational performance. The part on human resource management and organizational performance is nourished by operations management. Quality of work life improves employee performance, satisfaction, and engagement. The findings indicate that firms should prioritize the quality of work life initiatives to increase worker engagement and productivity.
McGunagle, D., & Zizka, L. (2020). Employability skills for 21st-century STEM students: the employers’ perspective.
Higher Education, Skills and Work-Based Learning,
10(3), 591–606. https://doi.org/10.1108/heswbl-10-2019-0148
The 2020 study “Employability skills for 21st-century STEM students: The employers’ perspective” by McGunagle and Zizka explores companies’ perspectives on STEM students’ employability abilities. The study looks at the employability of STEM graduates and the skills that companies value. According to the research, technical and non-technical skills determine how employable STEM students are. Along with technical skills, employers highly emphasize communication, teamwork, problem-solving, adaptability, and critical thinking. Operations management provides information on the workforce development and skills component, which significantly aids in workforce management. It clarifies the abilities STEM businesses need, assisting educators and policymakers in connecting curricula and training plans with market demands. The outcomes enhance STEM education and produce well-rounded graduates with 21st-century skills.
Meng, J., & Berger, B. K. (2019). The impact of organizational culture and leadership performance on PR professionals’ job satisfaction: Testing the joint mediating effects of engagement and trust.
Public Relations Review,
45(1), 64–75. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.pubrev.2018.11.002
Meng and Berger’s article from 2019, “The impact of organizational culture and leadership performance on PR professionals’ job aatisfaction: Testing the joint mediating effects of engagement and trust,” examines how organizational culture and leadership affect PR professionals’ work satisfaction. This connection is mediated through trust and employee engagement. Key findings indicate that corporate culture and leadership effectiveness have an impact on the pleasure of PR professionals at work. According to the research, organizational culture, leadership effectiveness, and work satisfaction are all mediated by employee engagement and trust. Human resource management and employee happiness are segments that are informed by operations management. It strongly emphasizes a positive business culture and capable leadership to increase work happiness in PR. Organizations should place a high priority on employee engagement and trust-building to increase the productivity and happiness of PR professionals.
Meredith, J. R., & Shafer, S. M. (2019).
Operations and supply chain management for MBAs (7th ed.). John Wiley & Sons.
The fundamentals of operations and supply chain management are taught to MBA students in Meredith and Shafer’s book “Operations and supply chain management for MBAs” (2019). The topics of supply chain design, logistics, inventory control, supply chain planning, and operations strategy are covered in this debate. This book teaches MBA candidates how to manage supply networks and operations. It blends various real-world scenarios and case studies with academic concepts to make learning easier. This book can be helpful for MBA students and professionals researching operations and supply chain management. It has a guiding influence on the final operations strategy, process management, and supply chain design.
Padilla-Rivera, A., do Carmo, B. B., Arcese, G., & Merveille, N. (2021). Social circular economy indicators: Selection through fuzzy delphi method.
Sustainable Production and Consumption,
26, 101–110. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.spc.2020.09.015
Indicators are chosen to analyze the social component of the circular economy in “Social circular economy indicators: Selection through fuzzy delphi method” by Padilla-Rivera, do Carmo, Arcese, and Merveille (2021). To gather expert opinions and create social indicators of circular economy practices, the study used fuzzy Delphi. The findings highlight the importance of social considerations in assessing the circular economy. The essay provides measures of community involvement, employment creation, and social inclusion. This topic is relevant to operations management’s focus on sustainable production and consumption, which aids comprehension. It gives companies and policymakers instructions on how to track and evaluate the social effects of circular economy initiatives.
Ratten, V., & Usmanij, P. (2021). Entrepreneurship education: Time for a change in research direction?
The International Journal of Management Education,
19(1), 100367. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijme.2020.100367
The article “Entrepreneurship education: Time for a change in research direction?” by Ratten and Usmanij (2021) questions the current research trajectory in entrepreneurship education. The essay, which was printed in The International Journal of Management Education, calls for a shift in emphasis in favor of more analytical and multidisciplinary approaches. The authors argue that cutting-edge topics like social entrepreneurship, sustainability, and the effects of technology on entrepreneurial education should be the focus of future research. They emphasize the value of including real-world experiences, experiential learning, and cultivating an entrepreneurial mindset. The essay suggests a reevaluation of research goals to address the evolving needs and challenges of entrepreneurship education successfully.
Small, E. (2020). How successful African-American male leaders in predominately white organizations integrate spirituality with leadership practice.
Journal of Management, Spirituality & Religion,
17(2), 184–208. https://doi.org/10.1080/14766086.2019.1697727
The article “How successful African-American male leaders in predominantly white organizations integrate spirituality with leadership practice” by Small (2020) explores how these leaders do so. The study investigates how these leaders balance their spiritual and professional lives. The results show that spirituality influences the leadership philosophies of African-American male leaders. It has an impact on their connections, decisions, and beliefs. The text emphasizes the need for moral rectitude and steady leadership. In the context of operations management, this article focuses on leadership and diversity. This study examines how African-American male CEOs who work in predominantly White firms integrate their religion. The results shed light on workplace leadership, diversity, and spirituality.
Smith, R. D. (2021).
Strategic planning for public relations (6th ed.). Routledge.
Smith’s book “Strategic Planning for Public Relations,” which was released in 2021, goes into great detail about the principles of strategic planning for public relations. Strategic planning includes setting goals, researching the environment, examining target audiences, creating communications, and evaluating the results. Careful strategic planning is required for public relations management to connect various communication initiatives to more general corporate goals and objectives. This book explores public relations strategy from numerous angles, looking at best practices, ideas, and methods. Strategic public relations planning may be used to inform operations management planning for communication management. The article stresses the importance of combining communication with business objectives and actively involving stakeholders. This book can help with strategic planning for those who work in or study public relations.
Stewart, G. L., & Brown, K. G. (2019).
Human resource management (4th ed.). John Wiley & Son.
Stewart and Brown’s book “Human Resource Management” is a reference that is highly respected and considered to be authoritative in the field. The book, which was created by John Wiley & Sons and released by that firm, covers various human resource management-related topics and provides insightful information on the theory and practice of human resource management. This book is an essential resource for human resource professionals, managers, students, and researchers who are interested in getting a more in-depth understanding of human resource management ideas, techniques, and current challenges because of its comprehensive approach. It has established itself as a crucial tool in the field of human resource management due to the abundance of knowledge and valuable advice it offers.
Sutherland, K., Freberg, K., Driver, C., & Khattab, U. (2020). Public relations and customer service: Employer perspectives of social media proficiency.
Public Relations Review,
46(4), 101954. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.pubrev.2020.101954
Sutherland, Freberg, Driver, and Khattab’s article “Public relations and customer service: Employer perspectives of social media proficiency” (2020) examines how employers view social media competency in PR and customer service. The study looks at how businesses value social media skills and how they impact customer service. According to the report, social media expertise is respected by organizations for customer relationship management and service. The essay focuses on the importance of social media skills for managing brand reputation, responding to customer inquiries, and engaging customers. The customer service and technology departments receive information from operations management. It highlights the growing importance of social media in customer service and public relations and the requirement for businesses to provide social media training to their workers. The statistics show how social media has an impact on experiences and customer service.
Testorelli, R., Ferreira de Araújo Lima, P., & Verbano, C. (2022). Fostering project risk management in SMEs: An emergent framework from a literature review.
Production Planning & Control,
33(13), 1304–1318. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2020.1859633
Project risk management in SMEs is covered in “Fostering project risk management in SMEs: an emergent framework from a literature review” by Testorelli, Ferreira de Araujo Lima, and Verbano (2022). A thorough literature review has produced a developing approach to enhance project risk management in SMEs. The findings highlight how vital risk management is to SME project management. The strategy strongly emphasizes identifying, analyzing, and mitigating risks with project stakeholders. Issues with SME risk management are also covered. From the operations management perspective, this article educates on project and risk management. It offers essential insights and a method for enhancing project risk management appropriate for SMEs. The findings influence SMEs’ best practices for risk reduction and project success.
Wiyono, B. B., Komariah, A., Alghamdi, A. A., Fahlevi, M., & Sultoni. (2023). The influence of principals’ e-leadership on the effectiveness of schools’ public relations and organizational improvement.
Sustainability,
15(2), 1296. https://doi.org/10.3390/su15021296
Wiyono, Komariah, Alghamdi, Fahlevi, and Sultoni’s 2023 article “The Influence of Principals’ E-Leadership on the Effectiveness of Schools’ Public Relations and Organizational Improvement” explores how principals’ e-leadership impacts school PR and organizational improvement. Principals ‘ use of electronic leadership techniques impacts the company’s and public relations’ effectiveness. E-leadership is essential for the organizational growth and public relations of schools. The essay focuses on how administrators can enhance school community participation, communication, and cooperation by employing electronic communication technologies. Leadership and educational management are informed by operations management. It demonstrates how teachers can use e-leadership to improve organizational effectiveness and public relations. E-leadership is a tool that educators can utilize to enhance communication and performance in the classroom.
1
2
Human Resource Management ILPA Assignment
Sha-Nicca White
School of Business Liberty University
BUSI 650 –Operations Management (B04)
Sha-Nicca A. White (ID # L29442727)
I have no known conflict of interest to disclose.
Correspondence concerning this article should be addressed to Sha-Nicca. A. White
Email: [email protected]
Human Resource Management ILPA Assignment
Table of Contents
2
Abstract
2
Improvement of Organizational Value
3
Role of Christianity in the Organization
Abstract
The company being discussed is a fictitious one called Company A. Company A offers public relations consulting services and aids other businesses or people in handling workplace issues. Risks related to culture, management, health, politics, sociology, technology, the economy, the law, and finances are frequently encountered by people. Each person is responsible for understanding the risk category they fall into to ensure they achieve successful outcomes based on their potential to develop their mental capacity to handle hazards.
Introduction
Company A employees are trained to comprehend the normal human behavior that takes place when a risk is discovered, and people develop a mental picture of the scenario at hand. This procedure is crucial because it makes it easier to pinpoint the cause of the issue and enables the person involved to assess their level of problem-solving ability. In this way, risk identification forms the cornerstone of all management techniques that result in success.
Organizational Mission
The organization’s mission is to “promote better client management by offering our clients the best counsel services possible.” For the associated specialists to effectively manage the clients’ attitudes, Company A analyzes current approaches for fostering greater market comprehension. Risk management then ensures that understanding how to handle typical communication requirements is improved. Since knowing the issue is crucial, it is possible to ensure that the value of all types of risk is improved. Education is vital when assessing and managing risks since it enables a person to understand the best course of action.
Definition of Customers
Company A’s customers are external, including social networking companies, hospitals, educational institutions, and manufacturing firms. All of these require cutting-edge techniques to provide their clients with professional and practical services that consistently result in financial gains. By easing access to information about risk solutions in the existing environment, managing risk would be practicable (Wiyono et al., 2023). It would be achievable to guarantee that everyone improves their capacity to comprehend the root causes of risks and to produce appropriate ideas for solutions in this method. The following mental step is humans’ hardwired reflexes while making a decision, which comes after risk identification and comprehension. Making decisions is crucial while looking for solutions to public relations problems. Each person must decide whether they feel an emotional connection to the job scenario as part of the mental process. Creating a manageable strategy to deal with a client management scenario is possible.
Improvement of Organizational Value
Today’s information age relies on technical communication methods to provide adequate client services. A company’s public relations gradually increase by utilizing the changing skill sets of various individuals who demonstrate cutting-edge communication strategies (Sutherland et al., 2020). Analyzing this and comparing it to my beliefs demonstrates that my contribution to the organization is related to promoting the current viewpoints of many people and then ensuring ethics are taken into consideration by being objective while making decisions. In order to create effective solutions, each person must cut their emotional ties to danger.
Role of Christianity in the Organization
Although the corporation under discussion is secular, all its employees are expected to uphold Christian beliefs. Only those who integrate their particular faith are selected for managerial posts after the organization integrates an interview procedure to determine each applicant’s level of religiosity. The selection process is a thorough way to make sure that the organization’s essential ideals of ethical living are incorporated, not a discriminatory one.
Conclusion
Thus, the company makes sure that while considering better strategies for fostering client interaction, advanced PR practices are always integrated.
References
Sutherland, K., Freberg, K., Driver, C., & Khattab, U. (2020). Public relations and customer service: Employer perspectives of social media proficiency.
Public Relations Review,
46(4), 101954. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.pubrev.2020.101954
Wiyono, B. B., Komariah, A., Alghamdi, A. A., Fahlevi, M., & Sultoni. (2023). The influence of principals’ e-leadership on the effectiveness of schools’ public relations and Organizational Improvement.
Sustainability,
15(2), 1296. https://doi.org/10.3390/su15021296
Meridth-ffirs.indd 2 11/5/2015 4:08:43 PM
Operations and Supply
Chain Management
for MBAs
Meridth-ffirs.indd 1 11/5/2015 4:08:43 PM
Meridth-ffirs.indd 2 11/5/2015 4:08:43 PM
Sixth Edition
Jack R . Meredith
Scott M. Shafer
Wake Forest University
Operations and Supply
Chain Management
for MBAs
Meridth-ffirs.indd 3 11/5/2015 4:08:44 PM
VICE PRESIDENT & DIRECTOR George Hoffman
EXECUTIVE EDITOR Lise Johnson
DEVELOPMENT EDITOR Jennifer Manias
ASSOCIATE DEVELOPMENT EDITOR Kyla Buckingham
SENIOR PRODUCT DESIGNER Allison Morris
MARKET SOLUTIONS ASSISTANT Amanda Dallas
SENIOR DIRECTOR Don Fowley
PROJECT MANAGER Gladys Soto
PROJECT SPECIALIST Nichole Urban
PROJECT ASSISTANT Anna Melhorn
PROJECT ASSISTANT Emily Meussner
EXECUTIVE MARKETING MANAGER Christopher DeJohn
ASSISTANT MARKETING MANAGER Puja Katariwala
ASSOCIATE DIRECTOR Kevin Holm
SENIOR CONTENT SPECIALIST Nicole Repasky
PRODUCTION EDITOR Ezhilan Vikraman
This book was set in 10/12 Times LT Std by SPi Global and printed and bound by Lightning Source Inc.
Founded in 1807, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. has been a valued source of knowledge and understanding for more than
200 years, helping people around the world meet their needs and fulfill their aspirations. Our company is built on a
foundation of principles that include responsibility to the communities we serve and where we live and work. In 2008,
we launched a Corporate Citizenship Initiative, a global effort to address the environmental, social, economic, and
ethical challenges we face in our business. Among the issues we are addressing are carbon impact, paper specifications
and procurement, ethical conduct within our business and among our vendors, and community and charitable support.
For more information, please visit our website: www.wiley.com/go/citizenship.
Copyright © 2016, 2013, 2010, 2007, 2002, 1999 John Wiley & Sons, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication
may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise, except as permitted under Sections 107 or 108 of the 1976 United
States Copyright Act, without either the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization through payment of
the appropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923
(Web site: www.copyright.com). Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the Permissions
Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030-5774, (201) 748-6011,
fax (201) 748-6008, or online at: www.wiley.com/go/permissions.
Evaluation copies are provided to qualified academics and professionals for review purposes only, for use in their
courses during the next academic year. These copies are licensed and may not be sold or transferred to a third party.
Upon completion of the review period, please return the evaluation copy to Wiley. Return instructions and a free of
charge return shipping label are available at: www.wiley.com/go/returnlabel. If you have chosen to adopt this textbook
for use in your course, please accept this book as your complimentary desk copy. Outside of the United States, please
contact your local sales representative.
ISBN: 978-1-119-23953-6 (PBK)
ISBN: 978-1-119-22321-4 (EVALC)
Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data:
Names: Meredith, Jack R., author. | Shafer, Scott M., author.
Title: Operations and Supply Chain Management for MBAs / Jack R. Meredith, Scott M. Shafer.
Description: Sixth edition. | Hoboken, NJ : John Wiley & Sons, 2016. |
Includes bibliographical references and index.
Identifiers: LCCN 2015038625 | ISBN 978-1-119-23953-6 (pbk. : alk. paper)
Subjects: LCSH: Production management. | Business logistics.
Classification: LCC TS155 .M393 2016 | DDC 658.5—dc23 LC record available at http://lccn.loc.gov/2015038625
Printing identification and country of origin will either be included on this page and/or the end of the book. In addition,
if the ISBN on this page and the back cover do not match, the ISBN on the back cover should be considered the correct
ISBN.
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Meridth-ffirs.indd 4 11/5/2015 4:08:44 PM
This book is dedicated to the Newest Generation:
Avery, Mitchell, Ava, Chase, and Ian. J.R.M.
Brianna, Sammy, and Kacy S.M.S.
Meridth-ffirs.indd 5 11/5/2015 4:08:44 PM
vi
Part 1 Strategy and Execution 1
1 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness 2
2 Executing Strategy: Project Management 34
Part 2 Process and Supply Chain Design 65
3 Process Planning 66
4 Capacity and Scheduling 97
5 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics 126
6 Supply Chain Management 157
Part 3 Managing and Improving the Process 199
7 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes 200
8 Process Improvement: Six Sigma 225
9 Process Improvement: Lean 258
Cases 284
Glossary 338
Index 343
Brief Contents
Preface xiii
Meridth-ftoc.indd 6 11/6/2015 2:49:49 PM
vii
Part 1 Strategy and Execution 1
1 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness 2
1.1 Operations 4
1.1.1. Systems Perspective 5
1.1.2. Inputs 6
1.1.3. Transformation Processes 6
1.1.4. Outputs 7
1.1.5. Control 9
1.1.6. Operations Activities 9
1.1.7. Trends in Operations and Supply Chain Management 10
1.2 Customer Value 11
1.2.1. Costs 11
1.2.2. Benefi ts 12
1.2.3. Innovativeness 12
1.2.4. Functionality 14
1.2.5. Quality 14
1.2.6. Customization 15
1.2.7. Responsiveness 18
1.3 Strategy and Competitiveness 19
1.3.1. Global Trends 19
1.3.2. Strategy 21
1.3.3. Strategic Frameworks 22
1.3.4. Core Capabilities 28
2 Executing Strategy: Project Management 34
2.1 Defi ning a Project 37
2.2 Planning the Project 38
2.2.1. The Project Portfolio 38
2.2.2. The Project Life Cycle 41
2.2.3. Projects in the Organizational Structure 42
2.2.4. Organizing the Project Team 42
2.2.5 Project Plans 43
Contents
Preface xiii
Meridth-ftoc.indd 7 11/6/2015 2:49:49 PM
viii Contents
2.3 Scheduling the Project 46
2.3.1. Project Scheduling with Certain Activity Times:
A Process Improvement Example 47
2.3.2. Project Scheduling with Uncertain Activity Times 50
2.3.3. Project Management Software Capabilities 55
2.3.4. Goldratt’s Critical Chain 56
2.4 Controlling the Project: Earned Value 58
Part 2 Process and Supply Chain Design 65
3 Process Planning 66
3.1 Forms of Transformation Systems 68
3.1.1. Continuous Process 68
3.1.2. Flow Shop 69
3.1.3. Job Shop 75
3.1.4. Cellular Production 79
3.1.5. Project Operations 83
3.2 Selection of a Transformation System 83
3.2.1. Considerations of Volume and Variety 84
3.2.2. Product and Process Life Cycle 86
3.2.3. Service Processes 87
4 Capacity and Scheduling 97
4.1 Long‐Term Capacity Planning 99
4.1.1. Capacity Planning Strategies 100
4.2 Effectively Utilizing Capacity Through Schedule Management 104
4.2.1. Scheduling Services 106
4.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning 109
4.3.1. Process‐Flow Analysis 109
4.3.2. Short‐Term Capacity Alternatives 115
4.3.3. Capacity Planning for Services 117
4.3.4. The Learning Curve 119
4.3.5. Queuing and the Psychology of Waiting 122
5 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics 126
5.1 Importance of Supply Chain Planning and Analytics 128
5.2 Demand Planning 129
5.2.1. Forecasting Methods 130
5.2.2. Factors Influencing the Choice of Forecasting Method 131
5.2.3. Time Series Analysis 132
5.2.4. Causal Forecasting with Regression 141
5.2.5. Assessing the Accuracy of Forecasting Models 147
Meridth-ftoc.indd 8 11/6/2015 2:49:49 PM
ixContents
5.3 Sales and Operations Planning 148
5.3.1. Aggregate Planning Strategies 149
5.3.2. Determining the Service Level: An Example
Using the Newsvendor Problem 150
5.3.3. Collaborative Planning, Forecasting, and Replenishment 153
6 Supply Chain Management 157
6.1 Defining SCM 160
6.2 Supply Chain Strategy 162
6.2.1. Strategic Need for SCM 163
6.2.2. Measures of Supply Chain Performance 165
6.3 Supply Chain Design 166
6.3.1. Logistics 167
6.4 Sourcing Strategies and Outsourcing 175
6.4.1. Purchasing/Procurement 177
6.4.2. Supplier Management 179
6.5 Inventory and Supply Planning 180
6.5.1. Functions of Inventories 181
6.5.2. Forms of Inventories 182
6.5.3. Inventory‐Related Costs 183
6.5.4. Decisions in Inventory Management 185
6.6 Role of Information Technology 185
6.6.1. ERP 186
6.6.2. Customer Relationship Management Systems 188
6.7 Successful SCM 188
6.7.1. Closed‐Loop Supply Chains and Reverse Logistics 189
Supplement A—The Beer Game 195
Supplement B—The Economic Order Quantity Model (online)
Part 3 Managing and Improving the Process 199
7 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes 200
7.1 Monitoring and Control 201
7.2 Process Monitoring 203
7.2.1. Stages of Operational Effectiveness 203
7.2.2. Balanced Scorecard 204
7.2.3. The Strategy Map 206
7.2.4. ISO 9000 and 14000 207
7.2.5. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) 208
7.3 Process Control 209
7.3.1. Statistical Process Control 210
7.3.2. Constructing Control Charts 213
Meridth-ftoc.indd 9 11/6/2015 2:49:49 PM
x Contents
7.4 Controlling Service Quality 216
7.4.1. Service Defections 217
8 Process Improvement: Six Sigma 225
8.1 Approaches for Process Improvement 228
8.2 Business Process Design (Reengineering) 229
8.3 Six Sigma and the DMAIC Improvement Process 231
8.3.1. Example Six Sigma Project 232
8.4 The Define Phase 235
8.4.1. Benchmarking 235
8.4.2. Quality Function Deployment 236
8.5 The Measure Phase 238
8.5.1. Defects per Million Opportunities (DPMO) 239
8.5.2. Measurement Systems Analysis 241
8.6 The Analyze Phase 243
8.6.1. Brainstorming 244
8.6.2. Cause-and-Effect Diagrams 246
8.6.3. Process Capability Analysis 246
8.7 The Improve Phase 249
8.7.1. Design of Experiments 249
8.8 The Control Phase 251
8.9 Six Sigma in Practice 251
8.9.1. Six Sigma Roles 251
8.9.2. Becoming Certified 252
8.9.3. The Need to Customize Six Sigma Programs 252
9 Process Improvement: Lean 258
9.1 History and Philosophy of Lean 261
9.1.1. Traditional Systems Compared with Lean 262
9.2 Specify Value and Identify the Value Stream 266
9.2.1. Identify the Value Stream 268
9.3 Make Value Flow 271
9.3.1. Continuous Flow Manufacturing 272
9.3.2. The Theory of Constraints 273
9.4 Pull Value through the Value Stream 275
9.4.1. Kanban/JIT in Services 276
9.5 Pursue Perfection 277
9.5.1. 5S 277
9.5.2. The Visual Factory 277
9.5.3. Kaizen 278
9.5.4. Poka Yoke 278
9.5.5. Total Productive Maintenance 278
Meridth-ftoc.indd 10 11/6/2015 2:49:49 PM
xiContents
9.6 Benefits of Lean and Lean Six Sigma 279
9.6.1. Lean Six Sigma 280
Cases 284
BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project 284
Peerless Laser Processors 297
General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor
Assembly Process 302
Heublein: Project Management and Control System 315
D. U. Singer Hospital Products Corp. 327
Automotive Builders, Inc.: The Stanhope Project 331
Case (online)—United Lock: Door Hardware Division (A)
Bibliography (online)
Glossary 338
Index 343
Meridth-ftoc.indd 11 11/6/2015 2:49:49 PM
Meridth-ftoc.indd 12 11/6/2015 2:49:49 PM
xiii
The enthusiasm of the users of this MBA‐oriented book has been greatly rewarding for us, and
we thank them for their comments, suggestions, criticism, and support. Although the book is not
the massive seller that an undergraduate textbook can become, it is clear that there is, as we felt,
a need for a solely MBA‐level text. The book was originally written because of the express need
we felt in our many MBA programs at Wake Forest University for an operations management
textbook directed specifically to MBA students and especially to those who had some real‐world
experience. We tried all of the current texts but found them either tomes that left no time for the
cases and other materials we wanted to include or shorter but simplistic quantitative books.
Moreover, all the books were so expensive they did not allow us to order all the cases, readings,
and other supplements and class activities (such as the “Beer Game”; see Chapter 6 Supplement)
that we wanted to include in our course.
What we were looking for was a short, inexpensive book that would cover just the introduc-
tory, basic, and primarily conceptual material. This would allow us, as the professors, to tailor the
course through supplementary cases and other materials for the unique class we would be teach-
ing: executive, evening, full time, short course, and so on. Although we wanted a brief,
supplementary‐type book so that we could add other material, we have colleagues who need a
short book because they only have a half‐semester module for the topic. Or they may have to
include another course (e.g., statistics) in the rest of the semester.
Changes in this Sixth Edition
A lot has happened since our previous edition, and we felt compelled to reorganize the book to
reflect these changes. First, we amended the title to reflect the increased importance of supply
chain management concepts and added an extra chapter ( 5 ) as well, focusing on demand plan-
ning, forecasting, analytics, and sales and operations planning. Also, project management is now
being used for implementing strategic plans through the project portfolio, since the successful
execution of strategy has continued to be a problem. Also, the concepts of lean and six sigma are
now well established in organizations, and the details of their procedures are of less importance
for MBA students.
As a result of all these changes, we reorganized the material into three parts of the book. In
Part I: Strategy and Execution, we discuss operations and supply chain strategy in Chapter 1 and
then follow this up with executing strategy through project management in Chapter 2 . Part II:
Process and Supply Chain Design then covers four chapters. Process planning is described first
in Chapter 3 and then the planning of capacity and schedules in Chapter 4 . Chapter 5 : Supply
Chain Planning and Analytics is our first chapter on the supply chain as described above, and then
Chapter 6 covers many of the details on managing the supply chain. Part III: Managing and
Improving the Process then begins with Chapter 7 on monitoring and controlling the processes,
followed by Chapter 8 on process improvement through the use of six sigma. The last chapter,
also on process improvement, covers the concepts of lean management.
The book then concludes with six cases, one of which—General Micro Electronics—is
new. This is followed by a Glossary of key terms to help students quickly refresh their memories
on the terminology used in the chapters. We have also updated the examples and added a few new
Preface
Meridth-fpreface.indd 13 10/30/2015 6:11:50 PM
xiv Preface
short cases to those at the back of the chapters. To conserve space and improve the pace of the
book, we have cut about 80 pages from the previous edition and moved the bibliographies online,
as well as some of the supplements. Of course, we have added a lot of new material as listed
below so the book may still run about the same total length:
Process mapping
Supply chain disruptions
Total cost of ownership
Strategic sourcing
Sustainability
Collaborative planning and replenishment
SCOR model
Change management
Reverse logistics
Triple bottom line
Analytics
Demand planning
Forecasting
Sales and operations planning
In revising the book, we have kept the elements of our earlier philosophy. For example, we
kept the other majors such as marketing and finance in mind—what did these students need to know
about operations to help them in their careers? And we still minimize the heavier quantitative mate-
rial, keeping only discussions and examples that illustrate a particular concept since finance and
marketing majors would not be solving operations problems. Moreover, even operations managers
probably wouldn’t themselves be solving those problems; more likely, they would be assigned to an
analyst. For those chapters in which exercises are included, they are intended only to help illustrate
the concept we are trying to convey rather than make experts of the students.
We continued to add service examples throughout the text, since the great majority (over 80
percent these days!) of our students would be, or are already, employed in a service organization.
And since these students will be working and competing in a highly global economy, we employ
many international examples. We also kept the textual flow of material in the chapters away from
the current undergraduate trend of fracturing the material flow with sidebars, examples, applica-
tions, solved problems, and so forth, in an attempt to keep the students’ interest and attention.
Given the maturity of MBA students, we instead worked these directly into the discussions to
attain a smoother, clearer flow. As noted below, the Instructor’s Manual includes suggestions for
readings, cases, videos, and other course supplements that we have found to be particularly helpful
for MBA classes since this book is intended to be only a small part of the MBA class.
Supplements
Our approach to supplementary MBA‐level material here is to reference and annotate in the
Instructor’s Manual additional useful cases, books, video clips, and readings for each of the nine
textbook chapters. The annotation is intended to help the instructors select the most appropriate
materials for their unique course. Although we have added some of our own and our colleagues’
Meridth-fpreface.indd 14 10/30/2015 6:11:50 PM
xvPreface
cases to the rear of this edition, we also rely on our favorite Harvard, Darden, Western Ontario, and
European cases, plus Harvard Business Review readings to fully communicate the nature of the
chapter topic we are covering. Although we didn’t think that Test Bank Questions or PowerPoint
slides would be used by most MBA instructors, these materials are available from the publisher
also. For that matter, the publisher can also custom bind selected content from this text, our larger
undergraduate (or any other) Web text, along with cases and articles, should this approach be of
interest to the professor. Please contact your local Wiley representative for more details.
Your Inputs Appreciated
We would once again like to encourage users of this book to send us their comments and sugges-
tions. Tell us if there is something we missed that you would like to see in the next edition (or the
Instructor’s Manual or web site) or if there is perhaps material that is unneeded for this audience.
Also, please tell us about any errors you uncover or if there are other elements of the book you
like or don’t like. We hope to continue keeping this a living, dynamic project that evolves to meet
the needs of the MBA audience, an audience whose needs are also evolving as our economy and
society evolve and change.
We want to thank the many reviewers of this book and its previous editions: Alexander Ansari,
Seattle University; Dennis Battistella, Florida Atlantic University; Linda Brennan, Mercer
University; David Cadden, Quinnipiac University; Satya Chakravorty, Kennesaw State University;
Okechi Geoffrey Egekwu; Michael H. Ensby, Clarkson University; James A. Fitzsimmons,
University of Texas; Lawrence D. Fredendall, Clemson University; William C. Giauque, Brigham
Young University; Mike Godfrey, University of Wisconsin–Oshkosh; Damodar Golhar, Western
Michigan University; Suresh Kumar Goyal, Concordia University, Canada; Hector Guerrero, The
College of William & Mary; Robert Handfield, North Carolina State University; Mark Gerard
Haug, University of Kansas; Janelle Heineke, Boston University; Zhimin Huang, Hofstra University;
David Hollingworth, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute; James L. Hoyt, Troy State University;
Kendra Ingram, Texas A&M University–Commerce; Jonatan Jelen, NYU–Poly; Mehdi Kaighobadi,
Florida Atlantic University; Casey Kleindienst, California State University–Fullerton; Archie
Lockamy III, Samford University; Manoj Malhotra, University of South Carolina; Gus Manoochehri,
California State University–Fullerton; Robert F. Marsh, Sacred Heart; Ron McLachlin, University
of Manitoba; Ivor P. Morgan, Babson College; Rob Owen, Thunderbird School of Global
Management; Seungwook Park, California State University–Fullerton; Ranga V. Ramasesh, Texas
Christian University; Jaime S. Ribera, IESE–Universidad de Navarra, Spain; Gary D. Scudder,
Vanderbilt University; Sue Perrott Siferd, Arizona State University; Samia Siha, Kennesaw State
University; Donald E. Simmons, Ithaca College; William J. Tallon, Northern Illinois University;
Forrest Thornton, River College; Richard Vail, Colorado Mesa University; Asoo J. Vakharia,
University of Florida; Jerry C. Wei, University of Notre Dame; and Jack Zhang, Hofstra University.
For this edition we thank the following reviewers: Patrick Jaska, University of Mary
Hardin–Baylor; Deborah Kellogg, University of Colorado, Denver; JD McKenna, Colorado
Technical University; Madeleine Pullman, Portland State University; Anthony Steigelman,
California Lutheran University.
Jack Meredith
School of Business
Wake Forest University, P.O. Box 7897
Winston‐Salem, NC 27109
[email protected]
www.mba.wfu.edu/faculty/meredith
336.758.4467
Scott Shafer
School of Business
Wake Forest University, P.O. Box 7897
Winston‐Salem, NC 27109
[email protected]
www.mba.wfu.edu/faculty/shafer
336.758.3687
Meridth-fpreface.indd 15 10/30/2015 6:11:50 PM
Meridth-fpreface.indd 16 10/30/2015 6:11:50 PM
part
1
Strategy and Execution
In this first part of the book, we describe the importance of operations and the supply
chain to the global competitiveness of all organizations. We then move into a discussion
of their role in designing and executing a competitive strategy for the organization.
Chapter 1 first describes the functions of operations and the supply chain in an organiza-
tion and then lists the aspects of value that customers and clients desire of the products
and services they buy. Next, a range of strategic frameworks are described that organiza-
tions commonly employ. However, selecting and carefully designing a strategy for the
organization are only half the battle for survival in a very competitive global economy—
the organization must be able to successfully execute the strategy. As discussed in
Chapter 2 , a major tool for achieving this is project management, which has developed
into a field in itself, with a full range of tools and techniques for executing projects of all
kinds, including strategy.
ROLE OF OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAINS IN
THE ORGANIZATIONS’ COMPETITIVENESS
PART II: Process and
Supply Chain Design
PART I: Strategy
and Execution
Chapter. 1: Operations
and Supply Chain Strategy
for Competitiveness
Chapter. 2: Executing
Strategy: Project
Management
Chapter. 6: Supply
Chain
Management
Chapter. 5: Supply
Chain Planning
and Analytics
Chapter. 4: Capacity
and Scheduling
Chapter. 3: Process
Planning
Chapter. 7: Monitoring
and Controlling the
Process
Chapter. 9: Process
Improvement:
Lean
Chapter. 8: Process
Improvement: Six
Sigma
PART III: Managing and
Improving the Process
I
Meridth-p01.indd 1 11/5/2015 4:10:30 PM
1
2
chapter
Operations and Supply Chain
Strategy for Competitiveness
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
The crucial role that operations and the supply chain play in the global competi-
tiveness of all organizations is achieved through the execution of an operations
strategy devoted to designing, improving, and then executing the production
process by which the organization ’ s services and products are created.
In Chapter 1 , we first describe the nature of the operations function within the
global competitive environment. Then, we analyze what customers value such
as innovativeness, functionality, quality, customization, and responsiveness at
minimal cost. Last, we explore the major strategic frameworks used in opera-
tions to provide these valued benefits at low cost.
Introduction
• No discussion of global competitiveness would be complete without the inclusion of Apple
Inc. ’ s amazing comeback from its near‐death experience over a decade ago. Under the futur-
istic vision of the late Steve Jobs, the firm has innovated in the electronics market like no firm
has ever done before, with high quality and reasonable pricing to bring magical capabilities to
small gadgets and overwhelm its competitors.
Over the five‐year period from February 2010 to February 2015, Apple ’ s share price has
risen to 338.3 percent, compared to the S&P 500 ’ s increase of 89.6 percent. At the end of
2014, Apple became the most valuable company of all time as its market capitalization crossed
the $700 billion mark.
This example of Apple ’ s uniqueness shows how important operations capabilities in
areas such as innovation, quality, customization, and cost can be to an organization ’ s global
competitiveness (Cheng and Intindola 2012).
• As in sports, numerous intense rivalries exist in the world of business, such as the rivalries
between Visa and MasterCard, Microsoft and Apple, Ford and General Motors, Energizer and
Duracell, and Nike and Reebok. Certainly, any list of top business rivalries would be incom-
plete without Coke and Pepsi. Interestingly, while these two firms compete in the same indus-
try, one has had considerable success on the important dimension of share price performance,
while the other ’ s performance has been rather dismal. More specifically, over the 10‐year
period ending in February 2015, Pepsi ’ s stock price increased by 85.6 percent, while Coke ’ s
increased by 100.6 percent. The result was that Coke ’ s market capitalization increased to
$182.4 billion compared to Pepsi ’ s market capitalization of $145.8 billion. This difference in
market capitalization is even more dramatic when one considers the fact that Pepsi ’ s sales are
significantly higher than Coke ’ s—$66.4 billion versus $46.9 billion in 2013.
A question that naturally arises is: What accounts for these very different outcomes?
One explanation offered by analysts and critics is that Pepsi simply took its eye off the ball.
In particular, while Coke focused its attention on beverages, Pepsi has been distracted by
attempting to develop nutritious snacks. One result is that Pepsi Cola went from being the
number‐two soda to the number‐three soda behind Coke and Diet Coke. To address its
Meridth-c01.indd 2 11/5/2015 4:15:25 PM
3Introduction
weakened performance, Pepsi’s board of directors initiated a strategic review of the company.
A variety of opinions have been offered regarding what the outcome of Pepsi’s strategic
review will be, from reducing its payroll to free up additional resources for marketing its soft
drink products to breaking up the company into a beverage company and a snack food com-
pany (Esterl 2012).
• General Motors’ market share had been in a long downward decline from about 45 percent in
1980 to about 20 percent in 2008 when the entire automotive industry got hit with a powerful
one‐two punch, throwing all the weakened American automobile producers into chaos. First,
in early 2008, extreme gasoline prices killed the truck and SUV market, and then, the sudden
credit crisis and recession killed the rest of the automobile market. The high cost of debt,
unionized labor, and unfunded liabilities (pensions and health care) forced GM and Chrysler
to go begging to the government for bailouts, with GM getting a $50 billion lifeline from US
taxpayers, for example. By late 2008, GM was burning through billions of dollars of cash
every month. One industry analyst calculated that GM’s obligations in March of 2009
amounted to $62 billion, 35 times its market capitalization (Denning 2009, p. C10)! Finally,
both GM and Chrysler had to file for a prepackaged structured bankruptcy. The bankruptcy
helped GM to cut its labor costs, get rid of a lot of its debt, get rid of some of its pension and
health care obligations, and cut the number of models it was offering to the public.
So how did the restructuring work out? In 2011, GM had the largest annual profit, at
$7.6 billion, in its 103‐year history, up 62 percent from 2010. GM’s revenues were up 13 per-
cent on sales of 1.37 million cars (Chrysler’s sales were up 26 percent), and GM had hired
100,000 workers in each of the previous five months! GM’s car sales are growing quickly in
China as well as in North America, and the company now has very little debt, over $38 billion
in liquidity, and minimal taxes (as a part of their bankruptcy agreement). This represents a
tremendous turnaround in the competitiveness of the US automobile industry.
But the news is not all good. GM’s European business is in trouble, having lost $747
million in 2011 (but $2 billion in 2010). And its share of the US market also continues to slip,
dropping to 17.8 percent in 2014 (Bennett 2012; Terlep 2012; McIntyre 2014).
These brief examples highlight the diversity and importance of operations while providing a
glimpse of two themes that are central to operations: customer satisfaction and competitiveness.
They also illustrate a more subtle point—that improvements made in operations can simultane-
ously increase customer satisfaction and lower costs. The Apple example demonstrates how a
company obtained a substantial competitive advantage by improving their innovation capability,
their production process, and their supply chain. The American automobile industry example
shows how losing an operations focus can drive a firm into bankruptcy but how, through restruc-
turing, the firm can regain its operational competitiveness. The Pepsi example illustrates a funda-
mental principle in strategy and competitiveness—namely, that organizations that focus on doing
a few things well usually outperform organizations that lack this focus. And Apple’s success
demonstrates how quickly technology can upend an industry and change the major players and
their competitiveness.
Today, in our international marketplace, consumers purchase their products from the pro-
vider that offers them the most “value” for their money. To illustrate, you may be doing your
course assignments on a Japanese notebook computer, driving a German automobile, or watching
a sitcom on a TV made in Taiwan while cooking your food in a Korean microwave. However,
most of your services—banking, insurance, and personal care—are probably provided domesti-
cally, although some of these may also be owned by, or outsourced to, foreign corporations. There
is a reason why most services are produced by domestic firms while products may be produced
in part, or wholly, by foreign firms, and it concerns an area of business known as operations.
Meridth-c01.indd 3 11/5/2015 4:15:25 PM
4 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
A great many societal changes that are occurring today intimately involve activities
associated with operations. For example, there is great pressure among competing nations to
increase their exports. And businesses are intent on building efficient and effective supply chains,
improving their processes through “Six Sigma,” and successfully applying the precepts of “lean
management” and other operations‐based programs.
Another characteristic of our modern society is the explosion of new technology, an impor-
tant aspect of operations. Technologies such as smart phones, e‐mail, notebook computers,
tablets, and the Web, to name a few, are profoundly affecting business and are fundamentally
changing the nature of work. For example, many banks are shifting their focus from building new
branch locations to using the Web as a way to establish and develop new customer relationships.
Banks rely on technology to carry out more routine activities as well, such as transferring funds
instantly across cities, states, and oceans. Our industries also rely increasingly on technology:
robots carry and weld parts together, and workerless, dark “factories of the future” turn out a
continuing stream of products. And soft operations technologies, such as “supply chain manage-
ment” and “lean production” (Feld 2000; Womack and Jones 2003), have transformed world
markets and the global economy.
This exciting, competitive world of operations is at the heart of every organization and,
more than anything else, determines whether the organization survives in the international mar-
ketplace or disappears into bankruptcy or a takeover. It is this world that we will be covering in
the following chapters.
1.1 Operations
Why do we argue that operations be considered the heart of every organization? Fundamentally,
organizations exist to create value, and operations is the part of the organization that creates value
for the customer. Hammer (2004) maintains that operational innovation can provide organiza-
tions with long‐term strategic advantages over their competitors. Regardless of whether the
organization is for profit or not for profit, primarily service or manufacturer, or public or private,
it exists to create value. Thus, even nonprofit organizations like the Red Cross strive to create
value for the recipients of their services in excess of their costs. Moreover, this has always been
true, from the earliest days of bartering to modern‐day corporations.
Consider McDonald’s as an example. This firm uses a number of inputs, including ingredi-
ents, labor, equipment, and facilities; transforms them in a way that adds value to them (e.g., by
frying); and obtains an output, such as a chicken sandwich, that can be sold at a profit. This con-
version process, termed as production system, is illustrated in Figure 1.1. The elements of the
figure represent what is known as a system1: a purposeful collection of people, objects, and pro-
cedures for operating within an environment.
Note the word purposeful; systems are not merely arbitrary groupings but goal‐directed or
purposeful collections. Managing and running a production system efficiently and effectively are
at the heart of the operations activities that will be discussed in this text. Since we will be using
this term throughout the text, let us formally define it. Operations is concerned with transforming
inputs into useful outputs according to an agreed‐upon strategy and thereby adding value to some
entity; this constitutes the primary activity of virtually every organization.
Not only is operations central to organizations, it is also central to people’s personal and
professional activities, regardless of their position. People, too, must operate productively, add-
ing value to inputs and producing quality outputs, whether those outputs are information, reports,
services, products, or even personal accomplishments. Thus, operations should be of major inter-
est to every reader, not just professionally but also personally.
1 Note the word system is being used here in a broad sense and should not be confused with more narrow usages such as
information systems, planning and control systems, or performance evaluation systems.
Meridth-c01.indd 4 11/5/2015 4:15:25 PM
51.1 Operations
1.1.1 Systems Perspective
As Figure 1.1 illustrates, a production system is defined in terms of the environment, a strategy,
a set of inputs, the transformation process, the outputs, and some mechanism for controlling the
overall system. The strategy includes determining such elements as what customers value (often
referred to as the value proposition), the vision and mission of the organization, an appropriate
framework to execute this vision, and the core capabilities of the organization. We discuss the
strategy in detail a bit later. The environment includes those things that are outside the actual
production system but that influence it in some way. Because of its influence, we need to consider
the environment, even though it is beyond the control of decision makers within the system.
For example, a large portion of the inputs to a production system are acquired from the
environment. Also, government regulations related to pollution control and workplace safety
affect the transformation system. Think about how changes in customers’ needs, a competitor’s
new product, or a new advance in technology can influence the level of satisfaction with a pro-
duction system’s current outputs. As these examples show, the environment exerts a great deal of
influence on the production system.
Because the world around us is constantly changing, it is necessary to monitor the produc-
tion system and take action when the system is not meeting its strategic goals. Of course, it may
be that the current strategy is no longer appropriate, indicating a need to revise the strategy. On
the other hand, it may be found that the strategy is fine but that the inputs or transformation pro-
cesses, or both, should be modified in some way. In either case, it is important to continuously
collect data from the environment, the transformation processes, and the outputs; compare that
data to the strategic plan; and, if substantial deviations exist, design and implement improve-
ments to the system, or perhaps the strategy, so that results agree with the strategic goals.
Environment
Transformation
processes • Facilitating
goods
• Services
• Alteration
• Transportation
• Storage
• Inspection
Inputs
Control
• Capital
• Materials
• Equipment
• Facilities
• Suppliers
• Labor
• Knowledge
• Time
• Measure
• Compare
• Plan
improvements
• Implement
improvements
Output
ActionActionAction Data DataData
• Customers
• Government
• Competitors
• Technology
• Suppliers
• Economy
Strategy
• Value
proposition
• Vision/mission
• Strategic
frameworks
• Core
capabilities
FIGURE 1.1
The production system.
Meridth-c01.indd 5 11/5/2015 4:15:27 PM
6 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
Thinking in terms of systems provides decision makers with numerous advantages. To
begin with, the systems perspective focuses on how the individual components that make up a
system interact. Thus, the systems perspective provides decision makers with a broad and com-
plete picture of an entire situation. Furthermore, the systems perspective emphasizes the relation-
ships between the various system components. Without considering these relationships, decision
makers are prone to a problem called suboptimization. Suboptimization occurs when one part of
the system is improved to the detriment of other parts of the system and, perhaps, the organiza-
tion as a whole. For example, if a retailer decides to broaden its product line in an effort to
increase sales, this could actually end up hurting the retailer as a whole if it does not have suffi-
cient shelf space or service personnel available to accommodate the broader product line. Thus,
decisions need to be evaluated in terms of their effect on the entire system, not simply in terms of
how they will affect one component of the system.
In the remainder of this section, we elaborate on inputs, the transformation processes, and
outputs. In later sections and chapters, we further discuss both strategy and elements of the con-
trol system in more detail.
1.1.2 Inputs
The set of inputs used in a production system is more complex than might be supposed and typi-
cally involves many other areas such as marketing, finance, engineering, and human resource
management. Obvious inputs include facilities, labor, capital, equipment, raw materials, and sup-
plies. Supplies are distinguished from raw materials by the fact that they are not usually a part of
the final output. Oil, paper clips, pens, tape, and other such items are commonly classified as
supplies because they only aid in producing the output.
Another very important but perhaps less obvious input is knowledge of how to transform
the inputs into outputs. The employees of the organization hold this knowledge. Finally, having
sufficient time to accomplish the operations is always critical. Indeed, the operations function
quite frequently fails in its task because it cannot complete the transformation activities within
the required time limit.
1.1.3 Transformation Processes
The transformation processes are the part of the system that add value to the inputs. Value can be
added to an entity in a number of ways. Four major ways are described here:
1. Alter: Something can be changed structurally. That would be a physical change, and this
approach is basic to manufacturing industries, where goods are cut, stamped, formed,
assembled, and so on. We then go out and buy the shirt, or computer, or whatever the good
is. But it need not be a separate object or entity; for example, what is altered may be us. We
might get our hair cut, or we might have our appendix removed.
Other, more subtle, alterations may also have value. Sensual alterations, such as heat
when we are cold, or music, or beauty, may be highly valued on certain occasions. Beyond
this, even psychological alterations can have value, such as the feeling of worth from obtain-
ing a college degree or the feeling of friendship from a long‐distance phone call.
2. Transport: An entity, again including ourselves, may have more value if it is located some-
where other than where it currently is. We may appreciate having things brought to us, such
as flowers, or removed from us, such as garbage.
3. Store: The value of an entity may be enhanced for us if it is kept in a protected environment
for some period of time. Some examples are stock certificates kept in a safe‐deposit box, our
pet boarded at a kennel while we go on vacation, or ourselves staying in a hotel.
Meridth-c01.indd 6 11/5/2015 4:15:27 PM
71.1 Operations
4. Inspect: Last, an entity may be more valued because we better understand its properties.
This may apply to something we own, plan to use, or are considering purchasing, or, again,
even to ourselves. Medical exams, elevator certifications, and jewelry appraisals fall into
this category.
Thus, we see that value may be added to an entity in a number of different ways. The entity
may be changed directly, in space, in time, or even just in our mind. Additionally, value may be
added using a combination of these methods. To illustrate, an appliance store may create value by
both storing merchandise and transporting (delivering) it. There are other, less frequent, ways of
adding value as well, such as by “guaranteeing” something. These many varieties of transforma-
tions, and how they are managed, constitute some of the major issues to be discussed in this text.
1.1.4 Outputs
Two types of outputs commonly result from a production process: services and products.
Generally, products are physical goods, such as a personal computer, and services are abstract or
nonphysical. More specifically, we can consider the characteristics in Table 1.1 to help us distin-
guish between the two.
However, this classification may be more confusing than helpful. For example, consider a
pizza delivery chain. Does this organization produce a product or provide a service? If you
answered “a service,” suppose that instead of delivering its pizzas to the actual consumer, it made
the pizzas in a factory and sold them in the frozen food section of grocery stores. Clearly, the
actual process of making pizzas for immediate consumption or to be frozen involves basically
the same tasks, although one may be done on a larger scale and use more automated equipment.
The point is, however, that both organizations produce a pizza, and defining one organization as
a service and the other as a manufacturer seems to be a little arbitrary. In addition, both products
and services can be produced as commodities or individually customized.
We avoid this ambiguity by adopting the point of view that any physical entity accompany-
ing a transformation that adds value is a facilitating good (e.g., the pizza). In many cases, of
course, there may be no facilitating good; we refer to these cases as pure services.
The advantage of this interpretation is that every transformation that adds value is simply a
service, either with or without facilitating goods! If you buy a piece of lumber, you have not
purchased a product. Rather, you have purchased a bundle of services, many of them embodied
in a facilitating good: a tree‐cutting service, a sawmill service, a transportation service, a storage
service, and perhaps even an advertising service that told you where lumber was on sale. We refer
to these services as a bundle of “benefits,” of which some are tangible (the sawed length of lum-
ber, the type of tree) and others are intangible (courteous salesclerks, a convenient location, and
payment by charge card). Some services may, of course, even be negative, such as an audit of
your tax return. In summary, services are bundles of benefits, some of which may be tangible and
others intangible, and they may be accompanied by a facilitating good or goods.
■ TABLE 1.1 Characteristics of Products and Services
Products Services
Tangible
Minimal contact with customer
Minimal participation by customer in the delivery
Delayed consumption
Equipment‐intense production
Quality easily measured
Intangible
Extensive contact with customer
Extensive participation by customer in the delivery
Immediate consumption
Labor‐intense production
Quality difficult to measure
Meridth-c01.indd 7 11/5/2015 4:15:27 PM
8 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
Firms often run into major difficulties when they ignore this aspect of their operations.
They may think of, and even market themselves as, a “lumberyard” and not as providing a bundle
of services. They may recognize that they have to include certain tangible services (such as cut-
ting lumber to the length desired by the customer) but ignore the intangible services (charge
sales, having a sufficient number of clerks). Another reason for not making a distinction between
manufacturing and services is that when a company thinks of itself as a manufacturer, it tends to
focus on measures of internal performance such as efficiency and utilization. But when compa-
nies consider themselves as providing services, they tend to focus externally and ask questions
such as “How can we serve our customers better?” This is not to imply that improving internal
performance measures is not desirable. Rather, it suggests that improved customer service should
be the primary impetus for all improvement efforts. It is generally not advisable to seek internal
improvements if these improvements do not ultimately lead to corresponding improvements in
customer service and customer satisfaction.
In this text, we will adopt the point of view that all value‐adding transformations (i.e.,
operations) are services, and there may or may not be a set of accompanying facilitating goods.
Figure 1.2 illustrates how the tangible product (or facilitating good) portion and the intangible
service portion for a variety of outputs contribute to the total value provided by each output. The
outputs shown range from virtually pure services to what would be known as products. For
example, the Plush restaurant appears to be about 75 percent service and 25 percent product.
Although we work with “products” as extensively as with services throughout the chapters in
this book, bear in mind that in these cases we are working with only a portion of the total service,
the facilitating good. In general, we will use the nonspecific term outputs to mean either products
or services.
One particular type of output that is substantially different from products and many other
types of services is that of knowledge or information. These outputs often have the characteristic
that the more they are used, the more valuable they become. For example, in a network, the more
entities that belong to the network, the more useful it may be. If you are on Facebook® or use e‐
mail, the more other people that are also there, the more valuable it is to you. And when you share
this output, you don’t lose anything, you gain. Some other characteristics of information or
knowledge that differ from normal goods and services are as follows.
100 50 0
Magazine purchase
Flour purchase
50 100
Plush restaurant
Theatrical performance
Travels
Auto repair
Hand-made suit
Movie rental
Medical examination
% Service % Product
FIGURE 1.2
The range from services
to products.
Meridth-c01.indd 8 11/5/2015 4:15:29 PM
91.1 Operations
• Giving or selling the information/knowledge to someone doesn’t mean you can’t give or sell
it to someone else.
• The information/knowledge doesn’t wear out.
• The information/knowledge isn’t subject to the law of diminishing returns.
• The information/knowledge can be replicated at minimal cost and trouble.
• The more the knowledge is used, the more valuable it becomes.
1.1.5 Control
Suppose that in our production system, we make a mistake. We must be able to observe this
through, for example, accounting records (measurement data), compare it to a standard to see
how serious the error is, and then, if needed, plan and implement (usually via a project) some
improvements. If the changes are not significantly affecting the outputs, then no control actions
are needed. But if they are, management must intercede and apply corrective control to alter the
inputs or the transformation processes and, thereby, the outputs. The control activities illustrated
in Figure 1.1 are used extensively in systems, including management systems, and will be
encountered throughout this text.
One example of the components of the production system for a school would be as follows:
A strategy of providing a safe, trustworthy, friendly environment for passing knowledge on to the
students. The inputs would be, among others, the teachers, facility, books, and students that are
exposed to a transformation system of learning, counseling, motivating, and so on to produce
outputs of educated, skilled students. Control is exercised through examinations, demographics,
grievance procedures, and constant oversight. This all occurs in a physical and structural environ-
ment that includes state and county school boards to provide oversight policies and tax systems
to provide the resources.
1.1.6 Operations Activities
Operations include not only those activities associated specifically with the production system
but also a variety of other activities. For example, purchasing or procurement activities are con-
cerned with obtaining many of the inputs needed in the production system. Similarly, shipping
and distribution are sometimes considered marketing activities and sometimes considered opera-
tions activities. Because of the important interdependencies of these activities, many organiza-
tions are attempting to manage these activities as one process commonly referred to as supply
chain management.
As organizations begin to adopt new organizational structures based on business processes
and abandon the traditional functional organization, it is becoming less important to classify activ-
ities as operations or nonoperations (e.g., sales, marketing, and accounting). However, to under-
stand the tasks more easily, we commonly divide the field of operations into a series of subject
areas such as scheduling, process design, inventory management, maintenance, and quality con-
trol. These areas are quite interdependent, but to make their workings more understandable, we
discuss them as though they were easily separable from each other. In some areas, a full‐fledged
department may be responsible for the activities, such as quality control or scheduling, but in other
areas, the activities (such as facility location) may be infrequent and simply assigned to a particu-
lar group or project team. Moreover, some of the areas such as supply chain management are criti-
cally important because they are a part of a larger business process or because other areas depend
on them. Finally, since we consider all operations to be services, these subject areas are equally
applicable to organizations that have traditionally been classified as manufacturers and services.
Meridth-c01.indd 9 11/5/2015 4:15:29 PM
10 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
1.1.7 Trends in Operations and Supply Chain Management
As has been previously discussed in this chapter and will be further emphasized in the remaining
chapters, an organization’s operations play a critical role in its overall competitiveness and long‐
term success. Given the critical role played by operations, it is important to stay abreast of the
significant trends in the operations area as well as general business trends that may impact the
operations function.
As in other disciplines, technology is having a significant impact on the practice of opera-
tions. For example, communication technologies such as the Internet and cloud computing are
greatly facilitating the ability of organizations to share real‐time information with their suppliers
and customers. Having more timely information enhances the opportunities for supply chain
partners to coordinate and integrate their operations, which ultimately leads to a more effective
and efficient supply chain that benefits both the end customer and the trading partners in the sup-
ply chain.
One exciting technology that promises to greatly enhance the ability of organizations to
have real‐time information on their inventory and other assets is radio‐frequency identification
(RFID); RFID tags are attached to individual inventory items, and these tags transmit identifica-
tion and location information. For example, by attaching an RFID tag to a part, its progress
through the production process can be monitored and, when finished, its location in the ware-
house tracked.
RFID tags are classified as passive or active. Passive RFID tags contain no power source
and therefore rely on the power source of an RFID reader to transmit their information. Active
RFID tags contain a power source such as a battery and use this power source to periodically
transmit a signal that provides identification information. Perhaps the greatest challenge to
greater adoption of RFID tags is the cost of the tags themselves. As with other technologies, the
cost of RFID has decreased dramatically and is expected to continue on this trajectory. The cost
of basic passive RFID tags ranges from $0.10 to $1.50, depending on the volume of tags pur-
chased and the environmental factors they are designed to withstand. The cost of active RFID
tags starts from $15 to $20 and again increases depending on the features desired. Thus, at pre-
sent, the costs of active RFID tags are mainly justified for tracking expensive assets such as a rail
car or delivery truck.
Beyond technology, another important trend in business is the increasing emphasis organi-
zations are placing on effectively managing their supply chains. Indeed, to remain competitive,
organizations are discovering the importance of leveraging the volumes of customer data that are
a natural by‐product of our computerized society, developing stronger relationships with their
supply chain partners, and proactively managing the risks associated with disruptions to their
supply chain. Regarding the increasing volumes of data, as will be discussed in greater detail in
Chapter 5, many organizations are finding ways to combine the volumes of data they accumulate
with advanced analytical techniques to manage and improve their supply chains in ways that
were unthinkable in the past.
Another area gaining increasing attention in supply chain management is the development
of strong relationships with supply chain partners through increased collaboration. It is now
widely accepted that all supply chain partners can benefit through greater collaboration. For
example, including all supply chain partners in the development of the demand forecast not only
increases the amount of information available from different perspectives but also helps ensure
that the detailed plans of suppliers and customers are aligned and working toward achieving the
same goals. We return to the issue of building relationships with supply chain partners and the
benefits of greater collaboration in Chapter 5.
Related to the area of developing stronger relationships with supply chain partners is the
emphasis organizations are placing on the sourcing of their products. In the past, sourcing decisions
Meridth-c01.indd 10 11/5/2015 4:15:29 PM
111.2 Customer Value
were frequently viewed as primarily tactical in nature with the overarching goal of obtaining the
lowest possible unit cost. Often, the strategy used to obtain the lowest cost was to play one sup-
plier against another. Now, we see organizations increasingly discussing strategic sourcing and
thinking more holistically in terms of the total cost of ownership, not just the unit cost. Likewise,
the potential benefits of outsourcing overseas are being increasingly questioned, and new terms
such as reshoring and next‐shoring have entered the lexicon. The topic of strategic sourcing is
discussed in greater detail in Chapter 6.
Managing the risk of disruptions to the supply chain is yet another area gaining increasing
attention. For example, consider the impact of the earthquake and the tsunami that hit Japan in
2011 on the availability of product components and finished goods. Disruptions to the supply
chain are generally either the result of nature (natural disasters such as earthquakes, blizzards,
floods, and hurricanes) or human behavior (terrorist strikes, glitches in technology, and workers
going on strike). Managing such disruptions is especially challenging because they are often dif-
ficult to predict. The best approach for dealing with these types of disruptions to the supply chain
is to brainstorm potential disruptions, assess the impact of the identified disruptions, and develop
contingency plans to mitigate the risk of the disruption.
A final important trend impacting the practice of operations management is the increasing
levels of concern for the environment which in turn have led many organizations to place greater
emphasis on issues related to sustainability. Addressing environmental concerns impacts virtu-
ally all aspects of operations management from the design of the organization’s output to the
sourcing of parts, the distribution of the product, and even the disposal or recycling of the product
or its components once it reaches the end of its useful life. Green sourcing, for example, seeks to
identify suppliers in such a way that the organization’s carbon footprint and overall impact on the
environment are minimized.
As a result of the increasing importance organizations are placing on sustainability, some
organizations are adopting the triple bottom line approach for assessing their performance. In
addition to assessing profits, organizations that employ the triple bottom line approach also assess
themselves on social responsibility (people) and their environmental responsibility (planet).
Reducing the waste associated with products is another top sustainability priority of organ-
izations that seek to minimize the negative impact they have on the environment. In this case,
organizations can deploy a strategy often referred to as the three Rs: reduce, reuse, and recycle.
As its name suggests, the reduce strategy seeks to decrease the amount of waste associated with
a product. One way to accomplish this is to minimize the amount of product packaging used. In
services, switching to electronic copies of documents helps reduce waste, such as when a bank
switches to electronic statements. Reuse is a second strategy for minimizing waste. The idea
underlying reuse is to identify alternative uses for an item after its initial use. For example, there
are kits available for converting old computer monitors into fish aquariums. Finally, recycling
involves using the materials from old products to create new products. For example, many greet-
ing cards are made from recycled paper.
1.2 Customer Value
1.2.1 Costs
In the “Introduction” to this chapter, we mentioned that customers support the providers of goods
and services who offer them the most “value.” In this section, we elaborate on this concept. The
equation for value is conceptually clear:
Value perceived benefits costs/
Meridth-c01.indd 11 11/5/2015 4:15:30 PM
12 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
The perceived benefits can take a wide variety of forms, but the costs are usually more
straightforward:
• The upfront monetary investment
• Other monetary life‐cycle costs of using the service or product, such as maintenance
• The hassles involved in obtaining the product or service, such as travel required, obtaining
financing, the friendliness of service, and so on
The cost to the customer is, of course, the price paid, but this is usually highly correlated
with the cost of producing the service or product, which is itself largely based on the “efficiency”
of the production process. Efficiency is always measured as output/input; for example, a standard
automobile engine that uses gasoline is usually about 15 to 20 percent efficient (that is, the energy
put into the engine in terms of gasoline vs. the energy put out in terms of automobile motion).
However, electric and jet engines are more efficient, and rocket engines can reach almost 70 per-
cent efficiency.
The primary method of attaining efficiency in production is through high productivity,
which is normally defined as output per worker hour. This definition of productivity is actually
what is known as a partial factor measure of productivity, in the sense that it considers only
worker hours as the productive factor. Although in the past, labor often constituted as much as
50 percent of the cost of a product—or even more for a service—it is now frequently as little as
5 percent, so labor productivity is no longer a good measure of efficiency. Clearly, labor produc-
tivity could easily be increased by substituting machinery for labor, but that doesn’t mean that
this is a wise, or even cost‐saving, decision. A multifactor productivity measure uses more than a
single factor, such as both labor and capital. Obviously, the different factors must be measured in
the same units, such as dollars. An even broader gauge of productivity, called total factor produc-
tivity, is measured by including all the factors of production—labor, capital, materials, and
energy—in the denominator. This measure is to be preferred in making any comparisons of pro-
ductivity for efficiency or cost purposes.
Last, we also frequently hear of “effectiveness,” which is a measure of the achievement of
goals; where efficiency is sometimes considered to be “doing the thing right,” effectiveness is
instead considered to be “doing the right thing” or being focused on the proper task or goal.
1.2.2 Benefits
In contrast to the role of costs in the customer’s value equation, the benefits can be multiple. We
will consider five of these in detail: innovativeness, functionality, quality, customization, and
responsiveness.
1.2.3 Innovativeness
Many people (called “early adopters” in marketing) will buy products and services simply
because they are so innovative, or major improvements over what has been available formerly. It
is the field of research and development (known as R&D) that is primarily responsible for devel-
oping innovative new product and service ideas. R&D activities focus on creating and developing
(but not producing) the organization’s outputs. On occasion, R&D also creates new production
methods by which outputs, either new or old, may be produced.
Research itself is typically divided into two types: pure and applied. Pure research is sim-
ply working with basic technology to develop new knowledge. Applied research is attempting to
develop new knowledge along particular lines. For example, pure research might focus on
developing a material that conducts electricity with zero resistance, whereas applied research
Meridth-c01.indd 12 11/5/2015 4:15:30 PM
131.2 Customer Value
could focus on further developing this material to be used in products for customers. Development
is the attempt to utilize the findings of research and expand the possible applications, often con-
sisting of modifications or extensions to existing outputs to meet customers’ interests. Figure 1.3
illustrates the range of applicability of development as the output becomes more clearly defined.
In the early years of a new output, development is oriented toward removing “bugs,” increasing
performance, improving quality, and so on. In the middle years, options and variants of the output
are developed. In the later years, development is oriented toward extensions of the output that
will prolong its life.
Unfortunately, the returns from R&D are frequently meager, whereas the costs are great.
Figure 1.4 illustrates the mortality curve (fallout rate) associated with the concurrent design,
Time
Discovery
E
ff
o
rt
Development
Maturity
Variants
Saturations
Extensions
Decline
Death
Options
Idea
incubation
Idea
refinement
Idea
examination
and
evaluation
Improving
performance
Output
selection
Full marketing
Acceptance
testing,
modification
Pure Research Applied
Growth
FIGURE 1.3
The development effort.
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
1 2 3 4 5 6
C
om
m
er
ci
al
iz
at
io
n
an
d
pr
od
uc
ti
on
In
t
he
m
ar
ke
t
D
es
ig
n
an
d
te
st
in
g
D
ev
el
op
m
en
t
Ec
on
om
ic
a
na
ly
si
s
Ev
al
ua
ti
on
a
nd
s
cr
ee
ni
ng
N
um
be
r
of
p
ro
du
ct
s
re
m
ai
ni
ng
Years
Success FIGURE 1.4
Product mortality curve.
Meridth-c01.indd 13 11/5/2015 4:15:34 PM
14 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
evaluation, and selection for a hypothetical group of 50 potential products, assuming that the
50 candidate products are the result of earlier research. Initial evaluation and screening reduce the
50 to about 22, and economic analysis further reduces the number to about 9. Development
reduces this number even more, to about 5, and design and testing reduce it to perhaps 3. After
two and a half more year’s commercialization and production are completed, there is only one
successful product left. (Sometimes there are none!) One study found that, beyond this, only
64 percent of the new products brought to market were successful or about two out of three.
Two alternatives to research frequently used by organizations are imitation of a proven new
idea (i.e., employing a second‐to‐market strategy) or outright purchase of someone else’s inven-
tion. The outright purchase strategy is becoming extremely popular in those industries where
bringing a new product to market can cost huge sums, such as pharmaceuticals and high technol-
ogy. It is also employed in those industries where technology advances so rapidly that there isn’t
enough time to employ a second‐to‐market strategy. Although imitation does not put the organi-
zation first in the market with the new product or service, it does provide an opportunity to study
any possible defects in the original product or service and rapidly develop a better design, fre-
quently at a better price. The second approach—purchasing an invention or the inventing com-
pany itself—eliminates the risks inherent in research, but it still requires the company to develop
and market the product or service before knowing whether it will be successful. Either route
spares the organization the risk and tremendous cost of conducting the actual research leading up
to a new invention or improvement.
In addition to product research (as it is generally known), there is also process research,
which involves the generation of new knowledge concerning how to produce outputs. Currently,
the production of many familiar products out of plastic (toys, pipe, furniture, etc.) is an outstand-
ing example of successful process research. Motorola, to take another example, extensively uses
project teams that conduct process development at the same time as product development.
1.2.4 Functionality
Many people confuse functionality with quality (discussed next). But functionality involves the
activities the product or service is intended to perform, thereby providing the benefits to the cus-
tomer. A contemporary example is the ubiquitous cell phone. These days, it is probably rare to
find a cell phone that is only a phone; many phones include a camera and a way to send its picture
to another person or provide access to the Internet, as well as a myriad of other functions.
However, many products, especially electronics, but also some services, may be advertised
to provide purchasers with a new, unique function and they may do so, but it may not work well
or for long. The former involves performance and the latter has to do with reliability. Clearly,
these are different attributes of the output, and one can be well addressed while others disap-
point. Our discussion of quality, next, elaborates a bit more on the distinction between these
attributes.
1.2.5 Quality
Quality is a relative term, meaning different things to different people at different times. Moreover,
quality is not an absolute but, rather, is based on customers’ perceptions. Customers’ impressions
can be influenced by a number of factors, including brand loyalty and an organization’s reputa-
tion. Richard J. Schonberger has compiled a list of multiple quality dimensions that customers
often associate with products and services:
1. Conformance to specifications. Conformance to specifications is the extent to which the
actual product matches the design specifications, such as a pizza delivery shop that consist-
ently meets its advertised delivery time of 30 minutes.
Meridth-c01.indd 14 11/5/2015 4:15:34 PM
151.2 Customer Value
2. Performance. Customers frequently equate the quality of products and services with their
performance. (Note, however, that this dimension may in some cases actually refer to func-
tionality.) Examples of performance include how quickly a sports car accelerates or the
battery life of a cell phone.
3. Features. Features are the options that a product or service offers, such as side impact air-
bags or leather seats in automobiles. (Again, however, this dimension may also be confused
with functionality.)
4. Quick response. Quick response is associated with the amount of time required to react to
customers’ demands. However, we consider this to be a separate benefit, discussed further
in the following text.
5. Reliability. Reliability is the probability that a product or service will perform as intended
on any given trial or for some period of time, such as the probability that a car will start on
any given morning.
6. Durability. Durability refers to how tough a product is, such as a notebook computer that still
functions after being dropped or a knife that can cut through steel and not need sharpening.
7. Serviceability. Serviceability refers to the ease with which maintenance or a repair can be
performed.
8. Aesthetics. Aesthetics are factors that appeal to human senses, such as the taste of a steak or
the sound of a sports car’s engine.
9. Humanity. Humanity has to do with how the customer is treated, such as a private university
that maintains small classes so students are not treated like numbers by its professors.
It is worth noting that not all the dimensions of quality are relevant to all products and
services. Thus, organizations need to identify the dimensions of quality that are relevant to the
products and services they offer. Market research about customers’ needs is the primary input for
determining which dimensions are important. Of course, measuring the quality of a service can
often be more difficult than measuring the quality of a product or facilitating good. However, the
dimensions of quality described previously apply to both.
1.2.6 Customization
Customization refers to offering a product or service exactly suited to a customer’s desires or
needs. However, there is a range of accommodation to the customer’s needs, as illustrated in
Figure 1.5. At the left, there is the completely standard, world‐class (excellence suitable for all
markets) product or service. Moving to the right is the standard with options, continuing on to
Standard
world-class
Increasing
customization
Increasing
standardization
Standard
with options
Variants
Alternate
models
Customization
FIGURE 1.5
Continuum of
customization.
Meridth-c01.indd 15 11/5/2015 4:15:35 PM
16 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
variants and alternative models and ending at the right with made‐to‐order customization. In
general, the more customization, the better—if it can be provided quickly, with acceptable qual-
ity and cost.
Flexibility
However, to offer customization demands flexibility on the part of the firm. Professor Upton
(1994), formerly of the Harvard Business School, defines flexibility as “the ability to change or
react with little penalty in time, effort, cost, or performance” (p. 73). There are more than a dozen
different types of flexibility that we will not pursue here—design, volume, routing through the
production system, product mix, and many others. But having the right types of flexibility can
offer the following major competitive advantages:
• Faster matches to customers’ needs because change over time from one product or service to
another is quicker
• Closer matches to customers’ needs
• Ability to supply the needed items in the volumes required for the markets as they develop
• Faster design‐to‐market time to meet new customer needs
• Lower cost of changing production to meet needs
• Ability to offer a full line of products or services without the attendant cost of stocking large
inventories
• Ability to meet market demands even if delays develop in the production or distribution
process
Mass Customization
Until recently, it was widely believed that producing low‐cost standard products (at the far left in
Figure 1.5) required one type of transformation process and producing higher‐cost customized
products (far right) required another type of process. However, in addition to vast improvements
in operating efficiency, an unexpected by‐product of the continuous improvement programs of
the 1980s was substantial improvement in flexibility. Indeed, prior to this, efficiency and flexibil-
ity were thought to be trade‐offs. Increasing efficiency meant that flexibility had to be sacrificed,
and vice versa.
Thus, with the emphasis on continuous improvement came the realization that increasing
operating efficiency could also enhance flexibility. For example, many manufacturers initiated
efforts to reduce the amount of time required to set up (or change over) equipment when switch-
ing from the production of one product to another. Obviously, all time spent setting up equipment
is wasteful, since the equipment is not being used during this time to produce outputs that ulti-
mately create revenues for the organization. Consequently, improving the amount of time a
resource is used productively directly translates into improved efficiency. Interestingly, these
same reductions in equipment times also resulted in improved flexibility. Specifically, with
shorter equipment setup times, manufacturers could produce economically in smaller‐size
batches, making it easier to switch from the production of one product to another.
In response to the discovery that efficiency and flexibility can be improved simultane-
ously and may not have to be traded off, the strategy of mass customization emerged (see Pine
1993; Gilmore and Pine 1997). Organizations pursuing mass customization seek to produce
low‐cost, high‐quality outputs in great variety. Of course, not all products and services lend
themselves to being customized. This is particularly true of commodities, such as sugar, gas,
electricity, and flour. On the other hand, mass customization is often quite applicable to prod-
ucts characterized by short life cycles, rapidly advancing technology, or changing customer
Meridth-c01.indd 16 11/5/2015 4:15:35 PM
171.2 Customer Value
requirements. However, recent research suggests that successfully employing mass customiza-
tion requires an organization to first develop a transformation process that can consistently
deliver high‐quality outputs at a low cost. With this foundation in place, the organization can
then seek ways to increase the variety of its offerings while at the same time ensuring that qual-
ity and cost are not compromised.
In an article published in the Harvard Business Review, Gilmore and Pine (1997) identified
four mass customization strategies:
1. Collaborative customizers. These organizations establish a dialogue to help customers artic-
ulate their needs and then develop customized outputs to meet these needs. For example, one
Japanese eyewear retailer developed a computerized system to help customers select eye-
wear. The system combines a digital image of the customer’s face and then various styles of
eyeware are displayed on the digital image. Once the customer is satisfied, the customized
glasses are produced at the retail store within an hour.
2. Adaptive customizers. These organizations offer a standard product that customers can mod-
ify themselves, such as fast‐food hamburgers (ketchup, etc.) and closet organizers. Each
closet‐organizer package is the same but includes instructions and tools to cut the shelving
and clothes rods so that the unit can fit a wide variety of closet sizes.
3. Cosmetic customizers. These organizations produce a standard product but present it differ-
ently to different customers. For example, Planters packages its peanuts and mixed nuts in a
variety of containers on the basis of specific needs of its retailing customers, such as
Wal‐Mart, 7‐Eleven, and Safeway.
4. Transparent customizers. These organizations provide custom products without the custom-
ers knowing that a product has been customized for them. For example, Amazon.com pro-
vides book recommendations based on information about past purchases.
Example: Hewlett‐Packard
Faced with increasing pressure from its customers for quicker order fulfillment and for more
highly customized products, Hewlett‐Packard (HP) wondered whether it was really possible to
deliver mass‐customized products rapidly while at the same time continuing to reduce costs
(Feitzinger and Lee 1997). HP’s approach to mass customization can be summarized as effec-
tively delaying tasks that customize a product as long as possible in the product supply process.
It is based on the following three principles:
• Products should be designed around a number of independent modules that can be easily com-
bined in a variety of ways.
• Manufacturing tasks should also be designed and performed as independent modules that can
be relocated or rearranged to support new production requirements.
• The product supply process must perform two functions. First, it must cost‐effectively supply
the basic product to the locations that complete the customization activities. Second, it must
have the requisite flexibility to process individual customers’ orders.
HP has discovered that modular design provides three primary benefits. First, components
that differentiate the product can be added during the later stages of production. This method of
mass customization, generally called postponement, is one form of the assemble‐to‐order pro-
duction process, discussed in more detail in Chapter 3. For example, the company designed its
printers so that country‐specific power supplies are combined with the printers at local distribu-
tion centers and actually plugged in by the customer when the printer is set up. Second, produc-
tion time can be significantly reduced by simultaneously producing the required modules. Third,
producing in modules facilitates the identification of production and quality problems.
Meridth-c01.indd 17 11/5/2015 4:15:35 PM
18 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
1.2.7 Responsiveness
The competitive advantages of faster, dependable response to new markets or to the individual
customer’s needs have occasionally been noted in the business media (Eisenhardt and Brown
1998; Stalk 1988; Vessey 1991). For example, in a study of the US and Japanese robotics indus-
try, the National Science Foundation found that the Japanese tend to be about 25 percent faster
than Americans, and to spend 10 percent less, in developing and marketing new robots. The major
difference is that the Americans spend more time and money on marketing, whereas the Japanese
spend five times more than the Americans on developing more efficient production methods.
Table 1.2 identifies a number of prerequisites for and advantages of fast, dependable re –
sponse. These include higher quality, faster revenue generation, and lower costs through elimina-
tion of overhead, reduction of inventories, greater efficiency, and fewer errors and scrap. One of
the most important but least recognized advantages for managers is that by responding faster,
they can allow a customer to delay an order until the exact need is known. Thus, the customer
does not have to change the order—a perennial headache for most operations managers.
Faster response to a customer also can, up to a point, reduce the unit costs of the product or
service, sometimes significantly. On the basis of empirical studies reported by Meredith et al.
(1994) and illustrated in Figure 1.6, it seems that there is about a 2:1 (i.e., 0.50) relationship between
response time and unit cost. That is, starting from typical values, an 80 percent reduction in response
time results in a corresponding 40 percent reduction in unit cost. The actual empirical data indi-
cated a range between about 0.60 and 0.20, so for an 80 percent reduction in response time, there
could be a cost reduction from a high of 0.60 × 80 percent = 48 percent to a low of 16 percent.
This is an overwhelming benefit because if corresponding price reductions are made, it
improves the value delivered to the customer through both higher responsiveness and lower price.
The result for the producer is a much higher market share.
If the producer chooses not to reduce the price, then the result is both higher margins and
higher sales, for significantly increased profitability.
■ TABLE 1.2 Prerequisites for and Advantages of Rapid Response
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Sharper focus on the customer. Faster response for both standard‐ and custom‐designed
items places the customer at the center of attention
Better management. Attention shifts to management’s real job, improving the firm’s
infrastructure and systems
Efficient processing. Efficient processing reduces inventories, eliminates nonvalue‐added
processing steps, smoothes flows, and eliminates bottlenecks
Higher quality. Since there is no time for rework, the production system must be sufficiently
improved to make parts accurately, reliably, consistently, and correctly
Elimination of overhead. More efficient, faster flows through fewer steps eliminate the
overhead needed to support the remaining steps, processes, and systems
Improved focus. A customer‐based focus is provided for strategy, investment, and general
attention (instead of an internal focus on surrogate measures such as utilization)
Reduced changes. With less time to delivery, there is less time for changes in product mix,
engineering changes, and especially changes to the order by the customer who just wanted
to get in the queue in the first place
Faster revenue generation. With faster deliveries, orders can be billed faster, thereby
improving cash flows and reducing the need for working capital
Better communication. More direct communication lines result in fewer mistakes, oversights,
and lost orders
Improved morale. The reduced processing steps and overhead allow workers to see the
results of their efforts, giving a feeling of working for a smaller firm, with its greater visibility
and responsibility
Meridth-c01.indd 18 11/5/2015 4:15:36 PM
191.3 Strategy and Competitiveness
1.3 Strategy and Competitiveness
Competitiveness can be defined in a number of ways. We may think of it as the long‐term viabil-
ity of a firm or organization, or we may define it in a short‐term context such as the current suc-
cess of a firm in the marketplace as measured by its market share or its profitability. We can also
talk about the competitiveness of a nation, in the sense of its aggregate competitive success in all
markets. The US President’s Council on Industrial Competitiveness gave this definition in 1985:
Competitiveness for a nation is the degree to which it can, under free and fair market conditions,
produce goods and services that meet the test of international markets while simultaneously maintain-
ing and expanding the real incomes of its citizens.
1.3.1 Global Trends
The United States provides a graphic example of global trade trends. The trend in merchandise
trade for the United States is startling. Although some might think that foreign competition has
been taking markets away from US producers only in the past decade, US merchandise imports
have grown considerably for over 30 years. Although exports have increased over this period as
well, they have not increased as fast as imports; the result is an exploding trade deficit with for-
eign countries. Partly as a result of this deficit, the United States is now the biggest debtor nation
in the world, with a cumulative deficit of about $5 trillion, nearly half of the US annual gross
domestic product (GDP), and an annual deficit running about 6 percent of GDP. However, these
values hold only for the period up to mid‐2008, when the global financial/credit/recession crisis
started. It now appears that all these figures will become much worse—not for just the United
States, but globally.
Another important issue relating to the financial crisis involves the exchange rate between
currencies. Let’s consider in more detail what it means when a country’s currency declines in
value relative to foreign currencies. A weaker currency means that citizens in that country will
have to pay more for products imported from foreign countries. Meanwhile, the prices for prod-
ucts produced in that country and exported to foreign countries will decline, making them more
desirable. Thus, a decline in the value of a country’s currency is a double‐edged sword. Such a
decline makes imported goods more expensive for citizens to purchase but at the same time makes
exports less expensive for foreign consumers, increasing the demand for domestic products.
20 40 60
Percentage change in response time
P
e
rc
e
n
ta
g
e
c
h
a
n
g
e
i
n
c
o
st
80 100
20
40
60
80
100
Approximation
Lower range
Upper range
FIGURE 1.6
Cost reductions with
decreases in response
time.
Meridth-c01.indd 19 11/5/2015 4:15:37 PM
20 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
As an example, let’s consider the American dollar. In the financial crisis of 2008, the dollar
grew stronger as Americans sold foreign assets and foreigners rushed to hold assets in the dollar,
the world’s strongest currency, as well as a “reserve” (commodities are priced in dollars) cur-
rency. However, given the massive amount of dollars, the US government borrowed and created
to overcome the financial crisis, there is widespread concern that the dollar may weaken or even
collapse in the future.
According to economic theory, a stronger dollar should make American products less
desirable (or competitive) in foreign markets and imports more desirable in American markets.
However, some market actions that governments and businesses often take to keep from losing
customers can alter this perfect economic relationship. For instance, in the 1990s, when the price
of Japanese products in the United States started increasing in terms of dollars, Japanese firms
initiated huge cost‐cutting drives to reduce the cost (and thereby the dollar price) of their prod-
ucts, to keep from losing American customers, which was largely successful. Similarly, China
controls the exchange rate of its currency, the renminbi, to stay at about 7 to the dollar (though
they have been letting it strengthen recently), so it always sells its goods at a competitive price.
In the last decade, particularly with the economic rise of China and India, global markets,
manufacturers, and service producers have evolved in a dramatic manner. With the changes
occurring in the World Trade Organization (WTO), international competition has grown very
complex in the last two decades. Previously, firms were domestic, exporters, or international.
A domestic firm produced and sold in the same country. An exporter sold goods, often someone
else’s, abroad. An international firm sold domestically produced as well as foreign‐produced
goods both domestically and in foreign countries. However, domestic sales were usually pro-
duced domestically, and foreign sales were made either in the home country or in a plant in the
foreign country, typically altered to suit national regulations, needs, and tastes.
Now, however, there are global firms, joint ventures, partial ownerships, foreign subsidiar-
ies, and other types of international producers. For example, Canon is a global producer that sells
a standard “world‐class” camera with options and add‐ons available through local dealers. And
automobile producers frequently own stock in foreign automobile companies. Mazak, a fast‐
growing machine tool company, is the US subsidiary of Yamazaki Machinery Company of Japan.
Part of the reason for cross‐ownerships and cross‐endeavors is the spiraling cost of bringing out
new products. New drugs and memory chips run in the hundreds of millions to billions of dollars
to bring to market. By using joint ventures and other such approaches to share costs (and thereby
lower risks), firms can remain competitive.
Whether to build offshore, assemble offshore, use foreign parts, employ a joint venture, and
so on is a complex decision for any firm and depends on a multitude of factors. For example, the
Japanese have many of their automobile manufacturing plants in foreign countries. The reasons
are many and include to circumvent foreign governmental regulation of importers, to avoid the
high yen cost of Japanese‐produced products, to avoid import fees and quotas, and to placate
foreign consumers. Of course, other considerations are involved in producing in foreign coun-
tries: culture (e.g., whether women are part of the labor force), political stability, laws, taxes,
regulations, and image.
Other complex arrangements of suppliers can result in hidden international competition.
For example, many products that bear an American nameplate have been totally produced and
assembled in a foreign country and are simply imported under a US manufacturer’s or retailer’s
nameplate, such as Nike shoes. Even more confusing, many products contain a significant pro-
portion of foreign parts or may be composed entirely of foreign parts and only assembled in the
United States (e.g., toasters, mixers, and hand tools). This recent strategic approach of finding the
best mix of producers and assemblers to deliver a product or service to a customer has come to
be known as “supply chain management,” a topic we discuss in detail in Chapters 5 and 6.
Meridth-c01.indd 20 11/5/2015 4:15:37 PM
211.3 Strategy and Competitiveness
1.3.2 Strategy
The organization’s business strategy is a set of objectives, plans, and policies for the organization
to compete successfully in its markets. In effect, the business strategy specifies what an organiza-
tion’s competitive advantage will be and how this advantage will be achieved and sustained
through the decisions the organization’s business units make in the future. A key element of the
business strategy is determining the window of opportunity for executing this strategy before
competitors do the same. The strategic plan that details this business strategy is typically formu-
lated at the executive committee level (CEO, president, vice presidents) and is usually long range,
at least three to five years.
In fact, however, the actual decisions that are made over time become the long‐range
strategy. In too many firms, these decisions show no pattern at all, reflecting the truth that they
have no active business strategy, even if they have gone through a process of strategic planning.
In other cases, these decisions bear little or no relationship to the organization’s stated or offi-
cial business strategy. The point is that an organization’s actions tell more about its true busi-
ness strategy, or the lack thereof, than its public statements.
But devising a winning strategy is only the first step in being competitive. The organization
and its various business units still need to successfully implement this strategy, and that is where
so many fail. It is now clear that more organizational strategies fail not so much for being a poor
strategy but instead for poor execution. As Morgan, Levitt, and Malek note in their widely her-
alded book, “Executing your Strategy; How to Break it Down and Get it Done” (Morgan et al.
2007, p. 1), “Corporations spend about $100 billion a year on management consulting and train-
ing, most of it aimed at creating brilliant strategy. Yet studies have found that . . . something like
90 percent of companies consistently fail to execute strategies effectively.” They confirm that
thousands of such strategies fail every year because of poor execution.
DILBERT: © Scott Adams/Dist. by United Feature Syndicate, Inc.
Executing a winning strategy is a major project that must be implemented within a limited
time, taking substantial resources and experienced talent, the province of project management
(Meredith et al. 2015). Unfortunately, as Morgan et al. point out, top managers consider the tedi-
ous work of project management as “too ‘tactical’ to take up their precious time . . . leaving the
grunt work of execution to the lower echelons. Nothing could be further from the truth . . . that is
precisely where strategy goes awry.” (p. 2, 4). Morgan et al. suggest that a simple test of this
failure in perspective of top executives is to examine the set of projects—the project portfolio—to
see whether it is aligned with the organization’s stated strategy or not. The execution of strategic
initiatives through project management will be dealt with in the next chapter of this first part of
the book concerning strategy and execution.
Meridth-c01.indd 21 11/5/2015 4:15:37 PM
22 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
1.3.3 Strategic Frameworks
We now move to a discussion of the business unit strategies organizations employ to support the
overall strategy of the organization. Clearly, the business unit strategies are also projects—there
will be a marketing strategy, a financial strategy, an R&D strategy, and so on. Here, of course, we
are interested in the operations and supply chain strategy. As it happens, there are a number of
fairly well‐defined such strategies. One that is common to many of the functional areas is related
to the life cycle of the organization’s products or services.
The Life Cycle
A number of functional strategies are tied to the stages in the standard life cycle of products and
services, shown in Figure 1.7. Studies of the introduction of new products indicate that the life
cycle (or stretched S growth curve, as it is also known) provides a good pattern for the growth of
demand for a new output. The curve can be divided into three major segments: (1) introduction
and early adoption, (2) acceptance and growth of the market, and (3) maturity with market satura-
tion. After market saturation, demand may remain high or decline, or the output may be improved
and possibly start on a new growth curve.
The length of product and service life cycles has been shrinking significantly in the last
decade or so. In the past, a life cycle might have been five years, but it is now six months. This
places a tremendous burden on the firm to constantly monitor its strategy and quickly change a
strategy that becomes inappropriate to the market.
The life cycle begins with an innovation—a new output or process for the market, as dis-
cussed earlier. The innovation may be a patented product or process, a new combination of exist-
ing elements that has created a unique product or process, or some service that was previously
unavailable. Initial versions of the product or service may change relatively frequently; produc-
tion volumes are small, since the output has not caught on yet; and margins are high. As volume
increases, the design of the output stabilizes and more competitors enter the market, frequently
with more capital‐intensive equipment. In the mature phase, the now high‐volume output is a
virtual commodity, and the firm that can produce an acceptable version at the lowest cost usually
controls the market.
Clearly, a firm’s business strategy should match the life‐cycle stages of its products and
services. If a firm such as HP is good at innovation, it may choose to focus only on the introduc-
tion and acceptance phases of the product’s life cycle and then sell or license production to others
as the product moves beyond the introduction stage. If its strength is in high‐volume, low‐cost
production, the company should stick with proven products that are in the maturity stage. Most
Introduction
D
e
m
a
n
d
Growth Maturity
Time
FIGURE 1.7
The life‐cycle curve.
Meridth-c01.indd 22 11/5/2015 4:15:39 PM
231.3 Strategy and Competitiveness
common, perhaps, are firms that attempt to stick with products throughout their life cycle, chang-
ing their strategy with each stage.
One approach to categorizing an organization’s business strategy is based on its timing of
introductions of new outputs. Two researchers, Maidique and Patch (1979), suggest the following
four product development strategies:
1. First‐to‐market. Organizations that use this strategy attempt to have their products available
before the competition. To achieve this, strong applied research is needed. If a company is
first‐to‐market, it has to decide if it wants to price its products high and thus skim the market
to achieve large short‐term profits or set a lower initial price to obtain a higher market share
and perhaps larger long‐term profits.
2. Second‐to‐market. Organizations that use this strategy try to quickly imitate successful out-
puts offered by first‐to‐market organizations. This strategy requires less emphasis on applied
research and more emphasis on fast development. Often, firms that use the second‐to‐
market strategy attempt to learn from the mistakes of the first‐to‐market firm and offer
improved or enhanced versions of the original products.
3. Cost minimization or late‐to‐market. Organizations that use this strategy wait until a product
becomes fairly standardized and is demanded in large volumes. They then attempt to com-
pete on the basis of costs as opposed to features of the product. These organizations focus
most of their R&D on improving the production process, as opposed to focusing on product
development.
4. Market segmentation. This strategy focuses on serving niche markets with specific needs.
Applied engineering skills and flexible manufacturing systems are often needed for the
market‐segmentation strategy.
Be aware that a number of implicit trade‐offs are involved in developing a strategy. Let us
use the first‐to‐market strategy to demonstrate. A first‐to‐market strategy requires large invest-
ments in product development in an effort to stay ahead of the competition. Typically, organiza-
tions that pursue this strategy expect to achieve relatively higher profit margins, larger market
shares, or both as a result of initially having the market to themselves. The strategy is somewhat
risky because a competitor may end up beating them to the market. Also, even if a company suc-
ceeds in getting to the market first, it may end up simply creating an opportunity for the competi-
tion to learn from its mistakes and overtake it in the market. To illustrate, although Sony introduced
its Betamax format for VCRs in 1975, JVC’s VHS format—introduced the following year—is the
standard that ultimately gained widespread market acceptance.
Such trade‐offs are basic to the concept of selecting a business strategy. Although specific
tasks must be done well to execute the selected strategy, not everything needs to be particularly
outstanding—only a few things. And, of course, strategies based on anything else—acquisitions,
mergers, tax loss carry‐forwards, even streams of high‐technology products—will not be suc-
cessful if the customer is ignored in the process.
Performance Frontiers
As we know from the earlier “Customer Value” section, there are a wide range of benefits and
costs that organizations can compete on and various groups of customers value. If, say, n of these
factors are important for an organization to consider, we might then conceive of a graph or space
with n dimensions on it showing the organization’s measures on each of the n factors as well as
their competitors’ measures. The curve connecting all these measures would then be called the
organization’s performance frontier (Clark 1996). For simplicity, let us use just two factors, say,
cost and variety, as shown in Figure 1.8, with the performance frontier curve labeled 1.
Meridth-c01.indd 23 11/5/2015 4:15:39 PM
24 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
As illustrated by the points A, B, and C, improvement on one dimension can usually only
be attained by sacrificing performance on another dimension. For example, as shown in Figure 1.8,
increasing output variety may result in higher unit costs. In effect, this curve represents the level
of performance that organizations in an industry can achieve across two dimensions given the
technology available at a given point in time. According to the figure, company A is apparently
pursuing more of a customization strategy than the two other competitors shown, offering a wider
variety of outputs but incurring greater cost. We might think of a high end furniture store as per-
haps fitting point A. Company C, perhaps Costco, seems to be pursuing a standardization strat-
egy, offering a smaller range of furniture but incurring lower unit costs.
An interesting use of this framework is to investigate and evaluate the impact of a change
in technology or operational innovation (Hammer 2004). For example, in Figure 1.9, assume a
new innovation such as “cross‐docking” has been developed by company B, perhaps represented
by Wal‐Mart, shifting its performance frontier to curve 2. In this case, company B could hold its
unit price constant and offer higher output variety than company A and at lower unit cost (posi-
tion B
1
). Alternatively, company B could maintain its current level of output variety and lower its
unit cost to levels below company C’s (position B
2
) or perhaps choose a position somewhere
between points B
1
and B
2
.
Suppose you were employed at company A and company B chose to operate at point B
1
. In
effect, company B can now offer a wider variety of outputs and at lower unit costs. What are your
options? As it turns out, there are two generic options or improvement trajectories company A
could try to follow. One improvement trajectory would be for company A to streamline its opera-
tions and make cost‐variety trade‐offs, moving down curve 1 toward company C. Upon stream-
lining its operations, company A could then attempt to adopt the new technology and choose a
position on the new frontier. A second improvement trajectory would be for company A to attempt
to directly adopt the new technology and move to the new frontier without streamlining its cur-
rent operations.
Output variety
U
n
it
c
o
st
C
B
A
1
FIGURE 1.8
Example performance
frontier.
Output variety
U
n
it
c
o
st
C
B
B2
B1
A
2
1
FIGURE 1.9
Development of new
technology results in
shift in the performance
frontier.
Meridth-c01.indd 24 11/5/2015 4:15:42 PM
251.3 Strategy and Competitiveness
There are advantages and disadvantages associated with both trajectories. An advantage of
streamlining operations first is that this might provide a better understanding of current processes.
In turn, this better understanding might increase company A’s options in choosing a location on
the new frontier and might even better position it to adopt the new technology. One drawback of
streamlining its current operations first is that the knowledge gained might be irrelevant when the
new technology is eventually adopted and delaying the adoption of the new technology might
mean reduced market share and profits. Another important factor is the amount of time required
to execute the improvement trajectory and get to the new position on the new performance fron-
tier. However, although it might appear that streamlining the current operation first before adopt-
ing the new technology should take more time than immediately adopting the technology, when
ease of implementation is considered, the former approach might in fact be more expedient.
On a more practical note, Kmart some years ago tried to challenge Wal‐Mart on low prices
but was unsuccessful. Then, Sears and Kmart merged instead, but that didn’t seem to work well
either; now, both seem to be in trouble.
One final point. In Figure 1.9, it was assumed that the result of the new technology/innova-
tion was simply a shift in the performance frontier. It is also important to be aware of the possibility
that a new technology can change the shape as well as the location of the performance frontier.
Such a change in shape can have important implications regarding choosing a location on the new
frontier as well as the nature of the trade‐off facing the industry. In either case, the way to beat your
competition is through developing or using new technology to move to a new frontier.
Focus
In the past, firms primarily competed on one factor, such as low cost or innovation, because that
was what they were good at. Obviously, they could not ignore the other factors of competition,
which they had to do acceptably on, but their heavy attention to their one strength was based on
a strategic framework called focus (Skinner 1974).
McKinsey & Company, a top management consulting firm, studied 27 outstanding firms to
find their common attributes. Two of the major attributes reported in Business Week are directly
related to focus:
1. Stressing one key business value. At Apple, the key value is developing innovative new prod-
ucts that are easy to use; at Dana Corporation, it is improving productivity.
2. Sticking to what they know best. All the outstanding firms define their core capabilities (or
strengths) and then build on them. They resist the temptation to move into new areas or
diversify.
When an organization chooses to stress one or two key areas of strength, it is referred to as
a focused organization. For example, IBM is known for its customer service, General Electric for
its technology, and Procter & Gamble for its consumer marketing. In general, most but not all
areas of focus relate to operations. Some firms, such as those in the insurance industry, focus on
financial strength and others focus on marketing strengths. For example, Harley‐Davidson con-
siders its strength to be in building relationships with its dealers and motorcycle owners. And
many health care organizations are achieving significant operational efficiencies by focusing on
a narrow range of ailments. For example, by treating only long‐term acute cases, Intensiva
HealthCare has been able to reduce its costs to 50 percent of those of a traditional intensive‐care
ward. Clearly, adopting a focus strategy means knowing not only what customers to concentrate
on but also knowing what customers you do not want.
Table 1.3 identifies several areas of focus that organizations commonly choose when form-
ing their competitive strategy; all are various forms of differentiation. Recent competitive behavior
among firms seems to be dividing most of the factors in Table 1.3 into two sets that Hill (2000), an
operations strategist and researcher in England, calls order qualifiers and order winners.
Meridth-c01.indd 25 11/5/2015 4:15:42 PM
26 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
An order qualifier is a characteristic of the product or service that is required if the product is even
to be considered or in the running. In other words, it is a prerequisite for entering the market. An
order winner is a characteristic that will win the bid or the purchase. These qualifiers and winners
vary with the market, of course, but some general commonalties exist across markets. For example,
response time, performance, customization, innovation, and price seem to be frequent order win-
ners, and the other factors (e.g., quality, reliability, and flexibility) tend to be order qualifiers.
Working with marketing and sales to properly identify which factors are which is clearly of major
strategic importance.
In addition to the advantages of being focused, there are also some dangers. A narrowly
focused firm can easily become uncompetitive in the market if the customers’ requirements
change. In addition to being focused, a firm must also be flexible enough to alter its focus when
the need changes and to spot the change in time. Frequently, a focus in one area can be used to an
advantage in another way if there is enough time to adapt—for example, to move into a new
product line or alter the application of the focus. Moreover, as products go through their life
cycle, the task of operations often changes, as shown in Figure 1.10, from being flexible enough
■ TABLE 1.3 Common Areas of Organizational Focus
Innovation. Bringing a range of new products and services to market quickly
Customization. Being able to quickly redesign and produce a product or service to meet customers’
unique needs
Flexibility of products and services. Switching between different models or variants quickly to satisfy
a customer or market
Flexibility of volume. Changing quickly and economically from low‐volume production to high
volumes and vice versa
Performance. Offering products and services with unique, valuable features
Quality. Having better craftsmanship or consistency
Reliability of the product or service. Always working acceptably, enabling customers to count on the
performance
Reliability of delivery. Always fulfilling promises with a product or service that is never late
Response. Offering very short lead times to obtain products and services
After‐sale service. Making available extensive, continuing help
Price. Having the lowest price
Introduction
S
a
le
s
Growth
Time
Maturity
Design changes
Quality
Performance
Volume
Capacity
Emphasis required
Price
FIGURE 1.10
Product life cycle: stages
and emphasis.
Meridth-c01.indd 26 11/5/2015 4:15:44 PM
271.3 Strategy and Competitiveness
to accept changes in design, to meeting the growing demand in the marketplace, and to cutting
costs. Throughout this life cycle, the focus of the organization has to change if it stays with the
same output. Many firms, however, choose to compete at only one stage of the life cycle and
abandon other stages so that they can keep the strength of their original focus.
An organization can also easily lose its focus. For example, in the traditional functional
organization, purchasing may buy the cheapest materials it can. This requires buying large quan-
tities with advance notice. Scheduling, however, is trying to reduce inventories, so it orders mate-
rials on short notice and in small quantities. Quality control is trying to improve the output, so it
carefully inspects every item, creating delays and extensive rework. In this example, each func-
tional department is pursuing its own objectives but is not focusing on how it can support the
organization’s overall business strategy.
However, the most common reason a firm loses its focus is simply that the focus was never
clearly identified in the first place. Never having been well defined, it could not be communicated
to the employees, could therefore not gain their support, and thus was lost. Sometimes a focus is
identified but not communicated throughout the organization because management thinks that
lower‐level employees don’t need to know the strategic focus of the firm in order to do their jobs.
The Sand Cone
For many organizations that relied on the focus framework of strategy, the traditional view was
that competing on one competitive dimension required trading off performance on one or more
other dimensions (e.g., higher quality results in higher costs). However, research suggests that, at
least in some cases, building strengths along alternative competitive dimensions may in fact be
cumulative and that building a strength on one dimension may facilitate building strengths on
other dimensions (Ferdows and De Meyer 1990).
Furthermore, according to this research, there is a preferred order in developing strengths
on various competitive dimensions. According to the sand cone model (as it is called), shown in
Figure 1.11, organizations should first develop the capability to produce quality outputs. Once an
organization has developed this proficiency, it is next appropriate to address the issue of delivery
dependability. Next, according to the model, the competitive dimensions of speed and cost should
be addressed, respectively.
In addition to providing guidance to organizations regarding the order in which to focus
their attention and initiatives, the model has intuitive appeal. For example, it makes little sense to
focus on improving delivery dependability before an organization can provide a consistent level
of quality. In today’s competitive marketplace, providing defective outputs in a timely fashion is
not a recipe for long‐term success.
Likewise, organizations should achieve consistent quality levels and delivery dependability
before attempting to reduce lead times. Of course, the model is not set in stone (remember that it
is called the sand cone) and organizations facing different circumstances may choose to address
the competitive dimensions in a different order.
Cost
Speed
Dependability
Quality
FIGURE 1.11
The sand cone model.
Adapted from Ferdows
and De Meyer 1990,
p. 175.
Meridth-c01.indd 27 11/5/2015 4:15:46 PM
28 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
1.3.4 Core Capabilities
One important result of developing a business strategy is identifying the organization’s core com-
petencies and capabilities that provide those product/service dimensions important to customers
and hence are the source of customer value. Core competencies (Prahalad and Hamel 1990) are
the collective knowledge and skills an organization has that distinguish it from the competition.
In effect, these core competencies become the building blocks for organizational practices and
business processes, referred to as core capabilities (Stalk et al. 1992). (Hereafter, we will refer to
both of these simply as “core capabilities.”) The importance of these core capabilities derives
from their strong relationship to an organization’s ability to integrate a variety of technologies
and skills in the development of new products and services. Clearly, then, one of the top manage-
ment’s most important activities is the identification and development of the core capabilities the
organization will need to successfully execute the business strategy.
In effect, core capabilities provide the basis for developing new products and services and
are a primary factor in determining an organization’s long‐term competitiveness. Hammer (2004)
points out the importance of “operational innovation” in the organization as one basis for sus-
tained competitive advantage, the clear result of a core capability. Therefore, two important parts
of strategic planning are identifying and predicting the core capabilities that will be critical to
sustaining and enhancing the organization’s competitive position. On this basis, an organization
can also assess its suppliers’ and competitors’ capabilities. If the organization finds that it is not
the leader, it must determine the cost and risks of catching up with the best versus the cost and
risks of losing that core capability.
Hayes and Pisano (1994) stress the importance of a firm not looking for “the” solution to a
current competitive problem but rather the “paths” to building one or two core capabilities to
provide the source of customer value for the indefinite future. Moreover, the firm should not think
in terms of “trade‐offs” between core capabilities (e.g., moving from flexibility as a strength to
low cost), but rather of “building” one capability on top of others and determining which set will
provide the most customer value.
Often, it is more useful to think of an organization in terms of its portfolio of core capabili-
ties, rather than its portfolio of businesses or products. For instance, Sony is known for its exper-
tise in miniaturization; 3M for its knowledge of substrates, coatings, and adhesives; Black and
Decker for small electrical motors and industrial design; Boeing for its ability to integrate large‐
scale complex systems; and Honda for engines and power trains. Had Sony initially viewed itself
as primarily a manufacturer of Walkmans, rather than as a company with expertise in miniaturiza-
tion, it might have overlooked several profitable opportunities, such as entering the camcorder
business. As another example, Boeing has successfully leveraged its core capability related to
integrating large‐scale systems in its production of commercial jetliners, space stations, fighter‐
bombers, and missiles.
As these examples illustrate, core capabilities are often used to gain access to a wide vari-
ety of markets. Canon used its core capabilities in optics, imaging, and electronic controls to
enter the markets for copiers, laser printers, cameras, and image scanners. In a similar fashion,
Honda’s core capabilities in engines and power trains comprise the basis for its entry into other
businesses: automobiles, motorcycles, lawn mowers, and generators.
In addition to providing access to a variety of markets, a core capability should be strongly
related to the benefits provided by the product or service that customers value. In Sony’s case, its
expertise in miniaturization translates directly into important product features such as portability
and aesthetic designs. Alternatively, suppose Sony developed a core competence in writing
understandable user manuals. Since people who purchase an HD TV or a camcorder rarely base
their purchase decision on the quality of the user manual (when was the last time you read a user
manual?), this core capability would provide little of any competitive advantage.
Meridth-c01.indd 28 11/5/2015 4:15:46 PM
291.3 Strategy and Competitiveness
Another characteristic of core capabilities is that they should be difficult to imitate. Clearly,
no sustainable competitive advantage is provided by a core capability that is easily imitated. For
example, Sony’s expertise in miniaturization would mean little if other electronics manufacturers
could match it simply by purchasing and taking apart Sony’s products (this is called reverse engi-
neering). Bartmess and Cerny (1996) identify three elements of a core capability that hinder
imitation:
• It is complex and requires organizational learning over a long period of time.
• It is based on multiple functional areas, both internal and external to the organization.
• It is a result of how the functions interact rather than the skills/knowledge within the functions
themselves.
The topic of core capabilities is also strongly related to the recent surge in outsourcing and
offshoring. Outsourcing involves subcontracting out certain activities or services. For example, a
manufacturer might outsource the production of certain components, the management and main-
tenance of its computer resources, employee recruitment, or the processing of its payroll.
When we consider the concept of core capability, it is important to recognize that not all
parts, services, and activities are equal. Rather, these activities and parts can be thought of as fall-
ing on a continuum ranging from strategically important to unimportant. Parts and activities are
considered strategically important when:
• They are strongly related to what customers perceive to be the key characteristics of the prod-
uct or service.
• They require highly specialized knowledge and skill, a core capability.
• They require highly specialized physical assets, and few other suppliers possess these assets.
• The organization has a technological lead or is likely to obtain one.
Activities that are not strategic or core are candidates for outsourcing. These parts or activi-
ties are not strongly linked to key product characteristics, do not require highly specialized
knowledge, and do not need special physical assets, and the organization does not have the tech-
nological lead in this area. Thus, if it is beneficial to outsource these parts or activities—perhaps
because of lower cost or higher quality—no loss in competitiveness should result. On the other
hand, when a firm’s strategic parts and activities have been outsourced, particularly to a foreign
supplier, called offshoring, the firm has become hollow (Jonas 1986). As we have stated, the wise
firm will outsource only nonstrategic, simple, relatively standard parts and processes such as
screws or types of processes that are not worth the time for the firm to produce itself; the com-
plex, proprietary parts and processes that give their products an edge in the marketplace are
produced internally. If the firm outsources these parts and processes as well, it soon finds that the
engineering design talent follows the production of the part outside the firm, too, and its core
capabilities have been lost. Then, the firm has been hollowed out, becoming merely a distributor
of its supplier’s products.
Given the huge potential effects of outsourcing, both positive and negative, a firm should
consider such a move very carefully. Management needs to think about both the long‐term and
short‐term effects. They also need to consider the impact of this decision on their core capabili-
ties and everything else they do within the company. Such a major decision as outsourcing will
affect other decisions as well, such as sourcing materials, hiring/releasing labor and management,
marketing, finance, and a wide range of other areas.
So what is the problem? If a supplier can deliver the parts at lower cost and better quality
when they are needed, why not use the supplier? The problem is that the supplier gains the
Meridth-c01.indd 29 11/5/2015 4:15:46 PM
30 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
expertise (and core capabilities) to produce the critical parts you need, and as Hayes and Pisano
(1994), among others, note, organizations quickly forget how they produced those critical
parts. After a while, when the supplier has improved on the process and you have forgotten
how to make the parts, it is likely to start competing with you, producing the products you have
been selling and dropping you as a customer. This is even more dangerous if, as already noted,
the product and transformation system has also been hollowed out, following the production
activities to the supplier. This happened extensively in the television industry, where the
Japanese learned first how to produce and then how to engineer black‐and‐white and, later,
color television sets. They then started tentatively introducing their own brands, to see if US
customers would buy them. Their products were inexpensive, of high quality, and caught on
quickly in the free‐enterprise American markets. The Japanese and Koreans now virtually con-
trol this industry.
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1. Why is it so hard to increase productivity in the service
sector?
2. Identify other major differences between services and prod-
ucts in addition to those listed in Table 1.1.
3. Many foreign firms have been successful in the following
areas: steel, autos, cameras, and televisions. Are services more
protected from foreign competition? How?
4. It is commonly said that Japanese firms employ 10 times as
many engineers per operations worker as US firms and 10
times fewer accountants. What effect would you expect this to
have on their competitiveness? Why?
5. How might the concept of a “facilitating good” alter the way
we perceive a product? A service?
6. Is it wise for a firm to stick to what it knows best, or should it
expand its market by moving into adjoining products or ser-
vices? How can it avoid losing its focus?
7. Can you think of any other areas of possible focus for a firm
besides those identified in Table 1.3?
8. What core capabilities do you think China possesses? India?
Japan? The United States?
9. According to K. Blanchard and N. V. Peale (The Power of
Ethical Management, New York: Morrow, 1988), the follow-
ing three ethical tests may be useful: (1) Is it legal or within
company policy? (2) Is it balanced and fair in the short and
long term? (3) Would you be proud if the public or your fam-
ily knew about it?
Apply these tests to the following situations:
a. A foreign firm subsidizes its sales in another country.
b. A foreign firm dumps its products (sells them for less than
cost) in another country.
c. A country imports products that, had they been made
domestically, would have violated domestic laws (e.g.,
laws against pollution).
10. In responding faster to customers’ needs, where might the
cost savings come from? What benefits would result?
11. Can you think of companies that have moved the performance
frontier of their industries?
12. Why do Americans invest more in marketing new products
while the Japanese invest more in engineering? What advan-
tages accrue to each investment?
13. Using new technologies, it is not uncommon for firms to cut
their response times by a factor of 10. What effect would you
expect this to have on their unit costs?
14. What are the order winners and order qualifiers for Wal‐Mart?
Toyota? BMW? Sony?
15. Given the recent trends in products and services, does the
focus strategy or sand cone strategy seem most applicable
these days?
16. Why don’t we see more mass customization in products and
services?
Meridth-c01.indd 30 11/5/2015 4:15:46 PM
31Apply your Understanding
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
■ IZMIR NATIONAL UNIVERSITY
Izmir National University (INU) was chartered in 2010
to facilitate Turkey ’ s expected eventual entry into the
economy of Europe, via the EU. To foster growth and
development in the European economy, engineering, sci-
ence, and business were deemed to be the institution ’ s
primary areas of intellectual endeavor. The university
grew rapidly during its first three years. By 2015, the
enrollment had reached just over 9300 students. However,
with this rapid growth came a number of problems. For
example, because the faculty had to be hired so quickly,
there was little real organization, and curriculum seemed
to be decided on the basis of which adviser a student
happened to consult. The administrative offices were
often reshuffled, with vague responsibilities and short
tenures.
The faculty of the new Business School was typi-
cal of the confusion that gripped the entire university.
The 26 faculty members were mostly recent graduates of
doctoral programs at major European and Turkish uni-
versities. There were 21 Assistant Docents and Lecturers,
3 Docents, and 2 full Professors, spread fairly evenly
over the four departments, each overseen by a Kürsü pro-
fessor (department head). In addition, funds were avail-
able to hire three additional faculty members, either
assistant or regular Docents. The background of the
newly recruited Dekan (administrative head, dean) of the
Business School included five years of teaching at a pri-
marily Muslim university in Turkey and two years of
departmental administration at a large southern European
university.
Upon arriving at the Business School, the Dekan
asked the faculty to e‐mail their concerns to her so that
she could begin to get a handle on the major issues con-
fronting the school. Her office assistant selected the fol-
lowing comments as representative of the sentiments
expressed:
• “Our student–teacher ratio is much higher than what it
was at my former university. We need to fill those open
slots as quickly as possible and ask the university to
fund at least two more faculty positions.”
• “If we don ’ t get the quality of enrollments up in the
MBA program, the graduate school will never approve
our application for a doctoral program. We need the doc-
toral program to attract the best faculty, and we need the
doctoral students to help cover our courses.”
• “Given that research is our primary mission, we need to
fund more graduate research assistants.”
• “The travel budget isn ’ t sufficient to allow me to attend
the meetings I ’ m interested in. How can we improve and
maintain our visibility if we get funding for only one
meeting per year?”
• “We need better staff support. Faculty members are
required to submit their exams for copying five days
before they are needed. However, doing this makes it dif-
ficult to test the students on the material covered in class
right before the exam, since it ’ s difficult to know ahead
of time exactly how much material we will cover.”
• “I think far too much emphasis is placed on research. We
are here to teach.”
• “Being limited in our consulting is far too restrictive. In
Europe, we were allowed one day a week. How are we
supposed to stay current without consulting?”
• “We need a voice mail system. I never get my important
messages.”
Questions
1. What do the comments by the faculty tell you about
INU ’ s strategy?
2. What would you recommend the Dekan do regarding the
Business School ’ s strategic planning process? What role
would you recommend the Dekan play in this process?
3. Productivity is defined as the ratio of output (including
both goods and services) to the input used to produce it.
How could the productivity of the Business School be
measured? What would the effect be on productivity if
the faculty all received a 10 percent raise but continued
to teach the same number of classes and students?
Meridth-c01.indd 31 11/5/2015 4:15:46 PM
32 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness
■ TARACARE, INC.
Taracare, Inc. operates a single factory in Ensenada,
Mexico, where it fabricates and assembles a wide range
of outdoor furniture for the US market, including chairs,
tables, and matching accessories. Taracare ’ s primary
production activities include extruding the aluminum
furniture parts, bending and shaping the extruded parts,
finishing and painting the parts, and then assembling the
parts into completed furniture. Upholstery, glass table-
tops, and all hardware are purchased from outside
suppliers.
Jorge Gonzalez purchased Taracare in 2011.
Before that, Jorge had distinguished himself as a top
sales rep of outdoor furniture for the western region of
one of the leading national manufacturers. However,
after spending 10 years on the road, he wanted to settle
down and spend more time with his family back in
Mexico. After searching for a couple of months, he
came across what he believed to be an ideal opportunity.
Not only was it in an industry that he had a great deal of
knowledge about, but he would be his own boss.
Unfortunately, the asking price was well beyond Jorge ’ s
means. However, after a month of negotiation, Jorge
convinced Jesus Garza, Taracare ’ s founder, to maintain
a 25 percent stake in the business. Although Jesus had
originally intended to sell out completely, he was
impressed with Jorge ’ s knowledge of the business, his
extensive contacts, and his enthusiasm. He therefore
agreed to sell Jorge 75 percent of Taracare and retain
25 percent as an investment.
Jorge ’ s ambition for Taracare was to expand it
from a small regional manufacturer to one that sold to
major national retailers. To accomplish this objective,
Jorge ’ s first initiative was to triple Taracare ’ s sales force
in 2012. As sales began to increase, Jorge increased the
support staff by hiring an accountant, a comptroller, two
new designers, and a purchasing agent.
By mid‐2015, Taracare ’ s line was carried by sev-
eral national retailers on a trial basis. However, Taracare
was having difficulty both in meeting the deliveries its
sales reps were promising and in satisfying the national
retailers ’ standards for quality. To respond to this prob-
lem, Jorge hired Alfredo Diaz as the new manufacturing
manager. Before accepting Jorge ’ s offer, Alfredo was the
plant manager of a factory that manufactured replace-
ment windows sold by large regional and national
retailers.
After several months on the job—and after making
little progress toward improving on‐time delivery and
quality—Alfredo scheduled a meeting with Jorge to discuss
his major concerns. Alfredo began:
I requested this meeting with you, Jorge, because I am not
satisfied with the progress we are making toward improving
our delivery performance and quality. The bottom line is that
I feel I ’ m getting very little cooperation from the other
department heads. For example, last month purchasing
switched to a new supplier for paint; and although it is true
that the new paint costs less per gallon, we have to apply
a thicker coat to give the furniture the same protection. I
haven ’ t actually run the numbers, but I know it is actually
costing us more, in both materials and labor.
Another problem is that we typically run a special promotion
to coincide with launching new product lines. I understand
that the sales guys want to get the product into the stores as
quickly as possible, but they are making promises about deliv-
ery that we can ’ t meet. It takes time to work out the bugs and
get things running smoothly. Then, there is the problem with
the designers. They are constantly adding features to the
product that make it almost impossible for us to produce.
At the very least, they make it much more expensive for us to
produce. For example, on the new “Destiny” line, they
designed table legs that required a new die at a cost of 250,000
pesos. Why couldn ’ t they have left the legs alone so that we
could have used one of our existing dies? On top of this, we
have the accounting department telling us that our equipment
utilization is too low. Then, when we increase our equipment
utilization and make more products, the finance guys tell us
we have too much capital tied up in inventory. To be honest,
I really don ’ t feel that I ’ m getting very much support.
Rising from his chair, Jorge commented:
You have raised some important issues, Alfredo. Unfortunately,
I have to run to another meeting right now. Why don ’ t you
send me a memo outlining these issues and your recommen-
dations? Then, perhaps, I will call a meeting and we can dis-
cuss these issues with the other department heads. At least
our production problems are really no worse than those of
our competitors, and we don ’ t expect you to solve all of our
problems overnight. Keep up the good work and send me that
memo at your earliest convenience.
Meridth-c01.indd 32 11/5/2015 4:15:46 PM
33Apply your Understanding
Questions
1. Does Alfredo ’ s previous experience running a plant
that made replacement windows qualify him to run a
plant that makes outdoor furniture?
2. What recommendations would you make if you were
Alfredo?
3. Given Jorge ’ s background and apparent priorities, how
is he likely to respond to Alfredo ’ s recommendations?
On the basis of this likely response, is it possible to
rephrase Alfredo ’ s recommendations so they are more
appealing to Jorge?
Meridth-c01.indd 33 11/5/2015 4:15:46 PM
34
chapter
2
Executing Strategy: Project
Management
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
In the last chapter, we discussed the importance of successfully implementing the
organization’s strategic plans. Such efforts are executed through major projects
involving changes in the organization’s systems and procedures. In this chapter,
we address the management of such projects. We use a process improvement
project as an example, but projects are used in all kinds of organizations for every
conceivable purpose. They range from simple combinations of tactical tasks to
strategic organizational change and from setting up a party to putting a person
on the moon.
The chapter begins with a discussion of the crucial topics of project selection,
project planning, and organizing the project team. We then move on to an expla-
nation of some project scheduling techniques, showing some typical project man-
agement software printouts that are available to project managers. The chapter
continues with a discussion of controlling project cost and performance, primarily
through the use of “earned value,” and then concludes with a brief description of
Goldratt’s “critical chain.”
Introduction
Meridth-c02.indd 34 10/29/2015 3:23:25 PM
35Introduction
Meridth-c02.indd 35 10/29/2015 3:23:25 PM
36 Executing Strategy: Project Management
right
won’t
Meridth-c02.indd 36 10/29/2015 3:23:25 PM
372.1 Defining a Project
2.1 Defining a Project
process
process
project
stakeholders
how
Meridth-c02.indd 37 10/29/2015 3:23:25 PM
38 Executing Strategy: Project Management
production
assembly
scheduling control
2.2 Planning the Project
project portfolio
2.2.1 The Project Portfolio
aggre-
gate project plan
Meridth-c02.indd 38 10/29/2015 3:23:25 PM
392.2 Planning the Project
distribution
set
1. Derivative projects
R & D
projects
Extensive
process
changes
Extensive
product
changes
Minor
process
changes
Minor
product
changes
Platform projects
Derivative
projects
Breakthrough
projects
FIGURE 2.1
The aggregate project
plan.
Meridth-c02.indd 39 10/29/2015 3:23:26 PM
40 Executing Strategy: Project Management
2. Breakthrough projects
3. Platform projects
platform
4. R&D projects
manage
Extensive
process
changes
Extensive
product
changes
Minor
process
changes
Minor
product
changes
FIGURE 2.2
An example aggregate
project plan.
Meridth-c02.indd 40 10/29/2015 3:23:26 PM
412.2 Planning the Project
2.2.2 The Project Life Cycle
a
b
Time
(a)
Project
initiation
Project
implementation
Project
termination
%
p
ro
je
c
t
c
o
m
p
le
ti
o
n
Time
(b)
Project
initiation
Project
implementation
Project
termination
%
p
ro
je
c
t
c
o
m
p
le
ti
o
n
FIGURE 2.3
Two project life cycles.
(a) stretched‐S.
(b) exponential.
Meridth-c02.indd 41 10/29/2015 3:23:26 PM
42 Executing Strategy: Project Management
2.2.3 Projects in the Organizational Structure
2.2.4 Organizing the Project Team
Meridth-c02.indd 42 10/29/2015 3:23:26 PM
432.2 Planning the Project
1. Credibility
2. Sensitivity
3. Leadership, ethics, and managerial style
4. Ability to handle stress
2.2.5 Project Plans
project
charter project plan
Meridth-c02.indd 43 10/29/2015 3:23:26 PM
44 Executing Strategy: Project Management
Purpose
Objectives
Overview
Schedule and milestones
Resources project budget
Stakeholders
team
Risk management plan
Evaluation method
Meridth-c02.indd 44 10/29/2015 3:23:26 PM
452.2 Planning the Project
work breakdown structure
project schedule
project Gantt chart
Performance
(“scope”)
Target
Time
(“schedule”)
Cost
Required performance
Budget limit
Due date
FIGURE 2.4
Three project objectives.
Reprinted with
permission from
J. Meredith,
S. J. Mantel, Jr., and
S. M. Shafer, Project
Management: A
Managerial Approach,
9th ed. New York:
Wiley, 2015.
E.
Implement and
start-up
A.
Determine
need
B.
Solicit
quotations
C.
Appropriation
request
Quick Response Teams
D.
Purchase
resources
2.
Equipment
1.
Order
3.
Write
2.
$
1.
Contacts
2.
Where
1.
Benefit
3.
Materials
1.
Hire
3.
Test
2.
Train
1.
Equipment
FIGURE 2.5
Work breakdown
structure.
Meridth-c02.indd 45 10/29/2015 3:23:26 PM
46 Executing Strategy: Project Management
program evaluation and review technique critical path method
Planning precede
Scheduling when can
must critical
slack
2.3 Scheduling the Project
Responsibility
Project OfficeWBS
Subproject Task
A1 A
A
I A
I
I R
C I
C
C
R C
C
I
I
R
A
R
A
R
R
C
C
R
A2
B1
C1
C2
C3
Project
Manager
Contract
Admin.
Program
Mgr.
Portfolio
Mgr.
Field
Manager
Field Oper.
Determine
need
Solicit
quotations
Write approp.
request.
Legend:
Responsible
Consult
Inform
”
”
”
”
”
”
A Approval
FIGURE 2.6 Linear
responsibility chart or
RACI matrix. Reprinted
with permission
from J. Meredith,
S. J. Mantel, Jr., and
S. M. Shafer, Project
Management:
A Managerial Approach,
9th ed. Hoboken, NJ:
Wiley, 2015.
Meridth-c02.indd 46 10/29/2015 3:23:27 PM
472.3 Scheduling the Project
Activity
Event
Network
nodes
Path
Critical path
Critical activities
2.3.1 Project Scheduling with Certain Activity Times: A Process
Improvement Example
activity completion times durations
Project Completion and Critical Paths
Meridth-c02.indd 47 10/29/2015 3:23:27 PM
48 Executing Strategy: Project Management
early start times T early finish times T
T T
T T
■ TABLE 2.1 Data for a Bank’s Mortgage Refinancing Project
Activity Expected time, t
e
Preceding activities
A: Identify all stakeholders
B: Develop the project charter
C: Uncover all relevant regulations
D: Set up project procedures
E: Determine total refinancing time
F: Use accounting data for total cost
G: Interview to determine unknown risks
H: Redesign so as to reduce task times
I: Determine cost reductions of new design
J: Uncover any new constraints on design
10
10
5
7
5
7
2
5
8
4
—
—
—
A
B, C
B, C
B, C
C
G, H
D, E
A, 10
0, 10
0, 10
B, 10
0, 10
1, 11
0
Start
21
End
C, 5
0, 5
3, 8
D, 7
10, 17
10, 17
J, 4
17, 21
17, 21
Activity, te
TES, TEF
TLS, TLF
E, 5
10, 15
12, 17
F, 7
10, 17
14, 21
G, 2
10, 12
11, 13
H, 5
5, 10
8, 13
I, 8
12, 20
13, 21FIGURE 2.7
Network diagram for
mortgage process
improvement project.
Meridth-c02.indd 48 10/29/2015 3:23:28 PM
492.3 Scheduling the Project
both
latest
T T
T T latest
T T latest start time T latest finish time T
backward T T
T T
earliest
Slack Time
T T T T
Meridth-c02.indd 49 10/29/2015 3:23:30 PM
50 Executing Strategy: Project Management
T T T
T
slack float
T T T T
2.3.2 Project Scheduling with Uncertain Activity Times
to tp
tm optimistic time
pessimistic time
most
likely time
Meridth-c02.indd 50 10/29/2015 3:23:31 PM
512.3 Scheduling the Project
Calculating Activity Durations
to tm not tp tm
te2
t
t t t
e
o m p4
6
2
2
6
t tp o
■ TABLE 2.2 Six Sigma Activity Times (Days)
Project activity Optimistic time to Most likely time tm Pessimistic time tp
Expected time te, and
variance 2
A 5 11 11 10, 1
B 10 10 10 10, 0
C 2 5 8 5, 1
D 1 7 13 7, 4
E 4 4 10 5, 1
F 4 7 10 7, 1
G 2 2 2 2, 0
H 0 6 6 5, 1
I 2 8 14 8, 4
J 1 4 7 4, 1
Meridth-c02.indd 51 10/29/2015 3:23:47 PM
52 Executing Strategy: Project Management
95 3 3
90 2 6
% : / .
% : / .
t t
t t
p o
p o
Probabilities of Completion
V 2 2 2 1 4 1 6
Z
V
23 21
6
0 818.
®
D te, , , D
21 1 28 24 14( . ) .V ®
te
0 90 21 2 449 24 14. , , . .
Meridth-c02.indd 52 10/29/2015 3:23:49 PM
532.3 Scheduling the Project
Simulating Project Completion Times
21
Time (days)
F
re
q
u
e
n
c
y
Area =
79%
23
V = 6
FIGURE 2.8
Probability distribution
of path completion time.
Start
A, 32.1, 1.2 C, 22.2, 2.2
B, 24.6, 3.1
D, 26.1, 5.2
E, 34.4, 6.2
F, 34.5, 4.1
End
FIGURE 2.9
Network for simulating.
Meridth-c02.indd 53 10/29/2015 3:23:49 PM
54 Executing Strategy: Project Management
®
®
3 3 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Activity
A
A
32.1
Formulae:
Cell G3
Cell H3
Cell I3
Cell J3
= A3 + C3 + F3
= B3 + D3 + F3
= B3 + E3
= MAX (G3:I3)
Activity
B
B
24.6
Activity
C
C
22.2
Activity
D
D
26.1
Activity
E
E
34.4
Activity
F
F
34.5
Path
G
ACF
88.8
Path
H
BDF
85.2
Path
I
BE
59
Completion
J
Time
88.8
Assumption Cells Forecast Cell
FIGURE 2.10
Spreadsheet for
simulating the network.
FIGURE 2.11
Simulation results.
Meridth-c02.indd 54 10/29/2015 3:23:50 PM
552.3 Scheduling the Project
2.3.3 Project Management Software Capabilities
WBS Name Duration Sch. start Sch. finish 4 11 18 25 1 8 15 22 29 5 12 19 25 5 12 19 26 2 9 16
December January February March April
1
2
3
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
5
6
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
8
9
10 Purchase order prepared
Purchase recommendation prepared
Check out references
Evaluate demos
Survey participants
Software loaded on system
Participants selected
Demo evaluation
Price evaluation
Demos received
Reference list
Prices gathered
Demos ordered
Vendor calls
Literature reviewed
Literature search
Software review begins 0d
2d
12d
10d
10d
1d
1d
1d
5d
40d
1d
1d
9d
30d
3d
5d
0d Mar 14 Mar 14
Mar 14
Mar 7
Mar 7
Mar 8
Dec 28 Dec 30
Jan 25
Jan 11 Jan 11
Jan 11 Jan 11
Jan 11
Jan 10 Jan 16
Jan 10
Jan 9
Jan 9
Jan 10
Dec 27
Dec 27
Dec 27
Dec 27
Dec 27
Dec 27
Dec 7 Dec 7
Dec 7 Dec 8
Dec 9 Dec 26
Jan 12 Jan 24
Project: software evaluation
Date: 1/20/94
Critical
Noncritical
Progress
Milestone
Summary
Rolled up
FIGURE 2.12
Microsoft project’s Gantt
chart for a software
information system
upgrade.
Meridth-c02.indd 55 10/29/2015 3:23:50 PM
56 Executing Strategy: Project Management
2.3.4 Goldratt’s Critical Chain1
Critical Chain
Inflated Activity Time Estimates
pad
12/9/98
Project approval
1
12/3/98
0d
12/3/98
Begin scheduling
4
12/3/98
0d
12/3/98
Scheduling complete
8
12/16/98
0d
12/16/98
Deliver video to
client
14
12/4/99
0d
12/4/99
Schedule shoots
7
12/10/98
5d
12/16/98
Propose shoots
5
12/3/98
5d
12/9/98
Hire secretary
6
12/3/98
5d
ID
Scheduled start
Duration
Critical Milestone
Noncritical Summary
Subproject
MarkedScheduled finish
Script writing
2
12/3/98
14d
12/22/98
Schedule shoots
3
12/3/98
10d
12/16/98
Script approval
9
12/23/98
5d
12/29/98
Revise script
10
12/30/98
5d
1/5/99
Shooting
11
1/6/99
10d
1/19/99
Editing
12
1/20/99
7d
1/28/99
Final approval
13
1/31/99
5d
2/4/99
Name
FIGURE 2.13
PERT chart generated by
Microsoft Project for a
video sales tool.
Project Management in Practice
Meridth-c02.indd 56 10/29/2015 3:23:51 PM
572.3 Scheduling the Project
delay starting the
task student syndrome
Activity Time Variability with Path Interdependencies
Resource Dependence
project buffer
not
Meridth-c02.indd 57 10/29/2015 3:23:51 PM
58 Executing Strategy: Project Management
critical chain
feeding buffer
2.4 Controlling the Project: Earned Value
Critical chain
Project buffer
Feeding buffer
FIGURE 2.14
Project and feeding
buffers.
Meridth-c02.indd 58 10/29/2015 3:23:51 PM
592.4 Controlling the Project: Earned Value
a
b
earned value
cost variance
schedule variance
time
variance
assignable cause
favorable variance
TE TA TE TA
Time
P
ro
g
re
ss
A
m
o
u
n
t
sp
e
n
t
(a)
Time
Time varianceTime variance
(b)
Planned
Actual
0
100%
Planned
Actual
PV
AC
EV
FIGURE 2.15
Cost–schedule
reconciliation charts.
1 2
Month
D
o
ll
a
rs
Time
variance
(10-day delay)
Cost variance
Schedule variance
3
Cost–schedule plan
(baseline)
Actual cost
Value completed
TE TA
PV
AC
EV
FIGURE 2.16
Earned value chart.
Meridth-c02.indd 59 10/29/2015 3:23:52 PM
60 Executing Strategy: Project Management
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
®
12.
13.
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
■ E‐RAZOR, INC., A STRATEGIC BUDGETING DECISION
Meridth-c02.indd 60 10/29/2015 3:23:52 PM
61Apply your Understanding
■ NUTRI‐SAM: THE LATIN AMERICAN EXPANSION DECISION
Questions
Meridth-c02.indd 61 10/29/2015 3:23:52 PM
62 Executing Strategy: Project Management
Activity Optimistic time (months) Most likely time (months) Pessimistic time (months)
A: Concept development 3 12 24
Plan definition
B: Define project scope 1 2 12
C: Develop broad schedule 0.25 0.5 1
D: Detailed cost estimates 0.2 0.3 0.5
E: Develop staffing plan 0.2 0.3 0.6
Design and construction
F: Detailed engineering 2 3 6
G: Facility construction 8 12 24
H: Mobilization of employees 0.5 2 4
I: Procurement of equipment 1 3 12
Start‐up and turnover
J: Prestart‐up inspection 0.25 0.5 1
K: Recruiting and training 0.25 0.5 1
L: Solving start‐up problems 0 1 2
M: Centerlining 0 1 4
Questions
®
E X E R C I S E S
2.1
2.2
2.3
Activity
Times (weeks) Required
precedenceOptimistic Most likely Pessimistic
A
B
C
D
5
10
2
1
11
10
5
7
11
10
8
13
—
—
—
A
Start
A, 4
B, 3
End
C, 1
D, 5
E, 4
F, 1
I, 1
G, 3
H, 5
J, 2
Meridth-c02.indd 62 10/29/2015 3:23:52 PM
63Exercises
Activity
Times (weeks) Required
precedenceOptimistic Most likely Pessimistic
E
F
G
H
I
J
4
4
2
0
2
1
4
7
2
6
8
4
10
10
2
6
14
7
B
B
B
C
G,H
D, E
2.4
Activity t
e
(Weeks)
Preceding
activities
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
3
5
3
1
3
4
2
3
1
None
a
a
c
b
b, d
c
g, f
e, h
2.5
Activity
Times (days)
Required
precedenceOptimistic
Most
likely Pessimistic
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
6
8
2
6
5
5
4
2.7
7
10
3
7
5.5
7
6
3
14
12
4
8
9
9
8
3.5
—
—
—
A
B, C
B, C
D, E
F
(a)
(b)
(c)
2.6
# Activity
Times
Optimistic
Most
likely Pessimistic
Preceding
tasks
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Lay
foundation
Dig hole
for scale
Insert scale
bases
Erect frame
Complete
building
Insert
scales
Insert
display
cases
Put in
office
equipment
Give
finishing
touches
8
5
13
10
11
4
2
4
2
10
6
15
12
20
5
3
6
3
13
8
21
14
30
8
4
10
4
—
—
2
1, 3
4
5
5
7
8, 6
2.7
Meridth-c02.indd 63 10/29/2015 3:23:52 PM
64 Executing Strategy: Project Management
2.8
2.9
2.10
A, 5
B, 3
C, 6
D, 7
Start End
F, 6
E, 5
G, 10
H, 8
I, 4
(a)
(b)
(c)
2.11
Activity
Times
(weeks)
Preceding
activities
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
3
6
8
7
5
10
4
5
6
—
—
—
A
B
C
C
D, E, F
G
(a)
(b)
(c)
2.12
Activity Duration
Preceding
activities
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
3
8
2
4
2
6
5
10
11
1
9
3
8
6
—
—
—
3
2, 4
3
2, 4
1, 5
17
2, 4
6, 10
7, 8, 11
7, 8, 11
6, 10
12
6, 10
12
13, 14, 15
(a)
(b)
(c)
2.13
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Start
A, 2
B, 4
End
C, 3
D, 3
F, 6
E, 5
G, 4
H, 4
KL, 3
J, 2
I, 8
Meridth-c02.indd 64 10/29/2015 3:23:53 PM
part
65
Process and Supply Chain Design
In this second part of the book, “Process and Supply Chain Design,” we first describe
in Chapter 3 how to plan and design the organization ’ s transformation and supply
processes to produce services and/or products for its customers and clients. In
Chapter 4 , we go further into the design details by elaborating the importance of plan-
ning for the amount to be offered as well as its timing through proper scheduling of
the processes. In Chapters 5 and 6 , we describe how to plan and manage the supply
chain. Chapter 5 focuses on the planning and analysis of the supply chain and its criti-
cal ties to the sales function. Chapter 6 then gets into the details of supply chain strat-
egy in terms of its design, such as sourcing, inventory management, and the role of
information technology.
Chapter. 3: Process
Planning
Chapter. 4: Capacity
and Scheduling
Chapter. 5: Supply
Chain Planning
and Analytics
Chapter. 6: Supply
Chain
Management
Chapter. 2: Executing
Strategy: Project
Management
Chapter. 7: Monitoring
and Controlling the
Process
Chapter. 8: Process
Improvement: Six
Sigma
Chapter. 9: Process
Improvement:
Lean
PART I: Strategy
and Execution
PART II: Process and
Supply Chain Design
Chapter. 1: Operations and
Supply Chain Strategy
for Competitiveness
PART III: Managing and
Improving the Process
Role of Operations and Supply Chains in
The Organizations’ Competitiveness
II
Meridth-p02.indd 65 10/29/2015 3:50:52 PM
66
chapter
Process Planning
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
Chapters 1 and 2 in PART I focused on determining a competitive strategy for the
organization and planning its implementation. As we start PART II, our first task is
the selection and design of the transformation process that can execute that strat-
egy in an efficient and effective manner. If an organization is using the wrong trans-
formation process, frequently because the organization has changed or the mar-
ket has changed over time, it will not be competitive. The chapter begins with an
overview of the five major types of transformation processes and their respective
advantages and disadvantages. Next, issues related to the selection of a competi-
tive transformation process, such as considerations of volume, variety, and prod-
uct life cycles, are discussed. Last, explicit attention is given to some of the unique
aspects of designing service operations.
Introduction
3
Meridth-c03.indd 66 10/29/2015 3:29:19 PM
67 Introduction
virtual
organizations focused factories
efficiency effectiveness volume
capacity lead time flexibility
layout
analysis
Meridth-c03.indd 67 10/29/2015 3:29:20 PM
68 Process Planning
waiting line queuing theory
3.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
3.1.1 Continuous Process
continuous transformation process
commodities
continuous process
job shops flow
shops
Meridth-c03.indd 68 10/29/2015 3:29:21 PM
693.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
3.1.2 Flow Shop
flow shop
production
line
assembly line
Advantages of the Flow Shop
Meridth-c03.indd 69 10/29/2015 3:29:21 PM
70 Process Planning
buffer
Disadvantages of the Flow Shop
rate
paced
Shipping
Storage
Out
In
FIGURE 3.1
A generalized flow shop
operation.
Meridth-c03.indd 70 10/29/2015 3:29:21 PM
713.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
balanced
ongoing operation
setup
Layout of the Flow Shop
paced line
Meridth-c03.indd 71 10/29/2015 3:29:24 PM
72 Process Planning
Balancing the Production Line
line balancing
precedence graph
cycle time
takt time
cycle time
cycle time
■ TABLE 3.1 Tasks in Credit Application Processing
Task Average time (minutes) Immediately preceding tasks
a Open and stack applications
b Process enclosed letter; make note of and
handle any special requirements
c Check off form 1 for page 1 of application
d Check off form 2 for page 2 of application;
file original copy of application
e Calculate credit limit from standardized
tables according to forms 1 and 2
f Supervisor checks quotation in light of special
processing of letter and notes type of form
letter, address, and credit limit to return to
applicant
g Administrative assistant types in details on
form letter and mails
Total
0.20
0.37
0.21
0.18
0.19
0.39
0.36
1.90
None
a
a
a
c, d
b, e
f
0.37
0.21 0.19
0.18
0.20 0.39 0.36
b
a c e f g
dFIGURE 3.2
Precedence graph for
credit applications.
Meridth-c03.indd 72 10/29/2015 3:29:25 PM
733.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
idle time
=
=
/
// =
= up
N
T
= ∑
N
T
theoretical
efficiency N
A
NA
longest operation time
Meridth-c03.indd 73 10/29/2015 3:29:26 PM
74 Process Planning
a
b c d
b c d d
a d
b c e c b
b c
f e b e
c e
f
g
f g a
e f
■ TABLE 3.2 Station Task Assignments
Station Time available Eligible tasks Task assigned Idle time
1 0.40
0.20
0.02
a
b, c, d
b, c
a
d
None will fit
0.02
2 0.40
0.03
b, c
c
b
c will not fit
0.03
3 0.40
0.19
c
e
c
e
0.00
4 0.40
0.01
f
g
f
g will not fit
0.01
5 0.40 g g 0.04
0.36
Station 3
Station 1
Station 5Station 4
0.37
Station 2
0.20 0.190.21 0.39
0.18
c e f g
d
b
a
FIGURE 3.3
Station assignments.
Meridth-c03.indd 74 10/29/2015 3:29:27 PM
753.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
Dept. A Dept. B
Dept. E
Dept. G
Dept. C
Shipping
Dept. D Dept. F Receiving
Product B5
Product A63
Product B5
Product A63
FIGURE 3.4
A generalized job shop
operation.
3.1.3 Job Shop
job shop
grouping
variety transport
variations
Meridth-c03.indd 75 10/29/2015 3:29:29 PM
76 Process Planning
Advantages of the Job Shop
Disadvantages of the Job Shop
Meridth-c03.indd 76 10/29/2015 3:29:31 PM
773.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
in‐process inventories
Layout of the Job Shop
Directly Specified Closeness Preferences
closeness prefer-
ences
a
Meridth-c03.indd 77 10/29/2015 3:29:31 PM
78 Process Planning
b
Cost–Volume–Distance Model
i j
i j i j D
ij
i j
V
ij
i j C
ij
i j
C
ij
V
ij
D
ij
C V D
j i i j
i j
j i
1
A
3 5
E
4
(a)
2
I I
I
I
A 6
4
I I
5 6
I
1
(b)
2
I A
E A
3
FIGURE 3.5
Closeness preferences
layout: (a) initial layout.
(b) final layout.
*Note:
A = Absolutely
necessary
E = Especially
important
I = Important
O = Ordinary
closeness OK
U = Unimportant
X = Undesirable
■ TABLE 3.3 Directly Specified Closeness Preferences*
Department
Department 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 E A U U U
2 U I I U
3 U U A
4 I U
5 I
6
Meridth-c03.indd 78 10/29/2015 3:29:32 PM
793.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
#1
#2
#3
Cell
Cell
Cell
F W
F
F
T
Job
(a)
(b)
Cell
Raw materials
Welding
Turning
FormingMilling
Raw
materials HT
Heat treat
F F F
W
M
M
HT
T
FIGURE 3.6
Conversion of (a) a job
shop layout into (b) a
cellular layout for part
families.
3.1.4 Cellular Production
a
b
group technology
part families
cell
teams
Meridth-c03.indd 79 10/29/2015 3:29:32 PM
80 Process Planning
classification
Advantages of Cellular Production
Unorganized parts
Parts organized by families
Formed partsGeometric partsTurned parts
FIGURE 3.7
Organization of
miscellaneous parts into
families.
Meridth-c03.indd 80 10/29/2015 3:29:32 PM
813.1 Forms of Transformation Systems
virtual cell
logical cell nominal
Meridth-c03.indd 81 10/29/2015 3:29:33 PM
82 Process Planning
Disadvantages of Cellular Production
Cellular Layout
virtual cell
cell
remainder cell
Meridth-c03.indd 82 10/29/2015 3:29:33 PM
833.2 Selection of a Transformation System
pilot cell
hybrid stage
3.1.5 Project Operations
Project operations
staging area
3.2 Selection of a Transformation System
hybrid
Meridth-c03.indd 83 10/29/2015 3:29:33 PM
84 Process Planning
3.2.1 Considerations of Volume and Variety
make‐to‐stock
make‐to‐order
every
engineer‐to‐order
assemble‐to‐order
many
assembled
and already available
a product–process matrix
Meridth-c03.indd 84 10/29/2015 3:29:33 PM
853.2 Selection of a Transformation System
Note the overlap in the different forms
b
Project
Job
Cell
Flow
None
None
One Few Many
Batch size
0 50 100
% make-to-order
(a) (b)
90%
make-to-stock
None
Low
Much
High
0 50 100
O
u
tp
u
t
v
a
ri
e
ty
None
Low
Much
High
O
u
tp
u
t
v
a
ri
e
ty
Continuous
process
∞
FIGURE 3.8
Effect of output
characteristics on
transformation
systems—the product–
process matrix.
Meridth-c03.indd 85 10/29/2015 3:29:33 PM
86 Process Planning
3.2.2 Product and Process Life Cycle
product
process
applying
Meridth-c03.indd 86 10/29/2015 3:29:33 PM
873.2 Selection of a Transformation System
3.2.3 Service Processes
service blueprint
Product innovations
Process innovations
Time
N
o
.
o
f
in
n
o
v
a
ti
o
n
s
FIGURE 3.9
Product–process
innovations over time.
Meridth-c03.indd 87 10/29/2015 3:29:34 PM
88 Process Planning
Service Process Design
Meridth-c03.indd 88 10/29/2015 3:29:34 PM
893.2 Selection of a Transformation System
Servicescapes
servicescape
ambient conditions
spatial layout and functionality
Customer contact intensity
Low High
Capital-Intensive
Service factory
Airlines
Package/postal services
Hotels
Recreation
Service shop
Hospitals
Cruise line
Repair services
Expensive restaurants
Labor-Intensive
Mass service
Sporting events
School classes
Retailing
Fast food
Professional service
Legal services
Physicians
Interior decorators
Tax preparers FIGURE 3.10
The service matrix.
Meridth-c03.indd 89 10/29/2015 3:29:34 PM
90 Process Planning
signs symbols and artifacts
Service Gaps
Perceived
received
service
Perceived
delivered
service
Expected
service
Experience
and knowledge
Ideal
service
Need
Gap 8
Gap 1
Gap 2
Gap 3
Gap 10
Gap 7
Gap 9
Gap 6
Gap 5
Gap 4
Selected
service
Perceived
service
need
Designed
service
Communicated
and advertised
service
Actual
delivered
service
FIGURE 3.11
Potential locations for
service gaps.
Meridth-c03.indd 90 10/29/2015 3:29:34 PM
913.2 Selection of a Transformation System
Service Guarantees and Fail‐Safing
the customer’s service expectations
1.
2.
3.
4.
Meridth-c03.indd 91 10/29/2015 3:29:34 PM
92 Process Planning
fail‐
safing
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
b
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. a
11. a
Meridth-c03.indd 92 10/29/2015 3:29:35 PM
93Apply your Understanding
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
■ PARADISE STATE UNIVERSITY
Department Faculty Number of students per year
Accounting 8 100
Finance 6 40
General
management
7 70
MIS 10 150
Marketing 6 50
OM 10 30
Questions
Number of courses taken in respective departments
Concentration Accounting Finance Management MIS Marketing OM
Accounting 4 1 1 1 1 2
Finance 1 4 1 1 1 2
General management 1 1 4 1 1 2
MIS 1 1 1 4 1 2
Marketing 1 1 1 1 4 2
OM 1 1 1 1 1 5
Meridth-c03.indd 93 10/29/2015 3:29:35 PM
94 Process Planning
■ X‐OPOLY, INC.
®
Station
number
Task(s) performed at station
Time to
perform task
1 Get box bottom and place
plastic money tray in box
bottom. Take two dice from bin
and place in box bottom in
area not taken up by tray.
10 seconds
2 Count out 35 plastic houses and
place in box bottom.
35 seconds
3 Count out 15 plastic hotels and
place in box bottom.
15 seconds
4 Take one game piece from
each of eight bins and place
them in box bottom.
15 seconds
5 Take one property card from
each of 28 bins. Place rubber
band around property cards
and place cards in box bottom.
40 seconds
6 Take one orange card from
each of 15 bins. Place rubber
band around cards and place
cards in box bottom.
20 seconds
7 Take one yellow card from each
of 15 bins. Take orange cards
from box and remove rubber
band. Place yellow cards on
top of orange cards. Place
rubber band around yellow
and orange cards and place
cards in box bottom.
35 seconds
8 Count out 25 $500 bills and
attach to cardboard strip with
rubber band. Place money in
box bottom.
30 seconds
Meridth-c03.indd 94 10/29/2015 3:29:36 PM
95Exercises
Station
number
Task(s) performed at station
Time to
perform task
9 Count out 25 $100 bills. Take $500
bills from box bottom and
remove rubber band. Place $100
bills on top of $500 bills. Attach
rubber band around money
and place in box bottom.
40 seconds
10 Count out 25 $50 bills. Take $500
and $100 bills from box bottom
and remove rubber band.
Place $50 bills on top. Attach
rubber band around money
and place in box bottom.
40 seconds
11 Count out 50 $20 bills. Take
money in box and remove
rubber band. Place $20 bills on
top. Attach rubber band
around money and place in
box bottom.
55 seconds
12 Count out 40 $10 bills. Take
money in box and remove
rubber band. Place $10 bills on
top. Attach rubber band
around money and place in
box bottom.
45 seconds
13 Count out 40 $5 bills. Take
money in box and remove
rubber band. Place $5 bills on
top. Attach rubber band around
money and place in box
bottom.
45 seconds
14 Count out 40 $1 bills. Take money
in box and remove rubber band.
Place $1 bills on top. Attach
rubber band around money and
place in box bottom.
45 seconds
15 Take money and remove rubber
band. Shrink‐wrap money and
place back in box bottom.
20 seconds
16 Take houses, hotels, dice, and
game pieces and place in bag.
Seal bag and place bag in box.
30 seconds
Station
number
Task(s) performed at station
Time to
perform task
17 Place two cardboard game
board halves in fixture so that
they are separated by ¼ in.
Peel backing off of printed
game board decal. Align decal
over board halves and lower it
down. Remove board from
fixture and flip it over. Attach
solid blue backing decal. Flip
game board over again and
fold blue backing over front of
game board, creating a ¼ in.
border. Fold game board in
half and place in box covering
money tray, game pieces, and
cards.
90 seconds
18 Place game instructions in box.
Place box top on box bottom.
Shrink‐wrap entire box.
30 seconds
19 Place completed box in carton. 10 seconds
Questions
E X E R C I S E S
3.1
1 2 3
4 5 6
Department 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 I A X O U
2 X E I O
3 O X I
4 I E
5 A
6
Meridth-c03.indd 95 10/29/2015 3:29:36 PM
96 Process Planning
3.2
Task Time required (min) Predecessor tasks
a 4 —
b 5 a
c 3 a
d 2 b
e 1 b,c
f 5 d,e
3.3
(a)
(b)
(c)
3.4
3.5
3.6
Task Time (min) Preceding tasks
1 0.4 None
2 0.3 1
3 1.1 1
4 0.2 3
5 0.5 2
6 0.3 3
7 0.6 5
8 0.6 4, 6, 7
(a)
(b)
3.7
Department
Number of users
Distance by location
1 2 3
1 25 0 3 5
2 30 5 4 3
3 10 2 0 1
4 5 3 2 0
5 14 6 2 3
c
2
h
4
d
8
f
2
i
9
b
4
a
7
e
3
g
2
Meridth-c03.indd 96 10/29/2015 3:29:37 PM
97
chapter
4
Capacity and Scheduling
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
Now that we have selected a process, we need to determine the detailed specifi-
cations of that process. An important early element in our specifications concerns
the capacity we will require. Having adequate capacity and effectively utilizing
it are critical for dependability, speed, and maximizing revenues, while having
excess capacity will impair costs—all strategic competitive factors. We begin the
chapter with an overview of various measures of capacity and then discuss issues
related to long‐term capacity planning strategies.
Following this, we consider issues related to efficiently using the available
capacity through effective schedule management. The chapter then concludes
with a discussion of short‐term capacity planning, including process‐flow mapping,
capacity planning for services, and how humans’ ability to learn affects capacity
planning.
Introduction
Meridth-c04.indd 97 10/30/2015 4:23:49 PM
98 Capacity and Scheduling
Inc
capacity
Meridth-c04.indd 98 10/30/2015 4:23:49 PM
994.1 Long‐Term Capacity Planning
4.1 Long‐Term Capacity Planning
Capacity
rate
time dimension
available seat miles
■ TABLE 4.1 Examples of Measures of Capacity
Production system
Measure of capacity in terms of
outputs produced
Measure of capacity in terms of
inputs processed
Airline Available seat miles per year Reservation calls handled
per day
Hospital Babies delivered per month Patients admitted per week
Supermarket Customers checked out
per hour
Cartons unloaded per hour
Post office Packages delivered per day Letters sorted per hour
University Graduates per year Students admitted per year
Automobile assembly plant Autos assembled per year Deliveries of parts per day
Meridth-c04.indd 99 10/30/2015 4:23:49 PM
100 Capacity and Scheduling
average
bottleneck
yield
Yield management revenue management
where
supply chain manage-
ment
4.1.1 Capacity Planning Strategies
Meridth-c04.indd 100 10/30/2015 4:23:49 PM
1014.1 Long‐Term Capacity Planning
Facility Size Planning
economies of scale
Economies of Scale and Scope
economies of scale
economies of scope
Capacity
U
n
it
o
u
tp
u
t
co
st
Very
large facilities
Large
facilities
Medium-
size
facility
Small-size
facility
A
B
C
E
D
F
G
Economies of scale Diseconomies of scale FIGURE 4.1
Envelope of lowest unit
output costs with
facility size.
Meridth-c04.indd 101 10/30/2015 4:23:49 PM
102 Capacity and Scheduling
Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.
100
200
300
400
500
600
Total
Air conditioners
Furnaces
S
a
le
s
(u
n
it
s)
FIGURE 4.2
Anticyclic product sales.
Capacity Planning for Multiple Outputs
anticyclic
seasonality
seasonality
life cycles
Meridth-c04.indd 102 10/30/2015 4:23:50 PM
1034.1 Long‐Term Capacity Planning
Timing of Capacity Increments
a
b
c d
Total current output
Additional required output between years 4 and 7
Capacity requirements for six different outputs
Now 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
R
e
q
u
ir
e
d
c
a
p
a
ci
ty
Year
FIGURE 4.3
Forecast of required
organizational capacity
from multiple life cycles.
Meridth-c04.indd 103 10/30/2015 4:23:50 PM
104 Capacity and Scheduling
Time
Small capacity increments
U
n
it
s
Capacity
Demand
(a)
Time
Large capacity increments
U
n
it
s
(b)
Time
Preceding demand
U
n
it
s
(c)
Time
Following demand
U
n
it
s
(d)
S
in
g
le
i
n
cr
e
m
e
n
t
Capacity
additions
FIGURE 4.4
Methods of adding fixed
capacity.
4.2 Effectively Utilizing Capacity Through Schedule
Management
acquisition
timing
Gantt chart
a
Meridth-c04.indd 104 10/30/2015 4:23:50 PM
1054.2 Effectively Utilizing Capacity Through Schedule Management
■ TABLE 4.2 Sequential Operations Required for Two Jobs
Job Operations resource needed Time required (hours)
1 A 10
C 10
A 30
B 20
C 5
2 B 15
A 10
C 10
A 10
B 10
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88
C
B
A
R
e
so
u
rc
e
Time (hour)
(a)
Job 1
Job 2
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88
C
B
A
R
e
so
u
rc
e
Time (hour)
(b)
FIGURE 4.5
Gantt charts for capacity
planning and
scheduling.
Meridth-c04.indd 105 10/30/2015 4:23:50 PM
106 Capacity and Scheduling
infinite loading
finite loading
b
a
operation splitting preemption
4.2.1 Scheduling Services
Approaches to Resource Scheduling
Meridth-c04.indd 106 10/30/2015 4:23:51 PM
1074.2 Effectively Utilizing Capacity Through Schedule Management
floating
demand
off‐peak pricing
Hospitals
patient
classification system
Urban Alarm Services
smooth
duty tours
Meridth-c04.indd 107 10/30/2015 4:23:51 PM
108 Capacity and Scheduling
+ + =
Educational Services
1.
2.
3.
Yield/Revenue Management and Overbooking
Yield management revenue management
1. Fixed capacity:
2. Perishable capacity:
Meridth-c04.indd 108 10/30/2015 4:23:51 PM
1094.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
3. Segmentable market:
4. Capacity sold in advance:
5. Uncertain demand:
6. Low marginal sales cost and high marginal capacity addition cost:
overbooking
4.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
4.3.1 Process‐Flow Analysis
Meridth-c04.indd 109 10/30/2015 4:23:51 PM
110 Capacity and Scheduling
utilization
=
=
Bottlenecks in a Sequential Process
efficiency versus capacity output rate Efficiency
sequential
bottlenecks
sequentially
throughput time
Raw
materials
Machine D
Finisher
2 minutes
Machine C
Stringer
10 minutes
Machine B
Handler
3 minutes
Machine A
Framer
4 minutes
FIGURE 4.6
King Sports production
process.
Meridth-c04.indd 110 10/30/2015 4:23:51 PM
1114.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
slowest
each
cycle time of the
process
double
Meridth-c04.indd 111 10/30/2015 4:23:52 PM
112 Capacity and Scheduling
■ TABLE 4.3 Return to King for Using More Machines
Machine times (min)
Number of
machines
Type of
next
machine A B C D
Cycle time
(min)
Total
hourly
output
Efficiency
(%)
4 — 4 3 10 2 10 6 47.5
5 C 4 3 5 2 5 12 76.0
6 C 4 3 3.33 2 4 15 79.2
7 A 2 3 3.33 2 3.33 18 81.4
8 C 2 3 2.5 2 3 20 79.2
9 B 2 1.5 2.5 2 2.5 24 84.4
10 C 2 1.5 2 2 2 30 95.0
11 D 2 1.5 2 1 2 30 86.0
12 A 1.33 1.5 2 1 2 30 79.2
13 C 1.33 1.5 1.67 1 1.67 36 87.5
14 C 1.33 1.5 1.43 1 1.5 40 90.5
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
00
1020
2040
3060
4080
50100
Output
Efficiency
H
o
u
rl
y
o
u
tp
u
t
(u
n
it
s)
E
ffi
ci
e
n
cy
(
%
)
Number of machines
FIGURE 4.7
Efficiency and output
change as machines are
added.
Mapping Product and Service Flows
Meridth-c04.indd 112 10/30/2015 4:23:52 PM
1134.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
Fabrication
25 lb/component
25 components/hour
Assembly
20 units/hour
Storage
3500-lb cap.
Storage
500 cap.
375
lb/hour
1.5
tons/
day
240
parts/
day
30
parts/hour
15
units/
hour
80
units/
day
40
units/
day
120
units/
day
Raw material
2-ton capacity
1 load/day
Parts
300 cap.
Packaging A
5 minutes
process time
Packaging B
10-minutes
process time
15
components/hour
FIGURE 4.8
Process flow for
manufactured unit.
× =
Meridth-c04.indd 113 10/30/2015 4:23:53 PM
114 Capacity and Scheduling
anticipate
line of visibility
CC 5
20
10
Yes
No
CC 10
F
F
Ask
specifications:
# of copies
type of paper
reduce/enlarge
Inform
customer
of cost
Customer
decision
Take
originals
to
back room
Original
and copies
to
customer
Take
payment
Ring up
on register
Change,
receipt, and
thank
customer
Leaves
Line of visibility
Originals
and
instructions
to operator
45 60
Copier
electricity
Set up
copier
Run
copies
Legend:
Seconds
Failure
point?
Activity
CC 5 CC 20
F
CC 30
Greet
customer
CC 10
F
CC 25
CC 10
F
F F
Customer
contact?
Paper,
toner
F
F
FIGURE 4.9
Process‐flow map for a
service.
Meridth-c04.indd 114 10/30/2015 4:23:53 PM
1154.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
swim lanes
Value Stream Maps
within
4.3.2 Short‐Term Capacity Alternatives
Meridth-c04.indd 115 10/30/2015 4:23:53 PM
116 Capacity and Scheduling
■ TABLE 4.4 Techniques for Increasing Short‐Run Capacity
I. Increase resources
1. Use overtime
2. Add shifts
3. Employ part‐time workers
4. Use floating workers
5. Lease workers and facilities
6. Subcontract
II. Improve resource use
7. Overlap or stagger shifts
8. Cross‐train the workers
9. Create adjustable resources
10. Share resources
11. Schedule appointments/reservations
12. Inventory output (if feasible) ahead of demand
13. Backlog or queue demand
III. Modify the output
14. Standardize the output
15. Offer complementary services
16. Have the recipient do part of the work
17. Transform service operations into inventoriable product operations
18. Cut back on quality
IV. Modify the demand
19. Partition the demand
20. Change the price
21. Change the promotion
22. Initiate a yield/revenue management system
V. Do not meet demand
23. Do not supply all the demand
Meridth-c04.indd 116 10/30/2015 4:23:53 PM
1174.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
decrease
4.3.3 Capacity Planning for Services
a
daily b
yearly
inputs
Meridth-c04.indd 117 10/30/2015 4:23:53 PM
118 Capacity and Scheduling
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 3 5 7 9 11
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Building fire alarms
Total fire alarms
Noon
(a)
Distribution of fire alarms by month
Dade County, Florida
Distribution of fire alarms by 2-hour periods
Dade County, Florida
A.M. P.M.
%
o
f
d
a
il
y
t
o
ta
l
Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sep. Oct. Nov. Dec.
5
10
15
20 Building fire alarms
Outdoor fire alarms
Total fire alarms
(b)
Dry season Wet season
%
o
f
a
n
n
u
a
l
to
ta
l
FIGURE 4.10
Fire alarm histories.
(a) Hourly. (b) Monthly.
Meridth-c04.indd 118 10/30/2015 4:23:54 PM
1194.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
4.3.4 The Learning Curve
learning curve
improvement curves production
progress functions performance curves experience curves
Each time the output doubles, the labor hours decrease to a fixed percentage of their previous
value
negative exponential function
M
N M
N
N N N
N
r .
M = mNr
M = N
m =
N =
r =
=
Meridth-c04.indd 119 10/30/2015 4:23:54 PM
120 Capacity and Scheduling
groups systems
Creating Learning Curve Tables
N
N
total
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22
0.00
20.00
40.00
60.00
80.00
100.00
Labor-hours
Number of units produced, N
L
a
b
o
r-
h
o
u
rs
,
M
(
1
0
0
0
)
FIGURE 4.11
80 percent learning
curve for airplane
production.
Meridth-c04.indd 120 10/30/2015 4:23:54 PM
1214.3 Short‐Term Capacity Planning
80%
100,000
Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Unit Time
100,000.0
80,000.0
70,210.4
64,000.0
59,563.7
56,168.3
53,449.0
51,200.0
49,295.0
47,651.0
46,211.1
44,934.6
43,791.6
42,759.2
41,819.9
40,960.0
40,168.3
39,436.0
38,755.5
38,120.8
37,526.7
36,968.9
36,443.6
35,947.7
35,478.4
Cumulative
Time
100,000.0
180,000.0
250,210.4
314,210.4
373,774.1
429,942.4
483,391.4
534,591.4
583,886.3
631,537.3
677,748.4
722,683.1
766,474.6
809,233.8
851,053.7
892,013.7
932,182.0
971,618.0
1,010,373.5
1,048,494.3
1,086,021.0
1,122,989.9
1,159,433.5
1,195,381.2
1,230,859.6
Improvement Rate:
Hours for 1st Unit (m): Cell B5: =$C$2*A5^(LN($C$1)/LN(2))
Copy to cells B6:B29
Cell C6: =C5+B6
Copy to cells C7:C29
A B C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
FIGURE 4.12
Example learning
curve table.
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 10 20 30 30
6
40
7
50
8
60
9
70
10
80
L
a
b
o
r-
h
o
u
rs
/u
n
it
No
production
Unit
Time (days)
Theoretical curve
Actual curve
Learning plateau
Breakthrough
“Forgetting” curve
Relearning curve
Natural variability
exceeds improvement
Continuation of
original curve
FIGURE 4.13
Typical pattern of
learning and forgetting.
Meridth-c04.indd 121 10/30/2015 4:23:55 PM
122 Capacity and Scheduling
4.3.5 Queuing and the Psychology of Waiting
queues
input requirements
1. Cost of waiting
2. Cost of service facilities
1. Unoccupied time feels longer than occupied time
Optimal capacity
Cost of waiting
Cost of facility
Total cost
Minimal cost
C
o
st
Service facility capacity
FIGURE 4.14
The relevant queuing
costs.
Meridth-c04.indd 122 10/30/2015 4:23:55 PM
123Expand Your Understanding
2. Preservice waiting feels longer than in‐service waiting
3. Anxiety makes waiting seem longer
4. Uncertain waiting is longer than known, finite waiting
5. Unexplained waiting is longer than explained waiting
6. Unfair waiting is longer than fair waiting
7. Solo waiting is longer than group waiting
8. The more valuable the service, the longer it is worth waiting for
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Meridth-c04.indd 123 10/30/2015 4:23:55 PM
124 Capacity and Scheduling
■ EXIT MANUFACTURING COMPANY
Average sales price ($/door) Area sales (in units)
$90 40,000
$103 38,000
$115 31,000
$135 22,000
Questions
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
■ BANGALORE TRAINING SERVICES
Questions
Meridth-c04.indd 124 10/30/2015 4:23:55 PM
125Exercises
E X E R C I S E S
4.1
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
4.2
(a)
(b)
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Report Introduction Analysis Conclusion
1 1.5 6 2
2 — (Lost data) —
3 1 3 0.8
4.8
4.9
Meridth-c04.indd 125 10/30/2015 4:23:55 PM
126
chapter
5
Supply Chain Planning
and Analytics
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
Now that the organization has a transformation process selected to execute its
strategy and has decided on the required capacity and scheduling of that trans-
formation system, the next step is to design the supply chain to feed that system
and get the service/product to its clients or customers. There are two parts to this
endeavor, planning the chain itself and then deciding how to manage the chain.
We discuss the planning of the chain first here in Chapter 5 and then supply man-
agement in the next chapter.
Supply chain planning has become much more sophisticated in the last decade
and a large part of it is concerned with attempting to predict what the actual
demand is going to be for the service or product. The good news is that we now
have a much greater amount of data (“big data”) to help us make this forecast, but
the bad news is that we need substantially more powerful tools to analyze all this
data. To help make these forecasts, organizations are turning to analytics to dissect
and analyze the data to turn it into information for managerial use. The chapter starts
with some elementary statistical forecasting techniques to illustrate how masses of
data can be analyzed to determine some limited range of future demand. Having
these forecasts in hand, the next step is for management to decide how much of
this forecast the organization wants to and can supply, called the service level ,
and then bring sales and operations together to create an aggregate plan for
producing that amount.
Introduction
Meridth-c05.indd 126 10/30/2015 1:21:52 PM
127 Introduction
Meridth-c05.indd 127 10/30/2015 1:21:52 PM
128 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
5.1 Importance of Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
Meridth-c05.indd 128 10/30/2015 1:21:52 PM
1295.2 Demand Planning
service level
5.2 Demand Planning
Meridth-c05.indd 129 10/30/2015 1:21:52 PM
130 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
5.2.1 Forecasting Methods
Life-cycle
analysis
Surveys
Delphi
method
Qualitative
Expert
opinion
Consumer
panels
Test
marketing
Historical
analogy
Causal
Quantitative
Informal
(intuitive)
Formal
Forecasting
methods
Time series
analysis
Multiple
regression
Econometric
Box–Jenkins
Exponential
smoothing
Moving
average
Simple
regression
FIGURE 5.1
A classification of
forecasting methods.
Meridth-c05.indd 130 10/30/2015 1:21:53 PM
1315.2 Demand Planning
qualitative
his-
torical analogy
Delphi
life‐cycle analysis
time series analysis
causal
5.2.2 Factors Influencing the Choice of Forecasting Method
Meridth-c05.indd 131 10/30/2015 1:21:53 PM
132 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
inaccurate
5.2.3 Time Series Analysis
Components of a Time Series
1. T
2. S
3. C
4. R
trend
Seasonal fluctuations
Meridth-c05.indd 132 10/30/2015 1:21:53 PM
1335.2 Demand Planning
FIGURE 5.2
Three common trend
patterns. (a) Constant
change, (b) constant
percent change, and
(c) standard “S” curve.
1
E F G H I J K
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
(a)
(b)
(c)
40
20
0
0
800
600
400
200
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
V
a
ri
a
b
le
o
f
in
te
re
st
V
a
ri
a
b
le
o
f
in
te
re
st
1 2 3 4 5
Time
V
a
ri
a
b
le
o
f
in
te
re
st
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5
Time
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5
Time
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Meridth-c05.indd 133 10/30/2015 1:21:53 PM
134 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
cycle cyclical component
Random
1.
2.
3.
Moving Averages
moving average
n n
= n
n
n
n
n
n
F n At
i t n
t
i
t =
Ft 1 =
A
i
= i
n =
Meridth-c05.indd 134 10/30/2015 1:21:53 PM
1355.2 Demand Planning
weighted moving average
A B C D FE G H I J K L M N
Quarter
iPad sales
(millions)
4-Period
moving
average
Q3 2010 3.27
Q4 2010 4.19
Q1 2011 7.33
Q2 2011 4.69
Q3 2011 9.25 4.87
Q4 2011 11.12 6.37
Q1 2012 15.43 8.10
Q2 2012 11.80 10.12
Q3 2012 17.04 11.90
Q4 2012 14.04 13.85
Q1 2013 22.86 14.58
Q2 2013 19.28 16.44
Q3 2013 14.62 18.31
Q4 2013 14.08 17.70
Q1 2014 26.04 17.71
Q2 2014 16.35 18.51
Q3 2014 13.28 17.77
Q4 2014 12.32 17.44
Q1 2015 21.42 17.00
Forecast 15.84
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Q
3
2
0
1
0
Q
4
2
0
1
0
Q
1
2
0
1
1
Q
2
2
0
1
1
Q
3
2
0
1
1
Q
4
2
0
1
1
Q
1
2
0
1
2
Q
2
2
0
1
2
Q
3
2
0
1
2
Q
4
2
0
1
2
Q
1
2
0
1
3
Q
2
2
0
1
3
Q
3
2
0
1
3
Q
4
2
0
1
3
Q
1
2
0
1
4
Q
2
2
0
1
4
Q
3
2
0
1
4
Q
4
2
0
1
4
Q
1
2
0
1
5
F
o
re
c
a
s
t
U
n
it
s
al
e
s
Date
iPad sales (millions of units)
iPad sales (millions)
4-period moving average
Cell C6: =Average(B2:B5) and copy to cells C7:C21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
FIGURE 5.3
Four‐period moving
average of iPad sales.
Statista, www.statista.
com, February 8, 2015.
Meridth-c05.indd 135 10/30/2015 1:21:54 PM
136 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
Exponential Smoothing
= α + − α
F A Ft t t
α F
t
t A
t
t
t
F A Ft t t
F A A Ft t t t
A
t− − α α α
n
n n
A
t
α
A
t−
α − α A
t−
α − α − − α
Meridth-c05.indd 136 10/30/2015 1:21:55 PM
1375.2 Demand Planning
F A F
A F F
F A F
F F
t t t
t t t
t t t
t tAt
A Ft t t
t
α
t t t
t
t t
α
α
α
α
α
α
α
α
n α
α
α
α
F = A
F = A =
F = + =
F = + =
Meridth-c05.indd 137 10/30/2015 1:21:55 PM
138 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
Simple Regression: The Linear Trend Multiplicative Model
Alpha 0.21
Quarter
iPad unit
sales
(millions)
Exponential
smoothing
Q3 2010 3.27 3.27
Q4 2010 4.19 3.27
Q1 2011 7.33 3.45
Q2 2011 4.69 4.23
Q3 2011 9.25 4.32
Q4 2011 11.12 5.31
Q1 2012 15.43 6.47
Q2 2012 11.80 8.26
Q3 2012 17.04 8.97
Q4 2012 14.04 10.58
Q1 2013 22.86 11.27
Q2 2013 19.28 13.59
Q3 2013 14.62 14.73
Q4 2013 14.08 14.71
Q1 2014 26.04 14.58
Q2 2014 16.35 16.87
Q3 2014 13.28 16.77
Q4 2014 12.32 16.07
Q1 2015 21.42 15.32
Forecast 16.54
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Q
3
2
0
1
0
Q
4
2
0
1
0
Q
1
2
0
1
1
Q
2
2
0
1
1
Q
3
2
0
1
1
Q
4
2
0
1
1
Q
1
2
0
1
2
Q
2
2
0
1
2
Q
3
2
0
1
2
Q
4
2
0
1
2
Q
1
2
0
1
3
Q
2
2
0
1
3
Q
3
2
0
1
3
Q
4
2
0
1
3
Q
1
2
0
1
4
Q
2
2
0
1
4
Q
3
2
0
1
4
Q
4
2
0
1
4
Q
1
2
0
1
5
F
o
re
ca
st
U
n
it
s
a
le
s
Date
iPad sales (millions of units)
iPad unit sales
(millions)
Exponential
smoothing
Cell C5: =(B$1*B4)+((1B$1)*C4) and copy to C6:C23
A B C D FE G H I J K L M N
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
FIGURE 5.4
Using exponential
smoothing to forecast
iPad sales. Statista,
www.statista.com,
February 8, 2015.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Quarter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
b
15461.54
Visitors to
web site
35,000
80,000
55,000
100,000
95,000
140,000
115,000
160,000
155,000
200,000
175,000
220,000
215,000
260,000
a
27252.75
B C D E F G H I J K L
300,000
Medfo.com
250,000
200,000
150,000
100,000
50,000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Quarter
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
N
u
m
b
e
r
o
f
v
is
it
o
rs
t
o
w
e
b
s
it
e
FIGURE 5.5
Number of visitors to
Medfo.com.
Meridth-c05.indd 138 10/30/2015 1:21:55 PM
1395.2 Demand Planning
T S
X X
X
S
X
Y
T
X
X
Y
X
X T
X
X
T
A
1
2
3 Quarter Tx
Visitors to
web site
Seasonal
factor
(Y/T)
1 35,000 42714.29
58175.82
73637.36
89098.90
104560.44
120021.98
135483.52
150945.05
166406.59
181868.13
197329.67
212791.21
228252.75
243714.29
0.82
1.38
0.75
1.12
0.91
1.17
0.85
1.06
0.93
1.10
0.89
1.03
0.94
1.07
80,000
55,000
100,000
95,000
140,000
115,000
160,000
155,000
200,000
175,000
220,000
215,000
260,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
B C D
FIGURE 5.6
Calculation of quarterly
seasonal factors.
Meridth-c05.indd 139 10/30/2015 1:21:56 PM
140 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
T
Y
Y 55
Y T Y T
Y
T
Y
T
55
5
T
T
S F
F
F
A B C D E
Year
1
2
3
4
Average
0.82
0.91
0.93
0.94
0.90
1.38
1.17
1.1
1.07
1.18
0.75
0.85
0.89
0.83
1.12
1.06
1.03
1.07
Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 41
2
3
4
5
6
FIGURE 5.7
Calculating seasonal
component (S ) for
quarters 1 through 4.
Meridth-c05.indd 140 10/30/2015 1:21:57 PM
1415.2 Demand Planning
5.2.4 Causal Forecasting with Regression
The Simple Linear Regression Model
multiple regression model
Y X
X Y α β
Y
X residual
α β
Y a bX
a b α
β
y mx b
y x
m x
y y
x =
Meridth-c05.indd 141 10/30/2015 1:21:57 PM
142 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
D E F G H I
25
20
15
10
5
0
20
15
10
5
0
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
D
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
v
a
ri
a
b
le
Independent variable
Independent variable
Independent variable
No relationship
Non linear relationship
Linear relationship
D
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
v
a
ri
a
b
le
D
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
v
a
ri
a
b
le
2 4 6 8 10 12
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
0 5 10 15
FIGURE 5.8
Example relationships
between variables.
a y b
b m
errors
least squares regression
Meridth-c05.indd 142 10/30/2015 1:21:57 PM
1435.2 Demand Planning
e
i
,
Y
X Y X
∑e
i
Y X
array function
a b
=
X Y
X
Y X
e1
e2
e3
e4
FIGURE 5.9
Least squares approach
to fitting line to set of
data.
Meridth-c05.indd 143 10/30/2015 1:21:57 PM
144 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
y
A
1 Lot
number size (ft) price TREND
House
193.7816
b a
-226.688
House
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
145
144
119
136
7
114
97
90
108
200
2,620
2,635
3,019
3,049
3,141
3,141
3,264
3,319
3,403
3,578
$266,500
$266,900
$364,500
$384,900
$389,900
$399,900
$439,000
$405,000
$414,500
$442,000
$281,020
$283,927
$358,339
$364,152
$381,980
$381,980
$405,815
$416,473
$432,751
$466,663
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B C D E F G H I J K
=LINEST(C3:C12,B3:B12)
$500,000
$450,000
$400,000
$350,000
$300,000
$250,000
$200,000
2,500 2,700 2,900
House size (square feet)
3,100 3,300 3,500 3,700
H
o
u
se
p
ri
ce
(
$
)
=TREND(C3:C12,B3:B12)
R2 = 0.9006
FIGURE 5.10
Using Excel’s LINEST
and TREND functions.
70
0
350
300
250
0
120 125 130 135 140 145 150
50
100
150
200
100
200
300
400
90 110 130 150
Independent variable
Independent variable
D
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
v
a
ri
a
b
le
D
e
p
e
n
d
e
n
t
v
a
ri
a
b
le
Outlier on dependent variable dimension
Outlier on independent variable dimension
Regression line with
outlier included
Regression line with
outlier excluded
Outlier
Regression line with
outlier included
Outlier
Regression line with
outlier excluded
FIGURE 5.11
Impact of outliers on
regression line fit to set
of data.
Meridth-c05.indd 144 10/30/2015 1:21:58 PM
1455.2 Demand Planning
y
coefficient
of determination R R
R R
cause
R
correlation coefficient, R
R
− + Y
X Y X
X
Y
R R
R
Y X
Regression Analysis Assumptions
The residuals are normally distributed
The expected value of the residuals is zero, E ei
The residuals are independent of one another
The variance of the residuals is constant
Meridth-c05.indd 145 10/30/2015 1:21:58 PM
146 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
X
Y X Y
X
Using the Regression Model
extrapolation
generalize
R
Meridth-c05.indd 146 10/30/2015 1:21:58 PM
1475.2 Demand Planning
5.2.5 Assessing the Accuracy of Forecasting Models
n
F A
i
n
i i
n
F A
A
i
n
i i
i
n
F A
i
n
i i
F
i
= i
A
i
= i
n =
errors
accuracy
– –
+
Meridth-c05.indd 147 10/30/2015 1:21:59 PM
148 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
self‐adjust
α
− + α
−
+
− + α
5.3 Sales and Operations Planning
Aggregate
Plan
Meridth-c05.indd 148 10/30/2015 1:21:59 PM
1495.3 Sales and Operations Planning
5.3.1 Aggregate Planning Strategies
pure strategies
1. Level production
2. Chase demand
Meridth-c05.indd 149 10/30/2015 1:21:59 PM
150 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
5.3.2 Determining the Service Level: An Example Using the
Newsvendor Problem
incremental marginal)
ordering one more
■ TABLE 5.1 Kacy’s Newspaper Demand
Demand (newspapers) Frequency (days) Relative frequency
28 10 0.10
29 20 0.20
30 35 0.35
31 25 0.25
32 10 0.10
Total 100 1.00
Meridth-c05.indd 150 10/30/2015 1:21:59 PM
1515.3 Sales and Operations Planning
p = at least
− p = not
=
=
p
p
p below which
p p
p
=
=
p
N N.
■ TABLE 5.2 Probability Table for Kacy’s Newspaper Ordering Problem
Order size, N Probability of selling N units
Cumulative probability of selling
more than N units
28 0.10 0.90
29 0.20 0.70
30 0.35 0.35
31 0.25 0.10
32 0.10 0
Meridth-c05.indd 151 10/30/2015 1:22:00 PM
152 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
p = N =
N =
N =
N less p
p
N p
N N
p
p
Expected
demand
N
p
FIGURE 5.12
Determining the order
size when the
distribution of demand
is normally distributed.
■ TABLE 5.3 Revised Probability Table for Kacy’s Newspaper Ordering Problem
Order size, N Probability of selling N units
Cumulative probability of selling
more than N units
28 0.15 0.85
29 0.25 0.60
30 0.20 0.40
31 0.20 0.20
32 0.20 0
Meridth-c05.indd 152 10/30/2015 1:22:00 PM
153Expand Your Understanding
5.3.3 Collaborative Planning, Forecasting, and Replenishment
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Meridth-c05.indd 153 10/30/2015 1:22:01 PM
154 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
■ RUSH AIRLINES
Number of no‐shows Number of flights
0 50
1 60
2 40
3 30
4 20
Questions
■ BARDSTOWN BOX COMPANY
Meridth-c05.indd 154 10/30/2015 1:22:01 PM
155Exercises
Month 20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5
January 12,000 8,000 12,000 15,000 15,000
February 8,000 14,000 8,000 12,000 22,000
March 10,000 18,000 18,000 14,000 18,000
April 18,000 15,000 13,000 18,000 18,000
May 14,000 16,000 14,000 15,000 16,000
June 10,000 18,000 18,000 18,000 20,000
July 16,000 14,000 17,000 20,000 28,000
August 18,000 28,000 20,000 22,000 28,000
September 20,000 22,000 25,000 26,000 20,000
October 27,000 27,000 28,000 28,000 30,000
November 24,000 26,000 18,000 20,000 22,000
December 18,000 10,000 18,000 22,000 28,000
Questions
E X E R C I S E S
5.1
Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Demand 60 52 55 42 57 33 26 42 35 31
5.2
α
α
5.3
5.4
α
α
5.5
Month J F M A M J J A S O
Demand
(000)
0.2 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 8.0 25 45 59 66
(a)
(b)
(c)
Meridth-c05.indd 155 10/30/2015 1:22:02 PM
156 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics
(d)
5.6
Year Winter Spring Summer Fall
20X4 123 133 172 281
20X5 155 189 205 286
20X6 151 186 288 303
20X7 178 225 272 296
5.7
Month 20X4 20X5 20X6
January 12,000 15,000 15,000
February 8,000 12,000 22,000
March 18,000 14,000 18,000
April 13,000 18,000 18,000
May 14,000 15,000 16,000
June 18,000 18,000 20,000
July 17,000 20,000 28,000
August 20,000 22,000 28,000
September 25,000 26,000 20,000
October 28,000 28,000 30,000
November 18,000 20,000 22,000
December 18,000 22,000 28,000
Total 209,000 230,000 265,000
(a)
(b)
(c) α
(d)
5.8
Demand (quarts) Probability
13,000 0.1
15,000 0.5
18,000 0.3
20,000 0.1
5.9
Pizza demand Probability
45 0.15
46 0.15
47 0.25
48 0.20
49 0.15
50 0.10
Meridth-c05.indd 156 10/30/2015 1:22:02 PM
157
chapter
6
Supply Chain Management
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
As the organization designs its processes to achieve its competitive strategy, a
major element is the supply chain for its products and/or services. We now con-
sider the execution, or management, of the supply chain, which often involves
relationships with organizations outside the firm.
Supply chain management fundamentally involves matching supply with de-
mand and as such is strongly related to a firm’s competitiveness. Important supply
chain management topics include designing and restructuring the value chain,
outsourcing, and e‐commerce. Furthermore, competent management of the
supply chain has major impacts on all the strategic sand cone factors described in
Chapter 1 : quality, dependability, speed, and cost.
We first define the concept of supply chains and discuss their strategic impor-
tance. We then describe the many elements involved in their design, such as lo-
gistics, global sourcing, and supplier management. From this, we move to the role
of information technology and provide guidelines for successful supply chain
management. We conclude the chapter with a discussion of closed‐loop supply
chains. Two supplements to the chapter describe a supply chain classroom exer-
cise used by many MBA classes (Supplement A: The Beer Game) and an online
quantitative technique that is popular for some MBA classes (Supplement B: The
Economic Order Quantity Model).
Introduction
• While Apple’s enormous success is most commonly attributed to its ability to design highly
innovative products that are easy to use, the significant contribution its operations makes to its
success gets much less publicity. Nevertheless, experts and analysts that closely follow Apple
readily acknowledge that Apple’s operations excellence is as much an asset to Apple as is its
product innovation and marketing. Indeed, it is Apple’s operational capabilities that allow it to
pull off its massive, high‐volume product launches by managing its inventory efficiently.
It is not widely known, but Apple’s focus on improving its supply chain dates back to
the return of Steve Jobs in 1997. For example, to ensure that there was an adequate supply of
Apple’s new translucent blue iMacs, Apple spent $50 million to acquire all the available holi-
day air transport capacity. Not only did this ensure that Apple could get its products to the
customers but also the move crippled competitors, such as Compaq, that didn’t recognize the
need to ship products by air until it was too late. Based on this example and others like it,
Apple has learned that making investments in its supply chain up front pays for itself in the
long run in the form of greater volume. Greater volumes also yield additional benefits. For
example, when the sales volume of iPods increased in 2001, Apple discovered it could air‐ship
the iPods economically from the Chinese factories directly to its customers’ homes. Not only
does this help Apple reduce its investment in inventory but also it provides an added level of
service for the customer.
Beyond investing financial resources in its supply chain, Apple invests in its human
capital as well. For example, to facilitate the process of translating product prototypes into
Meridth-c06.indd 157 11/5/2015 4:06:59 PM
158 Supply Chain Management
successful new products, Apple’s design engineers live in hotels for months to be close to their
suppliers in order to help them perfect their production processes. For example, when Apple
designed a new MacBook with a case that was made from a single piece of aluminum, Apple’s
design engineers worked with the suppliers to develop the equipment to fabricate the cases.
With a huge cash war chest, Apple planned to almost double its supply chain capital
expenditures in 2011 to $7.1 billion. In part, this investment was used to purchase capacity
from its suppliers to ensure the prices and availability of its products. For example, prior to the
introduction of the iPhone 4 in June 2010, supplier capacity for screens was being used for
iPhones, forcing Apple’s competitor HTC to scramble for sources of phone screens. Likewise,
when Apple launched the iPad 2, it purchased so many of the high‐end drills used to produce
the tablet’s internal casing that the lead time for other companies to get these drills extended
to as long as six months.
Turning the tables, being selected by Apple to be one of its suppliers can be very profit-
able. However, this comes at a price. For example, when a potential supplier is asked to pro-
vide a price quote for a part or assembly that will go into an Apple product, the supplier is
required to submit in great detail how it arrived at the quote, including the specific material
costs, labor costs, and its estimated profit. Furthermore, to guard against supply disruptions,
Apple requires its suppliers to maintain a two‐week supply of inventory within a mile of the
Asian assembly plants.
Carefully orchestrated events announcing new products are eagerly anticipated by
industry analysts and loyal customers. Here, too, Apple’s supply chain management (SCM)
practices play an important role. For example, supplier factories work overtime weeks in
advance of new product launches to build up inventory to meet the often overwhelming
demand for new Macs, iPods, iPhones, and iPads. Furthermore, the success of the new product
debuts centers on the secrecy Apple is able to maintain about the features of its new products.
To ensure that the secrecy of its new products is not breached and to discourage leaks, Apple
places electronic monitors in a subset of the boxes of parts that go into its products so that it
is able to monitor the parts through the production process. Through this monitoring, Apple is
able to track every part handoff from the loading docks through the distribution centers. And
not to leave anything to chance, once the new products are finished, they are shipped in plain
boxes or even disguised boxes, such as tomato boxes.
A final piece of Apple’s supply chain that contributes to its operational excellence is its
retail stores. Apple tracks the sales at its stores hour by hour and, based on these sales, adjusts
its production forecast each day. When a risk of a product shortage is identified, Apple imme-
diately deploys teams, and the added capacity is acquired (Satariano and Burrows 2011).
• Even with the lean inventories that have resulted from the prevalence of just‐in‐time (JIT)
inventory systems, shifts in economic cycles can still wreak havoc for industry‐wide supply
chains. The electronics industry during the global recession of 2008–2009 illustrates this well.
At one end of the electronics, supply chain are the retailers that sell electronic products
to end consumers. With the financial crisis rapidly escalating in the fall of 2008, Minnesota‐
based retailer Best Buy experienced a significant decline in sales. Best Buy orders electronic
products such as DVD players six weeks prior to when they are needed. With the 2008
Thanksgiving shopping season approaching, Best Buy revised its prior forecast and dramati-
cally reduced its orders to its suppliers, such as Japan’s Toshiba and Korea’s Samsung
Electronics in early October 2008. As the financial crisis was uncharted territory, Best Buy’s
merchandising chief had to make his best guess in deciding how to modify the forecast.
Lacking a direct relationship with the final consumers, Best Buy’s suppliers were caught
off guard by its revised forecast and reduced orders. As expected, these suppliers in turn
reduced orders from their suppliers. As an example, Zoran Corp, a designer of specialty chips
used in electronic products, such as televisions (TVs), cameras, cell phones, DVD players, and
Meridth-c06.indd 158 11/5/2015 4:06:59 PM
159 Introduction
digital picture frames, saw its revenue decline in the fourth quarter of 2008 by 42 percent.
Zoran, which only designs chips, relies on companies like Taiwan Semiconductor
Manufacturing Company (TSMC) to produce its chips. Faced with decreased orders for its
chips, Zoran slashed its orders to TSMC. In January and February of 2009, TSMC saw its
revenue decrease by 58 percent compared to the prior year and was only utilizing 35 percent
of its plant capacity.
With decreased demand for its chips, TSMC in turn reduced its orders for chip‐making
equipment by 20 percent. Applied Materials is one company that makes the equipment used
in chip‐making factories. With the downturn in demand for chip‐making equipment, Applied
Materials was forced to lay off 2000 workers and require another 12,000 workers to take an
unpaid leave.
With the downturn in its business, Applied Materials reduced orders to its suppliers. For
example, D&H Manufacturing Company, which makes aluminum parts for chip‐making
equipment, reduced its employment from 600 to 150 workers in 18 months because of the
drop‐off in business. It also found itself sitting on a one‐year supply of inventory versus its
usual three months of inventory.
This example illustrates how the effects and decisions made at one end of the supply
chain are often amplified as they cascade to the other end. And because the players at different
stages in the supply chain are often caught off guard, it is not surprising that they frequently
overreact to the situation. In this particular case, Best Buy was actually having trouble keeping
its shelves stocked in the early part of 2009 despite the decline in demand. In fact, Best Buy
estimated in March 2009 that it could have sold more in the preceding three months had its
suppliers made less drastic reductions to their production plans (Dvorak 2009).
• Milwaukee, Wisconsin, is home to two of the biggest multibillion‐dollar manufacturers of
earth‐moving equipment that sells for up to $180 million: Bucyrus International, Inc. and Joy
Global, Inc. However, they disagree completely on how to locate their production facilities.
Bucyrus makes all their machines in the United States and Europe, where they have developed
highly efficient, low‐cost production processes, and then ships them from there to customers
all over the globe. Moreover, they expect the U.S. dollar and the euro to remain relatively
weak currencies, making manufacturing there affordable. Although they were invited to build
a plant in China in the 1970s, they declined to do so because the Chinese government decided
to make the production of industrial mining machinery “strategically critical,” meaning that
they would be heavily subsidizing their own domestic manufacturers.
• In contrast, Joy prefers to design and engineer in the United States but build their plants close
to emerging markets and in low‐cost developing countries, such as China, where the mining
market is growing and customers and domestic suppliers are plentiful. Joy’s Chinese factory
operating costs are fully 20 percent less than in the United States or Europe, though they admit
to having had some early quality problems. As Bucyrus’s CEO says, “It’s going to be interest-
ing to see how it plays out. One of us is more right than the other” (Matthews 2010).
The concept of SCM has taken on the nature of a crusade in U.S. industry, in part because of the
tremendous benefits that accrue to firms participating in a well‐managed supply chain. The
examples above illustrate this by highlighting the important role SCM plays in an organization’s
competitiveness. In Apple’s case, its supply chain practices ensure a stable supply of its highly
demanded products, which in turn leads to satisfied customers and minimizes potential lost sales.
On the other hand, the Best Buy example illustrates the potential for lost sales and profits when
the supply chain overreacts.
It is also worth noting that, although the benefits of superior SCM are clear for manufactur-
ing and distribution firms, even service organizations benefit from good SCM. This is not only
Meridth-c06.indd 159 11/5/2015 4:06:59 PM
160 Supply Chain Management
because services use supplies and facilitating goods in the delivery of their service (as noted in
Chapter 1) but also because they, too, outsource many of their internal functions, such as infor-
mation technology, accounting, and human resource management, just like manufacturers do.
Thus, the provision of these services becomes part of another supply chain, a chain of services
rather than goods, but nonetheless one requiring the same attention to strategy, purchasing, logis-
tics, and management oversight, just like for goods.
We begin the chapter with some definitions of the supply chain and SCM. As with any new
concept, not everyone envisions SCM in the same way. We then discuss some of the important
strategic advantages that accrue from wise management of the supply chain. From this overview,
we then consider the elements of the supply chain in depth, including purchasing/procurement,
logistics, transportation, global sourcing, and supplier management. An important element of
SCM is the critical role of information technology as a major catalyst in the supply chain move-
ment. Next, we provide some guidelines for successful SCM. We conclude with a discussion of
closed‐loop supply chains.
6.1 Defining SCM
The term supply chain generally refers to all the activities involved in supplying an end user with
a product or service. The perception of each organization that is involved—the ore refiners, the
transporters, the component producers, the manufacturer, the wholesaler, the retailer, and the
customer—being a link in the process makes the analogy of a chain quite appropriate. In
Figure 6.1, we show the position of a typical company (A) in the chain, with its suppliers to the
left of it, all the way “upstream” (as it is often called) to the raw materials, and its customers to
the right, all the way “downstream” to the ultimate consumer. However, company C in the chain
(a downstream “customer” as far as company A is considered) sees the same thing as company
A, with its suppliers (including upstream supplier company A) to its left and its customers to its
right. And as is seen, company B in the middle is the customer of one firm and the supplier to
another firm, as is the situation of almost all the companies in the chain.
Of course, all these companies typically need multiple materials and services to serve their
immediate customer in the chain, so there are really a lot of upstream supplier company links
connected on the left side of each link in the chain (only shown with links for company A, arrows
for all others). And most firms typically sell to more than one customer, so there are also multiple
downstream customer links connected on the right side of each link in the chain (again shown
only for company A). Clearly, managing all these links—that is, suppliers and customers—even
if only those directly connected to your company, is a major task!
Downstream
…. C
ustom
ers
…
. C
us
to
m
er
s
Su
pp
lie
rs
..
..
Suppliers ….
Upstream
…. Supplier Supplier
Company A
supplier
Customer
Company B
supplier
Customer
Company C Customer Customer
Customer ….
ConsumerRaw materials
FIGURE 6.1
The supply chain.
Meridth-c06.indd 160 11/5/2015 4:07:02 PM
1616.1 Defining SCM
Given such a lengthy process, it may behoove companies to store inventories of their out-
puts (if feasible) for immediate delivery. Moreover, it must be remembered that it is not just
goods that are flowing along the chain but also information, funds, paper, people, and other such
items, and they are flowing in both directions along the chain. In addition, the green revolution
encourages recycling, recovery, and reuse of products, so even the used product may be flowing
back up the chain. (We will return to the topic of closed‐loop supply chains later in this chapter.)
In addition, the supply chain also involves other functional areas and activities such as product/
service design, finance, accounting, marketing, human resources, and engineering. Thus, instead
of a chain, we should probably think of the supply process as more of a network, with everyone
communicating with, and passing monies and items between, everyone else.
SCM, then, concerns the process of trying to manage this entire chain from initial receipt
of the ultimate consumer’s order all the way back to the raw material providers and then ulti-
mate delivery back to the consumer. Note that SCM is not restricted to managing only the links
that connect with your company’s position in the chain, but all the links along the chain, so that
savings (or increased value) in any part of the chain can be shared or leveraged by other com-
panies along the chain. For example, Toyota is famous for teaching their suppliers how to
install and operate their famed Toyota Production System (also known as lean manufacturing).
But the teaching doesn’t stop there, since Toyota’s first‐tier suppliers can gain additional
improvements by teaching their suppliers, the second tier, and so on up the supply chain. The
interest in SCM has exploded primarily because of the development of new information tech-
nologies such as intranets, e‐mail, electronic data interchange (EDI), and, of course, the
Internet. These technologies, in conjunction with greater global competition, have fostered an
interest and ability in improving processes along the entire supply chain, resulting in better
performance at reduced cost.
SCM can also be considered to include a number of other managerial thrusts, such as qual-
ity management (Chapters 1 and 7), inventory management (discussed later), enterprise resource
planning (ERP, also discussed later), and lean production (including JIT; Chapter 9). But it is
even more comprehensive than that. For example, it includes marketing aspects in terms of com-
munication with the customer, engineering issues involved in product/service design, financial
aspects in terms of payments and float, purchasing elements such as sole sourcing, and, of course,
technological initiatives such as the omnipresent Internet. To a large extent, this breakthrough in
conceptualizing the potential for improvement in customer value by including all elements of the
value chain is due to the development of advanced information technologies, such as the Internet.
Other definitions of SCM include the following points (Walker and Alber 1999):
• SCM coordinates and integrates all the supply chain activities into a seamless process and
links all of the partners in the chain, including departments within an organization as well as
the external suppliers, carriers, third‐party companies, and information system providers.
• SCM enables manufacturers to actively plan and collaborate across a distributed supply chain
to ensure that all parties are aware of commitments, schedules, and expedites. By actively
collaborating as a virtual corporation, manufacturers and their suppliers can source, produce,
and deliver products with minimal lead time and expense.
• The goal of SCM is to optimally deliver the right product to the right place at the right time
while yielding the greatest possible profit.
The SCM objective of attempting to manage activities that lie outside a manager’s normal
realm of internal responsibility (i.e., managing second‐ or third‐tier suppliers or downstream cus-
tomers) is to reduce the costs of delivering a product or service to a user and improve its value.
Sometimes, a distinction is made between a “value” chain, a “demand” chain, and a narrowly
defined supply chain that simply manages suppliers to obtain the lowest cost. The conceptualization
Meridth-c06.indd 161 11/5/2015 4:07:03 PM
162 Supply Chain Management
of the value chain is that it considers other important aspects of customer value besides cost, such
as timeliness, quality, and functionality. That is, where the supply chain tends to focus on efficiency,
the value chain focuses on effectiveness. These important issues will be discussed in more detail in
the next section.
Also, as many have pointed out (e.g., Lummus and Vokurka 1999), the current conceptual-
ization of the supply chain still has many elements of the old “push” system of production based
on forecasts of demand. (See Section 5.2 on demand planning for more information on this topic.)
The newer “pull” systems, consisting of JIT deliveries, lean manufacturing, and so on, dictate a
different view of the value chain called a demand chain. In this conceptualization, a customer
order pulls the product through the chain on demand, thereby further improving costs and bene-
fits. Of course, acting after the fact rather than anticipating demand will put even further stress on
the ability of the value chain to respond in a timely manner.
Another layer of complexity is often added when managing service supply chains, as the
customers of the service can also serve as suppliers. For example, you supply the yard to your
landscaping service. Likewise, your lifestyle and budget are important inputs to the architect you
hire to design your dream house. Because the customers of a service may also be a supplier, it is
likely that these customer–suppliers need to be handled differently than suppliers that are not
customers. For example, suppliers that are not customers need to be selected, but customer–sup-
pliers need to be attracted.
The dual nature of the customer–supplier role further compounds the complexity of the
service supply chain. With a more manufacturing‐oriented supply chain, the goods tend to flow
in one direction downstream. In service supply chains and the dual customer–supplier role, ser-
vices flow in both directions, with the customer both upstream and downstream from the service
provider. Finally, service providers may require additional flexibility to deal with the added vari-
ation that is associated with customer‐supplied inputs compared to other situations where the
inputs are supplied by a more limited set of suppliers.
Attempts to reduce the costs of supply (previously considered as “purchasing” or “procure-
ment”) have been ongoing for decades, of course. However, management has also realized that
there are costs other than strict materials and production costs in the supply chain that can be
reduced with better information sharing and tighter management, and these costs are at the fore-
front of attention in SCM. For example, costs of multiple shipments, costs of inappropriate func-
tionality, costs of low quality, and costs of late delivery are all costs that can be eliminated with
better information sharing and managerial oversight.
6.2 Supply Chain Strategy
The concept of the value chain was mentioned earlier, and it should be emphasized that an organi-
zation’s supply chain strategy needs to be tailored to meet the needs of its customers, which isn’t
always the lowest cost. In fashion goods, for example, fast response to short fashion seasons is
much more important than lowest cost. And in high technology, new functionality (or reliability
or security) may be more important than cost. Thus, the strategy for building an organization’s
supply chain should focus on maximizing the value to its customers, where value can be consid-
ered to be benefits received for the price paid or benefits/cost.
In situations where the goods are basic commodities with standard benefits (food, home
supplies, and standard clothing), then cost reduction will be the focus. But in fashion goods,
timeliness should be the focus of the supply chain, meaning quick deliveries, stockpiling of long
lead time items, and so on. In new notebook computers, the focus might be on identifying firms
that offer new functionality; in telecom, the focus might be on reliability; and in music, the focus
might be on flexibility to meet quickly changing tastes or talent. Thus, the supply chain needs to
Meridth-c06.indd 162 11/5/2015 4:07:03 PM
1636.2 Supply Chain Strategy
be carefully matched to the firm’s market and needs. Where the firm operates in multiple markets
or appeals to multiple needs within the same market, it may find it necessary to operate different
supply chains for each focus. Although most of the remaining discussion in this chapter is directed
toward the traditional supply chain strategy of minimizing costs, which is always an important
consideration and probably the major focus of most supply chains today, the other possible stra-
tegic purposes should be kept in mind also.
It is also important to point out that many organizations choose to outsource portions of the
SCM function to the so‐called third‐party logistics (3PL) companies. These 3PL companies
provide a range of services, including handling the distribution of the organization’s products,
receiving incoming materials, managing the organization’s warehouses, managing the purchasing
function, and handling product returns. The balance of activities kept in‐house and those out-
sourced vary by company and should be driven by the organization’s strategy and competencies.
There a number of reasons why organizations choose to outsource portions of or the entire
supply chain function to a 3PL. First, assuming that SCM is not the organization’s core compe-
tency, shifting these activities to a 3PL allows the organization to focus more directly on its core
competencies. Second, outsourcing these activities reduces the capital investments in the infra-
structure needed to support these activities. In effect, the use of a 3PL converts a significant por-
tion of what was a fixed cost into a variable cost. Finally, by utilizing a 3PL, the organization
gains access to the best practices and technologies that it might not be able to afford or develop
if the function was kept in‐house. 3PLs are able to make the investment to develop these best
practices and technologies because these development costs are spread across multiple organiza-
tions served by the 3PL.
However, there are also disadvantages in using 3PLs, such as the longer response time and
greater risk of disruption in the supply chain when customers are wanting faster, more reliable
response. An added danger of all outsourcing is the natural tendency for management to meas-
ure only the internal response time of the firm when the customer is measuring the total time
from order to obtaining the good or service. In any outsourcing decision, the added time and
risk of delay from outside suppliers need to be considered. This response time is also affected
by the production process adopted, since make‐to‐stock (MTS) will have the fastest response
because the order can simply be pulled off the shelf and sent to the customer, assemble‐to‐order
(ATO) is a bit slower, make‐to‐order (MTO) is slower still, and engineer‐to‐order (ETO) is the
slowest of all.
6.2.1 Strategic Need for SCM
To understand the potential for obtaining strategic advantage from better management of the sup-
ply chain, whether it is kept in‐house or outsourced to a 3PL, it is useful to realize that total sup-
ply chain costs represent more than half, and in some cases three‐quarters, of the total operating
expenses for most organizations (Quinn 1997). To understand these values, bear in mind that the
broader concept of the supply chain includes the supply, storage, and movement of materials,
information, personnel, equipment, and finished goods within the organization and between it
and its environment. The objective of SCM is to integrate the entire process of satisfying the
customer’s needs all along the supply chain. This includes procuring different groups of raw
materials from multiple sources (often through purchasing or recycling or recovery), transporting
them to various processing and assembly facilities, and distributing them through appropriate
distributors or retailers to the final consumer. Within this process are a great variety of activities
such as packaging, schedule coordination, credit establishment, inventory management, ware-
housing, maintenance, purchasing, order processing, and supplier selection and management.
As organizations have continued to adopt more efficient production techniques such as lean
manufacturing, total quality management, and inventory reduction techniques to reduce costs and
Meridth-c06.indd 163 11/5/2015 4:07:03 PM
164 Supply Chain Management
improve the quality, functionality, and speed of delivery of their products and services to custom-
ers, the costs and delays of procuring the requisite inputs and distributing the resulting goods and
services are taking a greater and greater fraction of the total cost and time. For example, the cost
of just physical distribution itself is now up to 30 percent of sales in the food industry. To achieve
quick response with quality goods that accurately satisfy the need at the lowest possible cost
requires taking a broad, long‐range, integrated perspective of the entire customer fulfillment
process instead of focusing on the little segments and pieces of the chain.
For instance, if each segment of the supply chain is acting in a way to optimize its own
value, there will be discontinuities at the interfaces and unnecessary costs will result. If an inte-
grated view is taken instead, there may be opportunities in the supply chain where additional
expense or time in one segment can save tremendous expense or time in another segment. If a
broad enough view is then taken, the savings in the one segment could be shared with the losing
segment, so everyone would be further ahead. This broad, integrated view of the supply chain is
more feasible these days due to the recent capabilities of advanced information technology and
computer processing (e.g., bar codes, computerized manufacturing, the Internet, ERP systems,
and electronic funds transfer).
Other factors are also driving the need to better manage the supply chain:
• Increasing global competition. In addition to increased pressure on cost from global competi-
tors who have lower labor rates, they also frequently offer better quality, functionality, and
customer responsiveness. This is pressuring firms to look globally for better or cheaper sup-
pliers, resulting in increased outsourcing and offshoring.
• Outsourcing. Since more organizations are outsourcing and thereby increasing the need for
transportation, this has pushed up transportation costs.
• E‐commerce. The advent of e‐commerce and other electronic technologies has made it easier
and cheaper to outsource, either domestically or even globally.
• Shorter life cycles. Customers are demanding greater variety, faster response, higher quality,
and cheaper prices. One result of these demands is shorter product life cycles, which means
constantly changing supply chains and using more chains over the same period of time.
• Greater supply chain complexity. The increased complexity of supply chains requires much
more attention and better management of these chains. For example, in early 2001, when the
bottom fell out of the telecom market, Solectron Corp., the world’s biggest electronics con-
tract manufacturer, was holding $4.7 billion of inventory from its 4000 suppliers to fill firm
orders from Cisco, Ericsson, Lucent, and other telecoms. But when the telecoms canceled
their orders, no one knew who owned all that inventory (Engardio 2001)!
• Increasing levels of concern for the environment. Addressing environmental concerns impacts
virtually all aspects of SCM from the sourcing of parts to the distribution of the product and
even to the disposal of the product once it reaches the end of its useful life. Green sourcing
seeks to identify suppliers in such a way that the organization’s carbon footprint and overall
impact on the environment are minimized. Reducing the waste associated with products is
another way organizations minimize the negative impact they have on the environment. Along
these lines, and as is discussed in Chapter 1, organizations can deploy a strategy referred to as
the three R’s: reduce, reuse, and recycle.
Implementing SCM has brought significant documented benefits to many companies.
Ferguson (2000) reports, for example, that compared to their competitors, such firms enjoy a
45 percent supply chain cost advantage, an order cycle time and inventory days of supply
50 percent lower, and finished product delivery 17 percent faster. Lummus and Vokurka (1998)
Meridth-c06.indd 164 11/5/2015 4:07:03 PM
1656.2 Supply Chain Strategy
note that these firms operate with 36 percent lower logistics costs, which, by itself, translates into
a 4 percent increase in net profit margins. One firm reported a 25 to 50 percent reduction in fin-
ished product inventories, a 10 percent reduction in cost, and a 10 to 25 percent improvement in
production process reliability.
Of course, these are primarily the cost aspects of the SCM process, which are more easily
measured than the qualitative benefits, such as more loyal customers and a larger market share.
There are also significant effects on other important aspects of an organization, such as its ability
to learn new procedures and ways of operating, the morale of its employees, and the ability to
change direction quickly.
6.2.2 Measures of Supply Chain Performance
Better supply chain performance will show up in a number of standard financial measures of a
company’s health. Lower inventories, normally considered an asset, will be reflected in less need
for working capital (WC) and a higher return on assets (ROA) ratio (since assets are reduced).
And the lower cost to carry these inventories (as well as other reduced costs in the supply chain)
will be seen in a reduced cost of goods sold (CGS) and thus a higher contribution margin, return
on sales (ROS), and operating income. Moreover, if the supply chain is also better managed to
provide other benefits to the consumer, as mentioned earlier, the effect should be seen in higher
total revenue, since the consumer will be willing to pay more. Lower costs, if used to reduce
prices, will also result in higher volumes, which will further increase revenues.
One performance measure that provides managers with a broad view of the supply
chain is the cash conversion cycle (CCC). This financial performance metric helps a company
assess how well it is managing its capital. In effect, the CCC is the amount of time the organi-
zation’s cash is tied up in WC before being returned by customers as they pay for delivered
products or services. The key inputs needed to calculate the CCC are inventory (I), accounts
receivable (AR), and accounts payable (AP). These inputs are readily available from the
organization’s financial statements. Before calculating the CCC, the inputs are standardized
into days as follows:
I
inventory
annual cost of goods sold
AR
accounts receiv
365
aable
annual net sales
AP
accounts payable
annual cost of
365
goods sold
365
These standardized inputs are used to calculate the CCC as follows:
CCC AR API
A positive CCC represents the number of days the organization’s capital is tied up waiting
for the customer to pay for the products or services. A negative CCC represents the number of
days the organization is able to receive cash from its sales before it pays its suppliers. Thus, the
smaller the CCC, including negative numbers, the better the organization is performing.
Dell has reduced their supply time so much that they actually receive payment from the
customer before (known as float, another financial term) they have to pay their suppliers for the
parts that make up the customer’s product! In 1998, Dell’s CCC was 29 days. By 2005, it had
improved to 230 days, and by 2009, it was 244 days (Dignan 2002; Magretta 1998).
Meridth-c06.indd 165 11/5/2015 4:07:07 PM
166 Supply Chain Management
Beyond these standard financial measures, however, we can also look at some more
operations‐oriented measures that we typically use to see how well operations is performing,
such as defect rates, lead times, inventory turns, productivity ratios, and so on. Since one of the
major cost savings in SCM is the cost of inventories, it is worthwhile to examine some perfor-
mance measures related to inventory reduction. One such measure to track is the percent of the
firm’s assets represented by inventory. First, we calculate the aggregate inventory value (at cost)
on average for the year (AAIV):
AAIV raw materials work in process finished goods- –
% /Assets in inventories AAIV total assets
Another inventory measure is the inventory turnover (or “turns,” as it is sometimes called):
Inventory turnover ( turns ) annual CGS AAIV“ ” /
Note that the inventory turnover is based on the same items that make up total annual
revenues but is based on their cost instead of their price. Turnover essentially represents
how often the average inventory is used up to obtain the total sales for the year. Like ROA, the
more the inventory and assets can be reduced and still maintain the same sales, the better!
Inverting the equation for turns gives us the same information, but through a measure of the
proportion of the year’s sales we are holding in inventory. This is usually expressed in daily (or
weekly) periods:
Days of supply AAIV daily CGS/
In some firms that have achieved supply chain excellence, they measure their supply in
hours instead of days. Dell Computer is one of these firms (Dignan 2002; Magretta 1998) due to
the outstanding job they have done on fine honing their supply chains.
6.3 Supply Chain Design
As shown in Figure 6.2, the supply chain consists of the network of organizations that supply
inputs to the business unit, the business unit itself, and the customer network. Note that the sup-
plier network can include both internal suppliers (i.e., other operating divisions of the same
organization) and external suppliers (i.e., operating divisions of separate organizations). Also,
note how design activities cut across the supplier network and the business unit and how distri-
bution activities cut across the business unit and the customer network. This broader view of the
entire process of serving customer needs provides numerous benefits. For example, it focuses
management attention on the entire process that creates value for the customer, not the individ-
ual activities. When viewed in this way, information is more freely shared up and down the sup-
ply chain, keeping all parties informed of one another’s needs. Furthermore, activities can be
performed at the point in the supply chain where they make the most sense. To illustrate, instead
of providing Johnson Controls with detailed specifications for car seats, car manufacturers pro-
vide broad specifications and rely on Johnson Controls’ expertise to design and manufacture
their car seats.
In this section, we will look at each of the major logistical elements of the supply chain to
better understand how they operate and interact to deliver value to the final customer: the “bull-
whip” effect, transportation, and location. Outsourcing, purchasing, supplier management, and
the role of information technology are discussed later in the chapter.
Meridth-c06.indd 166 11/5/2015 4:07:16 PM
1676.3 Supply Chain Design
6.3.1 Logistics
Logistics can be defined as planning and controlling the efficient, effective flows of goods,
services, and information from one point to another. As such, it consists of inventories, distribu-
tion networks, storage and warehousing, transportation, information processing, and even
production—a rather all‐enveloping term.
In these days of intense worldwide competition, international production in supply chains,
and global distribution, logistics is taking on tremendous importance. Labor cost is dropping as
a proportion of total output cost, as are manufacturing costs in general, but the costs of acquisi-
tion and distribution have remained about the same and now account, as noted previously, for up
to 30 percent of sales.
Generally speaking, when organizations design their supply chains, they tend to focus on
one of two overarching goals: maximizing efficiency and minimizing the cost of the supply chain
versus maximizing the flexibility and responsiveness of the supply chains. A logical question is:
Are there guidelines that can help an organization determine whether its supply chain focus
should be on efficiency or responsiveness? The good news is that there are indeed guidelines for
this and, as you might suspect, the emphasis on efficiency versus responsiveness depends largely
on the demand pattern of the outputs.
More specifically, Professor Marshall Fisher of the Wharton School distinguishes two fun-
damentally different types of outputs that he refers to as functional and innovative products.
Functional products tend to be staples that we routinely purchase. As such, functional products
tend to be more mature products with predictable demand patterns, long life cycles, and relatively
low contribution margins. Examples of functional products include frozen vegetables, batteries,
paper towels, soft drinks, and printer paper. At the other extreme, innovative products represent
products that are continuously being improved and enhanced with new styles, features, capabili-
ties, and so on. Because they are continuously updated, innovative products have unpredictable
demand, short life cycles, and relatively high contribution margins as well as being offered in
Transformation system
Raw
materials Finished
goods
Components
WIP
Customer
distribution
center
Customer
distribution
center
RetailersFirst tierSecond tier
Supplier network
R
RS
S
S
S
S
S
R
R
E
n
d
c
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
s
DistributeDesign
Information
R
Business unit Customer network
FIGURE 6.2
Simplified supply chain.
Meridth-c06.indd 167 11/5/2015 4:07:18 PM
168 Supply Chain Management
many varieties and options. Examples of innovative products include smart phones, tablet com-
puters, tennis rackets, and designer blue jeans.
Using this classification, Professor Fisher suggests that focusing on supply chain efficiency
is appropriate for functional outputs, while focusing on responsiveness is appropriate for innova-
tive products. In fact, when seeking to identify the root cause of supply chain problems, quite
often you will find that the problems are the result of the supply chain not being properly aligned
with the demand pattern of the product. Most often, this occurs when an organization seeks to
offer innovative products but is focusing on the efficiency of the supply chain. In these cases, the
organizations would be well served to either consider marketing their products as functional
products or placing greater emphasis on improving the responsiveness of their supply chain as
opposed to optimizing its efficiency.
The Bullwhip Effect
While all products have an underlying demand pattern, the way the supply chain is managed can
distort our perception of what the true underlying pattern of demand is. We now have a better
understanding of one logistical effect that distorts the demand pattern known as the bullwhip
effect, named after the action of a whip where each segment further down the whip goes faster
than that above it. Unfortunately, this same effect occurs in a supply chain, but in reverse order,
and has been well documented. More specifically, in supply chains, the bullwhip effect results
when the variability of demand increases from the customer stage upstream to the factory stage.
This is often the result of different parties in the supply chain being overly reactive in their order-
ing practices, as in the Best Buy example at the beginning of the chapter. For example, this hap-
pens when a small percentage increase in a retailer’s orders results in the wholesaler increasing
its orders by an amount greater than that of the retailer—a safety stock—just to be covered in
case demand is increasing. Then, the distribution center sees this greater demand from its whole-
salers and increases its orders by some safety percentage, also to be safe. The end result is that
the factory sees a huge jump in demand. As it orders more equipment, labor, and materials to
satisfy this big increase, too much is fed into the pipeline, and the retailer cuts back, with the
wholesaler and distribution center likewise cutting back even more. The factory then sees a tre-
mendous drop in demand and reverses the cycle, cutting excessively into production and initiat-
ing another round of excessive demand. This boom–bust cycle is particularly prevalent in some
industries, such as commercial building. Obviously, both overproduction and underproduction
are expensive and drive up supply chain costs. The Beer Game discussed in the supplement to this
chapter is a staple of MBA programs and is used to provide students with firsthand experience
with the bullwhip effect.
The bullwhip effect can occur whenever any one of the three conditions is extreme enough
to cause the boom–bust cycle. The first condition is simply long lead times between the stages of
the supply chain, so that changes in demand requirements are slowly moving up and down the
chain, thereby allowing excessive changes to occur in the other stages of the chain. The second
condition is large lot sizes with infrequent orders, resulting again in lags in information. And the
third condition is the slow transmission of information occurring by handoffs from one link of the
chain to the next.
The ways to eliminate the bullwhip effect are to reverse these three conditions. Reducing lead
times through JIT programs, for example, will result in immediate deliveries of the ordered
amounts, so safety stocks are unnecessary. Reducing lot sizes means smaller, more frequent deliv-
eries, which again eliminates the need for large safety stocks. And, finally, the sharing of informa-
tion from the retailer throughout the supply chain gives the factory, as well as the other supply chain
partners, accurate information, so appropriate amounts of items are produced and delivered.
In addition to these three conditions, there are a number of business practices that also
contribute to the bullwhip effect. One business practice is the tendency for customers to have a
Meridth-c06.indd 168 11/5/2015 4:07:18 PM
1696.3 Supply Chain Design
preference for placing all their orders either at the beginning or the end of the week (or month)
rather than spacing orders out evenly. This leads to a situation where incoming orders will be
bunched up around the beginning and end of the week (or month), thereby increasing the varia-
bility of the supplier’s daily demand beyond the variability of the customers’ daily demand.
Furthermore, this problem tends to be amplified as the orders cascade upstream.
Another business practice that contributes to the bullwhip effect is the use of standard batch
sizes. For example, if a particular product is packaged in cases of 24 units, then replenishment
orders for this product will be done in multiples of 24. This practice further bunches up orders
and again results in the supplier’s daily demand being larger than that of the customers placing
the orders.
Trade promotions are yet another practice that contributes to the bullwhip effect. Trade
promotions are short‐term discounts suppliers offer their customers. These discounts provide
customers with an incentive to order more product than they need, called forward buying. Because
customers will choose to place their orders when the trade promotion is offered and even delay
orders in anticipation of a trade promotion, these trade promotions create another order‐bunching
problem.
A final practice that contributes to the bullwhip effect is shortage gaming. This practice
occurs in situations where a product is in short supply. Anticipating that the supplier will allocate
its inventory to its customers, some suppliers inflate their orders, fearing that they will be shipped
less than they ordered. Attempting to game the system in this manner exacerbates the shortage
problem, as some customers end up with less than they can sell because they did not inflate their
orders, while others end up with more than they can sell. In some cases, the suppliers themselves
further compound this problem by allowing their customers to return unsold inventory.
There are several actions suppliers can take to mitigate these practices. For example, suppli-
ers can ask their customers to share information more frequently about actual demand. Likewise,
suppliers can coordinate with their customers to eliminate the batching of orders. Alternatively,
suppliers can encourage their customers to make greater use of technology such as the Web and
EDI to place smaller but more frequent orders. Furthermore, suppliers can eliminate the practice
of offering trade promotions. Finally, suppliers can enhance the value proposition they provide
their customers while at the same time helping smooth out incoming orders by taking over the
management of their customers’ inventory, referred to as “vendor‐managed” inventory.
Location
Another key supply chain design decision is determining the location of the facilities relative to
suppliers and potential customers. In general, the decision about location is divided into three
stages: regional (including international), community, and site. Sources of information for these
stages are chambers of commerce, realtors, utilities, banks, suppliers, transportation companies,
savings and loan associations, government agencies, and management consultants who specialize
in relocation. For some pure service organizations (e.g., physicians), only the site selection stage
may be relevant because they are already focused on a specific region and community. Before
discussing these stages in detail, however, we first highlight the relationship between the location
decision and the development of core capabilities.
Developing Capabilities and the Location Decision In examining the rationale offered by
organizations regarding their decisions to relocate existing facilities or open new ones, it often
appears that these decisions are being driven primarily by short‐term considerations such as
differentials in wage rates and fluctuations in exchange rates. In addition to having the appearance
of being more band‐aid solutions than addressing how to improve long‐term competitiveness,
these decisions are often dominated by operational factors such as wage rates and transportation
Meridth-c06.indd 169 11/5/2015 4:07:18 PM
170 Supply Chain Management
costs. The problem with such static and one‐dimensional analyses is that conditions change. For
example, if one competitor chooses a location based on low wage rates, there is very little to
prevent its competitors from locating in the same region. Furthermore, the benefit of low wages
is likely to be short lived, as the demand for labor will increase when more organizations locate
in the region.
An alternative approach for the location decision is to consider the impact these decisions
have on the development of key organizational capabilities. In Chapter 1, we defined core capa-
bilities as the organizational practices and business processes that distinguish an organization
from its competition. Clearly, the way various organizational units are located relative to one
another can have a significant impact on interactions between these units, which in turn impacts
the development of core capabilities.
In order to leverage the location decision to enhance the development of long‐term capa-
bilities, Bartmess and Cerny (1993) suggest the following six‐step process:
1. Identify the sources of value the company will deliver to its customers. In effect, this trans-
lates into identifying the order winners discussed in Chapter 1.
2. Once the order winners have been defined, identify the key organizational capabilities
needed in order to have a competitive advantage.
3. Based on the capabilities identified, assess the implications for the location of organiza-
tional units. For example, if the company determines that a rapid product development capa-
bility is needed, then it follows that design needs to be in close contact with manufacturing
and leading‐edge customers. Alternatively, if operational flexibility is needed, then it fol-
lows that manufacturing needs to be in close proximity to design, marketing, and manage-
ment information systems.
4. Identify potential locations.
5. Evaluate the sites in terms of their impact on the development of capabilities, as well as on
financial and operational criteria.
6. Develop a strategy for building an appropriate network of locations.
Having highlighted the relationship between the choice of a location and the development
of capabilities, we next turn our attention to the actual stages that location decisions typically
progress through.
Stage 1: Regional–International
In the regional–international stage, an organization focuses on the part of the world (e.g., North
America, Europe, and Pacific Rim) or perhaps the region of a country (e.g., Southwest, Midwest,
Northeast) in which it wants to locate its new facility. For example, when Mercedes‐Benz needed
a new facility to produce its new multipurpose vehicle (MPV), it initially decided that its new
facility should be located in North America and subsequently further narrowed the region to
sites in the Southeastern United States. There are four major considerations in selecting a
national or overseas region for a facility: proximity, labor supply, availability of inputs, and
environment.
To minimize transportation costs and provide acceptable service to customers, the facility
should be located in a region in close proximity to customers and suppliers. Although methods of
finding the location with the minimum transportation costs will be presented later in this chapter,
a common rule of thumb in the United States is that the facility should be within 200 miles of
major industrial and commercial customers and suppliers. Beyond this range, transportation
costs begin to rise quickly.
Meridth-c06.indd 170 11/5/2015 4:07:19 PM
1716.3 Supply Chain Design
The region should have the proper supply of labor available and in the correct proportions
of required skills. One important reason for the past expansion of American firms abroad, par-
ticularly to Japan in the 1980s, was the availability of labor there at wage rates much lower than
rates at home. Currently, this disparity has been eliminated because of Japan’s increased wages.
However, the real consideration should not be wage rates but rather the productivity of domestic
labor relative to productivity abroad. This comparison would thus involve considering level of
skills, use of equipment, wage rates, and even work ethics (which differ even between regions
within the United States) to determine the most favorable labor supply in terms of output per dol-
lar of wages and capital investment. The organization of the labor pool should also be given
consideration—that is, whether all the skills are unionized or whether there is an open shop.
Some states have passed right‐to‐work laws that forbid any requirement that all employees join a
union in order to work in an organization. Often, these laws result in significantly lower wage
rates in these states.
The region selected for location of the facility should have the necessary inputs available.
For example, supplies that are difficult, expensive, or time consuming to ship and those that are
necessary to the organization (i.e., no reasonable substitutes exist) should be readily available.
The proper type (rail, water, highway, and air) and supply of transportation; sufficient quantities
of basic resources such as water, electricity, gas, coal, and oil; and appropriate communication
facilities should also be available. Obviously, many American industries are located abroad in
order to use raw materials (oil, copper, etc.) available there.
The regional environment should be conducive to the work of the organization. Not only
should the weather be appropriate, but the political, legal, and social climate should also be
favorable. The following matters should be considered:
1. Regional taxes
2. Regional regulations on operations (pollution, hiring, etc.)
3. Barriers to imports or exports
4. Political stability (nationalization policies, kidnappings)
5. Cultural and economic peculiarities (e.g., restrictions on working women)
These factors are especially critical in locating in a foreign country, particularly an under-
developed country. Firms locating in such regions should not be surprised to find large differ-
ences in the way things are done. For example, in some countries, governmental decisions tend
to move slowly, with extreme centralization of authority. Very little planning seems to occur.
Events appear to occur by “God’s will” or by default. The pace of work is unhurried, and at times,
discipline, especially among managers, seems totally absent. Corruption and payoffs often seem
to be normal ways of doing business, and accounting systems are highly suspect. Living conditions
for the workers, especially in urbanized areas, are depressing. Transportation and communication
systems (roads, ports, phone service) can be incomplete and notoriously unreliable. Attempting
to achieve something under such conditions can, understandably, be very discouraging. When
locating in such countries, a firm should allow for such difficulties and unexpected problems. In
such an environment, Murphy’s law thrives.
With the escalating use of outsourcing, and especially offshoring, the roles of location and
capacity in the competitive elements of a firm’s strategy take on increased importance. By sub-
contracting production to another firm, an organization can often save substantially on labor costs
(especially when offshoring) and at the same time reduce its own asset base tremendously,
thereby increasing both its profit margins and ROAs. Contract manufacturers such as Flextronics,
Selectron, and Jabil Circuit are quick to point out these advantages and others, such as leaving the
organization free to concentrate on its strengths, such as design, brand building, marketing, and
Meridth-c06.indd 171 11/5/2015 4:07:19 PM
172 Supply Chain Management
strategy. There are, however, also disadvantages in both outsourcing and offshoring. One is the
loss of control of the product. Another is a probable reduction in speed of response to customers.
A third, which is especially sensitive in communities and is increasingly publicized by the media,
is the loss of domestic jobs when the company outsources its work. And outsourcing production
is always a dangerous action for two reasons: (1) Engineering and then design typically must
follow production overseas, meaning the additional loss of these capabilities within the organiza-
tion. (2) There is the increased potential that the firm is simply training a powerful competitor
(especially if engineering and design have also been outsourced), thereby “hollowing itself out.”
In the 1980s, many firms in the TV and VCR industries outsourced all their production overseas,
simply slapping on their own logo to sell their product domestically. Then, the foreign producers
started introducing their own brands, and all the formerly domestic producers went out of busi-
ness, losing the entire industry to foreign competition.
Stage 2: Community
After the region of a new facility has been selected, candidate communities within the region are
identified for further analysis. Many of the considerations made at the regional–international
stage should also be considered at this next stage. For example, the availability of acceptable
sites, attitudes of the local government, regulations, zoning, taxes, labor supply, the size and
characteristics of the market, and the weather would again be considered. In addition, the avail-
ability of local financing, monetary inducements (such as tax incentives) for establishing opera-
tions there, and the community’s attitude toward the organization itself would be additional
factors of interest to the organization.
Last, the preferences of the organization’s staff should play a role in selecting a community.
These would probably be influenced by the amenities available in the community, such as homes,
religious congregations, shopping centers, schools and universities, medical care, fire and police
protection, and entertainment, as well as local tax rates and other costs. Upper‐level educational
institutions may also be of interest to the organization in terms of opportunity for relevant research
and development (R&D). For example, it was no coincidence that major IBM plants were located
in Lexington, Kentucky; in Denver, Colorado; and in Austin, Texas, all of which are also sites of
major state universities.
The standard “breakeven” or “cost–volume–profit” model can be helpful for this stage of
the location decision, except that there is no revenue line and there are multiple costs lines, each
representing a different community’s costs. We assume that the problem is to choose from among
a set of predetermined communities, on the basis of a range of fixed and variable costs. Although
the relevant factors for comparison between the communities may be known (e.g., labor costs,
taxes, and utility charges), their values may be uncertain, particularly if they are a function of the
output rate of the facility being located. The various alternatives for location are then compared
by graphing total operating costs for each alternative at different levels of demand, as in Figure 6.3.
This is accomplished by dividing the total operating cost into two components—fixed costs
that do not vary with the demand for the output (e.g., land, buildings, equipment, property taxes,
and insurance) and variable costs such as labor, materials, and transportation—and plotting them
on the axes of a graph. At the demand point E (the intersection of the two lines), the costs for the
two alternatives are the same; for demand levels in excess of E, community 2 is best, and for
levels less than E, community 1 is best. Thus, if the range of uncertainty concerning the output
volume is entirely above point E, the manager need not be concerned about which community to
choose—community 2 is best. Similar reasoning holds for any uncertainty existing entirely below
point E—community 1 is best.
If the range of uncertainty is closely restricted to point E, then either community may be
selected because the costs will be approximately the same in either case. However, if the range of
uncertainty is broad and varies considerably from point E in both directions, then the breakeven
Meridth-c06.indd 172 11/5/2015 4:07:19 PM
1736.3 Supply Chain Design
chart will indicate to the manager the extra costs that will be incurred by choosing the wrong
community. Before selecting either community, the manager should probably attempt to gather
more information in order to reduce the range of uncertainty in demand.
Stage 3: Site
After a list of candidate communities is developed, specific sites within them are identified. The
site—the actual location of the facility—should be appropriate to the nature of the operation.
Matters to consider include size; adjoining land; zoning; community attitudes; drainage; soil; the
availability of water, sewers, and utilities; waste disposal; transportation; the size of the local
market; and the costs of development. The development of industrial parks in some communities
has alleviated many of the difficulties involved in choosing a site, since the developer automati-
cally takes care of most of these matters. Before any final decision is made, a cash‐flow analysis
is conducted for each of the candidate sites; this includes the cost of labor, land, taxes, utilities,
and transportation.
A model that can help with the site selection is the weighted score model. This approach
can combine cost measures, profit measures, other quantitative measures, and qualitative meas-
ures to help analyze multiple locations (as well as any other multicriteria decision). Deciding on
a location, whether for products or services, is complicated by the existence of multiple criteria
such as executives’ preferences, maximization of facility use, and customers’ attitudes. These
and other criteria may be very difficult to quantify or even to measure qualitatively; if they are
important to the decision, however, they must be included in the location analysis.
Locations can be compared in a number of ways. The most common is probably just mana-
gerial intuition: Which location best satisfies the important criteria? The weighted score model is
a simple formalization of this intuitive process that is useful as a rough screening tool for locating
a single facility. In this model, a weight is assigned to each factor (criterion), depending on its
importance to the manager. The most important factors receive proportionately higher weights.
Then, a score is assigned to each of the alternative locations on each factor, again with higher
scores representing better results. The product of the weights and the scores then gives a set of
E
Output demand volume
Fixed costs
community 2
Community 2
Community 1
T
o
ta
l
a
n
n
u
a
l
o
p
e
ra
ti
o
n
c
o
st
Fixed costs
community 1
Variable costs
community 1
FIGURE 6.3
Breakeven location
model.
Meridth-c06.indd 173 11/5/2015 4:07:21 PM
174 Supply Chain Management
weighted scores, which are added up for each location. The location with the highest weighted
score is considered best. In quantitative terms,
Total weighted score
i
i iW S
where
i
W i
S
i
i
index for factors
weight of factor
score of the loccation being evaluated on factor i
Quebec City, Canada, provides a good example of almost exactly this process (Price and
Turcotte 1986). The Red Cross Blood Donor Clinic and Transfusion Center of Quebec City was
located in a confined spot in the downtown area and wanted to expand in another location. The
center’s main activities affecting the choice of a new location were receiving donors, delivering
blood and blood products throughout the community and the province of Quebec, and holding
blood donor clinics across the same region.
Accordingly, the following criteria for a site were identified:
• Highway access for both clinics and blood deliveries
• Ability to attract more donors as a result of improved accessibility and visibility
• Convenience to both public and private transportation
• Ease of travel for employees
• Internal floor space
• Lot size
• Acceptability of the site to management and governmental authorities involved in the decision
The analysis of the problem was very complicated, owing to conflicting requirements and
the unavailability of data. Nevertheless, five sites were finally identified and evaluated on the
basis of four final criteria. The five sites were then ranked on each of these criteria, and a scoring
model was constructed to help management determine the best location. The weights were to be
determined by management, and they could be modified to determine if changing them would
have any effect on the best location. The final scores and rankings, with equal weights across the
four criteria, are shown in Table 6.1.
Locating Pure Services
Although all the material presented so far applies equally to services and product firms, some
aspects of locating service organizations are worth noting. First, service location decisions are
usually based on how the location will help increase the organization’s service revenues, with
■ TABLE 6.1 Comparison of Quebec City’s Site Factors
Site Road access Bus access Proximity Availability Rank
1 0.4 0.0 0.4 0.7 1
2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.7 2
3 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.0 4
4 0.0 0.4 0.1 0.0 5
5 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.7 3
Meridth-c06.indd 174 11/5/2015 4:07:26 PM
1756.4 Sourcing Strategies and Outsourcing
particular attention paid to avoiding poor locations, which can be fatal to some services. Since
the majority of services are highly dependent on physical interaction with the customer, the most
important factor in service location is being close to and easily accessible by customers. And if
the service relocates, it does not want to move too far from its original location. The second
major factor is usually access to qualified labor at a reasonable cost. Then come various other
factors such as rent, infrastructure, business climate, competition, and so on. There are some
exceptions, such as competitive clustering (auto dealers, motels) and saturation marketing
(Walgreens, Starbucks).
There are various approaches to analyzing service locations, depending on some distinc-
tions such as whether the issue is locating a single facility or multiple facilities. Another distinc-
tion involves the recipient coming to the facility, as in retailing, as opposed to the facility going
to the recipient, as with “alarm” services.
6.4 Sourcing Strategies and Outsourcing
As was noted in Chapter 1, one trend in business is the emphasis organizations are placing on the
sourcing of their products. In the past, sourcing decisions were frequently viewed as primarily
tactical in nature with the overarching goal of obtaining the lowest possible unit cost. Often, the
strategy used to obtain the lowest cost was to play one supplier against another. Now, we see
organizations increasingly discussing strategic sourcing and thinking more holistically in terms
of the total cost of ownership, not just the unit cost.
Outsourcing is the process of contracting with external suppliers for goods and services
that were formerly provided internally and offers an important benefit for SCM. Global sourcing
is an important aspect of supply chain outsourcing strategy, and we see it occurring more and
more. In the news, we read and hear about the meetings of the World Trade Organization (WTO),
the latest accords of the G7 major trading nations, the dangers of North American Free Trade
Agreement (NAFTA), the job losses due to overseas outsourcing (furniture manufacturers clos-
ing U.S. plants and sourcing from Asia, call centers being relocated to India), and so on. When
asked on the Lou Dobbs show for the reasons all this outsourcing is occurring now, the economist
Paul Craig Roberts responded that two primary factors were responsible: (1) the fall of commu-
nism and the economic insulation it had maintained and (2) the advent of telecommunications
and computer technology, which physically allow work that previously had to be done locally or
regionally to now be conducted overseas.
The classic example of global outsourcing has been Nike, where the shoes are designed in
the United States, but all the production is done overseas. The strategic appeal of this lean model
of business to other manufacturing and consumer firms is multiple. First, overseas production
offers the promise of much cheaper labor costs, clearly a strategic benefit. But equally attractive
to many firms that are outsourcing, whether globally or domestically, is the ability to dump a
large portion of their capital‐intensive production assets and staff, thus giving a big boost to their
balance sheets, especially their ROAs. In addition, not being burdened with fixed, unchangeable
capital production assets allows firms to be more flexible and responsive to their customers’
changing needs.
There is a danger to outsourcing, however, particularly overseas outsourcing, and that is the
possibility of being hollowed out, as noted in Chapter 1. To summarize, this is the situation where
the supplier has been trained to produce, and even sometimes design, the customer’s product so
well that it can simply sell the product under its own brand and compete successfully against its
former customer. In many cases, the customer has gone so long without designing or producing
its own product—simply slapping its logo on the foreign‐produced item—that it has lost the
knowledge and skills to even compete in the market. This happened in the 1980s when American
Meridth-c06.indd 175 11/5/2015 4:07:26 PM
176 Supply Chain Management
manufacturers trained foreign firms in how to produce TV sets and other electronic goods—and
lost those entire industries. Clearly, decisions about outsourcing at this level are strategic ones for
the organization, involving great potential benefits but also great risks, and should be deliberated
thoroughly.
A more recent phenomenon is the trend toward outsourcing the entire production process
to third‐party contract manufacturers. In this case, the firms often conclude that their core com-
petency is not in manufacturing per se but rather in system innovation or design. In the electron-
ics industry, this is becoming a major element of SCM strategy for firms like Cisco, Apple,
IBM, and many others. Cisco, for example, hardly makes any products itself. The big players in
this growing industry are Jabil Circuit, Flextronics, and SCI Systems. In fact, in the electronics
sector, contract manufacturing was growing faster than the rate of growth of electronics itself in
the late 1990s. In spite of the provision of products, these contract manufacturers consider
themselves manufacturing service providers, and, indeed, this is a substantial service they offer
their customers. However, in addition to the major impacts outsourcing involves for operations,
it also has major impacts on other functional areas of the organization, such as marketing,
finance, R&D, and human resource management. Moreover, to use this approach successfully
requires that the firm maintain a strong, perhaps even core, competence in outsourcing. Many
failures have resulted when firms jumped into outsourcing but didn’t have the skills to manage
it properly.
Outsourcing in general is a strategic element of SCM these days, not just for production
materials but for a wide range of services as well. For example, organizations are coming to real-
ize that many of the activities they perform internally, such as accounting, human resources,
R&D, and even product design and information systems, are not part of their core competencies
and can be performed more efficiently and effectively by third‐party providers, often at a fraction
of the cost of in‐house workers. There is thus a growing movement toward increasing the span of
SCM to include the acquisition of these services.
Recently, beginning in the early 2000s, there has been a trend toward reshoring or moving
the production of products that had been offshored back to the United States. In making the deci-
sion to reshore the production of products, organizations consider a number of factors such as
taxes, regulations, wages, oil prices, transportation, and fluctuations in the values of currencies.
A survey conducted at MIT in 2012 found that of the 105 firms participating in the survey,
39 percent were considering reshoring some of their products produced overseas (Hagerty, 2012,
2013). As one example, in 2012, Whirlpool made the decision to reshore the production of its
hand mixers after offshoring them to China six years earlier. And in 2013, Whirlpool moved the
production of some of its washing machines to a plant in Ohio from a plant in Mexico. As another
example, Apple began producing some of its high‐end desktop computers in Austin, Texas, in
2013. The nonprofit organization The Reshoring Initiative estimates that between 2010 and 2013,
80,000 manufacturing jobs have been created in the United States as a result of reshoring. It
appears that heavy, bulky, and/or expensive products are the best candidates for reshoring.
While often the primary considerations for offshoring and reshoring focus on the supply
side of the equation (e.g., taxes, regulations, wages, oil prices, and fluctuations in the values of
currencies), the latest trend referred to as next‐shoring considers the demand side of the equation.
More specifically, next‐shoring recognizes the significant benefits that accrue by being in close
proximity to where the demand for products and services actually occurs. Indeed, the McKinsey
Global Institute estimates that the share of global demand coming from emerging markets will
increase from 40 percent in 2008 to 66 percent by 2025. Proponents of next‐shoring recognize
that being in closer proximity to the sources of demand enhances the ability of organizations to
adapt to changes such as shifts in customer requirements and emerging technologies. By the
same token, next‐shoring also creates new challenges related to the development of new supply
chain partnerships.
Meridth-c06.indd 176 11/5/2015 4:07:26 PM
1776.4 Sourcing Strategies and Outsourcing
6.4.1 Purchasing/Procurement
Organizations depend heavily on purchasing activities to help them achieve their supply chain
strategy by obtaining quality materials and services at the right cost when they are needed.
Purchasing is expected to be able to quickly identify and qualify suppliers, negotiate contracts for
the best price, arrange for transportation, and then continue to oversee and manage these suppli-
ers. Lately, purchasing has been given the added responsibility in many organizations for also
supplying major services to the organization, such as information technology, accounting, human
resources, and other previously internal functions.
Another common term for the purchasing function is procurement. Whereas “purchasing”
implies a monetary transaction, “procurement” is the responsibility for acquiring the goods and
services the organization needs, by any means. Thus, it may include scrap and recycled as well
as purchased materials. Procurement thus allows the consideration of environmental aspects of
obtaining and distributing products. For example, there is often the possibility of recovering cer-
tain materials through recycling, reuse, or scrap purchases. And remanufacturing of goods is an
inexpensive alternative to virgin production. On the distribution side, the concept of reverse
logistics is being practiced in Germany, where packaging must reverse the logistics chain and
flow back to the producer that originated it for disposal or reuse.
The purchasing area has a major potential for lowering costs and increasing profits—
perhaps the most powerful within the organization. Consider the following data concerning a
simple manufacturing organization:
Total sales
Purchased materials
Labor
$ , ,
, ,
10 000 000
7 000 000
aand salaries
Overhead
Profit
2 000 000
500 000
500 000
, ,
,
,
To double profits to $1 million, one or a combination of the following five actions could
be taken:
1. Increase sales by 100 percent.
2. Increase selling price by 5 percent (same volume).
3. Decrease labor and salaries by 25 percent.
4. Decrease overhead by 100 percent.
5. Decrease purchase costs by 7.1 percent.
Although action 2 may appear easiest, it may well be impossible, since competitors and the
market often set prices. Moreover, raising prices almost always reduces the sales volume. In fact,
raising prices often decreases the total profit (through lower volume). Action 5 is thus particularly
appealing. Decreasing the cost of purchased material provides significant profit leverage. In the
previous example, every 1 percent decrease in the cost of purchases results in a 14 percent
increase in profits. This potential is often neglected in both business and public organizations.
Furthermore, this logic is also applicable to service organizations. For example, investment
firms typically spend 15 percent of their revenues on purchases. However, manufacturing firms
spend about 55 percent of their revenues for outside materials and services (Tully 1995)! And
with factory automation and outsourcing increasing, the percentage of expenditures on purchases
is increasing even more. In addition, with lean and JIT programs at so many firms (discussed in
Meridth-c06.indd 177 11/5/2015 4:07:29 PM
178 Supply Chain Management
greater detail in Chapter 9), “JIT purchasing” is even further increasing the importance of pur-
chasing and procurement, since delays in the receipt of materials, or receiving the wrong materi-
als, will stop a JIT program dead in its tracks.
SCM programs are putting ever greater emphasis on the purchasing function. Thus, we are
seeing multiple new initiatives for cutting purchasing costs, including reverse auctions and joint
venture Web sites by organizations that are normally competitors. Reverse auctions use a Web
site to list the items a company wants to buy and bidders make proposals to supply them, the low-
est qualified bidder typically winning the auction. Joint venture Web sites are typically for the
same purpose, but combine the purchasing power of multiple large players in an industry—
automobile manufacturing, aerospace, and health care, for example—in order to obtain even
bigger cost savings. Such sites are virtual online bazaars, including all the goods and services the
joint partners wish to outsource. But the range and volumes are massive, considering that the
old‐big‐three U.S. auto companies each spent close to $80 billion a year on such purchases.
Value Analysis
A special responsibility of purchasing, or purchasing working jointly with engineering/design
and operations (and sometimes even the supplier), is to regularly evaluate the function of pur-
chased items or services, especially those that are expensive or used in high volumes. The goal is
to either reduce the cost of the item or improve its performance. This is called “value analysis”
because the task is to investigate the total value of the item to see if it can be eliminated, rede-
signed for reduced cost, or replaced with a less expensive or more beneficial item, or even if the
specifications can be relaxed. Other aspects are investigated, too, such as the packaging, the lead
time, the transportation mode, the materials the item is made from, whether the part can be com-
bined with another part or parts, and so on.
Recent efforts in this area have extended the reach farther up the supply chain to involve
second‐ and third‐tier suppliers, even bringing them in before the product is designed in order
to improve its value up front, called early supplier involvement. Value analysis should be a con-
tinuing effort to improve supply chain performance and increase its value to the ultimate
consumer.
Key Elements of Effective Purchasing
Organizations that are highly effective in SCM purchasing seem to follow three practices:
1. They leverage their buying power. The advantages associated with decentralization are
typically not achieved when it comes to purchasing. For example, Columbia/HCA com-
bines the purchases of its 200‐plus hospitals to increase its overall purchasing power. By
combining all of its purchases for supplies ranging from cotton swabs to IV solutions, for
instance, it was able to reduce purchasing costs by $200 million and boost profits by
15 percent.
2. They commit to a small number of dependable suppliers. Leading suppliers are invited to
compete for an organization’s business on the basis of set requirements, such as state‐of‐the‐art
products, financial condition, reliable delivery, and commitment to continuous improvement.
The best one‐to‐three suppliers are selected from the field of bidders on the basis of the speci-
fied requirements. Typically, one‐ to five‐year contracts are awarded to the selected suppliers.
These contracts provide the supplier with the opportunity to demonstrate its commitment to
the partnership. The customer shares information and technology with the supplier, and the
supplier responds in turn. If a supplier is able to consistently improve its performance, the
organization reciprocates by increasing the volume of business awarded to that supplier and
extending the contract.
Meridth-c06.indd 178 11/5/2015 4:07:30 PM
1796.4 Sourcing Strategies and Outsourcing
3. They work with and help their suppliers reduce total cost. Often, organizations will send
their own production people to a supplier’s plant to help the supplier improve its operating
efficiency, improve its quality, and reduce waste. Additionally, an organization may bench-
mark key aspects of a supplier’s operation such as prices, costs, and technologies. If it is
discovered that a supplier has slipped relative to the competition, the organization can try to
help the supplier regain its lead. If the supplier is unable or unwilling to take the steps neces-
sary to regain its leadership position, the organization may need to find a new partner.
6.4.2 Supplier Management
Our discussion of the management of an organization’s suppliers will focus on three areas:
(1) selecting the suppliers, (2) contemporary relationships with suppliers, and (3) certification
and auditing of ongoing suppliers.
Supplier Selection and Vendor Analysis
The general characteristics of a good supplier are as follows:
• Deliveries are made on time and are of the quality and in the quantity specified.
• Prices are fair, and efforts are made to hold or reduce the price.
• The supplier is able to react to unforeseen changes such as an increase or decrease in demand,
quality, specifications, or delivery schedules—all frequent occurrences.
• The supplier continually improves products and services.
• The supplier is willing to share information and be an important link in the supply chain.
However, these are not the only factors to be considered in selecting a supplier. Additional
considerations involve the supplier’s reputation/reliability, its having a nearby location (especially
important for JIT delivery), its financial strength, the strength of its management, and even what
other customers and suppliers are involved with it. For example, if we are a relatively small cus-
tomer, we might be more at risk of not getting a delivery if a larger customer experiences a problem
and needs our supplier’s immediate help. Or if our supplier has weak or unreliable second‐ or third‐
tier suppliers, we might encounter a problem getting our supplies through no fault of our direct
supplier.
Another important factor to consider in selecting a supplier is the total cost of ownership. In
particular, one pitfall that organizations should avoid is the tendency to overly emphasize the unit
cost being charged for a purchased item to the exclusion of other important aspects that also impact
the organization’s costs. In many cases, the actual costs of using, maintaining, transporting, inspect-
ing, reworking, servicing, and handling a purchased item can be much greater than its unit cost. For
example, after‐sales service or the amount of maintenance required for a purchased item may have
a larger impact on an organization’s costs than simply the cost of acquiring the product or service.
Thus, the objective for employing a total cost of ownership approach is to consider and analyze all
costs related to a purchase, not just the obvious purchase price. It is also worth pointing out that when
all costs of the purchase are considered (e.g., import costs, duties, and currency fluctuations), out-
sourcing overseas may not be as advantageous as when only the unit cost of the item is considered.
Supplier Relationships
In these days of intense global competition and SCM, the relationship between customers and
suppliers has changed significantly. In the past, most customers purchased from the lowest bid-
ders who could meet their quality and delivery needs, often maintaining at least two or three
Meridth-c06.indd 179 11/5/2015 4:07:30 PM
180 Supply Chain Management
suppliers in case one was suddenly unable to meet their needs due to a wildcat strike or delivery
problem. As pressure mounted to reduce costs, they often pressured their suppliers to cut costs by
promising larger volumes to those that had the lowest costs and provided smaller amounts to
other suppliers.
To implement SCM, customers are seeking a closer, more cooperative relationship with
their suppliers. They are cutting back the total number of their suppliers by a factor of 10 or 20
and combining their purchases, with those remaining getting the overwhelming volume of all
their business. They are also asking suppliers to do a greater portion of assembly, such as with
automobile seats and other automotive components, which can then simply be installed as a pack-
age rather than assembled first and then installed. Not only does the reduced assembly labor save
them cost, but in return for the higher volumes, they are expecting even further reductions in cost
from their reduced number of suppliers.
Supplier Certification and Audits
As can be seen, these sole‐sourcing arrangements are becoming virtual partnerships, with the
customer asking the supplier to become more involved even at the design stage and asking for
smaller, more frequent JIT deliveries of higher quality items. This means longer‐term relation-
ships, help with each other’s problems, joint planning, sharing of information, and so on. To do
this, suppliers are being certified or qualified so that their shipments do not need to be inspected
by the customer—the items go directly to the production line. This is often referred to as stock-
less purchasing because the items do not sit in the stockroom costing capital for holding and
securing them. To ensure that the contracted supplies will be available when needed, the cus-
tomers periodically conduct supplier audits of their vendors, checking for potential production
or delivery problems, quality assurance, design competence, process improvement procedures,
and the management of corrective actions. Some customers rely on standard industry certifica-
tions such as ISO 9000 (see Chapter 7) rather than incurring the time and expense of conduct-
ing their own certification. Such certified suppliers are sometimes known as world‐class
suppliers.
Of course, most of the benefits of this partnership accrue to the customer rather than the
supplier. The main immediate benefit to the supplier is that it stays in business and even grows.
If managed properly, it should even become more profitable. However, with the help of its cus-
tomers, its production processes should improve substantially, both in quality and efficiency,
resulting in cost reductions that are shared between the partners. Toyota is known for helping
their suppliers, and even their second‐ and third‐tier suppliers, in this kind of fashion.
In the not too distant past, when JIT production was still novel, customers were using sole
sourcing as a way to put pressure on their suppliers, forcing the supplier to stock inventories of
items for immediate delivery rather than holding the stock themselves. Singing the praises of
JIT—and insisting that the supplier implement JIT so that its deliveries could be made in smaller,
more frequent batches—was often just a ploy to accommodate the customers’ own sloppy sched-
ules, because they never knew from week to week what they were going to need the following
week. Today, firms are moving to lean/JIT (described in detail in Chapter 9) and bringing their
suppliers along with them. In many cases, the customer, like Toyota, is teaching the supplier how
to implement effective lean/JIT programs in their own organizations.
6.5 Inventory and Supply Planning
A key aspect of SCM is the use of inventory. In this section, we look at the use of inventory and
the factors that help determine the best levels of inventories to hold. We describe the various
functions of inventories, the forms of inventories, specific inventory‐related costs, and the two
Meridth-c06.indd 180 11/5/2015 4:07:30 PM
1816.5 Inventory and Supply Planning
fundamental inventory decisions all organizations must make. An online supplement to the chap-
ter provides additional details on using the economic order quantity model to determine how
much inventory should be ordered.
Although inventory is inanimate, the topic of inventory and inventory control can arouse
completely different sentiments in the minds of people in various departments within an organi-
zation. The salespeople generally prefer large quantities of inventory to be on hand. This allows
them to meet customers’ requests without having to wait. Customer service is their primary con-
cern. The accounting and financial personnel see inventory in a different light. High inventories
do not translate into high customer service in the accountant’s language; rather, they translate into
large amounts of tied‐up capital that could otherwise be used to reduce debt or for other, more
economically advantageous purposes. From the viewpoint of the operations manager, inventories
are a tool that can be used to promote efficient operation of the production facilities. Neither high
inventories nor low inventories per se are desirable; inventories are simply allowed to fluctuate so
that production can be adjusted to its most efficient level. And top management’s concern is with
the “bottom line”—what advantages the inventories are providing versus their costs.
6.5.1 Functions of Inventories
There are many purposes for holding inventory, but, in general, inventories have five basic func-
tions. Be aware that inventories will not generally be identified and segregated within the organi-
zation by these functions and that not all functions will be represented in all organizations:
1. Transit inventories. Transit inventories exist because materials must be moved from one
location to another. (These are also known as pipeline inventories.) A truckload of merchan-
dise from a retailer’s regional warehouse to one of its retail stores is an example of transit
inventory. This inventory results because of the transportation time required.
2. Buffer inventories. Another purpose of inventories is to protect against the uncertainties of
supply and demand. Buffer inventories—or, as they are sometimes called, safety stocks—
serve to cushion the effect of unpredictable events. The amount of inventory held over and
above the expected demand requirement is considered to be buffer stock held to meet any
demand in excess of what is expected. The higher the level of inventory, the better the cus-
tomer service—that is, the fewer the stockouts and backorders. A stockout exists when a
customer’s order for an item cannot be filled because the inventory of that item has run out.
If there is a stockout, the firm will usually back‐order the item immediately, rather than wait
until the next regular ordering period.
3. Anticipation inventories. An anticipated future event such as a price increase, a strike, or a
seasonal increase in demand is the reason for holding anticipation inventories. For example,
rather than operating with excessive overtime in one period and then allowing the produc-
tion system to be idle or shut down because of insufficient demand in another period,
DILBERT: © Scott Adams/Dist. by United Feature Syndicate, Inc.
Meridth-c06.indd 181 11/5/2015 4:07:32 PM
182 Supply Chain Management
inventories can be allowed to build up before an event to be consumed during or after the
event. Manufacturers, wholesalers, and retailers build anticipation inventories before occa-
sions, such as Christmas and Halloween, when demand for specialized products will
be high.
4. Decoupling inventories. It would be a rare production system in which all equipment and
personnel operated at exactly the same rate. Yet, if you were to take an inspection tour
through a production facility, you would notice that most of the equipment and people were
producing. Products move smoothly even though one machine can process parts five times
as fast as the one before or after it. An inventory of parts between machines, or fluid in a vat,
known as decoupling inventory, acts to disengage the production system. That is, inventories
act as shock absorbers, or cushions, increasing and decreasing in size as parts are added to
and used up from the stock.
Even if a preceding machine were to break down, the following machines could still
produce (at least for a while), since an in‐process inventory of parts would be waiting for
production. The more inventories management carries between stages in the manufactur-
ing and distribution system, the less coordination is needed to keep the system running
smoothly. Clearly, there is an optimum balance between inventory level and coordination
in the operations system. Without decoupling inventories, each operation in the plant
would have to produce at an identical rate (a paced line) to keep the production flowing
smoothly, and when one operation broke down, the entire plant would come to a
standstill.
5. Cycle inventories. Cycle inventories—or, as they are sometimes called, lot‐size inventories
—exist for a different reason from the others just discussed. Each of the previous types of
inventories serves one of the major purposes for holding inventory. Cycle inventories, on
the other hand, result from management’s attempt to minimize the total cost of carrying
and ordering inventory. If the annual demand for a particular part is 12,000 units, manage-
ment could decide to place one order for 12,000 units and maintain a rather large inven-
tory throughout the year or place 12 orders of 1000 each and maintain a lower level of
inventory. But the costs associated with ordering and receiving would increase. Cycle
inventories are the inventories that result from ordering in batches, or “lots,” rather than
as needed.
6.5.2 Forms of Inventories
Inventories are usually classified into four forms, some of which correspond directly with the
previous inventory functions but some of which do not:
1. Raw materials. Raw materials are objects, commodities, elements, and items that are
received (usually purchased) from outside the organization to be used directly in the produc-
tion of the final output. When we think of raw materials, we think of such things as sheet
metal, flour, paint, structural steel, chemicals, and other basic materials. But nuts and bolts,
hydraulic cylinders, pizza crusts, syringes, engines, frames, integrated circuits, and other
assemblies purchased from outside the organization would also be considered part of the
raw materials inventory.
2. Maintenance, repair, and operating (MRO) supplies. MRO supplies are items used to
support and maintain the operation, including spares, supplies, and stores. Spares are some-
times produced by the organization itself rather than purchased. These are usually machine
Meridth-c06.indd 182 11/5/2015 4:07:32 PM
1836.5 Inventory and Supply Planning
parts or supplies that are crucial to production. The term supplies is often used synonymously
with inventories. The general convention, and the one that we will adopt in this book, is that
supplies are stocks of items used (consumed) in the production of goods or services but are
not directly a part of the finished product. Examples are copier paper, staples, pencils, and
packing material. Stores commonly include both supplies and raw materials that are kept in
stock or on shelves in a special location.
3. Work in process (WIP). WIP inventory consists of all the materials, parts, and assemblies
that are being worked on or are waiting to be processed within the operations system.
Decoupling inventories are an example of WIP. That is, they are all the items that have left
the raw materials inventory but have not yet been converted or assembled into a final
product.
4. Finished goods. The finished goods inventory is the stock of completed products. Goods,
once completed, are transferred out of WIP inventory and into the finished goods inventory.
From here, they can be sent to distribution centers, sold to wholesalers, or sold directly to
retailers or final customers.
As you can see from this discussion, the inventory system and the operations system
within an organization are strongly interrelated. Inventories affect customer service, utiliza-
tion of facilities and equipment, capacity, and efficiency of labor. Therefore, the plans con-
cerning the acquisition and storage of materials, or “inventories,” are vital to the production
system.
The ultimate objective of any inventory system is to make decisions regarding the level of
inventory that will result in a good balance between the purposes for holding inventories and the
costs associated with them. Typically, we hear inventory management practitioners and research-
ers speaking of total cost minimization as the objective of an inventory system. If we were able
to place dollar costs on interruptions in the smooth flow of goods through the operations system,
on not meeting customers’ demands, or on failures to provide the other purposes for which inven-
tories exist, then minimization of total costs would be a reasonable objective. But since we are
unable to assign costs to many of these subjective factors, we must be satisfied with obtaining a
good balance between the costs and the functions of inventories.
6.5.3 Inventory‐Related Costs
There are essentially five broad categories of costs associated with inventory systems: ordering
or setup costs, inventory carrying or holding costs, stockout costs, opportunity costs, and cost of
goods. This section looks at these costs in turn.
Ordering or Setup Costs
Ordering costs are costs associated with outside procurement of material, and setup costs are
costs associated with internal procurement (i.e., internal manufacture) of parts or material.
Ordering costs include writing the order, processing the order through the purchasing system,
postage, processing invoices, processing accounts payable, and the work of the receiving
department, such as handling, testing, inspection, and transporting. Setup costs also include
writing orders and processing for the internal production system, setup labor, machine down-
time due to a new setup (e.g., cost of an idle, nonproducing machine), parts damaged during
setup (e.g., actual parts are often used for tests during setup), and costs associated with employ-
ees’ learning curve (e.g., the cost of early production spoilage and low productivity immedi-
ately after a new production run is started).
Meridth-c06.indd 183 11/5/2015 4:07:32 PM
184 Supply Chain Management
Inventory Carrying or Holding Costs
Inventory carrying or holding costs have the following major components:
• Capital costs
• Storage costs
• Risk costs
Capital costs include interest on money invested in inventory and in the land, buildings,
and equipment necessary to hold and maintain the inventory, an item of special interest to both
financial and top management. These rates often exceed 20 percent of the cost of the goods. If
these investments were not required, the organization could invest the capital in an alternative
that would earn some return on investment.
Storage costs include rent, taxes, and insurance on buildings; depreciation of buildings;
maintenance and repairs; heat, power, and light; salaries of security personnel; taxes on the inven-
tory; labor costs for handling inventory; clerical costs for keeping records; taxes and insurance on
equipment; depreciation of equipment; fuel and energy for equipment; and repairs and mainte-
nance. Some of these costs are variable, some fixed, and some “semifixed.”
Risk costs include the costs of obsolete inventory, insurance on inventory, physical deterio-
ration of the inventory, and losses from pilferage.
Even though some of these costs are relatively small, the total costs of carrying items in
inventory can be quite large. Studies have found that for a typical manufacturing firm, the cost is
frequently as large as 35 percent of the cost of the inventoried items. A large portion of this is the
cost of the invested capital.
Stockout Costs
If inventory is unavailable when customers request it, a situation that marketing detests, or when
it is needed for production, a stockout occurs. Several costs are associated with each type of
stockout. A stockout of an item demanded by a customer or client can result in lost sales or
demand, lost goodwill (which is very difficult to estimate), and costs associated with processing
backorders (such as extra paperwork, expediting, special handling, and higher shipping costs). A
stockout of an item needed for production results in costs for rescheduling production, costs of
downtime and delays caused by the shortage, the cost of “rush” shipping of needed parts, and
possibly the cost of substituting a more expensive part or material.
Opportunity Costs
Often, capacity and inventory costs can be traded off for one another. For example, capacity
costs can be incurred because a change in productive capacity is necessary or because there
is a temporary shortage of or excess in capacity. Why would capacity be too great or too
small? If, for example, a company tried to meet seasonal demand (or any fluctuations in
demand) by changing the level of production rather than by allowing the level of inventory to
rise or fall, capacity would have to be increased during high‐demand periods and lie idle dur-
ing low‐demand periods. Also, capacity problems are often due to scheduling conflicts.
These commonly arise when multiple products have to be produced on the same set of
facilities.
Opportunity costs include the overtime required to increase capacity; the human resource
management costs of hiring, training, and terminating employees; the cost of using less skilled
workers during peak periods; and the cost of idle time if capacity is not reduced during periods
when demand decreases.
Meridth-c06.indd 184 11/5/2015 4:07:32 PM
1856.6 Role of Information Technology
Cost of Goods
Last, the goods themselves must be paid for. Although they must be acquired sooner or later any-
way, when they are acquired can influence their cost considerably, as through quantity discounts.
6.5.4 Decisions in Inventory Management
The objective of an inventory management system is to make decisions regarding the appropriate
level of inventory and changes in the level of inventory. To maintain the appropriate level of
inventory, decision rules are needed to answer two basic questions:
1. When should an order be placed to replenish the inventory?
2. How much should be ordered?
The decision rules guide the inventory manager or computerized materials management
system in evaluating the current state of the inventory and deciding if some action, such as replen-
ishment, is required. Various types of inventory management systems incorporate different rules
to decide “when” and “how much.” Some depend on time and others on the level of inventory, but
the essential decisions are the same. Even when complexities, such as uncertainty in demand and
delivery times, are introduced, deciding “how many” and “when to order” still remains the basis
of sound inventory management (refer to Supplement B online).
6.6 Role of Information Technology
Everyone knows that computers are everywhere these days and embedded in all kinds of products
that one would not have expected. But why is this, and why now? Professor Richard Chase of the
University of Southern California believes that the answer lies in two esoteric laws—one about
physical goods and the other about abstract information. The first is the better known of the two:
Moore’s law, which states that computing power doubles every 18 to 24 months. The unstated
surprise about Moore’s law is that this doubling of power comes at the same or lower cost as
before the doubling. Clearly, with enough money, our big computer companies could double
computing power every 18 (or 12 or 6) months, but the size of the computers would grow enor-
mously, as would their costs. Yet, this law implies that the cost and size do not increase. As a
result, more and more computing power is becoming available for less and less money; hence, it
is becoming omnipresent, appearing everywhere we go and in everything we buy.
The second law is less familiar to the public but derives from the fact that information
assets, like knowledge, tend to grow with use rather than dwindle, as with physical assets. This
second law is called Metcalfe’s law, which says that the value of a network is proportional to the
square of the number of elements (or users) connected to the network. This is why Amazon,
Microsoft, and eBay have been so successful—with more people in a network, the value of the
network to the user is enhanced, so more people join this network. And competing networks with
fewer users are of less value and hence fade away.
As a result of these two laws, the growth of computers, which support networks, and net-
works, which support people’s needs (business transactions, communication, blogging, etc.), has
exploded. This phenomenon has been particularly prevalent in business, where it has contributed
to both increased value (and thus revenues) and reduced costs, thereby having a double impact on
increased profits. Next, we will look at some particular types of information technology that are
commonly used in business, especially to support SCM.
Meridth-c06.indd 185 11/5/2015 4:07:32 PM
186 Supply Chain Management
Arguably, the most significant information technology development for SCM is the
Internet, and more specifically, its graphical component known as the World Wide Web (Web).
Without a doubt, the Web offers enormous opportunities for members of a supply chain to share
information. Companies such as IBM, General Electric, Dun & Bradstreet, and Microsoft are
rapidly developing products and services that will help make the Web the global infrastructure for
electronic commerce (Verity 1996).
For example, as noted earlier in the purchasing discussion, the Web will allow various
forms of purchasing fulfillment to take place, from placing electronic catalogs on a Web site to
holding joint purchasing bazaars, exchanges, and auction marketplaces involving massive
amounts of materials. Bazaars and reverse auctions (one buyer, multiple sellers) were discussed
earlier, but exchanges are for information transfer (often hosted by third parties, such as mySAP.
com), and auction marketplaces (one seller, multiple buyers) are primarily for selling commodi-
ties or near commodities at low prices. Of course, the costs of initiating and executing these
forms of purchasing will be almost trivial compared to their paper‐based predecessors. For exam-
ple, updating an electronic catalog can be done instantaneously, rather than waiting until next
year’s printing. In addition, password‐protected customized catalogs reflecting negotiated prices
can also be placed on a firm’s Web site for use by individual customers.
Intranets are Web‐based networks that allow all employees of a firm to intercommunicate.
They are usually firewall protected and use existing Internet technologies to create portals for
company‐specific information and communication, such as newsletters, training, human resource
information and forms, and product information. Extranets are private networks to allow the
organization to securely interact with external parties. They use Internet protocols and public
telecommunication systems to work with external vendors, suppliers, dealers, customers, and so
on. Clearly, the extranet would be a major element of a firm’s supply chain information system.
Collaborative software facilitates the work of groups or teams in the organization. Its
purpose is communication, collaboration, and coordination (of schedules, workflow, etc.). Most
collaborative systems these days are Web based. Microsoft’s NetMeeting and Cisco’s WebEx are
well‐known commercial systems.
6.6.1 ERP
ERP systems greatly facilitate communication throughout the supply chain and over the Internet.
The ERP system embodies much more than just the supply chain, however; it also includes all the
electronic information concerning the various parts of the firm. These massive systems can not
only reduce costs and allow instant access to the entire firm’s database but can also help increase
revenues by up to 25 percent in some cases (Mabert et al. 2001, p. 50).
As the name suggests, the objective of these systems is to provide seamless, real‐time
information to all employees who need it, throughout the entire organization (or enterprise), and
to those outside the organization. Figure 6.4 provides a broad overview of SAP’s MySAP ERP
system. MySAP, announced in 2003, represents the latest evolution of SAP’s ERP system. SAP
introduced its R/2 system in 1979, which was an ERP system that ran on mainframe computers,
and its R/3 system for client–server computing environments in 1992. MySAP takes the evolu-
tion one step further and is based on service‐oriented architecture (SOA) whereby organizations
will be able to access the SAP software via the Internet and thereby have access to the full func-
tionality of the software without having to actually install and deploy the software throughout the
enterprise. With the introduction of MySAP, SAP has announced that they will no longer con-
tinue to develop R/3.
As shown in Figure 6.4, an ERP system consists of a number of modules that provide the
functionality to support a variety of organizational processes. These modules all access data from
the central database, and changes made via these modules update the central database. Using
Meridth-c06.indd 186 11/5/2015 4:07:32 PM
1876.6 Role of Information Technology
ERP, each area interacts with a centralized database and servers, so suppliers can check on the
latest demands and customers can determine the status of their order or available capacity for new
orders. ERP can also handle international complications such as differences in taxes, currency,
accounting rules, and language.
With the ERP approach, information is entered once at the source and made available to
all stakeholders needing it. Clearly, this approach eliminates the incompatibility created when
different functional departments use different systems, and it also eliminates the need for people
in different parts of the organization to reenter the same information over and over again into
separate computer systems. Although ERP ties all these areas together, the actual implementa-
tion of an ERP system in an organization may include only portions of these modules on an as‐
needed basis.
Davenport (1998) provides an example that illustrates the opportunity to automate tasks in
a business process with an ERP system. In the example, a Paris‐based sales rep of a U.S. manu-
facturer prepares a quote for a customer in Paris. After the rep enters the customer information
into a notebook computer, the ERP system creates the sales contract in French. Included in the
sales contract are important details of the order, such as the product’s configuration, quantity
ordered, price, delivery date, and payment terms. When the customer agrees to the terms of the
quote, the sales rep submits the order electronically with a single keystroke. The system then
automatically checks the customer’s credit and accepts the order if it is within the customer’s
credit limit. Upon accepting the order, the ERP system then schedules the shipment of the com-
pleted order based on the agreed‐upon delivery date and then, based on the delivery date and
appropriate lead times, reserves the required raw materials. The system also determines if the
required materials will be available and, if not, automatically generates the orders for the needed
materials from suppliers. Next, the ERP system schedules the actual assembly of the order in one
of the organization’s Asian facilities. In addition, sales and production forecasts are updated, the
commission due the rep is calculated and credited to his or her account (in French francs), and
the profitability of the order (in U.S. dollars) is computed. Finally, the business units and corpo-
rate financial statements such as balance sheets, accounts payable, accounts receivable, and cash
flows are immediately updated.
As this example illustrates, the integration offered by ERP systems provides organizations
with the potential to achieve dramatic improvements in the execution of their business processes.
Owens Corning achieved this integration by replacing 211 legacy systems with one ERP system.
Much of the benefit associated with this integration stems from having real‐time access to operating
ERP modules
SuppliersCustomers
Employees
Central
database
Product
development
and
manufacturing
Sales and
service
Corporate
services
FinancialsAnalytics
Human
capital
management
Procurement
and
logistics
FIGURE 6.4
SAP’s MySAP ERP.
Meridth-c06.indd 187 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
188 Supply Chain Management
and financial data. For example, after implementing an ERP system, Autodesk reduced the time it
took to deliver an order from an average of two weeks to shipping 98 percent of its orders within
24 hours. Before implementation of an ERP system, it took IBM’s Storage Systems Division five
days to reprice all of its products. After implementing an ERP system, it was able to accomplish
the same task in 5 minutes. IBM also reduced the time required to ship replacement parts from
22 days to 3 days and reduced the time to perform credit checks from 20 minutes to 3 seconds!
Fujitsu Microelectronics achieved similar benefits, reducing its order fulfillment time from 18 days
to less than 2 days and reducing the time required to close its financial books from 8 days to 4 days.
Although ERP systems were originally developed for and adopted by manufacturing firms,
employees working in service organizations have the same need for seamless, real‐time information.
To meet the needs of service organizations, numerous ERP systems specific to the needs of service
organizations have been developed. For example, Carroll Hospital Center in Westminster, Maryland,
adopted an ERP system to help streamline its operations and reduce costs (Monegain 2009). Carroll
Hospital is using the ERP to facilitate a variety of functions from payroll to budgeting and planning.
According to the CIO of Carroll Hospital, the ERP system has impacted all aspects of the hospital
from how patients receive their care to how employees are paid. Employees at Carroll Hospital
appreciate the ERP system’s ability to provide them with the information they need and eliminate
paperwork. Overall, Carroll Hospital has found that the ERP system provides everyone with more
timely and accurate information, which in turn has facilitated the work of all employees.
In a similar fashion to the health‐care industry, a number of specialized ERP systems have
been developed for higher education. These ERP systems contain a number of specialized mod-
ules that universities can select from for maintaining and developing relationships with alumni,
student services such as financial aid and course registration, finance and human capital manage-
ment, and academic applications for tasks such as monitoring student progress and retention.
6.6.2 Customer Relationship Management Systems
Another important information technology is the customer relationship management (CRM)
systems. CRM systems are designed to collect and interpret customer‐based data (Ragins and Greco
2003). This could be from internal sources such as marketing, sales, or customer support services
or from external sources like market research or the customer. The aim is to develop a process for
improving the firm’s response to its customers’ needs, especially the most profitable customers.
CRM systems thus provide comprehensive customer data so the firm can provide better customer
service and design and offer the most appropriate products and services for its customers.
6.7 Successful SCM
The basic requirements for successful SCM are trustworthy partners, good communication,
appropriate performance measures, and competent managers with vision. Innovation to suit the
particular situation of the individual organization is particularly desirable. Here are some exam-
ples of visionary SCM innovations that have been developed:
• Dell’s “direct model” (Magretta 1998).
• Wal‐Mart’s “cross‐docking” technique of off‐loading goods from incoming trucks at a ware-
house directly into outbound distribution trucks instead of placing them into inventory.
• The relatively common approach used by Dell and many others of “delayed differentiation,”
where final modules are either inventoried for last‐minute assembly to customer order or
differentiating features are added to the final product upon receipt of the customer’s order.
Meridth-c06.indd 188 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
1896.7 Successful SCM
• Sport Obermeyer’s and Hewlett‐Packard’s “postponement” approach to delayed differentiation,
where variety and customization are delayed until as late in the production process as possible,
sometimes even arranging with the carrier to perform the final customization (called channel
assembly). In Sport Obermeyer’s (Fisher et al. 1994) version, those product lines where demand
is better known are produced first, while customer demand volume information is being col-
lected on less easily forecast lines whose production has thus been postponed. Similarly,
Hewlett‐Packard ships generic printers to regional centers around the globe, where local work-
ers add country‐specific power supplies, power cords, and local language instructions. Another
variant of postponement was mentioned in the Dell example cited earlier, where drop shipping
arrangements are made with the carrier to deliver third‐party‐supplied elements of the product
(e.g., monitors) to the customer at the same time that the main product is being delivered.
One framework that is particularly useful in helping organizations assess the current per-
formance of their supply chain and identify opportunities for improvement is the supply chain
operations reference (SCOR) model which was developed by the Supply Chain Council (which
more recently merged with APICS). The emphasis of the SCOR model is on modeling the supply
chain process, determining and using appropriate performance metrics, and identifying best prac-
tices through techniques such as benchmarking (discussed in detail in Chapter 1).
More specifically, the SCOR model helps managers understand their supply chain at four
levels that become increasingly detailed as one progresses down the levels. At the highest level
(level 1), the SCOR model identifies the five fundamental supply chain processes:
• Plan. Develop a strategy for aligning available supply with anticipated demand.
• Source. Procure the needed inputs to execute the plan.
• Make. Transform the inputs into outputs in order to meet the plan.
• Deliver. Move the finished outputs to the places where they are needed.
• Return. Process outputs that have reached the end of their useful life (discussed in more detail
in the next section).
The second level in the SCOR model breaks the first level into greater detail and is referred
to as the configuration level. For example, the level 1 general Make process can be further broken
down into the more specific processes MTS, MTO, and ETO. Level 3 (Process Elements) focuses
on the process activities needed to execute the level 2 processes, and level 4 addresses the topic
of implementation.
6.7.1 Closed‐Loop Supply Chains and Reverse Logistics
Guide and Van Wassenhove (2009, p. 10) define closed‐loop SCM as “the design, control, and
operation of a system to maximize value creation over the entire life cycle of a product with
dynamic recovery of value from different types and volumes of returns over time.” An important
aspect of closed‐loop SCM is recovering value from returned products. The potential for recover-
ing value from returns is enormous, as it is estimated that commercial returns exceed $100 billion
annually (Stock et al. 2002). Large retailers like Home Depot can expect to have 10 percent or
more of their sales returned, while Hewlett‐Packard estimates that it incurs costs equivalent to
2 percent of its outbound sales in returned merchandise.
Product returns are categorized as commercial returns, end‐of‐use returns, end‐of‐life
returns, and repair and warranty returns. Commercial returns are typically returns to the reseller
and occur within 90 days of purchase. For example, many cell phone companies allow customers
to return their cell phones for any reason within 30 days of purchase. End‐of‐use returns occur
Meridth-c06.indd 189 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
190 Supply Chain Management
when a product is returned so that its functionality can be upgraded. For example, in the United
States, it is estimated that 80 percent of cell phone users upgrade their perfectly usable cell
phones annually. End‐of‐life returns occur when the product still functions but is technologically
obsolete. Finally, between commercial returns and end‐of‐life returns, customers return products
to be repaired.
The type of product return has important implications for how the return is handled. For
example, commercial returns have usually been only lightly used. Therefore, they typically
require minor processing, such as cleaning and perhaps some minor repairs. End‐of‐use returns
have been used more heavily, and there is likely to be more variability in the quality of these
returns. Given this, these returns will typically require more extensive processing. The focus in
end‐of‐life returns is on parts recovery and recycling, since these products are technologically
obsolete. In summary, then, commercial returns are repaired, end‐of‐use returns are remanufac-
tured, and end‐of‐life returns are recycled.
In addition to providing significant environmental benefits, the goal of operating a closed‐
loop supply chain is to generate more value through the recovery activities than the cost of per-
forming these activities. The steps involved in operating a closed‐loop supply chain include
acquiring the right quantities of the used product with the right quality and at the right time; using
reverse logistics or moving the product back upstream from the customer to the repair/remanu-
facturing operations; sorting, testing, and grading the returned products to determine their dispo-
sition; repairing/remanufacturing the returned products; and, finally, remarketing the refurbished
products. Some products, such as consumer electronics and computers, have short life cycles and
therefore lose a significant portion of their value per week. In these cases, a slow reverse supply
chain can erode much if not all of the potential value that can be recovered.
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1. Why is supply chain management such a topic of interest
lately? Why wasn’t it previously?
2. What appears to be the primary “secret” of successful supply
chain management?
3. Given that the current conceptualization of the supply chain
includes JIT and lean manufacturing, what other elements of
SCM need to be changed to move toward the idea of a demand
chain?
4. In what way can contract manufacturers consider themselves
service providers? Hasn’t Nike been doing this for years?
What’s the difference?
5. To date, it appears that purchasing has been one of the
primary beneficiaries of supply chain management. Why do
you think this is so? What do you expect will happen in the
future?
6. The bullwhip effect is often blamed for the boom‐and‐bust
cycles in our national economy. Which of the remedies for
eliminating this effect in a supply chain might also benefit the
national economy?
7. How does postponement differ from assemble‐to‐order?
8. Contrast SCM systems with ERP systems. Which do you
suspect are larger and more costly?
9. Do any of the five functions and four forms of inventories
exist in service firms? If so, which ones, and why? If not, how
are the functions served?
10. Contrast the functions and forms of inventories. Does every
form exist for each function and vice versa, or are some more
common?
11. In many of today’s firms, the customer’s computer is tied to
the supplier’s computer so that purchase orders go directly
into the supplier’s production planning system. What are the
implications of this close relationship?
12. Discuss the pros and cons of relying on outside expertise in
the selection and implementation of an ERP system.
13. When might an organization not use all three stages of the
location selection process described here?
14. Might the breakeven model be used for the national or site
stage of location? Might the weighted scoring model be used
in the national or community stage of location? What factors
would be used in these models at other stages?
Meridth-c06.indd 190 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
191Apply Your Understanding
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
■ PEAK NUTRITION, INC.
Peak Nutrition, Inc. (PNI) offers a line of premium sports
recovery drinks. Its drinks are made from all‐natural fruit
juices that are supplemented with protein, creatine, vita-
mins, and minerals. Each flavor is offered in both a 12‐
and 20‐ounce bottle. Eighty percent of PNI’s sales are to
two national health food chains, and the remaining 20
percent are to independent health food stores and online
retailers.
PNI has a single production and bottling line,
which has sufficient capacity to meet its current demand.
Setting up the production line to produce a particular
flavor requires an entire 8‐hour shift. Most of the setup
time is related to flushing out the equipment in order to
not contaminate the new flavor to be produced with the
flavor that was last produced. Given the long setup times,
the production and bottling lines are dedicated to
producing a single flavor for an entire week. The typical
production schedule involves setting up the line on
Monday, producing 12‐ounce bottles on Tuesday and
Wednesday, and producing 20‐ounce bottles on Thursday
and Friday. The plastic bottles and labels are purchased
from outside suppliers. There is a one‐week lead time for
both the bottles and labels. PNI maintains a four‐week
inventory of plastic bottles and orders labels three weeks
before they are needed. Changing over the bottling line
from 12‐ounce to 20‐ounce bottles requires about an
hour and a half, which also includes changing the labels.
Since each flavor is produced every six weeks, PNI
historically produced an eight‐week supply for each fla-
vor to provide a safety net in the event demand exceeded
its forecasts. Despite having an extra two weeks of inven-
tory, PNI often experienced stockouts. Given the prob-
lem with stockouts, PNI recently acquired additional
warehouse space and now plans to produce 10 weeks of
demand during each production run. It is expected that
producing a 10‐week supply may result in the need for a
small amount of overtime in some weeks.
PNI has limited communication with its customers,
primarily consisting of the purchase orders it receives from
its customers and the invoices and products it sends to them.
PNI’s goal is to meet all orders from its inventory. In this
way, it is able to provide its customers with a one‐week lead
time. When the inventory level is insufficient to meet the
quantity ordered, lead times increase to an average of two to
three weeks, depending on how soon the product is next
scheduled for production. Once last year, PNI was stocked
out of a flavor for almost four weeks.
At the end of each quarter, PNI offers its customers
discounts for orders above certain order quantity thresholds.
The purpose of the discounts is to provide retailers with an
incentive to put the sports drinks on sale and help boost quar-
terly sales. As a result of these incentives, PNI’s sales tend to
be 5 to 10 times higher in the last two weeks of the quarter
compared to other times. In anticipation of the increase in
sales, PNI builds up its inventory. However, while on average
it has plenty of inventory across all flavors, it often experi-
ences mismatches in its available supply and demand for spe-
cific flavors. In other words, it often finds that it has too much
inventory of some flavors and too little of other flavors.
Questions
1. What concerns do you have about PNI’s supply chain
management practices?
2. What would you recommend PNI do to address your
concerns?
3. Do you have any concerns about the way PNI deter-
mines its level of safety stock?
4. Should PNI focus on enhancing the efficiency or respon-
siveness of its supply chain? Why?
■ STAFFORD CHEMICAL, INC.
Stafford Chemical, Inc. is a privately held company
that produces a range of specialty chemicals. Currently,
its most important product line is paint pigments used
by the automobile industry. Stafford Chemical was
founded more than 60 years ago by Phillip Stafford in
a small town north of Cincinnati, Ohio, and is currently
run by Phillip’s grandson, George Stafford. Stafford
has more than 150 employees, and approximately three‐
quarters of them work on the shop floor. Stafford Chemical
operates out of the same plant Phillip built when he
founded the company; however, it has undergone several
expansions over the years.
Recently, a Japanese competitor of Stafford Chemical,
Ozawa Industries, announced plans to expand its operations
Meridth-c06.indd 191 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
192 Supply Chain Management
to the United States. Ozawa, a subsidiary of a large
Japanese industrial company, decided to locate a new
facility in the United States to better serve some of its
customers: Japanese automobile manufacturers who
have built assembly plants in the United States.
The governor of Ohio has been particularly aggres-
sive in trying to persuade Ozawa Industries to locate in a
new industrial park located about 30 miles from Stafford’s
current plant. She has expressed a willingness to negoti-
ate special tax rates, to subsidize workers’ training, and
to expand the existing highway to meet Ozawa’s needs.
In a recent newspaper article, she was quoted as saying:
“Making the concessions I have proposed to get Ozawa to
locate within our state is a good business decision and a
good investment in our state. The plant will provide high‐
paying jobs for 400 of our citizens. Furthermore, over the
long run, the income taxes that these 400 individuals will
pay will more than offset the concessions I have proposed.
Since several other states have indicated a willingness to
make similar concessions, it is unlikely that Ozawa would
choose our state without them.”
George Stafford was outraged after being shown
the governor’s comments.
“I can’t believe this. Stafford Chemical has operated in this
state for over 60 years. I am the third generation of Staffords
to run this business. Many of our employees’ parents and
grand‐parents worked here. We have taken pride in being an
exemplary corporate citizen. And now our governor wants to
help one of our major competitors drive us out of business.
How are we supposed to compete with such a large indus-
trial giant? We should be the ones who are getting the tax
break and help with workers’ training. Doesn’t 60 years of
paying taxes and employing workers count for something?
Where is the governor’s loyalty? It seems to me that the state
should be loyal to its long‐term citizens, the ones who care
about the state and community they operate in—not some
large industrial giant looking to save a buck.”
Questions
1. How valid is George Stafford’s argument? How valid is
the governor’s argument? Is Stafford Chemical being
punished because it was already located within the state?
2. How ethical is it for states and local governments to
offer incentives to attract new businesses to their locali-
ties? Are federal laws needed to keep states from com-
peting with one another?
3. Does the fact that Ozawa is a foreign company alter the
ethical nature of the governor’s actions? What about
Ozawa’s size?
4. What are George’s options?
■ DART’S PARTS, INC.
Z. “Dart” Mitchell leaned forward in his chair to read the
e‐mail that had just arrived from one of his major cus-
tomers, Avery Machine Corp. It read as follows:
To all our preferred suppliers—
Due to our commitments to our primary customer, Globus
Enterprises, we will in the future be doing all of our supply
chain business by way of the Internet, e‐mail, and EDI. This
includes order preparation, bidding, forecasting, production
scheduling, delivery monitoring, cost control, accounts pay-
able and receivable, credit and financing, market and adver-
tising planning, human resource acquisition, engineering
specifications, and so on. To maintain compatibility with our
systems, you will have to invest in a specific set of EDI hard-
ware and software, available from GoingBust.com on the
Web. Although the hardware and software are expensive, we
anticipate that the cost savings and increased business this
will provide over the coming years can more than offset the
additional cost. Please let us know if we can continue to
count on you as one of our preferred suppliers as we move
our supply chain into the information age.
J. R. Avery, Chairman Avery Machine Corp.
Dart’s Parts had been founded in 1974 when the coun-
try was coming out of the 1973–1974 recession and the
need for machine part fabricators was great. Over the years,
Dart had built up the business to where it now had a solid
base of major customers and a comfortable backlog of
orders. Dart had increased the capacity of the plant substan-
tially over the years, moving from a small rented facility to
its own 200,000‐square‐foot plant, with a separate 50,000‐
square‐foot warehouse located adjacent to the main plant.
Although not a “first adopter” when it came to new technol-
ogy, Dart’s embraced proven advanced technologies both
on the plant floor, with innovations such as robots and
Meridth-c06.indd 192 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
193Exercises
numerically controlled machine tools, and in the office,
with computers, digital copiers, and other such office
equipment.
Dart Mitchell had been reading industry maga-
zines about some of these new technologies and had to
admit they sounded promising. However, he had read
about some horror stories, too, when the much‐adver-
tised features turned into a nightmare. In one case, a cus-
tomer had forced its suppliers to obtain production
schedules off its Web site. Initially responding to high
growth in a new product line, the firm had put its compo-
nent needs on its Web site, but when a major order was
canceled, it was late in changing the Web production
schedule. As a result, the suppliers were stuck with hun-
dreds of unneeded components, and the company
wouldn’t reimburse them. In another case, a manufac-
turer had made a bid for electronic parts on a Web auc-
tion and won. However, when it received the parts, they
were too large to fit in the standard‐sized enclosure it
was using, and they all had to be scrapped.
Dart believed that this new technology was indeed the
future of the industry, but he was concerned about getting in
too early and being stuck with the wrong equipment. The
new supply chain technology would undoubtedly open ave-
nues to increased business, but it would also result in a num-
ber of costs. Of course, it would also save the company’s
reputation with Avery, a major customer. However, obtain-
ing the EDI system would be a major financial investment
for the firm, particularly if Avery later dropped this approach
and went to an all‐Internet ERP system like some customers
had been talking about doing. At this point, Dart wasn’t sure
what to do.
Questions
1. Identify the trade‐offs facing Dart’s Parts.
2. What are the pros and cons of each alternative?
3. What additional information would be useful to have?
4. What recommendations would you make to Dart
Mitchell?
E X E R C I S E S
6.1 The location subcommittee’s final report to the board has
focused on three acceptable communities. Table 15b in the
appendix to the report indicates that the cost of locating in
communities 1, 2, and 3 is approximately €400,000, €500,000,
and €600,000 per year (respectively), mortgaged over
30 years. Paragraph 2 on page 39 of the report indicates that
the variable cost per unit of product will increase 15 percent in
community 1 but decrease 15 percent in community 3, owing
to differences in labor rates. As plant manager, you know that
variable costs to date have averaged about €3.05 per unit, and
sales for the next decade are expected to average 20 percent
more than the last 10 years, during which annual sales varied
between 40,000 and 80,000 units. Which location would you
recommend?
6.2 Nina is trying to decide in which of four shopping centers to
locate her new boutique. Some cater to a higher class of clien-
tele than others, some are in an indoor mall, some have a
much greater volume than others, and, of course, rent varies
considerably. Because of the nature of her store, she has
decided that the class of clientele is the most important con-
sideration. Following this, however, she must pay attention to
her expenses; and rent is a major item—probably 90 percent
as important as clientele. An indoor, temperature‐controlled
mall is a big help, however, for stores such as hers, where
70 percent of sales are from passersby slowly strolling and
window‐shopping. Thus, she rates this as about 95 percent as
important as rent. Last, a higher volume of shoppers means
more potential sales; she thus rates this factor as 80 percent as
important as rent. As an aid in visualizing her location alter-
natives, she has constructed the following table. “Good” is
scored as 3, “fair” as 2, and “poor” as 1. Use a weighted score
model to help Nina come to a decision.
Location
1 2 3 4
Class of clientele Fair Good Poor Good
Rent Good Fair Poor Good
Indoor mall Good Poor Good Poor
Volume Good Fair Good Poor
6.3 A new product involves the following costs associated with
three possible locations. If demand is forecast to be 3900 units
a year, which location should be selected?
Location
A B C
Annual cost ($) 10,000 40,000 25,000
Unit variable cost ($) 10.00 2.50 6.30
6.4 Select any publically traded organization you are familiar
with and calculate its CCC.
Meridth-c06.indd 193 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
194 Supply Chain Management
6.5 Use a weighted score model to choose between three locations
(A, B, C) for setting up a factory. The weights for each crite-
rion are shown in the following table. A score of 1 represents
unfavorable, 2 satisfactory, and 3 favorable.
Location
Category Weight A B C
Labor costs 20 1 2 3
Labor productivity 20 2 3 1
Labor supply 10 2 1 3
Union relations 10 3 3 2
Material supply 10 2 1 1
Transport costs 20 1 2 3
Infrastructure 10 2 2 2
6.6 A manufacturer is considering three possible locations for its
new factory. The choice depends not only on the operating
costs at each location but also on the cost of shipping the prod-
uct to the three regions it serves. Given the operating and distri-
bution costs in the following tables, which location would you
recommend for a production volume of 80,000 units per year?
Location
A B C
Construction cost
(amortized over
10 years)
$1,000,000 $1,800,000 $950,000
Material cost
per unit
2.46 2.17 2.64
Labor cost
per unit
0.65 0.62 0.67
Overhead: fixed 100,000 150,000 125,000
Overhead:
variable per unit
0.15 0.18 0.12
Total Distribution Costs
To region
Location
A B C
1 $10,000 $20,000 $26,000
2 17,000 10,000 15,000
3 12,000 18,000 10,000
Meridth-c06.indd 194 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
6
195
chapter
Supplement A
The Beer Game 1
The Beer Game has become a staple of the operations management course in MBA programs
across the country. In effect, the game simulates material and information flows in a simplified
supply chain. As shown in Figure 6SA.1, the supply chain consists of four stages. Moving from
the factory downstream, the supply chain consists of a factory, wholesaler, distributor, and
retailer. Accordingly, each stage in the supply chain is required to manage its inventory levels
given the receipt of orders from its downstream customer through the placement of orders with
its upstream supplier. The only exceptions to this are that the retailer’s demand comes from the
final consumer and the factory schedules production requests as opposed to placing an order from
an upstream supplier .
There is a two‐week delay between the retailer, wholesaler, and distributor. Thus, orders
from the retailer to the wholesaler in a given week arrive two weeks after the wholesaler ships
them. Likewise, orders from the wholesaler to the distributor in a particular week arrive two
weeks after the distributor ships it. Production orders at the factory are available to ship three
weeks after the production requests.
Your objective in playing the game is to minimize the sum of your total weekly costs.
Weekly costs consist of two components: an inventory cost and a backlog cost. More specifically,
weekly inventory cost is calculated at the rate of $0.50/keg of beer in inventory at the end of
the week, while backlog costs are calculated at the rate of $1.00/keg on backlog at the end of the
week. Obviously, only one of these costs can be positive in any given week (although it is pos-
sible that they both could be zero in a particular week).
Because a supply chain for the beer industry in reality would likely be characterized by
multiple factories, dozens of distributors, hundreds of wholesalers, and tens of thousands of
retailers, it is often the case that the only information shared between a supplier and its customer
is order information. Therefore, in the game, the only communication you may have with your
upstream supplier is the placement of your order.
In terms of the initial conditions, as it turns out, the demand at the retailer stage has been
quite stable at four kegs per week for the last several weeks. Therefore, every order placed
throughout the entire supply chain has been for four kegs over this period. Furthermore, each
stage has maintained an inventory level of 12 kegs or the equivalent of three weeks of demand.
However, as the weather turns warmer in the near future, demand is expected to increase. Also, it
is expected that there will be one or more promotions over the coming months.
In playing the game, you will be assigned to one of the four stages in the supply chain.
During each week of simulated time, you will be required to perform the following five tasks. It
is important that these tasks be completed in the order listed below and that each stage in the
supply chain complete the task simultaneously with the other stages. Note that only the final task
requires you to make a decision.
1. Deliver your beer and advance shipments. Move the beer in the Shipping Delay box (on the
right, adjacent to your Current Inventory box) into the Current Inventory box. Next, move
the beer in the other Shipping Delay box to the right to the now empty Shipping Delay box.
1Adapted from Sterman, J. “Instructions for Running the Beer Distribution Game.” Massachusetts Institute of Technology
(October 1984); Hammond, J. H. “The Beer Game: Description of Exercise,” Harvard Business School, 9-964-104.
Meridth-c06.indd 195 11/5/2015 4:07:36 PM
196 Supplement A
Meridth-c06.indd 196 11/5/2015 4:07:39 PM
Incoming
order for
retailer
Orders sold to
customer
Retailer
Current
inventory
Current
inventory
Current
inventory
OC
Order
placed by
retailer
OC
*
*
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
Wholesaler
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
Incoming
order for
wholesaler
OC
Order
placed by
wholesaler
OC
Incoming
order for
distributor
OC
Order
placed by
distributor
OC
Incoming
order for
factory
OC
Production
request
OC
Distributor
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
Factory
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* *
P.D.
P.D.S.D.S.D.S.D.
Current
inventory
S.D.S.D.S.D.
* = 1 keg, OC = order card, S.D. = shipping delay, P.D. = production delay
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* ** *
* *
* * * ** *Raw
materials
FIGURE 6SA.1 The beer game board and initial conditions.
197Supplement A
(Factories move the inventory from the Production Delay box directly to the right of the
Current Inventory box into the Current Inventory box. Then move inventory from the top
Production Delay box to the bottom Production Delay box.)
2. Pick up the incoming order from your downstream customer in your Incoming Order box at
your top left (retailers read incoming order from the consumer). Fill as much of the order as
you can from your current inventory by placing the appropriate quantity of kegs in the
Shipping Delay box directly to the left of your Current Inventory box. Quantities ordered
above your current inventory level become part of your current backlog. More specifically,
the amount to ship this week is calculated as follows:
Quantity to ship incoming order this week previous week s ’ bbacklog
3. Calculate and record in Figure 6SA.2 your ending inventory or backlog position (as a nega-
tive number). Count the number of kegs remaining in your current inventory after the ship-
ment for the week has been made. If you get into a backlog situation, the backlog must be
accumulated from week to week, since quantities ordered but not shipped must be made up.
The week’s ending backlog position is calculated as follows:
Week Inventory Order placed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Week Inventory Order placed
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
FIGURE 6SA.2 Data sheet.
Meridth-c06.indd 197 11/5/2015 4:07:41 PM
198 Supplement A
Current week s backlog previous week s backlog
incoming or
’ ’
dder shipments received this week
4. Advance your order cards. (Factories fill their production requests.) Advance the order from
the Order Placed box to the Incoming Order box (or, for the factory, read the Production
Request and fill the Production Delay box from the raw materials inventory). Make sure to
keep the order cards facedown as you move them.
5. Decide how much to order, write it down on your order card (and in Figure 6SA.2), and
place the card facedown in the Orders Placed box. Factories decide how much to schedule
for production, write it down on your order, and place the card facedown in the Production
Request box.
6. Repeat steps 1–5.
Most likely, your instructor will have the class complete one or more practice runs or go
through the first couple of weeks at a slow pace.
Meridth-c06.indd 198 11/5/2015 4:07:44 PM
part
199
part
Managing and Improving
the Process
In this final part of the book, we begin in Chapter 7 with the crucial role of monitoring
and controlling the processes that we have so carefully planned and designed in the
earlier chapters. Once again, just planning and designing the supply chain and other
processes is no guarantee of success or especially continued success. They must be
monitored for errors, inefficiencies, and improper execution on a constant basis, and
then management must intercede to correct, as well as improve, them. One of the major
ways of improving these processes is through Six Sigma projects, described in
Chapter 8 , which have their own detailed procedures that identify and rectify problems
in organizational processes. Another major way of improving processes is through the
technique of lean production, described in Chapter 9 , which reduces waste in all forms
within any type of process.
The book then concludes with a variety of cases that focus on many of the concepts
and techniques presented in the previous chapters.
Role of Operations and Supply Chains in
The Organizations’ Competitiveness
PART I: Strategy
and Execution
Chapter. 1: Operations
and Supply Chain Strategy
for Competitiveness
Chapter. 7: Monitoring
and Controlling the
Process
Chapter. 9: Process
Improvement:
Lean
Chapter. 8: Process
Improvement: Six
Sigma
PART III: Managing and
Improving the Process
Chapter. 6: Supply
Chain
Management
Chapter. 5: Supply
Chain Planning
and Analytics
Chapter. 4: Capacity
and Scheduling
Chapter. 3: Process
Planning
PART II: Process and
Supply Chain Design
Chapter. 2: Executing
Strategy: Project
Management
III
Meridth-p03.indd 199 11/5/2015 3:59:53 PM
200
chapter
7
Monitoring and Controlling
the Processes
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
Having completed the process and supply chain design steps of Part II, we now
turn to the need to manage, control, and improve these processes. With the
organization’s processes designed, they must now be implemented. The effective
and efficient execution of processes is complicated by changes that occur both
inside and outside the organization. Hence, every process must be monitored and
controlled to be sure it continues to achieve its objectives.
This chapter discusses the task of monitoring and control. It includes some dis-
cussion of the measures that will be monitored and ways to then exercise control
to correct the process. We illustrate the control process with the example of con-
trolling quality through the use of quality control charts. Other topics include well-
popularized subjects such as the balanced scorecard, strategy maps, ISO 9000
and ISO 14000, benchmarking, process capability, and service defections. After we
complete our discussion of how to plan for process monitoring and control, the
next two chapters will then delve into ways to improve these processes.
Introduction
p p
Meridth-c07.indd 200 10/29/2015 3:38:58 PM
2017.1 Monitoring and Control
7.1 Monitoring and Control
Meridth-c07.indd 201 10/29/2015 3:38:58 PM
202 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
The Soul of a New Machine
Meridth-c07.indd 202 10/29/2015 3:38:58 PM
2037.2 Process Monitoring
7.2 Process Monitoring
7.2.1 Stages of Operational Effectiveness
internally neutral
externally neutral
internally supportive
externally supportive
Meridth-c07.indd 203 10/29/2015 3:38:58 PM
204 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
7.2.2 Balanced Scorecard
■ TABLE 7.1 Measures for Operational Effectiveness
Stage Measures
Internally neutral The objective is to minimize operations negative potential.
Firefighting is common.
Outside experts are called in for strategic decisions.
Operations is primarily reactive.
Externally neutral Industry practice is followed.
The aim is to achieve competitive parity.
Internally supportive Operations investments support the business strategy.
An operations strategy is formulated and pursued.
Externally supportive Operations is involved upfront in major strategic decisions.
The aim is to achieve a competitive advantage through operations.
The goal is to achieve competitive superiority.
Meridth-c07.indd 204 10/29/2015 3:38:58 PM
2057.2 Process Monitoring
Meridth-c07.indd 205 10/29/2015 3:38:58 PM
206 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
7.2.3 The Strategy Map
Increase
sales/ft2
Improved
selling skills
Friendly and
courteous sales
associates
Provide training
to sales
associates
Happier sales
associates
Stronger relationships
between customers
and associates
Increase
inventory turns
Revenue growth strategy
Financial
perspective
Customer
perspective
Internal
business
process
perspective
Learning
and growth
perspective
Productivity improvement strategy
Less
turnover—more
experienced
associates
Improve store performance (ROI)
FIGURE 7.1
Sample strategy map for
a department store.
Meridth-c07.indd 206 10/29/2015 3:38:59 PM
2077.2 Process Monitoring
7.2.4 ISO 9000 and 14000
Source
Meridth-c07.indd 207 10/29/2015 3:38:59 PM
208 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
7.2.5 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Risk Priority Number N S
6.
■ TABLE 7.2 FMEA for a New Fast-Food Concept
Potential ways to fail S L D RPN
Inadequate training 8 4 5 160
Weak marketing 6 3 8 144
Poor location 7 5 3 105
Defective concept 9 3 3 81
Local restaurant regulation change 3 5 8 120
Competitors’ reactions (e.g., price, ads) 4 6 4 96
Meridth-c07.indd 208 10/29/2015 3:39:00 PM
2097.3 Process Control
7.3 Process Control
Meridth-c07.indd 209 10/29/2015 3:39:00 PM
210 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
7.3.1 Statistical Process Control
measuring existence
characteristic
1. inspection for variables
scaled
2. characteristic inspection of attributes
dichotomous
need
control charts
chance variation
assignable variation
exactly
normal distribution
population
samples
represent
rational subgroup
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LCL
Mean
UCL
99.74% 0.13%
Sample number
S
a
m
p
le
m
e
a
n
v
a
lu
e
FIGURE 7.2
Control chart with the
limits set at three
standard deviations.
Meridth-c07.indd 210 10/29/2015 3:39:00 PM
2117.3 Process Control
too high too low
when
the process is actually still under control
upper control limit
lower control limit
management by exception
sample mean
three standard deviations
variables measured characteristics
1. sample means X
2. range R
X R X R X = R
■ TABLE 7.3 Sample Data of Process Times (minutes)
Sample Scenario 1 Scenario 2
1 4, 5, 6 5, 4, 6
2 6, 7, 8 3, 5, 7
3 7, 9, 8 8, 2, 5
Meridth-c07.indd 211 10/29/2015 3:39:01 PM
212 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
X = R
X R X R
a
X
R b
R X
never
X
X
X
X
X
A R
A R
R
R
D R
D R
A D D
Process variable, X
F
re
q
u
e
n
cy
April 3
April 4
April 5
Process variable, X
F
re
q
u
e
n
cy
October 30
November 30
December 30
(a) (b)
FIGURE 7.3
Patterns of change in
process distributions.
Meridth-c07.indd 212 10/29/2015 3:39:02 PM
2137.3 Process Control
7.3.2 Constructing Control Charts
n
X
X
X
N
N
R
R
N
■ TABLE 7.4 Control Chart Factors to Determine Control Limits
Sample size, n A D D
2 1.880 0 3.267
3 1.023 0 2.575
4 0.729 0 2.282
5 0.577 0 2.115
6 0.483 0 2.004
7 0.419 0.076 1.924
8 0.373 0.136 1.864
9 0.337 0.184 1.816
10 0.308 0.223 1.777
12 0.266 0.284 1.716
14 0.235 0.329 1.671
16 0.212 0.364 1.636
18 0.194 0.392 1.608
20 0.180 0.414 1.586
22 0.167 0.434 1.566
24 0.157 0.452 1.548
Meridth-c07.indd 213 10/29/2015 3:39:03 PM
214 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
A D D n
X
X
R
R
X R
X R
■ TABLE 7.5 Mean and Range of Ages of Mortgage Applications
A B C
1 Sample Sample
2 Date mean range
3 June 1 10 18
4 June 2 13 13
5 June 3 11 15
6 June 4 14 14
7 June 5 9 14
8 June 6 11 10
9 June 7 8 15
10 June 8 12 17
11 June 9 13 9
12 June 10 10 16
13 June 11 13 12
14 June 12 12 14
15 June 13 8 13
16 June 14 11 15
17 June 15 11 11
18 June 16 9 14
19 June 17 10 13
20 June 18 9 19
21 June 19 12 14
22 June 20 14 14
23 Average 11 14
Meridth-c07.indd 214 10/29/2015 3:39:04 PM
2157.3 Process Control
1 5 10
Day of June
Sample means,
Grand mean
15 20
LCL
UCL
X
0.8
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
M
e
a
n
m
o
rt
g
a
g
e
a
p
p
li
ca
ti
o
n
a
g
e
,
X
(
d
a
y
s)
X
FIGURE 7.4
Mean mortgage
application age.
1 5 10
Day of June
Sample ranges, R
Average range
R
a
n
g
e
i
n
m
o
rt
g
a
g
e
a
p
p
li
ca
ti
o
n
a
g
e
s,
R
(
d
a
y
s)
15 20
LCL
UCL
R
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
FIGURE 7.5
Range in mortgage
application age.
fraction-defective
p-chart number-of-defects c-chart
p dichotomous
p X
p
Meridth-c07.indd 215 10/29/2015 3:39:05 PM
216 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
even one
binomial bi
p
p
p p
n
n
np n p
p
c
c
Poisson distribution
c c
7.4 Controlling Service Quality
Meridth-c07.indd 216 10/29/2015 3:39:06 PM
2177.4 Controlling Service Quality
7.4.1 Service Defections
Harvard Business Review
Meridth-c07.indd 217 10/29/2015 3:39:06 PM
218 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. p
p
8.
9.
10.
■ INVESTOR’S FRIEND
Investor’s Friend
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
Meridth-c07.indd 218 10/29/2015 3:39:06 PM
219Apply Your Understanding
Questions
Year
Number
of new
subscribers
Number of
renewals
Total
subscriber
revenues
Advertiser
revenues
Production
cost
Advertising
cost
20X1 531 0 10,620 0 12,444 3109
20X2 163 482 13,595 2124 12,802 2817
20X3 210 571 17,783 3509 14,311 3055
20X4 228 706 21,227 4788 17,975 2478
■ SAMMY’S JUMBO FRANKS
Investors Friend’s
Meridth-c07.indd 219 10/29/2015 3:39:06 PM
220 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
1 First shift
2 Sample number
3 Observation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4 1 4.90 5.05 4.96 4.92 4.96 5.03 4.99 5.00 5.02 5.03 5.01 4.95 5.02 4.96 5.06
5 2 5.03 5.04 4.96 5.00 5.00 4.99 5.03 5.01 5.05 4.90 4.94 4.95 4.95 4.97 4.97
6 3 5.00 5.00 4.92 5.05 5.03 4.98 5.01 4.95 5.00 4.95 5.00 5.06 5.00 4.93 5.00
7 4 5.03 5.11 5.01 5.03 4.98 4.99 5.02 5.01 5.01 5.01 5.00 5.02 4.98 5.01 5.00
8 5 5.02 4.94 4.98 5.01 5.00 4.98 5.01 4.99 5.03 5.01 4.96 4.94 5.04 5.00 5.03
9 6 4.92 5.02 5.00 5.02 5.02 5.01 4.99 4.98 5.00 4.94 4.98 4.99 5.02 5.04 5.08
10 7 5.04 5.03 4.98 5.02 5.00 4.99 5.06 4.96 5.01 4.98 5.01 4.97 4.99 4.98 4.97
11 8 4.92 5.00 5.00 4.96 5.01 5.01 5.05 5.00 4.97 4.98 4.97 4.97 5.05 5.08 4.98
12 9 4.95 4.95 4.94 5.02 4.95 4.98 4.97 4.94 5.07 5.00 5.00 4.96 5.02 4.94 5.00
13 10 5.02 4.99 5.08 4.94 5.00 4.95 5.04 4.98 5.02 5.01 4.98 5.02 5.06 5.02 4.97
14 Average 4.98 5.01 4.98 5.00 5.00 4.99 5.02 4.98 5.02 4.98 4.99 4.98 5.01 4.99 5.01
15
16
17 Second shift
18 Sample number
19 Observation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20 1 5.03 5.02 4.99 4.96 5.03 5.02 5.08 5.10 5.16 5.00 4.97 5.11 5.11 4.90 5.02
21 2 4.90 4.95 4.97 4.97 4.98 5.03 4.97 4.93 4.92 4.97 4.91 5.05 4.98 4.92 4.98
22 3 5.02 4.94 5.04 4.98 5.00 4.98 4.93 4.92 4.99 5.08 5.15 4.93 5.13 4.97 4.86
23 4 4.98 5.05 5.02 5.00 4.97 5.06 4.84 4.93 5.00 5.07 4.96 5.15 5.15 4.92 4.94
24 5 5.01 4.95 5.02 5.02 4.98 5.04 5.07 5.03 4.98 4.94 4.91 4.98 5.10 5.04 4.93
25 6 4.99 4.99 4.99 5.03 5.00 5.04 4.95 4.96 4.99 4.96 5.07 4.88 5.12 5.03 4.97
26 7 4.99 4.97 5.00 4.98 4.99 4.99 4.93 4.86 5.01 5.13 5.15 4.74 5.01 4.91 5.05
27 8 5.02 5.00 5.00 4.96 4.98 4.98 4.99 5.08 5.07 4.93 4.95 4.90 4.93 4.95 4.97
28 9 5.01 5.00 5.05 5.02 5.03 4.97 4.82 4.96 4.93 4.96 4.91 5.03 5.04 4.98 5.03
29 10 4.97 4.99 4.95 5.03 5.00 4.99 5.05 5.14 5.03 4.91 5.11 5.04 5.03 5.08 4.92
30 Average 4.99 4.99 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.01 4.96 4.99 5.01 5.00 5.01 4.98 5.06 4.97 4.97
Questions
Meridth-c07.indd 220 10/29/2015 3:39:08 PM
221Apply Your Understanding
■ KOALA TECH, LTD.
I received Nancy’s memo yesterday and, frankly, the problem
with the PFS 1000 does not surprise me. One of the problems
we’ve had in final assembly is with the casing. Basically, the
case is composed of a top and a bottom. The problem we are
having is that these pieces rarely fit together, so we typically
have to force them together. I’m sure this is adding a lot of
extra stress on the cases. I haven’t seen a breakdown on
what the problems with quality are, but it wouldn’t surprise
me if one of the problems was cracked cases or cases that are
coming apart. I should also mention that we never had this
problem with our old supplier. However, when purchasing
determined that we could save over $A1 per unit, we
switched to a new supplier for the cases.
We are having an extremely difficult time making the printed
circuit boards for the PFS 1000. The designers placed the
components closer together than this generation of equip-
ment was designed to handle. As a result, the leads of the
components are constantly being bent. I doubt that more
than 25 percent of the boards have all their components
installed properly. As a result, we are spending a great deal
of time inspecting all the boards and reworking the ones with
problems. Also, because of the huge backlog for these boards
and the large number that must be reworked, we have been
trying to operate the equipment 20 percent faster than its
normal operating rate. This has caused the machine to break
down much more frequently. I estimate that on a given
8-hour shift, the machine is down 1 to 2 hours.
In terms of your job—to determine the cause of the problems
with quality—faulty circuit boards are very likely a key con-
tributor. We are doing our best to find and correct all the
defects, but inspecting and reworking the boards is a very
tedious process, and the employees are putting in a lot of
extra hours. In addition, we are under enormous pressure to
get the boards to final assembly. My biggest regret is that I
didn’t have more input when they were building the proto-
types of the PFS 1000. The prototypes are all built by highly
trained technicians using primarily a manual process.
Unfortunately, the prototypes are built only to give the engi-
neers feedback on their designs. Had they shown some peo-
ple in production the prototypes, we could have made
suggestions on changes that would have made the design
easier to produce.
Meridth-c07.indd 221 10/29/2015 3:39:08 PM
222 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
The fact of the matter is that switching suppliers for the
cases saved $A1.04 per unit. That may not sound like a lot,
but multiply that by the 125,000 units we are expecting to
sell this year, and it turns out to be pretty significant. Those
guys in production think the world revolves around them. I
am, however, sympathetic to their problems, and I plan on
discussing the problem with the supplier the next time we
meet. That should be sometime next month.
So you are here to investigate our little quality snafu. The
pressure that we are under here in engineering is the need
to shrink things down. Two years ago fax machines, print-
ers, scanners, and copiers were all separate pieces of
equipment. Now, with the introduction of the PFS 1000, all
this functionality is included in one piece of equipment not
much larger than the original printer. That means design
tolerances are going to be a lot tighter and the product is
going to be more difficult to manufacture. But the fact of
the matter is that manufacturing is going to have to get its
act together if we are going to survive. The engineering
department did its job. We designed a state-of-the-art piece
of office equipment, and the prototypes we built proved that
the design works. It’s now up to the manufacturing guys to
figure out how to produce it. We have done all that we can
and should be expected to do.
My biggest challenge as director of quality assurance is try-
ing to convince the rest of the organization of the importance
quality plays. Sure, everyone gives lip service to the impor-
tance of quality, but as the end of the month approaches,
getting the product out the door is always the highest prior-
ity. Also, while I am officially held accountable for quality,
I have no formal authority over the production workers. The
quality inspectors that report to me do little more than
inspect product and tag it if it doesn’t meet the specifications
so that it is sent to the rework area. In all honesty, I am quite
optimistic about Nancy’s current concern for quality and
very much welcome the opportunity to work closely with you
to improve Koala Tech’s quality initiatives.
Questions
Meridth-c07.indd 222 10/29/2015 3:39:09 PM
223Exercises
E X E R C I S E S
7.1
7.2
7.3
X
Month
Average of 10 days of
deposits (£100,000)
June 0.93
July 1.05
August 1.21
September 0.91
October 0.89
November 1.13
7.4
Week Demand (six packs)
1 3500
2 4100
3 3750
4 4300
5 4000
6 3650
7.5
7.6
Day of sample Sample values
Saturday 22, 19, 20
Sunday 21, 20, 17
Monday 16, 17, 18
Tuesday 20, 16, 21
Wednesday 23, 20, 20
Thursday 19, 16, 21
7.7 p
Day
Number of
cases picked
Number of
incorrect picks
1 4700 38
2 5100 49
3 3800 27
4 4100 31
5 4500 42
6 5200 48
Meridth-c07.indd 223 10/29/2015 3:39:09 PM
224 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes
Day
Number of
cases picked
Number of
incorrect picks
7 100 1
8 100 2
9 100 4
7.8
X p c
7.9 p
Sample number Number of defects
1 2
2 0
3 8
4 5
5 8
6 4
7 4
8 2
9 9
10 2
11 3
12 0
13 5
14 6
15 7
16 1
17 5
18 8
19 2
20 1
7.10
p
7.11
Meridth-c07.indd 224 10/29/2015 3:39:10 PM
225
chapter
8
Process Improvement: Six Sigma
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
While controlling the processes as described in Chapter 7 , it is often determined
that there are opportunities to improve the process. Thus, the focus of this chapter
is on the redesign and continuous improvement of business processes in support
of the overall business strategy. To put our discussion in perspective, we begin
with an overview of three alternative approaches for process improvement. We
then turn our attention to the first process improvement strategy, Business Process
Design.
This is then followed by a detailed discussion of the second process improve-
ment strategy, Six Sigma. Next, each phase in Six Sigma ’ s DMAIC approach is
discussed in more detail, including illustrating the use of representative Six Sigma
tools in each phase. The chapter concludes with a discussion of Six Sigma in
practice. Here, we discuss the various roles associated with Six Sigma, becoming
certified, and the need for organizations to customize their approach to Six Sigma
training and implementation. In the next chapter, we then continue our discussion
of process improvement strategies and address the third process improvement
strategy, namely, lean. The trend toward integrating Six Sigma and lean will also be
discussed in the next chapter.
Introduction
Meridth-c08.indd 225 10/29/2015 3:40:47 PM
226 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
Meridth-c08.indd 226 10/29/2015 3:40:48 PM
227Introduction
It is reasonable to guess that the next CEO of this Company, decades down the road, is probably a Six
Sigma Black Belt or Master Black Belt somewhere in GE right now, or on the verge of being offered—
as all our early-career (3–5 years) top 20% performers will be—a two- to three-year Black Belt
assignment. The generic nature of a Black Belt assignment, in addition to its rigorous process disci-
pline and relentless customer focus, makes Six Sigma the perfect training for growing 21st century GE
leadership.
■ TABLE 8.1 Examples of Six Sigma Training and Benefits
Company Time period
Number of
master black
belts trained
Number of
black belts
trained
Number of
green belts
trained
Monetary
benefits from
Six Sigma ($M)
Air Canada 2002–2005 11 51 1200 $450
American Express 2002 $200
American Standard 2000–2004 44 673 4302 $170
Cummins 2000–2005 65 500 $1000
Merrill Lynch 2001–2005 20 406 874
Sun Microsystems 2000–2005 6 122 207 $1170
Tyco International 2002–2005 263 870 $800
Meridth-c08.indd 227 10/29/2015 3:40:49 PM
228 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
8.1 Approaches for Process Improvement
Is the
process
fundamentally
flawed or being
designed?
What is the
nature of the
problem?
No
Yes
Business Process
Design or design for
Six Sigma
Six Sigma (DMAIC)
Too much variation
Too much
waste
Lean
FIGURE 8.1
Alternative process
design and
improvement strategies.
Meridth-c08.indd 228 10/29/2015 3:40:50 PM
2298.2 Business Process Design (Reengineering)
8.2 Business Process Design (Reengineering)
reengineering
paving cow paths
First
second
quantum incremental
third
The Reengineering Revolution
radical redesign processes dramatic
radical redesign process dramatic
radical
profoundly
superficial
reinventing
redesign
Meridth-c08.indd 229 10/29/2015 3:40:50 PM
230 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
process
process centered
dramatic
Credit
department
Business
practices
department
Order logged Pricer AdministratorFIGURE 8.2
Processing credit
requests at IBM credit.
Meridth-c08.indd 230 10/29/2015 3:40:50 PM
2318.3 Six Sigma and the DMAIC Improvement Process
deal structurer
8.3 Six Sigma and the DMAIC Improvement Process
sigma
six Six Sigma
The Six Sigma Way
a comprehensive and flexible system for achieving, sustaining and maximizing business success. Six
Sigma is uniquely driven by close understanding of customer needs, disciplined use of facts, data,
and statistical analysis, and diligent attention to managing, improving, and reinventing business
processes. (p. xi)
Meridth-c08.indd 231 10/29/2015 3:40:50 PM
232 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
define, measure, analyze, improve, and control
DMAIC
8.3.1 Example Six Sigma Project
Meridth-c08.indd 232 10/29/2015 3:40:51 PM
2338.3 Six Sigma and the DMAIC Improvement Process
Goals for process improvement
Customer requirements
Project scope
The problem/opportunity
Define:
Identify appropriate performance
measures
Collect data
Evaluate current process performance
Develop and test theories related to
root causes of problems
Identify cause-and-effect relationships
Develop, evaluate, and implement
solutions to reduce gap between
desired process performance and
current performance
Monitor process to sustain improved
performance
Ensure that problems do not
resurface
Improve:
Control:
Measure:
Analyze:
FIGURE 8.3
The six sigma DMAIC
approach for process
improvement.
Meridth-c08.indd 233 10/29/2015 3:40:53 PM
234 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
■ TABLE 8.2 Common Tools and Methodologies in the Six Sigma Toolkit
Six Sigma tool/methodology DMAIC phase(s) most commonly used in
Affinity diagram D, A
Benchmarking D, M
Brainstorming A, I
Business case D
Cause-and-effect diagrams M, A
Control charts M, A, I, C
Critical to quality tree D
Data collection forms M, A, I, C
Data mining M
Design for Six Sigma (DFSS) An entire collection of tools/methodologies that
can be used across all phases
Design of experiments (DOE) A, I
Defects per million opportunities (DPMO) M
Failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA) M, I, C
Gantt chart Tool used to manage entire DMAIC project
Kano model D, M
Lean tools An entire collection of tools/methodologies that
can be used across all phases
Measurement systems analysis (gage R&R) M
Nominal group technique D, M
Pareto analysis D, M, A, I
Process capability M, A, I
Process maps D, M, A, I, C
Process sigma M, I
Project charter D
Quality function deployment (QFD) D, M
Regression A
Rolled throughput yield (RTY) D, M, A
Simulation A, I
SIPOC D
Stakeholder analysis D, I
Theory of constraints (TOC) One of the lean tools
Voice of the customer (VOC) D
Meridth-c08.indd 234 10/29/2015 3:40:54 PM
2358.4 The Define Phase
8.4 The Define Phase
8.4.1 Benchmarking
benchmarking
regardless of industry
published data
original research
Meridth-c08.indd 235 10/29/2015 3:40:54 PM
236 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
stretch goals
8.4.2 Quality Function Deployment
houses of quality
Broad Overview of QFD
voice of the customer (VOC)
Process
deployment
matrix
Process
activities
P
ro
ce
ss
re
q
u
ir
e
m
e
n
ts
Process
planning
matrix
Process
requirements
C
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
ch
a
ra
ct
e
ri
st
ic
s
Output
specification
matrix
Component
characteristics
T
e
ch
n
ic
a
l
re
q
u
ir
e
m
e
n
ts
Output
planning
matrix
Technical
requirements
V
o
ic
e
o
f
cu
st
o
m
e
r
FIGURE 8.4
Quality function
deployment process.
Meridth-c08.indd 236 10/29/2015 3:40:55 PM
2378.4 The Define Phase
House of Quality Details
Meridth-c08.indd 237 10/29/2015 3:40:55 PM
238 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
8.5 The Measure Phase
1 2 3
Competitive
evaluation
4 51 2 3
Importance
ratings
Technical requirements
F
o
o
d
c
o
rr
e
ct
t
e
m
p
e
ra
tu
re
4 5
95
87
88
4
A
v
e
ra
g
e
m
e
a
l
p
ri
ce
<
$
4
85
90
87
2
C
o
rr
e
ct
o
rd
e
r
98
86
84
12
F
o
o
d
d
e
li
v
e
re
d
i
n
<
1
m
in
90
78
83
10
C
le
a
n
B
R
a
n
d
e
a
ti
n
g
a
re
a
s
95
77
75
4
C
o
u
rt
e
o
u
s
st
a
ff
95
82
87
10
L
im
it
f
o
o
d
s
h
ig
h
i
n
f
a
t
a
n
d
c
a
rb
s
92
70
80
10
P
ro
p
e
rl
y
t
ra
in
e
d
f
o
o
d
p
re
p
a
re
rs
95
80
82
15
U
se
q
u
a
li
ty
i
n
g
re
d
ie
n
ts
85
70
70
18
U
se
f
re
sh
i
n
g
re
d
ie
n
ts
Food that tastes good
Voice of the customer
Strong relationship
Food that is reasonably nutritious
Friendly employees
Clean restaurant
Short wait for food
Get what I ordered
Reasonable price
Moderate relationship
Weak relationship
90
70
75
15
Strong positive
Positive
Negative
Strong negative
Target values
Competitive evaluation:
Competitor A
Competitor B
Importance weights
Competitor A
Competitor B
Us
FIGURE 8.5
Example output
planning matrix for
fast-food restaurant
chain.
Meridth-c08.indd 238 10/29/2015 3:40:55 PM
2398.5 The Measure Phase
defects per million opportunities (DPMO)
8.5.1 Defects per Million Opportunities (DPMO)
defects per unit DPU
number of defects per
opportunity DPO
Meridth-c08.indd 239 10/29/2015 3:40:56 PM
240 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
200
100 33
0 06.
Hotel reservation Name entered incorrectly
Wrong date of arrival entered
Wrong departure date entered
Error entering credit card number or expiration date
Wrong address entered
Incorrect number of people staying in room entered
Wrong room reserved (e.g., smoking versus nonsmoking, number of beds)
Incorrect number of baby cribs reserved
Wrong room rate entered
Check-in Lost reservation
Excessive wait
Defective or wrong room key
Desk staff not courteous
No baggage carts available
Room cleaning Dirty shower
Dirty linens
Dirty sink
Carpet not vacuumed
Trash cans not emptied
Room supplies No clean towels
No toilet paper
No shampoo/hand soap
TV Cable out
No remote control/remote control defective
Room service Late food order
Missing items
Billed incorrectly
Food not prepared properly
Food is cold
Checkout Incorrect charge for room service
Incorrect telephone charges
Excessive wait for desk clerk
Excessive wait for bell captain
FIGURE 8.6 Defect opportunities associated with a stay at a hotel.
Meridth-c08.indd 240 10/29/2015 3:40:56 PM
2418.5 The Measure Phase
200
100 7
0 29.
100
10 000 5
0 002
,
.
100
10 000 25
0 0004
,
.
8.5.2 Measurement Systems Analysis
Meridth-c08.indd 241 10/29/2015 3:40:57 PM
242 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
T p m
2 2 2
T
p
2
2
,
m
2
■ TABLE 8.3 Systolic Blood Pressure Values
for Sample of Male Diabetic Patients
Patient Systolic blood pressure
S. Jones 123
K. Smith 106
T. Carter 136
F. Lance 145
J. Porter 153
L. Davis 157
H. Johnson 101
R. Jones 124
G. Scott 152
B. Regan 108
Average 130.5
Std. dev. 21.0
Variance 442.9
Measurement
system variation
(σ )
2
m
Process variation
(σ )
2
p
Total variation
(σ = 442.9)
2
T
FIGURE 8.7
Components of total
process variation.
Meridth-c08.indd 242 10/29/2015 3:40:58 PM
2438.6 The Analyze Phase
S
T
T p m
2 2
measurement systems
analysis
1. Bias
2. Linearity
3. Stability
8.6 The Analyze Phase
Meridth-c08.indd 243 10/29/2015 3:40:58 PM
244 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
8.6.1 Brainstorming
1.
2.
3.
4.
1. Social loafing
2. Conformity
3. Production blocking
4. Downward norm setting
Meridth-c08.indd 244 10/29/2015 3:40:58 PM
2458.6 The Analyze Phase
Create diversified teams
Use analogical reasoning
Use brainwriting
Use the nominal group technique
Record team ideas
Use trained facilitators to run the brainstorming session
Set high standards
Change the composition of the team
Use electronic brainstorming
Make the workplace a playground
Meridth-c08.indd 245 10/29/2015 3:40:58 PM
246 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
8.6.2 Cause-and-Effect Diagrams
8.6.3 Process Capability Analysis
Shared
staffing
Additional
activities
Pullout
programs
Lack of
funding
Lack of
coordination and
communication
Special
education
Reading
Math
State
mandates
Lack of
teaching time
in grade 5
No priority for
classroom
instruction time
SchedulingStaffing
FIGURE 8.8
Fishbone diagram to
analyze the problem of
insufficient time being
spent covering the
curriculum.
Source: Adapted from
R. Manley and J. Manley.
“Sharing the Wealth: TQM
Spreads from Business to
Education.” Quality
Progress (June 1996),
pp. 51–55.
Meridth-c08.indd 246 10/29/2015 3:40:59 PM
2478.6 The Analyze Phase
1.
2.
3.
4.
a
b
c
d
process capability index
C
p
Cp 6
Design specification Design specification
Design specification Design specification
(a)
(c)
Natural variation in
process
Natural variation in
process
(b)
(d )
Natural variation in
process
Natural variation in
process
FIGURE 8.9
Natural variation in a
production system
versus product design
specifications.
Meridth-c08.indd 247 10/29/2015 3:40:59 PM
248 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
σ
Cp
Cp
Cp Six Sigma quality
Cp
Cp a
Design specification
range
LSL USL
Process
mean
+ 3σ
(a)
– 3σ
LSL USL
LSL USL
Process
mean
Process
mean
+ 3σ
(b)
(c)
– 3σ
+ 3σ– 3σ
Design specification
range
Design specification
range
FIGURE 8.10
Effect of production
system variability on
process capability index.
(a) C
p
1.6; (b) C
p
0.8;
and (c) C
p
1.0.
Meridth-c08.indd 248 10/29/2015 3:41:00 PM
2498.7 The Improve Phase
C
p
b
Cp c
Cp
a d Cp
d
While beyond our scope, we note that this limitation is easily addressed by using a
one-sided capability index
8.7 The Improve Phase
8.7.1 Design of Experiments
Meridth-c08.indd 249 10/29/2015 3:41:01 PM
250 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
Determining which factors to include in the experiment
Specifying the levels for each factor
Determining how much data to collect
Determining the type of experimental design
■ TABLE 8.4 Representative Factors and Their Levels for a Stress Test Study
Factor Levels
Method used to order stress test Fax; Web
Method used to schedule patient
appointments
Fixed time appointments; patients given a time
window
Method used to educate patients about
stress test
Information sheet; phone call from nurse; in-person
meeting with nurse
Dictation technology Tape recorder and transcriber; speech recognition
Meridth-c08.indd 250 10/29/2015 3:41:01 PM
2518.9 Six Sigma in Practice
Taguchi Methods
8.8 The Control Phase
8.9 Six Sigma in Practice
8.9.1 Six Sigma Roles
Master Black Belts
Black Belts
Green Belts
Meridth-c08.indd 251 10/29/2015 3:41:01 PM
252 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
Yellow Belts
Champions/Sponsors
Process owners
8.9.2 Becoming Certified
8.9.3 The Need to Customize Six Sigma Programs
Meridth-c08.indd 252 10/29/2015 3:41:01 PM
253
t
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
■ THREE DOT FOUR CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
Apply Your Understanding
Meridth-c08.indd 253 10/29/2015 3:41:01 PM
254 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
Questions
■ TABLE 1 Summary of Loan Approval Fairness Study
Loan officer 1 Loan officer 2 Loan officer 3
Loan Expert panel 01/01/2005 02/01/2005 01/01/2005 02/01/2005 01/01/2005 02/01/2005
1 A A A A A A A
2 R R R R R R A
3 A A A A A A A
4 A R R R R R R
5 R R R R R R R
6 R R R A A R R
7 A A A A R A A
8 R R R R R R R
Meridth-c08.indd 254 10/29/2015 3:41:02 PM
255
■ VALLEY COUNTY MEDICAL CLINIC
■ TABLE 2 Online Mortgage Application Submissions, January 2005
Web page Number of hits Number submitted Number of errors
Personal information 108,571 68,400 45,144
Property, loan, and expense information 68,400 62,928 22,025
Employment information 62,928 59,781 28,695
Asset and liability information 59,781 52,009 51,489
Loan officer 1 Loan officer 2 Loan officer 3
Loan Expert panel 01/01/2005 02/01/2005 01/01/2005 02/01/2005 01/01/2005 02/01/2005
9 A A R R R A R
10 R R R R R R R
11 R R R R R R R
12 A A A A A A A
13 A A A A R A A
14 R R R R R R R
15 R R R A R R R
16 A A A A A A A
17 A A A R A A A
18 A A A A A A A
19 R R R R R R R
20 R R R R A R R
21 R R A R A R A
22 A A A A A A A
23 A R R R R R R
24 A A R A R R R
25 A A A A A R A
A = Loan approved.
R = Loan not approved.
Apply Your Understanding
Meridth-c08.indd 255 10/29/2015 3:41:02 PM
256 Process Improvement: Six Sigma
Questions
8.1
Number of defects/call Frequency
1 73
2 13
3 3
4 1
5 0
8.2
8.3
E X E R C I S E S
Meridth-c08.indd 256 10/29/2015 3:41:02 PM
257
Decal characteristic Number of defects observed
Color accuracy 10
Image alignment 7
Color consistency 8
Image sharpness 3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Exercises
Meridth-c08.indd 257 10/29/2015 3:41:03 PM
258
chapter
Process Improvement: Lean
CHAPTER IN PERSPECTIVE
As an organization monitors its processes, opportunities may be identified to im-
prove these processes either by completely redesigning the process through
Business Process Design or reducing the variation inherent in the process through
Six Sigma, as described in Chapter 8 . In this chapter, we discuss another approach
for process improvement that seeks to minimize waste and maximize value.
More specifically, “lean management” has taken on the aura of a global com-
petitive philosophy because so many firms that embrace it have been so success-
ful: Toyota, Deere, and numerous others. We first address the history and philoso-
phy of lean and then make a comparison between traditional production systems
and lean enterprises. Following this, we continue with a discussion of five lean
principles: (1) specify value from the customer ’ s point of view, (2) identify the value
stream, (3) make value flow, (4) have the customer pull value, and (5) pursue per-
fection. The chapter concludes with a discussion of the benefits associated with
lean and Lean Six Sigma.
Introduction
9
Meridth-c09.indd 258 10/29/2015 3:42:35 PM
259Introduction
Meridth-c09.indd 259 10/29/2015 3:42:35 PM
260 Process Improvement: Lean
lean
Meridth-c09.indd 260 10/29/2015 3:42:35 PM
2619.1 History and Philosophy of Lean
Lean Thinking
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9.1 History and Philosophy of Lean
Lean production synchronous manufacturing lean
Meridth-c09.indd 261 10/29/2015 3:42:35 PM
262 Process Improvement: Lean
1.
2.
3.
9.1.1 Traditional Systems Compared with Lean
Priorities
not
Meridth-c09.indd 262 10/29/2015 3:42:35 PM
2639.1 History and Philosophy of Lean
Product/Service Design
■ TABLE 9.1 Comparison of Traditional Systems and Lean
Characteristic Traditional Lean
Priorities Accept all orders
Many options
Limited market
Few options
Low cost, high quality
Product/service
design
Customized outputs
Design from scratch
Standardized outputs
Incremental design
Simplify, design for manufacturing
Capacity Highly utilized
Inflexible
Moderately utilized
Flexible
Transformation system Job shop Flow shops, cellular manufacturing
Layout Large space
Material‐handling equipment
Small space
Close, manual transfer
Workforce Narrow skills
Specialized
Individualized
Competitive attitude
Change by edict
Easy pace
Status: symbols, pay, privilege
Broad skills
Flexible
Work teams
Cooperative attitude
Change by consensus
Hard pace
No status differentials
Scheduling Long setups
Long runs
Quick changeovers
Mixed model runs
Inventories Large WIP buffers
Stores, cribs, stockrooms
Small WIP buffers
Floor stock
Suppliers Many competitive
Deliveries to central receiving area
Independent forecasts
Few or single sourced
Cooperative, network
Deliveries directly to assembly line
Shared forecasts
Planning and control Planning‐oriented complex
Computerized
Control oriented
Simple
Visual
Quality Via inspection
Critical points
Acceptance sampling
At the source
Continuous
Statistical process control
Maintenance Corrective
By experts
Run equipment fast
Run one shift
Preventive
By operator
Run equipment slowly
Run 24 hours
Meridth-c09.indd 263 10/29/2015 3:42:36 PM
264 Process Improvement: Lean
design for manufacturability
design for assembly
Layout
spaghetti chart
Workforce
are
Inventories
Meridth-c09.indd 264 10/29/2015 3:42:36 PM
2659.1 History and Philosophy of Lean
Suppliers
single sourcing
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $$ $ $ $ $ $
$ $
$ $
$
$
$
FIGURE 9.1 Lowering
inventory investment to
expose problems.
Meridth-c09.indd 265 10/29/2015 3:42:37 PM
266 Process Improvement: Lean
Planning and Control
into
Quality
9.2 Specify Value and Identify the Value Stream
Meridth-c09.indd 266 10/29/2015 3:42:37 PM
2679.2 Specify Value and Identify the Value Stream
muda
1. Overproduction
2. Inventory
3. Waiting
4. Unnecessary transport
5. Unnecessary processing
6. Unnecessary human motions
7. Defects
Meridth-c09.indd 267 10/29/2015 3:42:37 PM
268 Process Improvement: Lean
9.2.1 Identify the Value Stream
its
Monday
National
Steel, Inc. Weekly
fax
Steel coils
Coils
15 days
1000 tops
1000 bottoms
100 tops
100 bottoms
160 tops
160 bottoms
10 hours16 hours16 hours16 hours15 days
5 seconds 3 seconds 5 minutes 3 minutes 8 minutes
Cutting Stamping Welding Drilling Assembly
I I I I
Production
control
Weekly production
schedule
Weekly
fax Allied
Computer, Inc.ERP
Monday
C/T = 5 seconds
C/O = 30 minutes
Uptime = 87%
C/T = 3 seconds
C/O = 1.5 hours
Uptime = 85%
C/T = 5 minutes
C/O = 10 minutes
Uptime = 90%
C/T = 3 minutes
C/O = 20 minutes
Uptime = 90%
C/T = 10 minutes
C/O = 0
Uptime = 100%
Production
Lead time
Value-added
time
= 22.3
days
= 16.1
minutes
50 tops
50 bottoms
I
FIGURE 9.2 As‐is value stream map for metal case contract manufacturer.
Source: Adapted from www.mamtc.com
Meridth-c09.indd 268 10/29/2015 3:42:38 PM
2699.2 Specify Value and Identify the Value Stream
■ TABLE 9.2 Commonly Used Value Stream Symbols
Value Stream Map Symbol Description Use
Customer/
Supplier
Customer/Supplier When in upper left represents a
supplier. When in upper right
represents a customer. Supplier
or customer name entered
inside symbol.
Frequency
External Shipment Used to represent shipments
from a supplier or to a customer.
The frequency of the shipment is
often entered inside the symbol.
Shipments Block arrows used to show the
movement of raw materials and
finished goods.
Inventory Used to show inventory between
stages in the process. The
amount of inventory and a
description of what is being
stored is often entered below
the symbol.
Process
Process This symbol represents a
process, operation, machine, or
department that material flows
through.
C/T =
C/O =
Avail =
Data Box Data Boxes are used with other
symbols to provide additional
information. They most
frequently are used with Process
symbols. Information frequently
captured about a process
includes its cycle time (C/T),
changeover time (C/O), uptime,
available capacity, batch size,
and scrap rate.
VA VA VA
NVA NVA
Timeline A timeline is often placed at the
bottom of the value stream map
to show value added (VA) and
non‐value‐added (NVA) time.
Production
Control
Production Control The Production Control symbol is
used to capture how production
is scheduled and controlled.
Manual Information A straight thin arrow is used to
show the flow of information
that is conveyed manually such
as memos, reports, and meetings.
The frequency with which the
information is conveyed can
also be added.
Electronic Information A wiggle arrow represents
information that is conveyed
electronically such as via the
Web or faxes. The frequency
with which the information is
conveyed can also be added.
(continued)
Meridth-c09.indd 269 10/29/2015 3:42:39 PM
270 Process Improvement: Lean
■ TABLE 9.2 Commonly Used Value Stream Symbols (continued)
Value Stream Map Symbol Description Use
Kaizen Blitz This symbol is used to document
specific process improvement
projects that are expected to be
executed.
Workcell This symbol represents the
production of part families in
cells.
Push Arrow This symbol is used when the
output of one process stage is
pushed to the next stage in the
process.
P W
Production and
Withdrawal
Kanbans
Production kanbans are used to
trigger production. Withdrawal
kanbans are used to authorize the
material movement to downstream
processes.
Supermarket A supermarket is a small amount
of inventory that is stored at the
point of usage.
cycle time
Meridth-c09.indd 270 10/29/2015 3:42:40 PM
2719.3 Make Value Flow
9.3 Make Value Flow
up
Daily
Daily
National
Steel, Inc.
Steel Coils
Daily
orders
Production control
Kanban
Daily
orders Allied
Computer, Inc.
I
Coils
1 day’s
300 tops
300 bottoms
20 tops
20 bottoms
Cutting Stamping
2 hours30 minutes1 day
5 seconds 3 seconds 6 minutes
Convert to
cells
Fabrication &
Assembly Cell
Convert to
Kanban
C/T = 5 seconds
C/O = 30 minutes
Uptime = 87%
C/T = 3 seconds
C/O = 30 minutes
Uptime = 85%
C/T = 18 minutes
C/O = 10 minutes
Uptime = 95%
Production
Lead time
= 10.6
hours
= 6.1
minutes
Value-added
time
Change
over
P
W W
P
Hourly production
schedule
FIGURE 9.3 To‐be value stream map for metal case contract manufacturer.
Source: Adapted from www.mamtc.com.
Meridth-c09.indd 271 10/29/2015 3:42:41 PM
272 Process Improvement: Lean
perfect
9.3.1 Continuous Flow Manufacturing
takt time
takt time
540 30 60
6000
20
450
300
1 5
min min min
. /
Meridth-c09.indd 272 10/29/2015 3:42:41 PM
2739.3 Make Value Flow
9.3.2 The Theory of Constraints
theory of constraints
1. Flows rather than capacities should be balanced throughout the shop
2. Fluctuations in a tightly connected, sequence‐dependent system add to each other rather
than averaging out
3. Utilization of a nonbottleneck is determined by other constraints in the system, such as
bottlenecks
4. Utilizing a workstation (producing when material is not yet needed) is not the same as
activation
utilized
5. An hour lost at a bottleneck is an hour lost for the whole shop
6. An hour saved at a nonbottleneck is a mirage
7. Bottlenecks govern shop throughput and work‐in‐process inventories
Meridth-c09.indd 273 10/29/2015 3:42:41 PM
274 Process Improvement: Lean
8. The transfer batch need not be the same size as the process batch process
batch
transfer batch
a
b
a
9. The size of the process batch should be variable, not fixed
(b)
(a)
Time 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100105110115120125130135140145150
Opn 1 P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
P
5
P
6
P
7
P
8
P
9
P
10
Opn 2 P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
P
5
P
6
P
7
P
8
P
9
P
10
Opn 3 P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
P
5
P
6
P
7
P
8
P
9
P
10
Time 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Opn 1 P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
P
5
P
6
P
7
P
8
P
9
P
10
Opn 2 P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
P
5
P
6
P
7
P
8
P
9
P
10
Opn 3 P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
P
5
P
6
P
7
P
8
P
9
P
10
FIGURE 9.4 Transfer batch size and its effects on flow time. (a) transfer batch size equals process batch size.
(b) transfer batch size equals one part.
Meridth-c09.indd 274 10/29/2015 3:42:42 PM
2759.4 Pull Value through the Value Stream
10. A shop schedule should be set by examining all the shop constraints simultaneously
9.4 Pull Value through the Value Stream
pull systems
Machine A Machine B
75 units/day 50 units/day
Demand
50 units/day
FIGURE 9.5 Sequential
production system with
two machines.
Meridth-c09.indd 275 10/29/2015 3:42:42 PM
276 Process Improvement: Lean
push
kanban
9.4.1 Kanban/JIT in Services
Meridth-c09.indd 276 10/29/2015 3:42:42 PM
2779.5 Pursue Perfection
9.5 Pursue Perfection
9.5.1 5S
1. Sort
2. Straighten (Set in order)
3. Scrub (Shine)
4. Systemize
5. Standardize (Sustain)
9.5.2 The Visual Factory
Meridth-c09.indd 277 10/29/2015 3:42:43 PM
278 Process Improvement: Lean
9.5.3 Kaizen
kaizen blitz
9.5.4 Poka Yoke
9.5.5 Total Productive Maintenance
Breakdowns
Setups
Stoppages
Reduced speed
Yields
Meridth-c09.indd 278 10/29/2015 3:42:43 PM
2799.6 Benefits of Lean and Lean Six Sigma
9.6 Benefits of Lean and Lean Six Sigma
1. Cost savings
2. Revenue increases
3. Investment savings
4. Workforce improvements
5. Uncovering problems
Meridth-c09.indd 279 10/29/2015 3:42:43 PM
280 Process Improvement: Lean
9.6.1 Lean Six Sigma
E X P A N D Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Meridth-c09.indd 280 10/29/2015 3:42:44 PM
281
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.1
12.
■ AIRCO, INC.
While I haven ’ t done a detailed analysis of why so many
seats fail final inspection, my experience tells me that by far
the number‐one reason for the seats ending up here is
because they are missing parts. Sometimes we also see seats
where the parts were installed incorrectly or where a part
was damaged when it was assembled.
A P P LY Y O U R U N D E R S T A N D I N G
Apply Your Understanding
Meridth-c09.indd 281 10/29/2015 3:42:44 PM
282 Process Improvement: Lean
Questions
■ J. GALT LOCK LTD.
We routinely abort the plans generated by our formal plan-
ning system because we figure out other ways of pushing
product. Although we use kanban systems in two areas of the
plant, in reality everything here is a push system. Everything
is based on inventory levels and/or incoming customer
orders. We push not just the customer order but all the raw
materials and everything that is associated with the product
being assembled.
We have an entire department that is dedicated to inventory
storage consisting of 10 to 11 aisles of parts. What is bad is
that we have all these parts, and none of them are the right
ones. Lots of parts, and we still can ’ t build.
Meridth-c09.indd 282 10/29/2015 3:42:44 PM
283
Work‐in‐process is everywhere. You can find work‐in‐pro-
cess at every one of the stations on the shop floor. It is
extremely difficult to find materials on the shop floor because
of the tremendous amount of inventory on the shop floor. It is
also very difficult to tell what state a customer order is in or
the material necessary to make that customer order, because
we have such long runs of components and subassemblies.
My biggest concern is consistent delivery to customers. We
just started monitoring on‐time delivery performance, and
it was the first time that measurement had ever been used
at this operation. We found out how poorly we are actually
doing. It is a matter of routinely trying to chase things
down in the factory that will complete customer orders.
The challenge of more consistent delivery is compounded
by the fact that we have to respond much faster. Our cus-
tomers used to give us three to six weeks of lead time, but
now the big retailers we are starting to deal with give us
only two or three days. And if we don ’ t get it out in that
short period of time, we lose the customer.
Questions
E X E R C I S E S
9.1
9.2
Exercises
Meridth-c09.indd 283 10/29/2015 3:42:44 PM
284
Cases
BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project
Scott M. Shafer
Allen J. (AJ) Lauren, executive vice president of BPO, Inc., shifted his gaze from the e‐mail mes-
sage he had just finished reading to the view of the neighboring manufacturing plant outside his
spacious fourth‐floor corner office. AJ was responsible for the operations of BPO ’ s Employee
Benefit Outsourcing (EBO) business. He often pondered the symbolism of the old manufacturing
plant ’ s reflection on his office building. If nothing else, the building ’ s neighbor made an interest-
ing contrast—the mature manufacturer versus BPO, an information age consultancy.
AJ ’ s attention shifted back to the e‐mail message he had just received from Sam Regan, the
CEO of HA, one of BPO ’ s major clients.
After considering different options for responding to the e‐mail message, he decided to
wait. Instead, he called his executive assistant and instructed her to contact Ethan Ekans, AJ ’ s
newly hired senior vice president of operations, and Jerry Small, assistant director of quality and
a Six Sigma Black Belt candidate.1 He asked her to set up a meeting for that afternoon. AJ wanted
an immediate update on the ongoing Six Sigma project Jerry was completing to investigate ways
to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process.
From: Sam Regan
Sent: May 10, 2005
To: Allen Lauren
Cc: Kacy Scott, Jim Regit, Larry Watts
Subject: Process audit needed
AJ—
Pursuant to my divorce becoming final last month, I called to have my former wife removed
from my benefits. I am sorry to report that the service BPO provided was far below my
expectations. As a result of this experience, I have asked my human resources chief, Kacy
Scott, to oversee a full audit of all HA transactions processed by BPO. We have identified
an outside auditor to perform the audit. It is my expectation that BPO will provide the audit
team with its full cooperation and that the audit will be performed at BPO ’ s expense.
I consider this to be a very serious matter and emphasize that our business relationship is at
risk. Pending the outcome of the audit, it may become necessary to renegotiate our contract.
If any of the above terms are unacceptable to you, please let me know at your earliest
convenience.
Sam Regan, CEO
HA, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 284 11/6/2015 5:21:13 PM
285BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project
AJ was interested in learning if Sam Regan’s experience was simply an isolated event or if this
was a common occurrence. Perhaps there was a way to use Jerry’s project to head off the process
audit HA’s CEO was demanding.
Returning to his desk with the e‐mail message still displayed on his computer screen, AJ
felt his stomach sink. When he first read the message, he had not noticed that Sam Regan had
copied Jim Regit, BPO’s chairman, and Larry Watts, BPO’s president. He had already anticipated
that the senior management team would review EBO’s business operations at its mid‐July quar-
terly performance review meeting. He was now concerned that this would be a top agenda item.
Although EBO’s revenues had been growing 30 percent annually, the division had been
losing about $5 to $10 million a year. AJ was glad he had asked Jerry to take on the project. He
knew Jerry had been using simulation modeling to examine the Health and Welfare Service
Delivery Process and hoped he would have some answers about how they could improve the
process and profitability. He certainly would need some answers for the July meeting.
Business Process Outsourcing
Increased competition was forcing organizations across virtually all industries to reduce their
costs while at the same time improving their service levels. Many had turned to business process
outsourcing, the farming out of business activities to specialized service providers. For example,
as early as 2001, Forrester found that two‐thirds of the companies it surveyed outsourced at least
one of their business processes.2 Furthermore, Forrester found that of the firms that already out-
sourced one or more of their business processes, approximately 80 percent expected to outsource
additional processes within the next two years. Business processes commonly outsourced
included manufacturing, human resources, finance and accounting, claims processing, information
technology, and marketing.
IDC, a leading provider of market intelligence for the information technology and communi-
cations industries, projected that by 2006 business process outsourcing sales would reach $1.2 trillion
industry‐wide3 and human resource outsourcing (HRO) would experience a 29.8 percent compound
annual growth rate (CAGR) with sales topping $15 billion.4 Because of specializing in a particular
business process, business process outsourcing providers sought to offer their clients faster innova-
tion, improved quality, economies of scale, and extensive process expertise.
BPO, Inc.
BPO, a Fortune 500 professional services organization, offered its clients a range of services
from risk management/insurance brokerage to management consulting. It had operations in over
100 countries, over 50,000 employees, and over 500 offices.
As Exhibit 1 shows, BPO had three divisions: (1) risk management/insurance brokerage,
(2) human resource consulting, and (3) compensation consulting. The risk management/ insurance
brokerage division helped organizations understand and assess their risk profiles and then develop
appropriate risk management/insurance programs to minimize their vulnerability to potential
long‐term setbacks. Its human resource consulting division offered organizations services in the
areas of HRO, business process design (BPD), and management consulting. BPO established the
HRO group to capitalize on the increasingly popular trend of outsourcing human resource
activities. The compensation consulting division assisted organizations in the development of
effective compensation and reward programs.
The HRO group consisted of EBO and employee processing outsourcing practices. Because
of the increasing popularity of business process outsourcing, the EBO group was one of BPO’s
fastest‐growing businesses and offered three primary services:
• Defined benefit. Administration of pension and retirement plans where a formula determined
the amount of the employee benefit based on the employee’s years of service and earnings.
Meridth-cases.indd 285 11/6/2015 5:21:13 PM
286 Cases
Meridth-cases.indd 286 11/6/2015 5:21:15 PM
BPO, Inc.
Risk management/
insurance brokerage
Human resource outsourcing
(HRO)
Employee benefits
outsourcing (EBO)
Defined benefit Defined contribution Health and welfare
Employee processing
outsourcing (EPO)
Business process design Management consulting
Human resource consulting Compensation consulting
■ EXHIBIT 1 BPO, Inc. Lines of Business
Source: BPO’s Web site
287BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project
• Defined contribution. Administration of retirement plans where employee benefits were a
function of employee and/or employer contributions.
• Health and welfare. Administration of medical, dental, vision, and survivor benefit plans.
Administering these plans included enrolling employees in the programs, reporting benefit
elections to insurance carriers, reporting deductions to payroll, answering questions about the
plans, and processing changes to the plan (e.g., adding a new dependent). Also, the EBO group
offered administrative services for flexible spending accounts (FSA) and COBRA.
The defined benefit service and health and welfare service each accounted for approxi-
mately $40 million in revenues. Revenues from the defined contribution service were negligible.
Clients of the HRO group were interested in the potential cost savings associated with outsourcing
their processes. Furthermore, they tended to view business process outsourcing services as a com-
modity and, based on this view, typically solicited bids from competing business process outsourc-
ing providers, pitting one service provider against the others. This, coupled with high service‐level
expectations, made it difficult for outsourcing companies to earn a profit.
The Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process
The EBO group’s Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process administered medical, dental,
vision, and survivor benefit plans for its 18 client firms. In effect, the EBO group performed
administrative tasks such as providing assistance to employees enrolling in company‐sponsored
benefit plans, changing benefit options, updating dependent information, and answering ques-
tions about coverage that were formerly performed in‐house by its clients’ human resource
departments. Interestingly, the employees of its client firms were often unaware of the fact that
they were actually talking to a third party, not a person employed in their organization’s human
resource department.
The EBO group interfaced with its client organizations on two levels. At the organizational
level, client organizations provided the EBO group with a weekly update of the Employment
Database. This database listed all employees, their position, employment status (e.g., full time,
part time, terminated, and medical leave), salary, and so on. The EBO group used information in
the database to determine employee eligibility and level of coverage.
At the participant level, individual employees contacted the EBO group directly either via
the phone or the Web to resolve benefit program‐related issues. Frequently, these requests came
from newly hired employees who needed to enroll in company‐sponsored benefit programs. In
other cases, the participants needed to make a change to their benefit selections, such as adding a
new dependent or adding/dropping a spouse. Participants also called when they had questions
about their coverage. The typical contractual service level between BPO and its clients was that
the BPO staff would answer 80 percent of the calls in 20 seconds or less. In addition, BPO estab-
lished a handling‐time goal of 6 minutes per call, although this was purely an internal metric, not
part of the service‐level agreement it negotiated with clients.
The Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process consisted of two primary subprocesses.
The first subprocess, Database Update, was a weekly batch process that updated the Employee
Benefits database based on the weekly Employment Database updates that client firms provided.
The other subprocess, Participant Care, focused on responding directly to client employees’
inquiries and requests. Although these two subprocesses were physically located on separate
floors, they were highly interrelated and neither one alone offered clients a complete business
solution. For example, the ability to answer customer inquiries accurately via the Participant Care
subprocess depended largely on the weekly Database Update subprocess. Likewise, Benefit
Administrators used information obtained from the Participant Care subprocess to update the
Employee Benefits database during the weekly Database Update subprocess.
Meridth-cases.indd 287 11/6/2015 5:21:15 PM
288 Cases
Meridth-cases.indd 288 11/6/2015 5:21:17 PM
Receive
employment
database update
Load data
Contact client
regarding errors
Determine
eligibility
Audit eligibility
report
Key changes
Benefits database
updated
Issue closed
CSR calls
participant back
NoNo
NoNo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Research issue
and update
records
Generate reports
Determine
eligibility
Download
changes received
via Web
Notify CSR
Upload resultsAudit reports
Import previous and
current week’s files into
Access and run queries
Attempt self-
service?
Resolved?
Participant
inquiry
P
a
rt
ic
ip
a
n
t
C
u
st
o
m
er
s
er
v
ic
e
re
p
.
B
en
efi
t
a
d
m
in
is
tr
a
to
r
C
li
en
t
Yes
Change
required?
Escalate?CSR logs inquiry
CSR speaks with
participant
■ EXHIBIT 2 Process Map for Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process
Source: BPO, Inc.
289BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project
■ EXHIBIT 3 Client Information
Clients
Number of BAs
assigned to account
Calls before 6:00 P.M.
(percent)
Calls after 6:00 P.M.
(percent)
Calls accepted
from 8 A.M. until
BM 1 2.9 0 6 P.M.
CS 1 6 0 6 P.M.
CI 2 3.2 0 6 P.M.
CO 1 1.3 0 6 P.M.
ED 1 6.6 0 6 P.M.
EQ 1 4.6 0 6 P.M.
HA 2 22.3 84.5 8 P.M.
IE 1 5.2 0 6 P.M.
LO 2 6.3 12.2 8 P.M.
ME 1 5 0 6 P.M.
MI 1 3 0 6 P.M.
NG 1 2.1 0 6 P.M.
OB 1 14.3 0 6 P.M.
PS 1 1.3 0 6 P.M.
RS 1 2.7 0 6 P.M.
TM 1 1.5 0 6 P.M.
US 1 9.7 0 6 P.M.
VA 1 2 3.3 8 P.M.
Source: BPO, Inc.
Exhibit 2 shows the process map Jerry developed in conjunction with his Six Sigma
project.
The Database Update Subprocess
The Database Update subprocess began when a benefits administrator (BA) in the EBO group
received the weekly Employment Database update from the client firm. The BAs worked for
specific clients. In other words, the same BA processed a given client’s data week in and week
out. As shown in Exhibit 3, 15 of the 18 clients had one dedicated BA assigned, while the other
three clients (CI, HA, and LO) had two dedicated BAs. The BAs worked from 8:00 a.m. to
5:00 p.m.5 and had two 15‐minute breaks and a 1‐hour lunch break. All BAs had a four‐year
college degree and earned $30,000 to $60,000 per year.
Once the BA received the data from the client, he/she loaded it on a mainframe computer.
The data Jerry collected suggested that loading the data most frequently took 80 minutes but had
been done in as little as 20 minutes and on other occasions had taken as long as 5 hours.
Once the BA loaded the data, the next step was to contact the client regarding any errors
discovered in the data. Jerry found that in 95 percent of the cases, this took between 10 and
60 minutes, with all times in this range equally likely. In the other 5 percent of cases, the time to
contact the client required 150 to 210 minutes, again with all times in this range equally likely.
Once the BA corrected the errors, the BA determined the eligibility of the participants who
had a change in their records since the last weekly update or for new employees. Most often, it
took the BAs approximately 90 minutes to determine the eligibility of the participants, but in
some cases, it had taken as little as 5 minutes and in other cases as long as 5 hours.
After the BAs determined the participant eligibility, they printed an audit report. The audit
report was subject to 100 percent inspection and most often required approximately 2 hours to
complete. On occasion, however, the BAs were able to audit the report in as little as 15 minutes,
and on other occasions, it had taken as long as 6 hours.
Meridth-cases.indd 289 11/6/2015 5:21:17 PM
290 Cases
Based on the audit and the client’s response to the errors detected after loading the data, the
BAs next manually keyed in any needed changes to the database. Jerry’s data suggested that the
BAs could key in the changes in as little as 10 minutes, had occasionally taken as long as 5 hours,
and most often required approximately 85 minutes.
These steps corresponded to processing the updates received directly from the client. In
addition, participants could have updated their records directly via the Web or a customer service
rep (CSR) could have updated them via the Web while speaking to the participant on the phone.
Therefore, in the next step, the BA downloaded the changes received via the Web. Typically, this
took the BA approximately 50 minutes but ranged between 15 minutes and 2 hours.
Based on this new information, the BAs next determined the participant eligibility exactly
as they did for the updated data they received from the client. Most often, the BAs required
90 minutes to determine the eligibility of the participants. However, Jerry’s data indicated that on
one occasion, a BA was able to determine participant eligibility in as little as 5 minutes; however,
on another occasion, a BA required 5 hours to complete this task.
Once the BAs determined participant eligibility, they then generated reports and files for
the actual insurance carriers and payroll departments. Jerry’s data indicated that it took the BAs
approximately 40 minutes to generate the reports and files, but some had accomplished this in as
little as 5 minutes and at other times had taken as long as 2 hours. After generating these reports,
the BAs imported them and the reports from the previous week into an Access™ database pro-
gram and then ran a number of queries. Jerry’s data indicated that a BA had been able to import
the files and execute the queries in as little as 5 minutes but in some cases had taken as long as
1 hour. Most often, it took the BAs 25 minutes to import the files and run the queries. Auditing
these reports typically took the BAs an additional 45 minutes, but this had been done in as little
as 15 minutes or as long as 3 hours.
In the last step, the BAs uploaded the results from all the previous steps to the Employee
Benefits database. Uploading the data typically took the BAs 3 hours, but this had been done in
as little as 30 minutes and on other occasions had taken as long as 495 minutes. The result of all
these steps was an updated Employee Benefits database.
The Participant Care Subprocess
The Participant Care subprocess consisted primarily of a call center staffed with 31 CSRs organ-
ized into five teams (see Exhibit 4). Approximately half of the CSRs had four‐year college degrees,
and they earned $25,000 to $35,000 per year. Unlike the BAs, many of the CSRs supported more
than one client. As shown in Exhibit 4, the schedules of the CSRs were staggered throughout the
day based on the anticipated call volume and the need to schedule lunch and 15‐minute breaks.
For 15 of the 18 client organizations, the call center accepted calls between 8 a.m. and 6 p.m. The
call center was staffed until 8 p.m. for the other three client organizations, which operated primar-
ily on the West Coast. Exhibit 3 provides additional information on the volume of calls by client.
The Participant Care subprocess began when a participant had an inquiry or needed assis-
tance with a company‐sponsored benefit program. In such cases, the participant had two choices
in attempting self‐service: via the Web or through a voice response system via a telephone. The
first point of contact for customers who did not attempt self‐service or who were unable to
resolve their issues on their own was the CSRs. As shown in Exhibit 5, there was considerable
fluctuation in the volume of calls throughout the day.
Most frequently, the CSRs were on the phone with participants for 6.2 minutes. The CSRs
handled simple requests such as providing a fax number in as short as 0.7 minute. In other more
complicated cases, such as helping a participant select from a number of different insurance
package options, the CSRs spent as much as 19.1 minutes. Following the completion of each call,
the CSR logged the call in the computer system. Jerry’s data indicated that CSRs spent from 0.75
to 1.5 minutes logging the calls, with all times in this range equally likely.
Meridth-cases.indd 290 11/6/2015 5:21:17 PM
291BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project
In approximately 20 percent of the cases, the participant had an issue that the CSR could
not handle. In these cases, the CSR acquired all the necessary information from the participant
and explained to the participant that the company would contact him/her within two days. The
CSR forwarded the collected information to the BA who served that client company. The BA then
researched the issue, updated the client’s records if necessary, and notified the CSR of the esca-
lated issue’s outcome. In approximately 60 percent of the cases, the BAs were able to research
and update a case that had been escalated by a CSR in 5 to 10 minutes, with all times in this range
■ EXHIBIT 4 Customer Service Rep (CSR) Information
CSR Clients supported Shift begins Morning break Lunch break Afternoon break Shift ends
Team 1 MC CS, HA, OB, VA 8:00 10:45 1:00 3:15 5:00
VH CO, ME, TM, US 8:00 9:00 2:00 4:15 5:00
YS CS, OB, VA 8:30 11:00 2:00 3:30 5:30
LL CS, CO, ME, TM 8:30 10:30 12:00 4:30 5:30
JA OB, US 8:30 10:15 12:00 3:00 5:30
KH CS, US 9:00 11:00 2:00 4:45 6:00
WB LO, OB, VA 9:00 10:30 12:00 2:30 6:00
NM CS, CO, ME, TM 9:00 11:00 1:00 5:15 6:00
RL CS, LO, OB, VA 8:00 10:00 12:30 3:00 5:00
Team 2 MS EQ 9:00 11:15 12:30 4:15 6:00
LL EQ, ME 8:00 10:00 2:00 3:45 5:00
RS EQ 8:00 9:30 11:30 3:00 5:00
TP ME 8:30 10:45 1:30 3:15 5:30
Team 3 TP ED, NG, PS 8:00 10:00 12:00 3:30 5:00
MB BM, CI, LO, MI 8:00 9:30 11:30 3:00 5:00
SW ED, RS 8:00 9:30 11:30 2:30 5:00
CS BM, CI, RS, IE, LO 9:00 10:45 12:30 4:00 6:00
TF BM, ED, MI, NG, PS 9:00 11:15 1:30 4:15 6:00
ID LO, MI, NG, PS 9:00 10:30 1:00 4:00 6:00
DW ED, RS 9:00 10:15 12:30 3:00 6:00
CC ED, RS 9:00 10:30 2:00 4:00 6:00
KP CI, ED, RS, IE, LO 9:00 10:15 1:30 3:15 6:00
Team 4 AS HA 11:00 1:15 3:00 4:45 8:00
SL HA 8:00 9:45 11:30 2:45 5:00
BK HA 11:00 12:45 2:00 3:45 8:00
OW HA 9:00 10:15 12:30 3:15 6:00
GJ HA 8:00 10:00 12:00 3:00 5:00
CR HA 9:00 9:00 1:30 3:30 6:00
LK HA, LO, VA 11:00 11:00 2:30 4:15 8:00
Team 5 KM EQ 8:00 8:00 11:30 3:00 5:00
VR EQ, ME 8:30 8:30 12:30 3:30 5:30
Source: BPO, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 291 11/6/2015 5:21:18 PM
292 Cases
equally likely. In the remaining 40 percent of the cases, it took the BA 45 to 60 minutes to
research and update the case, again with all times in the range equally likely.
Once the BA notified the CSR of the outcome of the escalated issue, the CSR called the
participant back to explain the outcome. In approximately 75 percent of the cases, the CSRs left
voice messages, requiring approximately 30 seconds per message. In the other cases, the CSRs
spent between 5 and 10 minutes explaining the outcome to the participant, with all times in this
range equally likely.
There were four other important points about these subprocesses. First, there was no difference
in the time the CSRs spent on the phone for calls that they handled versus calls that they sent to the
BAs. In some cases, the CSRs were able to determine very early in the call that they needed to hand
off to a BA, while in other cases, this did not become apparent until much later in the call. Second, the
CSRs gave priority to new incoming calls over callbacks. Third, the BAs gave priority to the Database
Update subprocess over researching calls escalated by the CSRs. Fourth, the tasks associated with the
Database Update subprocess were in general more complex than researching escalated calls.
Meeting with Ethan and Jerry
When Ethan and Jerry arrived at AJ’s office, AJ was in the middle of a phone conversation appar-
ently related to a problem with a software upgrade. Ethan and Jerry seated themselves at the
small round table at the far end of AJ’s office. After completing his phone conversation, AJ
removed his phone headset and walked across the office to close his glass office door. Joining
Ethan and Jerry at the table, he started the meeting by noting:
Today, I received a disturbing e‐mail message from the CEO of HA. Apparently, he tried to update his
benefits and the service we provided did not meet his expectations. He has requested a full audit of all
transactions with HA and has made it clear to me that his business is at risk. I need to know if this was
an isolated incident or if it is typical of the service we provide.
As you know, Jim and Larry are expecting an update on our plans for addressing our operational
problems in the performance review meeting scheduled for mid‐July. This was exactly why I assigned
Jerry to the Six Sigma project. What I need now is a full update on the status of the project, which will
hopefully give me some ideas on how to reply to HA’s CEO.
■ EXHIBIT 5 Arrival of Calls to Customer Service Reps
Hour Average number of calls per hour in April 2005
8:00 to 9:00 30.4
9:00 to 10:00 49.8
10:00 to 11:00 59.0
11:00 to 12:00 60.0
12:00 to 1:00 49.4
1:00 to 2:00 57.1
2:00 to 3:00 57.5
3:00 to 4:00 53.9
4:00 to 5:00 51.6
5:00 to 6:00 37.5
6:00 to 7:00 11.0
7:00 to 8:00 10.2
Source: BPO, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 292 11/6/2015 5:21:18 PM
293BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project
Jerry responded:
I began my Black Belt training the first week in March. The first week of training addressed the define
phase and the measure phase of the project. During the week that followed this training, I worked with
you and Ethan to develop a project charter and have a copy here for you if you need it (see Exhibit 6).
Having completed the project charter, I moved into the measure phase and turned my attention to
developing a process map of the Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process. At first, I thought this
was going to be a breeze as I was able to obtain a flowchart the IT group had developed for the pro-
cess. However, as I began talking with BAs about the process, I realized the flowchart was missing
important components of the process. I therefore spent a good week interviewing people who were
familiar with various parts of the process to develop an accurate and detailed process map. Here is a
copy of the most current version of the process map (see Exhibit 2).
A key challenge I faced in developing the process map was integrating the Database Update
subprocess, which is done in batch mode, with the Participant Care subprocess, which is done in real time.
Continuing in the measure phase, I next used the process map to identify the data requirements for
the simulation model you asked me to develop. In reviewing the process map, I determined I would
need data on the arrival rate of calls by client, the processing times for all steps in the process, the
■ EXHIBIT 6 Project Charter for Jerry’s Six Sigma Project
SIX SIGMA PROJECT CHARTER
Background
Project Name: Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process
Project Sponsor: AJ Lauren, Executive VP
Process Owner: Ethan Ekans, Senior VP
Black Belt: Jerry Small, Assistant Director
Project Objectives
Project Start Date: March 7, 2005
Target Completion Date: July 8, 2005
Project Mission Statement: Develop a simulation model of the Health and Welfare Service
Delivery Process to help better understand key operational problems,
assess the impact of varying resource levels on key performance
metrics, assist in the identification and test of solutions to improve
profitability and customer service levels.
Problem Statement
Operational problems are negatively impacting the profitability and service levels of the Health and
Welfare Service Delivery Process.
Project Scope
Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process, excluding FSA and COBRA.
Project Milestones
Milestones Target Completion Date
Complete Define Phase March 11, 2005
Complete Measure Phase April 1, 2005
Complete Analyze Phase April 29, 2005
Complete Improve Phase June 3, 2005
Complete Control Phase July 1, 2005
Source: BPO, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 293 11/6/2015 5:21:18 PM
294 Cases
assignment of BAs and CSRs to clients, the percentage of calls that were escalated from the CSRs to
the BAs, and the work schedules for the BAs and CSRs. I was able to obtain the arrival rate of calls
by client, the assignment of CSRs and BAs to clients, the percent of allocated calls, and the work
schedules without much difficulty.
On the other hand, obtaining the processing time data for both the BAs and CSRs was more of a
challenge. For the BAs, I created a form listing all their tasks and asked them to record their process-
ing times over a two‐week period. In terms of the CSRs, while it is true that our system automatically
tracks the duration of calls, I learned that the system does not include in the call duration times the
time a CSR puts a customer on hold while he/she researches an issue. I observed a number of CSRs
putting clients on hold despite the fact that they are trained not to do this. Therefore, in order to esti-
mate the processing times, I obtained tapes for an entire week of calls for six CSRs and manually
timed the duration of each call. I obtained tapes from two CSRs who have been here less than one year,
two CSRs who have been here between two and three years, and two CSRs who have been with us
more than three years. I fit individual distributions to the process time data that I collected for each
task and used these distributions to model the work activities in the simulation model. Finally, I con-
cluded the measure phase by collecting some baseline data on key performance metrics. Here is a
copy for you to review (see Exhibit 7).
Regarding these performance metrics, I performed a small work sampling study over a two‐week
period to get an estimate of the CSR and BA utilization levels. I calculated the other performance
metrics starting with system data and made appropriate adjustments based on the other data I obtained.
After completing the training on the analyze phase last month, I developed a simulation model of the
“As‐Is” process. After tweaking the model here and there, I am obtaining results from the model that
are consistent with the baseline performance metrics. This provides me with confidence that the benefits
observed in the simulation model corresponding to tested process improvements will accurately reflect
the actual benefits obtained from implementing these improvements in the actual process.
Last week, I completed the third week of training corresponding to the improve phase. Ethan has
an idea for improving the process that he would like to test with the simulation model.
Ethan explained:
I know I have only been here a couple of months, but I believe the Health and Welfare Service Delivery
Process is fundamentally broken. Tweaking it here and there will not resolve the operational problems.
My suggestion is to create a new case manager position between the CSRs and BAs. The case
managers would handle issues that the CSRs were handing off to the BAs. I envision the case managers,
like the CSRs, being able to support multiple client organizations. I also would like to provide the
CSRs with additional training in order to position them to handle more issues to reduce the number of
escalated calls. The pay scale for the case managers would be midway between the CSRs and BAs, or
about $35,000 per year, and we would need to include an additional 30 percent to account for benefits
and taxes.
■ EXHIBIT 7 Baseline Performance Metric for the Health and Welfare Service Delivery Process
Performance metric Value
CSR utilization 37 percent
BA utilization 74 percent
Average time on‐hold waiting for CSR 1.77 minutes
Average processing time for calls not escalated (includes on‐hold time
and time speaking with CSR)
11.54 minutes
Average elapsed time from when CSR escalates call to when CSR calls
customer back
6.7 hours (does not include
nonwork hours)
Source: BPO, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 294 11/6/2015 5:21:18 PM
295BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project
I have discussed this idea with the BAs and they concur that the CSRs could research the less com-
plex issues with a little training. I developed this plan to create a service delivery solution to improve
customer service, optimize operational expenses, and facilitate career development. I call it my “high‐
touch, low‐cost model” because the customer will have more direct contact with the service provider
since fewer calls will be escalated. At the same time, we will be positioned to respond to the partici-
pant with lower‐cost labor.
Signaling the end of the meeting, AJ stated:
This meeting has been helpful. I think I should be able to use the baseline performance information in
my reply to HA’s CEO. I will also note that we are currently investigating some fundamental changes
to our service delivery process such as the high‐touch, low‐cost approach.
I will try to convey to him that we are aware of our operational problems and that the changes we
will implement in the near future will fundamentally change our process, thereby making an audit of
our current process of little value.
I would like the two of you to continue this project and evaluate options for improving the Health
and Welfare Service Delivery Process. As I see it, we have two fundamental options. On the one hand,
we can make incremental improvements to the current process. Jerry’s baseline performance metrics
confirmed my suspicion that there are underutilized resources. Perhaps you can identify ways to real-
locate the staff to our bottlenecks or perhaps even eliminate some staff.
Eliminating staff could also help improve our profitability. There are probably additional opportu-
nities to improve the resource allocation through better scheduling. It would be great if you could
identify some process improvements that we could implement quickly and inexpensively to generate
some immediate cost savings and service‐level improvements.
On the other hand, I would also like you to consider more radical changes to the process such as
Ethan’s high‐touch, low‐cost approach. We need solutions that improve our profitability but not at the
expense of our service levels. Let’s schedule a meeting for early next week to discuss your process
improvement recommendations.
More Analysis
As Jerry walked back to his office, he considered numerous questions. How much inefficiency
existed in the current process and was it really beyond repair? How could the simulation model
be modified to test Ethan’s high‐touch, low‐cost model? In particular, how could the company
determine the number of BAs, CSRs, and case managers it needed and how should they be allo-
cated to clients? Where would the company get the new case managers? Would it be better to
train CSRs for the case manager role or simply reallocate some of the BAs to the case manager
role? Or perhaps some combination would be best? Using CSRs would require bumping their pay
as well as providing them with additional training, while shifting BAs to the case manager role
would entail paying the case managers more because AJ had made it clear that cutting the BAs’
pay was not an option. Could the organization really save money by utilizing case managers?
Certainly, the simulation model could help in developing a plan for allocating the work
across the different job functions. Then, based on this, he could assess the potential cost savings
and also evaluate Ethan’s idea for making a radical change in the process.
Notes
1. Consistent with industry practices, employees selected to serve in the Black Belt role at
BPO completed a four‐month training program during which the Black Belt candidates
received one week of formal in‐class training each month and used the time between classes
to complete a Black Belt project. Also consistent with the practices of other organizations,
Meridth-cases.indd 295 11/6/2015 5:21:18 PM
296 Cases
BPO made a distinction between employees who were Six Sigma Black Belt trained and
those that were certified Six Sigma Black Belts. At BPO, certified Black Belts were required
to pass a comprehensive 4‐hour exam and to have successfully completed a Six Sigma
project in addition to the four weeks of Black Belt training.
2. Ross, C. F. “Business Process Outsourcing Gains Momentum.” Techstrategy (November 30,
2001).
3. Ante, S. E. “Savings Tip: Don’t Do It Yourself.” Business Week (June 23, 2003): 78–79.
4. Pramuk, M. “The Evolution of HR Outsourcing Services: The Impact of New Entrants and
Changing Alliances on Building a Successful Competitive Strategy.” IDC (December 2002).
5. All times in the case are Eastern Standard Time.
Meridth-cases.indd 296 11/6/2015 5:21:18 PM
297
Peerless Laser Processors
Jack R. Meredith, Marianne M. Hill, and James M. Comer
Owner and president Ted Montague was sitting at his desk on the second floor of the small
Groveport, Ohio, plant that housed Peerless Saw Company and its new subsidiary, Peerless Laser
Processors, Inc. As he scanned over the eight‐page contract to purchase their third laser system,
a 1200‐watt computerized carbon dioxide (CO
2
) laser cutter, he couldn’t help but reflect back to
a similar situation he had faced three years ago in this same office. Conditions were significantly
different then. It was amazing, Ted reflected, how fast things had changed in the saw blade
market, especially for Peerless, which had jumped from an underdog to the technology leader.
Market data and financial statements describing the firm and its market environment are given in
Exhibits 1 and 2.
History of Peerless Saw Company
Peerless Saw Company was formed in 1931, during the Great Depression, in Columbus, Ohio, to
provide bandsaw blades to Ford Motor Company. It survived the Depression and by 1971, with
its nonunionized labor force, it was known for its quality bandsaws and circular saw blades.
But conditions inside the firm warranted less optimism. The original machines and pro-
cesses were now very old and breaking down frequently, extending order backlogs to 20 weeks.
However, the owners were nearing retirement and didn’t want to invest in new machinery, much
less add capacity for the growing order backlog that had been building for years.
By 1974, the situation had reached the crisis point. At that point, Ted Montague had
appeared and, with the help of external funding, bought the firm from the original owners. Ted’s
previous business experience was in food processing, and he had some concern about taking
charge of a metal products company. But Ted found the 40 employees, 13 in the offices and 27
(divided among two shifts) on the shop floor, to be very helpful, particularly since they now had
an owner who was interested in building the business back up.
Within two years, Ted felt comfortable with his knowledge of the business. At that point,
he had a feel for what he believed were the more serious problems of the business and hired both
a manufacturing manager and a manufacturing engineer, Con Wittkopp, to help him solve the
■ EXHIBIT 1 Peerless Financial Data, 1993
Sales $5,028,067
Costs:
Materials 1,860,385
Labor 905,052
Variable overhead 1,106,175
G&A 553,087
Contribution to profit 603,368
■ EXHIBIT 2 Sales and Market Data, 1993
Year Sales (M) Market share (%)
1993 $5.028 29
1992 3.081 27
1991 2.545 25
1990 2.773 25
Meridth-cases.indd 297 11/6/2015 5:21:18 PM
298 Cases
problems. The most shopworn machines at Peerless were the over‐30‐year‐old grinding machines
and vertical milling machines. Committed to staying in business, Ted arranged for capital financ-
ing to design and build a new facility and replace some of the aging equipment. In 1987, the firm
moved into new quarters in Groveport, not far from Columbus, with 7000 additional square feet
of floor space. He also ordered seven new grinders from Germany and five new vertical mills. In
order to determine what bottlenecks and inefficiencies existed on the shop floor, Ted also devised
and installed a cost‐tracking system.
Laser Cutting Technology
By 1988, the competition had grown quite strong. In addition to the growing number of direct
domestic competitors, foreign firms were mounting a devastating attack on the more common
saw blade models, offering equivalent quality off the shelf for lower prices. Furthermore, many
users were now tipping their own blades, or even cutting them themselves, further reducing the
salable market. Sales were down, while costs continued to increase and the remaining equipment
continued to age and fail. Ted and Con looked into new technologies for saw blade cutting. They
felt that computer numerical control (CNC) machining couldn’t be adapted to their needs, and
laser cutting had high setup times, was underpowered, and exhibited a poor cut texture. (Ted
remarked that “it looked as though an alligator had chewed on it.”)
By early 1991, advances in laser cutting technology had received a considerable amount of
publicity, so Ted and Con signed up to attend a seminar on the subject sponsored by Coherent,
one of the leaders in industrial laser technology. Unfortunately, at the last minute, they were
unable to attend the seminar and had to cancel their reservations.
Ted was under pressure from all sides to replace their worn‐out punch presses. No longer
able to delay, he had contracts made up to purchase three state‐of‐the‐art, quick‐change Minster
punch presses. As he sat at his desk on the second floor of the Groveport building, scanning the
Minster, Inc. contracts one last time before signing, Con came in with a small piece of sheet steel
that had thin, smooth cuts through it.
It seems that a salesperson had been given Ted and Con’s names from the seminar registra-
tion list and decided to pay them a call. He brought a small piece of metal with him that had been
cut with a laser and showed it to Con. This was what Con brought into Ted’s office. Impressed with
the sample, Ted put the contracts aside and talked to the salesperson. Following their talk, Ted made
arrangements to fly out to Coherent’s headquarters in Palo Alto, California, for a demonstration.
In July 1991, Ted and Con made the trip to Palo Alto and were impressed with the signifi-
cant improvements made in laser cutting technology in just a few years. Setups were faster, the
power was higher, and the cuts were much cleaner. Following this trip, they arranged to attend the
Hanover Fair in Germany in September to see the latest European technology. There they were
guaranteed that the newer higher‐powered lasers could even cut one‐quarter‐inch steel sheets.
In November, Ted and Con returned to Palo Alto, making their own tests with the equip-
ment. Satisfied, Ted signed a contract for a 700‐watt laser cutter,1 one of the largest then availa-
ble, at a price close to $400,000, although the cutter couldn’t be delivered until September 1992.
In addition to the risk of the laser technology, another serious problem now faced Ted and
Con—obtaining adequate software for the laser cutter. Ted and Con wanted a package that would
allow off‐line programming of the machine. Furthermore, they wanted it to be menu driven, to be
operable by their current high school‐educated workers (rather than by engineers, as most lasers
required), and to have pattern search capability.
Coherent, Inc. was simply not in the off‐line software business. Since Ted and Con did not
want to learn to write their own software for the cutter, Coherent suggested a seminar for them to
attend where they might find the contact they needed.
1 The contract included extensive ancillary equipment and hardware.
Meridth-cases.indd 298 11/6/2015 5:21:19 PM
299Peerless Laser Processors
Con attended the session but was shocked at the “horror stories” the other attendees were
telling. Nevertheless, someone suggested that he contact Battelle Laboratories in Columbus for
help. Fearing their high‐class price tag but with no other alternative, Ted and Con made arrange-
ments to talk with the Battelle people.
The meeting, in March 1992, gave Ted and Con tremendous hope. Ted laid out the specifi-
cations for the software and, surprisingly, it appeared that what they wanted could possibly be
done. The price would be expensive, however—around $100,000—and would require seven
months to complete. The timing was perfect. Ted arranged for a September completion, to coin-
cide with the delivery of the laser cutter. During the next seven months, Con worked closely with
Battelle, constantly redesigning and respecifying the software to improve its capabilities and
avoid unsolvable problems and snags.
Finally, in September 1992, a 2‐inch‐high printout of code, programmed into a computer,
was delivered and matched via an interface with the recently delivered laser cutter. But when the
system was turned on, nothing happened. As Ted remarked, “Disaster City!” The software prob-
lem was solved within a day, but the laser cutter had to be completely rebuilt on site. For almost
100 days, the bugs had to be worked out of the system. “It was just awful.”
The months of debugging finally resulted in a working system by December 1992.
Meanwhile, Ted and the machine operator, Steve, spent 4 hours every Friday morning in training
at Battelle to learn how to use the system. Con and another operator did the same on Friday after-
noons. Con and Ted later remarked that the “hardest” part of the training was learning to find the
keys on the keyboard. Initially, Ted and Con thought that they might have enough business to
keep the laser busy during one shift per day. As it turned out, running the system was considera-
bly more operator dependent than they had expected for a computerized system. Though anyone
in the shop could learn to use the system, the operator had to learn how to work with the system,
finessing and overriding it (skipping routines, “tricking” it into doing certain routines) when
necessary to get a job done. Ted described this as “a painful learning curve.” Thus, only an expe-
rienced operator could get the volume of work through the system that was “theoretically”
possible. Nevertheless, once thoroughly familiar with the system, one operator could easily
handle two cutters at the same time, and probably even three.
Within the next 17 months, Peerless put 4000 saw patterns on the system and started run-
ning the cutter for two full shifts. Due to increased demand, they added another laser cutter, using
the same computer system, and by November 1993 were running both cutters throughout two
full shifts.
Marketplace and Competitive Effects
As of 1994, Peerless saw a number of improvements in their operations and some significant
changes in their market as well. In 1989, they had a 14‐week delivery lead time. Part of the reason
for this was that 25 percent of their orders had to be renegotiated with the customer because the
old tooling couldn’t handle the job. This slowed down the work tremendously. With the laser cut-
ter, this has been reduced to just three weeks, heat treating being the bottleneck (two full weeks).
Though they weren’t making any blades that could not be made in 1989, their product mix
changed considerably. In 1989, they made primarily 8‐, 10‐, 12‐, and 14‐inch saw blades. With
the new capabilities of the laser cutter, they were now making a much wider variety of blades as
well as more complex blades. As a matter of fact, they were producing the more difficult blades
now, and at less cost. For example, with the laser cutter, it took one‐seventh the amount of time
to cut a blade as it did previously, and one‐eighth the number of machine operators. The resulting
average cost saving was 5 to 10 percent per blade, reaching a maximum of 45 percent savings (on
labor, material, and variable overhead) on some individual blades. Although cost savings allowed
Peerless to cut prices on their blades, more significantly, they had an improved product, faster
lead times, and more production capability.
Meridth-cases.indd 299 11/6/2015 5:21:19 PM
300 Cases
Production capability was of particular importance. Peerless found that the ability to do
things for customers that simply couldn’t be done before changed the way customers ordered
their blades. Because of their new capability, they were now seeing fewer repeat orders (although
the batch size remained about the same) and considerably more “creativity” on the part of their
customers. Orders now came to them as “The same pattern as last time except . . .” Customers
were using Peerless’ new capability to incrementally improve their saw blades, trying to increase
capacity, or productivity, or quality by even 1 or 2 percent, based on their previous experimenta-
tion. Peerless had discovered, almost by accident, a significant competitive advantage.
Ted was intrigued with the way the laser cutter had revived Peerless. He stated that, based
on payback or return on investment (ROI) criteria, he could not have justified the investment in
the laser cutter beforehand. But more significantly, if he were to go through the figures now, after
the tremendous success of the laser cutter, he still would not be able to justify the cutter on pay-
back or ROI grounds. The point was that the new technology had changed the market Peerless
was selling to, although the customers remained largely the same. The laser cutter in fact “cre-
ated” its own market, one that simply could not exist prior to this technology. It filled a need that
even the customers did not know existed.
Despite the increased speed of the laser cutter, it was not necessary to lay anyone off,
though some employees’ jobs changed significantly. The laser system was purposely packaged
so that the existing employees could work with it and contribute to its success, even though they
may have had only high school educations.
Ted continued to push the concept of a small, high‐quality, technologically advanced busi-
ness staying ahead of the same foreign competition that was wrecking havoc on the major corpo-
rations in America.
Ted summarized the benefits the new technology brought as follows:
• Decreased product cost
• Increased product quality
• Ability to use a sophisticated technology
• Ability to do what couldn’t be done before; more responsive to the market
• An inspiration to visiting customers
• A positive image for the firm
• Adds “pizzazz” and “mystique” to the firm
• Allows entry into new fields
Peerless in 1994
In September 1994, Ted created a new division, Peerless Laser Processors, Inc., to handle general
laser cutting of other types of parts besides saw blades. By then, Peerless had logged 10,000
hours on the laser cutters and had placed 6000 patterns on the system, adding new ones at the rate
of 300 a month. Due to continuing customer requests that had never originally been considered,
or even dreamed of, the software has been under constant revision and improvement by Battelle.
Ted noted that, even though the need for revisions is expected to continue, it would not pay to hire
a software programmer, nor would the job be interesting enough to keep one for long.
Ted and Con felt that generic computer‐assisted design/computer‐aided manufacturing
(CAD/CAM) systems available today would not help their situation. The unneeded capabilities
tend to slow down the system, and in their new business, the main competitive factor, given other
constants such as quality, is: “How fast can you do the job?”
Meridth-cases.indd 300 11/6/2015 5:21:19 PM
301Peerless Laser Processors
Peerless also hired two additional sales representatives, with one now in the field and two
in the office at all times. They also hired an engineer to develop new applications on a full‐time
basis for Peerless Laser Processing. As Con noted, “The problem is recognizing new applications
while still doing your own work.” They discovered, for example, that they could now make their
own shuttles for their double‐disk grinders instead of purchasing them.
Peerless now has five U.S. competitors in the laser cutting business. Of course, Germany
and Japan, among others, are still major competitors using the older technology. For the future,
Ted sees the lasers becoming more powerful and having better control. He sees applications
growing exponentially, and lasers doing welding and general fabrication of parts as well. He sees
other technologies becoming competitive also, such as water jet and electrodischarge machining
(EDM).
For Peerless, Ted’s immediate goal is to attain a two‐week lead time for saw blades and
even better customer service, possibly including an inventory function in their service offerings.
For the long run, Ted’s goal is to become a “showcase” operation, offering the best in technology
and quality in the world. As Ted put it:
A company is like a tree. It only succeeds if it continues to grow, and you’ve got to grow wherever
there’s an opportunity. There are a maximum number of saw blades needed in the world, but no cap
on what else the technology can do. We’re only limited by our own imagination and creativeness and
desire to make technology do things. That’s our only restriction. What it fundamentally comes down
to is this: Is a railroad a railroad or a transportation company? Are we a saw blade company or are
we a company that fabricates metals into what anyone wants?
Meridth-cases.indd 301 11/6/2015 5:21:19 PM
302 Cases
General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor
Assembly Process2
Scott M. Shafer
Having just left a tense meeting with Tom Kacy (her boss) and Charles Samuelson (Kacy’s boss),
Brianna Regan, process engineer at General Micro Electronics (GME), was sitting in her office.
She shifted her gaze from the data she was studying in the Excel spreadsheet to the sample semi-
conductor chips scattered on her desk. She tapped nervously with her pencil and stared at the
chips. She was reflecting on what the data were saying and thinking about what her recommenda-
tions were going to be to turn around the performance of the new automated wire‐bonder machine
used in GME’s assembly operation.
The company had purchased the new machine and had it all set up by the beginning of
January. It was now May, and Regan was becoming increasingly frustrated with her inability to
get control over the machine. She knew that if the new machine’s performance continued to dete-
riorate, she would soon be getting the type of attention from senior management she would prefer
to avoid.
GME purchased the new wire‐bonder machine in part to support the company’s contract
assembly business which was growing three times faster than the company’s proprietary semi-
conductor business. From its initial installation in January through February, the new machine
performed well in terms of the wire‐bond strength. However, beginning in March, its performance
became more erratic, although still acceptable. By April, the machine’s performance had grown
more and more erratic to the point that it was finally deemed unacceptable to the operations man-
agers at GME. Regan herself was becoming increasingly frustrated with the machine’s inability
to meet GME’s internal standards. In fact, the continuous adjustments she had made on the
machine in an effort to rectify the situation during the intervening months seemed to be making
the situation worse.
The need to improve the performance of the new wire‐bonding machine was becoming
critical as overtime costs were mounting and the operation would soon constrain the growth of
GME’s contract assembly business. Tom Kacy, manufacturing manager and Regan’s boss,
reflected this at the meeting earlier that day when he told her:
Brianna, we’ve got to correct the problems with the new machine ASAP! We’re scheduling overtime
on our existing outdated wire‐bonding machines but they’re very close to full utilization. We really
need the capacity of the new machine.
The wire‐bond strength was an important quality dimension for semiconductor chips. In
particular, when chips were subjected during use to such external stresses as vibration and heat,
the wire bonds could loosen causing the chips to fail. Given that the chips GME supplied to its
customers represented a small percentage of the total unit cost of the products they were used in,
GME’s customers became very disgruntled when their products failed as a result of an inexpen-
sive defective chip. In one instance, a $500 two‐way radio used in a taxicab failed because a
2 The authors are grateful to Dr. Deborah Ettington, the editor of the Case Research Journal, and three anonymous reviewers
who gave invaluable advice and suggestions for improving this case and to John Waltman for his copy‐editing expertise. This
case was developed for the sole purpose of providing material for course analysis and class discussion. It is not intended to
illustrate either effective or ineffective handling of a managerial situation. All characters, data, and events are real, but names of
people, organizations, and dates have been disguised.
Meridth-cases.indd 302 11/6/2015 5:21:19 PM
303General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor Assembly Process
$2.00 chip was defective. At that same meeting, Charles Samuelson, VP of Operations, expressed
his concern:
Without additional capacity we won’t be able to meet our promised delivery dates. We also can’t
afford to compromise on the quality our customers expect. Historically, fewer than 10 chips out of
every million we ship have been returned because of quality problems.
The Semiconductor Industry
Semiconductors (aka integrated circuits (ICs) and chips) had become a ubiquitous part of life and
had transformed the way people worked and lived. They were the heart of most electronic prod-
ucts and greatly enhanced the functionality of numerous other products. Imagine how different
life would have been over the last decade without cell phones, personal computers, GPS devices,
and video games. Likewise, consider how semiconductors enhanced the functionality of numerous
products including automobiles, medical equipment, TVs, cameras, dishwashers, and hearing
aids, just to name a few.
Beyond transforming our lives, the semiconductor industry played a critical role in the U.S.
economy. Semiconductors were a major category of U.S. exports, and U.S. sales accounted for
almost half of worldwide sales. The industry was a significant source of employment in the
United States, both directly and indirectly as the enabling technology for other products.
General Micro Electronics, Inc.
Founded in 1968, GME designed and supplied a range of low‐power analog, digital, and mixed‐
signal semiconductors used to support communication applications. Its headquarters were in the
United Kingdom, and it had operations in the United States, Germany, and Singapore.
GME operated in four major segments: wireless, memory management, wire line telecom-
munications, and networking. The wireless portion of its business accounted for 45 percent of
sales and provided chips for voice, data, signaling, and radio‐frequency applications. Memory
management applications accounted for an additional 36 percent of sales.
GME’s sales were approximately $30 million. GME was what industry experts called a
fabless (literally “without fabrication”) semiconductor company, meaning that it performed the
assembly and test operations of its semiconductors in‐house but outsourced the production of the
silicon wafers (a process discussed in more detail in the Appendix).
More specifically, GME’s primary business activity was contract assembly. As a contract
assembler, it received semiconductor wafers, or chips, from its customers, assembled them into
packages, and electrically tested the finished packages.
GME’s Semiconductor Assembly Process
As a fabless semiconductor firm, GME outsourced wafer fabrication (the appendix provides
additional details of the wafer fabrication process). When a completed wafer arrived, GME’s
technicians first tested each semiconductor or die within the wafer and recorded the locations of
defective dies within the wafer. Next, the wafers went through “singulation,” a process that used
a diamond saw that separated the wafer into individual dies. After singulation, the defective dies
were removed, and each good die was placed into a plastic container. Each wafer contained 50 to
200 dies, and consistent with industry standards, 90 to 99 percent of the dies on a given wafer
were of good quality. The dies ranged in size from 0.1‐inch sides to 0.25‐inch sides.
To work with other electronic components in a particular product, chips were often mounted
on printed circuit boards which were then used to support and connect electronic components to
obtain the desired functionality. The first step to connect with the printed circuit board was to
Meridth-cases.indd 303 11/6/2015 5:21:19 PM
304 Cases
mount the dies on a lead frame with glue. Exhibit 1 shows a lead frame with six positions (i.e., the
six squares at the center of the lead frame) prior to the semiconductor dies being mounted on
them. The dies were mounted by gluing one in each position. While the six chips were processed
together initially, eventually the lead frame shown in Exhibit 1 would be trimmed to create six
individual chips.
After the die was mounted on the lead frame, a wire‐bonding process was used to electri-
cally connect the die to the lead frame. Exhibit 2 illustrates the lead frame’s appearance after a
die was mounted on it. As Exhibit 2 shows, each die contained a number of small square bond
pads on its top surface around its perimeter. The die was connected to the lead frame by adding
gold wires that connected the pads on the die to the pads on the lead frame. For example, in
Exhibit 2, a gold wire was added to connect the pad labeled “PAD 1” on the die to the lead frame
pad labeled “1.” Additional wires were used to connect the other die pads to the lead frame pads.
To connect the die pads to the lead frame pads, the die was first heated. Next, a gold wire
was fed through a capillary on the wire‐bonding machine. A spark fired at the end of the gold
wire created a small gold ball at the wire’s end. The capillary then moved down to contact the
■ EXHIBIT 1 Example Lead Frame
Source: GME, Inc.
■ EXHIBIT 2 Schematic of Lead Frame with Mounted Die
Source: GME, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 304 11/6/2015 5:21:22 PM
305General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor Assembly Process
appropriate pad on the die. By the use of temperature, pressure, and ultrasonic vibration, the
machine created a bond between the gold ball and the pad on the die. Next, the capillary moved
over to the pad on the lead frame and used ultrasonic energy to stitch the wire to the lead frame
pad creating a wedge bond. Finally, a clamp on the capillary closed, cutting the wire, and the
capillary moved to the next die pad to bond. Exhibit 3 shows a wire bond completed between the
die and lead frame.
Following the wire‐bonding process, the die and lead frame went through a molding pro-
cess, which encapsulated them in plastic. Next, the lead frames were trimmed to create individual
chips. Finally, the leads were bent at 90° to facilitate mounting on the printed circuit board.
Challenges with the New Wire‐Bonding Machine
The pressure coming down on Brianna Regan and her boss Tom Kacy was escalating as GME’s
contract assembly business continued to grow. A key performance variable used to assess the
quality of chips was the strength of the wire bond. As mentioned earlier, weak bonds could result
in the chip failing since the connections between the semiconductor and the lead frame would
loosen under the stresses the chip encountered in its normal operation. In the taxi example men-
tioned earlier, a chip used in a two‐way radio in a taxicab was subjected to vibration stresses
when the cab encountered bumps in the road. These stresses led to microcracks at the wire‐bond
interface that in turn created intermittent or permanent failures.
GME quantified the strength of the wire bond by a measure called pull strength. To meas-
ure the pull strength of a wire bond, a technician manually positioned a die/lead frame assembly
on a piece of test equipment and then placed a small hook under the center of the wire spanning
the die and lead frame (see Exhibit 4). The diameter of the wire was approximately 0.001 inch
with a length of just a few hundredths of an inch. Given these small dimensions, the technician
used a small, mounted magnifying glass to position the hook. The technician then used the appa-
ratus to pull the hook upward with gradually increasing force until the wire bond broke. During
this process, the dial gauge of the apparatus recorded the bond pull strength, the maximum force
needed to break the wire bond. GME’s internal requirement for the pull strength of wire bonds
was at least 7 grams, which exceeded the military standard of 4 grams. Although military con-
tracts accounted for a very small percentage of GME’s business, the industry commonly used and
cited military standards.
The wire‐bond strength measurement process was very operator dependent. For example, it
was critical for the operator to place the hook in the center of the wire span because an off‐center
Wire-bond to die pad
Wire-bond to lead frame
■ EXHIBIT 3 Completed Wire Bonds
Source: GME, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 305 11/6/2015 5:21:24 PM
306 Cases
hook would apply more force on either the ball bond on the die or the wedge bond on the lead
frame. In fact, improper placement of the hook was the primary source of error in the measure-
ment process. To help ensure that the measurements taken were accurate, GME provided the
operators performing this test with extensive training. Furthermore, the technician periodically
recalibrated the measurement apparatus by the attachment of a weight to the hook on the appara-
tus. The technician then ensured the reading on the dial matched the known value of the attached
weight. Although automatic bond strength testers were available, GME’s apparatus was a manual
unit. While automatic testers greatly mitigated the chances of operator error in the measurement
process, they were significantly more expensive than manual ones. In March, Charles Samuelson
commented:
Industry still uses manual testers like ours, and with proper calibration and operator training these
testers should be sufficient for our purposes. In my view, all we’re compromising is test speed, but
that’s justified for us when we consider the cost of more automated testing equipment and our rela-
tively low assembly volumes. Even with our current growth in volume, it will be quite some time before
purchasing an automatic tester would be justified.
Prior to the introduction of the new wire‐bonder machine, GME had not encountered any
problems meeting its internal pull‐strength standard of 7 grams. In fact, the operations personnel
were surprised that the new wire‐bonder machine was not meeting the pull‐strength standard,
given that its process controls were so much more advanced compared to the existing equipment
used on the production floor. Furthermore, GME was reluctant to consider lowering its pull‐
strength standard. Charles Samuelson commented in March:
Even though the military standard requirement of greater than four grams pull‐strength provides some
safety margin, I see no reason why we should dilute our long‐term capability of greater than seven
grams pull‐strength. The new machine with its advanced features should perform as well or better
than our existing equipment. I’m not willing to dilute our long‐term performance specifications since
this would make it easier to dilute other specifications. Let’s not go down that slippery slope!
Over the four months following the installation of the new machine, Regan had collected
sample data on the wire‐bond pull strength for the new machine. Typically, the technician took one
sample each day, a frequency Kacy and Samuelson considered sufficient for a one machine, one
shift per day operation. The sampling plan involved the technician first randomly selecting one of
the six dies on the first lead frame produced in a production lot. For the selected die, the technician
then measured the pull strength of two randomly selected wires on each of the die’s sides. The
Die
Gold wire Lead frame
F
o
r
c
e
■ EXHIBIT 4 Measuring the Wire‐Bond Pull Strength
Source: GME, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 306 11/6/2015 5:21:26 PM
307General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor Assembly Process
semiconductors produced by GME generally required six wire bonds per side. Thus, to conduct
the sample, the operator randomly chose only two of those six wires on each side of the die to test.
This provided a total of eight observations (four sides × two wires per side). This was a destructive
test and the tested die could not be reworked and sold after the test; however, the production quan-
tities in the production plan factored in the need to perform these tests.
Exhibit 5 lists the data collected over the four‐month period, and Exhibit 6 plots the sample
means and ranges. In discussion with the test operators, Regan learned that virtually all the wire‐
bond breaks occurred at the bond to the lead frame.
■ EXHIBIT 5 Sample Data for New Wire‐Bonding Machine
Sample Obs1 Obs2 Obs3 Obs4 Obs5 Obs6 Obs7 Obs8
1 17.0 15.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 14.5 15.0
2 14.0 11.0 13.0 10.5 8.0 5.6 SO 10.0
3 7.0 17.5 17.5 17.2 16.5 16.5 16.5 18.5
4 13.0 20.0 16.0 13.5 14.1 17.5 10.5 17.0
5 14.5 15.5 14.5 14.0 11.5 13.5 13.5 14.2
6 15.0 12.3 16.5 14.5 15.5 19.0 14.0 8.0
7 17.0 14.0 18.0 17.0 16.4 17.0 17.5 12.5
8 11.5 11.7 12.0 11.5 16.5 12.0 12.5 11.5
9 14.5 14.0 14.5 15.5 10.5 16.0 16.0 15.5
10 15.0 15.0 14.5 14.8 14.0 12.0 15.0 16.5
11 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 12.6 11.0 13.5 12.5
12 15.5 15.0 12.0 14.6 12.0 15.0 12.0 17.0
13 11.5 16.0 16.0 15.0 16.5 15.5 15.0 15.0
14 18.5 15.5 13.0 15.0 15.0 14.5 12.0 16.5
15 14.5 12.0 13.0 15.0 12.0 11.5 16.5 14.9
18 11.5 16.0 12.0 16.0 11.5 11.5 11.7 11.5
17 12.6 11.5 12.5 14.5 11.0 10.5 15.5 14.0
18 13.5 14.0 5.0 11.0 9.0 9.0 10.5 14.5
19 11.0 10.5 12.0 16.5 13.5 11.5 13.5 15.5
20 15.0 16.0 16.5 14.5 14.5 13.5 13.5 12.0
21 12.0 14.0 12.0 12.5 12.0 14.5 13.0 17.5
22 12.5 10.0 12.5 13.5 13.3 13.5 12.5 12.5
23 11.5 12.0 10.5 11.5 17.5 12.0 13.0 12.0
24 12.8 8.5 11.5 15.0 11.5 12.5 13.5 14.0
25 9.0 13.5 12.0 13.5 13.5 12.2 12.5 12.5
26 14.3 14.5 14.0 12.0 12.5 14.0 9.5 11.5
27 10.0 13.0 11.2 16.5 12.5 13.0 12.5 13.0
28 15.5 13.3 16.5 11.5 13.0 14.0 11.5 11.5
29 18.0 13.0 9.0 14.0 11.0 13.5 13.0 11.0
30 11.7 13.5 7.0 15.0 14.5 14.5 17.0 12.0
31 12.0 13.0 11.5 12.7 10.5 15.0 13.5 14.0
32 13.5 13.5 14.5 13.5 12.5 MO 12.7 9.5
33 12.0 12.0 18.5 13.0 12.0 13.5 12.0 12 0
(Continued )
Meridth-cases.indd 307 11/6/2015 5:21:27 PM
308 Cases
Sample Obs1 Obs2 Obs3 Obs4 Obs5 Obs6 Obs7 Obs8
34 14.0 13.0 10.0 12.0 13.5 12.0 14.0 14.5
35 12.2 8.5 11.5 14.0 13.5 13.0 16.5 12.0
36 13.3 9.5 14.0 12.5 12.5 13.0 14.5 13.0
37 9.5 12.0 13.5 12.5 13.0 13.5 13.3 9.5
38 12.0 13.8 16.0 12.5 12.0 12.0 11.5 12.5
39 14.0 11.5 17.5 12.0 13.2 11.5 15.0 13.0
40 10.5 13.0 13.6 16.0 13.0 13.0 14.0 13.0
41 10.0 14.0 13.5 12.2 12.5 14.5 13.0 15.5
42 11.0 16.0 14.0 14.3 16.0 14.5 11.0 11.5
43 10.5 14.4 15.0 14.0 14.0 13.0 14.5 14.5
44 15.0 15.5 10.5 14.0 16.0 15.0 12.0 13.0
45 15.0 16.0 13.5 13.0 14.0 13.4 11.0 13.5
46 13.0 12.0 13.0 12.5 14.1 13.5 17.0 13.0
47 14.5 14.5 11.0 12.5 9.5 12.0 14.5 8.0
48 13.8 12.5 13.5 12.5 10.0 11.0 7.0 14.5
49 10.0 15.0 10.0 13.0 13.7 13.5 14.0 12.5
50 14.0 9.0 10.0 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.5 14.5
51 11.6 11.5 13.5 14.5 14.0 14.0 15.5 17.5
52 18.0 11.0 15.5 12.0 13.5 13.1 11.5 12.0
53 12.2 11.0 9.5 17.0 11.5 14.5 12.0 11.5
54 16.5 12.0 12.4 10.0 11.5 11.5 11.0 11.0
55 14.7 15.0 14.0 14.5 17.5 15.5 14.5 15.5
56 9.5 16.0 14.8 16.0 15.5 15.5 15.5 13.0
57 17.5 20.0 14.0 14.0 18.0 16.5 16.2 17.5
58 10.5 11.0 13.2 16.5 12.0 13.0 14.0 5.5
59 14.5 8.5 15.5 16.5 15.5 18.0 13.0 11.0
60 13.9 6.0 10.0 13.0 13.5 15.0 14.0 10.0
61 15.0 13.1 9.0 16.0 19.0 12.5 14.0 15.5
62 15.0 10.5 16.0 9.5 16.0 12.0 13.5 5.5
63 7.5 10.5 10.5 14.0 10.5 10.3 9.5 13.0
64 17.5 14.0 14.0 17.5 13.5 13.5 8.5 11.0
65 10.5 12.0 12.5 12.3 10.5 11.5 11.5 19.5
66 14.0 10.5 15.2 8.5 10.5 17.0 10.5 13.0
67 17.0 17.4 20.0 16.5 16.5 16.0 15.5 12.5
68 16.0 16.5 18.0 15.5 15.0 14.0 14.5 14.5
69 14.5 15.0 15.0 22.5 17.0 14.6 15.0 15.0
70 11.0 13.5 11.5 4.5 9.0 14.5 10.9 8.5
71 13.5 12.0 11.5 4.0 13.0 15.5 11.0 7.0
72 10.0 9.0 8.5 12.6 4.5 11.5 12.0 14.5
73 12.5 9.5 11.5 9.0 14.5 9.5 7.0 12.6
■ EXHIBIT 5 (continued )
Meridth-cases.indd 308 11/6/2015 5:21:27 PM
309General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor Assembly Process
Sample Obs1 Obs2 Obs3 Obs4 Obs5 Obs6 Obs7 Obs8
74 7.0 8.0 13.5 12.0 13.5 17.0 11.5 9.5
75 8.0 10.0 14.5 19.0 11.0 11.4 9.5 10.5
76 14.5 9.0 19.0 11.0 13.0 13.0 15.2 13.0
77 13.9 13.5 17.0 17.5 14.5 11.5 14.0 16.0
78 15.5 10.5 11.5 10.5 12.0 10.5 17.5 11.5
79 9.0 13.5 3.5 9.5 10.5 12.5 4.5 5.3
80 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.2 20.5 14.5 11.5 11.5
81 8.5 5.5 9.7 11.5 13.5 11.5 11.5 12.0
82 11.5 12.0 16.5 14.1 12.0 7.5 11.0 14.0
83 16.5 9.5 10.5 10.5 6.5 11.2 13.0 15.5
84 16.0 14.0 12.5 14.5 8.5 20.5 17.0 8.0
85 12.0 11.2 11.5 13.5 14.0 10.0 19.0 11.5
86 10.5 7.5 10.5 10.5 7.5 10.5 8.5 12.5
87 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.0 13.0 13.5 12.7 3.5
88 21.5 15.5 17.0 10.5 14.5 16.0 15.0 17.9
89 11.5 12.2 12.5 20.0 12.5 10.0 9.0 13.5
90 12.5 12.5 10.3 7.5 12.0 18.5 10.0 9.0
91 13.0 20.5 15.3 12.0 15.0 9.0 11.0 17.0
92 9.0 11.0 16.3 13.0 11.5 12.0 8.5 19.5
93 12.3 12.0 17.0 12.5 5.5 12.0 12.5 14.5
94 18.0 9.0 12.0 11.0 19.5 14.0 16.0 13.1
95 13.5 18.5 17.0 12.2 9.0 17.0 13.5 11.5
96 17.5 11.5 4.5 9.0 7.5 12.5 9.5 7.0
97 11.0 12.0 12.5 11.0 18.0 8.5 13.5 11.5
98 10.0 6.0 15.0 12.5 12.0 11.5 12.0 12.0
99 8.5 17.0 11.5 10.0 14.0 9.5 10.5 12.0
100 12.0 14.5 16.0 14.0 14.0 14.5 15.0 18.5
101 16.5 4.5 11.7 6.5 5.0 12.5 8.5 8.5
102 3.5 10.5 10.0 5.0 9.5 6.0 8.5 15.5
103 11.5 17.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 11.0 12.5
104 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 15.5 5.5 4.5 5.5
105 13.0 11.5 4.5 10.0 7.2 15.0 13.5 16.5
106 12.5 9.0 4.5 6.5 9.0 10.5 9.0 11.0
107 10.5 13.0 13.0 8.0 12.5 13.0 11.5 9.5
108 4.0 2.5 3.0 3.8 5.5 2.5 10.5 5.5
109 6.0 6.0 9.0 6.5 3.0 5.0 6.0 3.8
110 9.5 12.0 9.5 3.0 11.8 7.5 10.5 10.5
111 12.0 12.5 13.2 12.0 8.0 11.5 14.0 12.0
112 13.0 10.5 12.5 14.5 13.5 12.0 13.5 13.5
113 11.9 12.5 10.5 13.0 10.5 11.5 13.0 15.5
114 13.5 8.0 5.5 9.5 8.0 9.5 7.5 8.5
■ EXHIBIT 5
(Continued )
Meridth-cases.indd 309 11/6/2015 5:21:27 PM
310 Cases
In examining the patterns of the sample means and ranges shown in Exhibit 6, Regan was
extremely concerned about the deterioration in the performance of the new machine. She won-
dered whether the new machine was even capable of meeting GME’s pull‐strength requirement
of greater than 7 grams.
Tom Kacy and Charles Samuelson met in early March to discuss their shared concerns
regarding the ability of the new machine to meet the pull‐strength requirement, at which time
they decided to hire an employee of the bonding machine manufacturer as a consultant to assess
the situation and offer recommendations to resolve the issues. Unfortunately, despite paying sig-
nificant consulting fees to the manufacturer, they found that the problems with low bond strengths
and excess variability continued throughout the rest of March and then April. In his exit meeting
with Samuelson and Kacy, the consultant expressed his frustration with not being able to resolve
the issue:
Our machine’s not responsible for the problems you’re experiencing. I recommend you look more
closely at the input materials such as the wire, lead frames, and capillaries used. When you resolve the
material issues, I’ll be happy to come back and help you optimize the machine settings.
Prior to the company’s engaging the manufacturer as a consultant, Regan had enrolled in a
training program to become a certified Six Sigma Black Belt. Six Sigma was a comprehensive
approach for improving business performance. The key elements of the Six Sigma approach
included a clear focus on the customers’ needs, the use of performance metrics, a focus on
improving business processes often through the reduction of inherent variation in the processes,
clearly defined process‐improvement specialist roles, the use of data‐driven and highly structured
problem‐solving methodologies, and ultimately the generation of tangible business results. As
part of her training, Regan learned to use the design of experiments (DOE) methodology. DOE
used statistical principles to systematically and simultaneously investigate multiple process vari-
ables that potentially impact the outcome of the process, which in this case was the pull strength
of the wire‐bonding process. As she learned more about the DOE methodology, she became
convinced that this approach could be extremely beneficial in helping understand and ultimately
resolving the issues with the new wire‐bonding machine.
In a formal meeting in April with Tom Kacy and Charles Samuelson, Regan pitched her
idea for performing a DOE to investigate the problems with the new wire‐bonding machine.
Sample Obs1 Obs2 Obs3 Obs4 Obs5 Obs6 Obs7 Obs8
115 7.0 7.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 5.0 5.5 8.0
116 13.0 15.0 12.5 13.0 10.0 11.0 13.5 14.0
117 10.5 5.5 9.3 12.5 11.5 11.5 7.5 10.0
118 6.0 9.0 9.0 9.5 10.5 10.0 12.0 8.0
119 6.5 9.0 8.5 9.5 10.0 13.5 7.5 9.0
120 16.0 7.5 4.0 4.5 8.0 4.0 4.0 9.7
121 9.0 9.5 9.0 16.5 4.5 5.2 8.5 9.5
122 5.5 8.4 5.5 7.5 18.5 6.0 6.0 6.0
123 5.5 6.0 5.5 5.5 5.0 5.5 10.0 4.0
124 5.0 5.5 5.5 6.1 7.0 13.0 7.5 5.0
125 16.5 12.0 7.0 8.0 11.0 15.3 12.5 5.5
126 5.5 9.5 10.0 10.5 9.0 9.5 9.5 10.5
Source: GME, Inc.
■ EXHIBIT 5 (continued )
Meridth-cases.indd 310 11/6/2015 5:21:27 PM
311General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor Assembly Process
At the meeting’s conclusion, Kacy and Samuelson agreed with her recommendation to undertake
a formal DOE study. They also decided that while Regan had no direct experience with DOE, her
Six Sigma training best positioned her to lead the study. During the meeting, Regan stated:
We’re at an impasse. The process the manufacturer set up in January worked great at first. Something
happened, and we lost the handle on the process. To be perfectly honest, we’re not sure how the vari-
ables interact. I’ve tried to improve the process by adjusting the machine, but my changes have only
made the situation worse. With the hindsight of my Six Sigma training I now see how I made our
problems worse by not systematically studying the relevant variables. I believe that a DOE’s the best
way to learn how the variables interact and get this process back under control.
In the meeting, Tom Kacy noted:
I completely agree with Brianna. We seem to have lost the handle on the process and everything we’ve
tried so far is not working. We need to take a fresh, more systematic, approach.
Charles Samuelson also concurred:
I agree with the DOE approach. What really irritates me is that the manufacturer did not employ this
approach when we brought in its consultant. You know, I don’t think that the consultant was even
aware of DOE as he kept trying new settings without any apparent discipline or plan. I’ve heard of the
success of DOE in process‐improvement activities and think it can work here too. Brianna, I appreciate
your honesty in admitting your mistakes; it took a lot of courage to do that!
We will come out of this with a stronger process and a stronger organization! Brianna, right now
you’re our best choice for this project given your experience with wire bonding – both good and bad –
and because you’re the only one of us with any understanding of DOE.
For her part, Regan had mixed feelings concerning the outcome of the meeting. On the one
hand, she felt good that management expressed confidence in her. On the other hand, she was a
little apprehensive about getting what she had asked for. The pressure she had already imposed
on herself to perform increased exponentially now that her credibility was at stake.
The Design of Experiments (DOE) Study
Regan began the DOE study by identifying the process parameters to include in it. Based on her
personal knowledge of the process, Regan identified the following machine settings that were
normally used to control wire‐bond quality:
• Power: The ultrasonic energy applied to the wire‐bond process to heat and recrystallize the
wire to form the wire bond.
• Force: The downward force or pressure applied to the bond.
• Work holder temperature: The temperature of the work holder on which the die sat during
the bond formation process. Work holder temperature was a secondary way of supplying
energy to the bond process.
• Time: The duration of the capillary’s contact with the die surface and lead frame and thus the
amount of time the power and force were applied.
In the past, the work holder temperature had been held more or less constant, and the other
three machine settings had been varied from run to run based on Regan’s and the machine
operators’ best guesses, as they sought the best combination of settings to improve the machine’s
Meridth-cases.indd 311 11/6/2015 5:21:27 PM
312 Cases
performance. Unfortunately, as Exhibit 6 shows, they made little progress toward understanding
the key factors affecting bond quality and how the factors interacted.
In follow‐up discussions with other subject matter experts (SMEs) including her counter-
parts at sister plants, the manufacturer of the machine, and people she had met at conferences,
Regan identified other parameters that might also potentially impact bond quality:
• Work holder cleanliness: A dirty work holder impeded heat transfer between the work holder
and the lead frame die pad.
• Work holder planarization: An out‐of‐plane or uneven work holder would mean the same
downward force would not be applied equally around the lead frame bond pads.
• Capillary size and finish: The bond wire was fed through the center of the capillary, and the
size of the capillary and the capillary finish, such as smooth or matte, were believed to affect
bond properties. These had varied throughout the use of the new machine.
• Lead frame material: Lead frames were made of a range of different materials, each one of
which could affect the bond properties. Only one type of lead frame material had been used
on the new machine.
• Wire span shape and length: The bonder was capable of producing different shapes in the
wire‐bond span. The shape of the wire bond was defined by the length of the wire connecting
the die to the lead frame and the height of the wire above the die (see Exhibit 3). Different
shapes were available to optimize wire‐bond properties. The measurement equipment found
that longer wire spans tended to have lower bond strengths.
• Bond shape and/or imprint: Visual inspection of the bonds could be used to roughly gauge
whether the bond had been performed properly. For a “good” bond, the ball diameter on the
die should have been about three to five times the wire diameter, and the wedge‐bond imprint
on the lead frame should have approximated a half circle. A wedge bond of less than a half
circle indicated insufficient bonding, whereas more than a half circle indicated over bonding
and excessive pinching of the wire at the neck.
• The wire material: Numerous properties of the wire used could affect the bond strength
including the wire’s diameter, its composition (e.g., gold vs. copper), its coefficient of expan-
sion, its hardness, and so on.
0.00
1 4 7
1
0
1
3
1
6
1
9
2
2
2
5
2
8
3
1
3
4
3
7
4
0
4
3
4
6
4
9
5
2
5
5
5
8
6
1
6
4
6
7
7
0
7
3
7
6
7
9
8
2
8
5
8
8
9
1
9
4
9
7
1
0
0
1
0
3
1
0
6
1
0
9
1
1
2
1
1
5
1
1
8
1
2
1
1
2
4
2.00 January February March
Sample Number
Sample Means and Ranges (n = 8)
Sample Means
Sample Range
P
u
ll
S
tr
e
n
g
th
(
g
ra
m
s)
April
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00
14.00
16.00
18.00
■ EXHIBIT 6 Sample Means and Ranges for the Data Provided in Exhibit 5
Source: GME, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 312 11/6/2015 5:21:29 PM
313General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor Assembly Process
Analysis and Recommendations
After carefully considering the list of potential factors, Regan decided to include four factors in
the DOE study: power, force, work holder temperature, and time. Based on what she learned in
her Six Sigma training, she decided that studying each factor at two levels was appropriate. Given
this, she selected levels within the range of currently used operating values for each factor.
Exhibit 7 summarizes the list of factors and the levels Regan chose for each factor. In total, the
DOE study included 16 treatment combinations (two levels of power × two levels of force × two
levels of work holder temperature × two levels of time). The wire‐bonding machine was used to
create the wire bonds on two dies for each treatment combination. The wire‐bond pull strength
was then measured on six randomly chosen wires for each die, yielding a total of 12 observations
(or replications) for each treatment combination. Regan believed that obtaining 12 observations
for each treatment combination was a sufficient number of observations to estimate the
process average.
Regan completed her DOE study during May. Exhibit 8 summarizes the study’s results.
These results were the focus of the meeting Regan was just returning from with Kacy and
Samuelson.
■ EXHIBIT 7 Factors and Levels for Wire‐Bond DOE Study
Factor Current levels used Low level for DOE study High level for DOE study
Force 50 to 250 130 190
Power 120 to 250 150 210
Temperature 200° 185° 225°
Time 25 to 80 40 80
Source: GME, Inc.
■ EXHIBIT 8 Pull‐Strength Results from DOE Study
Treatment
Combina-
tions
Power
Time
Force
Temp
Rep 1
Rep 2
Rep 3
Rep 4
Rep 5
Rep 6
Rep 7
Rep 8
Rep 9
Rep 10
Rep 11
Rep 12
1 150 40 130 185 7.0 12.0 10.0 9.0 9.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 9.5 9.0 10.0
2 150 40 130 225 13.0 12 5 13.0 14.0 13.0 15.0 11.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 13.0 13.0
3 150 40 190 185 6.0 10.5 11.5 11.0 9.5 9.0 8.0 9.0 7.0 9.5 8.0 10.5
4 150 40 190 225 11.5 11.5 11.0 12.0 12.0 15.5 13.0 12.0 13.0 13.5 13.0 13.0
5 150 80 130 185 7.0 10.0 7.5 8.0 8.0 15.0 10.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 6.5 3.0
6 150 80 130 225 13.0 12.5 13.0 13.0 13 5 15.0 13.0 13.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 14.0
7 150 80 190 185 13.0 13.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 16.0 11.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 10.5 13.0
8 150 80 190 225 13.0 12.0 13.0 13.0 12.0 17.0 14.0 12 5 12.0 13.0 16.0 14.5
9 210 40 130 185 9.0 8.5 10.0 8.0 9.0 6.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 6.5 12.0
10 210 40 130 225 11.5 11.5 11.0 9.5 12.0 13.0 9.0 4.0 8.0 8.0 6.0 6.0
11 210 40 190 185 15.0 13.0 9.0 11.5 10.0 16.0 10.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 6.0 13.0
12 210 40 190 225 13.0 12.0 11.5 11.0 11.0 10.0 12 5 12.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.5
13 210 80 130 185 9.0 9.5 10.5 8.5 9.5 6.0 7.0 13.0 12.0 13.0 11.0 6.0
14 210 80 130 225 15.0 15.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 10.5 10.0 10.5 10.0 10.0 13.5
15 210 80 190 185 13.0 11.0 11.0 11.5 11.5 10.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 10.0 10.5 13.0
16 210 80 190 225 12 5 9.5 11.5 12.0 12.0 12.5 15.5 15.0 14.0 14.0 13.0 12.0
Source: GME, Inc.
Meridth-cases.indd 313 11/6/2015 5:21:30 PM
314 Cases
. . . As Regan returned her attention to the spreadsheet in front of her containing the results
of the DOE study, she began to reflect on how she was going to analyze the data from the study.
Would she be able to use the data to develop a set of recommendations for improving the perfor-
mance of the new wire‐bonding machine? Regan mused to herself:
I am under a lot of pressure to get this machine back under control! And I’ve made the situation much
worse with my adjustments to the machine. On top of this, we’re incurring a lot of overtime costs
trying to keep up with the increase in business using our old equipment. I really hope I can find some-
thing in the data that will help us better understand the variables that influence the strength of the wire
bonds . . .
APPENDIX
Wafer Fabrication Process
While the functionality chips enabled in everyday products often amazed people, semiconductors
were electronic devices that performed relatively basic functions such as switching between
conducting electric currents to blocking them. Despite the fact that semiconductors performed
fairly basic functions, the process of making them was quite complex and consisted of hundreds
of steps.
Most semiconductors were made from silicon, which was created from abundantly availa-
ble sand. The silicon first was heated to create a molten liquid after which a solid piece of silicon
called a seed was dipped into the molten liquid, similar to the way a wick was dipped into liquid
wax to create a candle. As the silicon seed was slowly withdrawn from the liquid silicon, it was
cooled to form a cylindrical silicon ingot. The silicon ingot was then ground to a uniform diameter,
and then a diamond saw blade was used to cut the ingot into thin individual silicon wafers.
Following a series of smoothing and polishing operations on each wafer, they were ready for
wafer fabrication.
The process of creating the actual semiconductor on the silicon wafer was referred to as
wafer fabrication. The process was extremely complex, often taking a month or more to complete.
Because a single dust particle could ruin an entire chip, wafer fabrication was done in an
environmentally controlled clean room, a production space where airborne particles that could
contaminate the wafers being made were continuously removed from the air. Each silicon wafer
contained up to several hundred chips depending on the size of the wafer and the size of the chips.
The wafers were first cleaned to maximize the yield of the wafer fabrication process. Next,
a uniform insulator film was created on the surface of the wafer by heating the wafer to 1000°C
and exposing it to ultrapure oxygen.
Patterning, the next major step in wafer fabrication, involved coating the wafer surface with
a light‐sensitive film. Ultraviolet light was then projected through a mask to transfer an image on
to the surface of the wafer.
After the patterning was completed on the wafer, it was ready for etching. In the etching
phase, the image transferred to the wafer’s surface was developed similar to the way a film pho-
tograph was developed with chemicals to create a negative. The developed image on the wafer’s
surface was then chemically removed or etched away.
After etching, the wafers went through a doping process that altered the electrical conduct-
ing characteristics. A finished wafer required numerous repetitions of the cleaning, patterning,
etching, and doping steps.
Meridth-cases.indd 314 11/6/2015 5:21:30 PM
315
Heublein: Project Management and Control System3
Herbert F. Spirer and A. G. Hulvey
Heublein, Inc., develops, manufactures, and markets consumer food and beverage products
domestically and internationally. The business of Heublein, Inc., their sales revenue, and some of
their better known products are shown in Figure 1. Highlights of Figure 1 include the following:
The four major businesses (“Groups”) use different manufacturing plants, equipment, and
processes to produce their products. In the Spirits Group, large, continuous‐process bottling plants
are the rule; in the Food Service and Franchising Group, small fast food restaurants are the
“manufacturing plants.”
The amount of spending for capital projects and support varies greatly among the Groups,
as would be expected from the differences in the magnitude of sales revenues.
The engineering departments of the Groups have responsibility for operational planning
and control of capital projects, a common feature of the Groups. However, the differences among
the Groups are reflected in differences in the sizes of the engineering departments and their sup-
port services. Similarly, financial tracking support varies from full external support to self‐
maintained records.
Prior to the implementation of the Project Management and Control System (PM&C)
described in this paper, the capital project process was chiefly concerned with the financial justi-
fication of the projects, as shown in Figure 2. Highlights include:
• A focus on cost–benefit analysis.
• Minimal emphasis on execution of the projects; no mechanism to assure that nonfinancial
results were achieved.
The following factors focused attention on the execution weaknesses of the process:
• Some major projects went over budget.
• The need for optimal utilization of capital funds intensified since depreciation legislation was
not keeping pace with the inflationary rise in costs.
Responding to these factors, Heublein’s corporate management called for a program to
improve execution of capital projects by implementing PM&C. Responsibility for this program was
placed with the Corporate Facilities and Manufacturing Department, which, in addition to reviewing
all Capital Appropriation Requests, provided technical consulting services to the corporation.
Heublein, Inc.,
$1.9 MM
Beverage operations
66% of sales
Spirits group
$992 M
Wine group
$280 M
Food service/
franchising group
$520 M
Grocery products
group
$131 M
Food operations
34% of sales
FIGURE 1
Heublein, Inc
3 Reprinted with permission from Herbert F. Spirer.
Meridth-cases.indd 315 11/6/2015 5:21:31 PM
316 Cases
Feasibility Study
Lacking specialized expertise in project management, the Director of Facilities and Manufacturing
Planning (F&MP) decided to use a consultant in the field. Interviewing of three consultants was
undertaken to select one who had the requisite knowledge, compatibility with the style and goals
of the firm, and the ability to communicate to all levels and types of managers. The latter require-
ment was important because of the diversity of the engineering department structures and person-
nel involved. The first author was selected as the consultant.
With the consultant selected, an internal program manager for PM&C was selected. The
deferral of this choice until after selection of the consultant was deliberate, to allow for develop-
ment of interest and enthusiasm among candidates for this position and so that both the selected
individual and the selection committee would have a clear picture of the nature of the program.
A program manager was chosen from the corporate staff (the second author).
Having the key staff in place, ground rules were established as follows:
• The PM&C program would be developed internally to tailor it to the specific needs of the
Groups. A “canned” or packaged system would limit this flexibility, which was deemed essen-
tial in this application of project management principles.
Group recognizes
need or opportunity
Group prepares a capital appropriation request—
primarily cost/benefi t analysis
Group management reviews,
approves/disapproves
Corporate Finance Department reviews,
approves/disapproves
Corporate Facilities and Manufacturing Planning
reviews, approves/disapproves
Corporate Management reviews, approves/disapproves
Group implements project
Group reports status monthly to Corporate
If signifi cant cost variance occurs, Group prepares
Capital Appropriation Revision and process repeated from step 3
Project completed
FIGURE 2
Capital Project Progress
Prior to PM&C
Meridth-cases.indd 316 11/6/2015 5:21:33 PM
317Heublein: Project Management and Control System
• The directors of the engineering departments of each of the Groups were to be directly
involved in both the design and implementation of the PM&C system in total and for their
particular Group. This would assure the commitment to its success that derives from owner-
ship and guarantees that those who know the needs best determine the nature of the system.
To meet the above two ground rules, a thorough fundamental education in the basic princi-
ples of project management would be given to all involved in the system design.
The emphasis was to be project planning as opposed to project control. The purpose of
PM&C was to achieve better performance on projects, not catch mistakes after they have occurred.
Success was the goal, rather than accountability or identification of responsibility for failure.
Program Design
The option of defining a uniform PM&C system, to be imposed on all engineering departments
by corporate mandate, was rejected. The diversity of projects put the weight in favor of individual
systems, provided planning and control was such that success of the projects was facilitated. The
advantage to corporate staff of uniform planning and reporting was given second place to accom-
modation of the unique needs of each Group and the wholehearted commitment of each engi-
neering manager to the effective use of the adopted system. Thus, a phased implementation of
PM&C within Heublein was planned in advance. These phases were:
Phase I. Educational overview for engineering department managers. A three‐day seminar
with two top‐level educational objectives: (1) comprehension by participants of a maximal set of
project management principles and (2) explanation of the corporate objectives and recommended
approach for any PM&C system.
Phase II. PM&C system design. A “gestation period” of three weeks was deliberately intro-
duced between Phases I and II to allow for absorption, discussion, and review of the project
management principles and objectives by the engineering department managers. At the end of
this period, a session was called for the explicit purpose of defining the system. The session was
chaired by the consultant, a deliberate choice to achieve the “lightning rod” effect whereby any
negative concern was directed to an outsider. Also, the consultant—as an outsider—could criti-
cize and comment in ways that should not be done by the engineering department managers who
will have long‐term working relationships among each other. It was agreed in advance that a
consensus would be sought to the greatest possible extent, avoiding any votes on how to handle
particular issues which leaves the “nay” votes feeling that their interests have been overridden by
the majority. If consensus could not be achieved, then the issue would be sidestepped to be
deferred for later consideration; if sufficiently important, then a joint solution could be developed
outside the session without the pressure of a fixed closing time.
Phase III. Project plan development. The output of Phase II (the set of consensus conclu-
sions) represented both guidelines and specific conclusions concerning the nature of a PM&C
system. Recognizing that the PM&C program will be viewed as a model project and that it should
be used as such, serving as an example of what is desired, the program manager prepared a
project plan for the PM&C program. The remainder of this paper is primarily concerned with the
discussion of this plan, both as an example of how to introduce a PM&C system and how to make
a project plan. The plan discussed in this paper and illustrated in Figures 3 to 11 is the type of
plan that is now required before any capital project may be submitted to the approval process at
Heublein.
Phase IV. Implementation. With the plan developed in Phase III approved, it was possible to
move ahead with implementation. Implementation was in accordance with the plan discussed in
the balance of this paper. Evaluation of the results was considered a part of this implementation.
Meridth-cases.indd 317 11/6/2015 5:21:33 PM
318 Cases
Project Plan
A feature of the guidelines developed by the engineering managers in Phase II was that a “menu”
of component parts of a project plan was to be established in the corporate PM&C system and
that elements of this menu were to be chosen to fit the situational or corporate tracking require-
ments. The menu is:
1. Introduction
2. Project Objectives
3. Project/Program Structure
4. Project/Program Costs
5. Network
6. Schedule
7. Resource Allocation
8. Organization and Accountability
9. Control System
10. Milestones or Project Subdivisions
In major or critical projects, the minimal set of choices from the menu is specified by
corporate staff (the definition of a “major” or “critical” project is a part of the PM&C procedure).
For “routine” projects, the choice from the menu is left to the project manager.
In the PM&C plan, items 6 and 7, Schedule and Resource Allocation, were combined into
one section for reasons which will be described as part of the detailed discussions of the indi-
vidual sections which follow.
Introduction
In this PM&C system, the Introduction is an executive summary, with emphasis on the justifica-
tion of the project. This can be seen from the PM&C Program Introduction shown in Figure 3.
It is to the advantage of everyone concerned with a project to be fully aware of the reasons
for its existence. It is as important to the technicians as it is to the engineers or the corporate
financial department. When the project staff clearly comprehends the reason for the project’s
existence, it is much easier to enlist and maintain their support and wholehearted efforts. In the
Heublein PM&C system, it is expected that the introduction section of a project plan will include
answers to these questions: What type of project is involved? What is the cost–benefit relation-
ship? What are the contingency plans? Why is it being done this way (i.e., why were alternatives
rejected)? Figure 3 not only illustrates this approach but also is the executive summary for the
Heublein PM&C system.
Objectives
Goals for a project at Heublein must be stated in terms of deliverable items. To so state a project
objective forces the definition of a clear, comprehensible, measurable, and tangible objective.
Often, deliverable items resulting from a project are documents. In constructing a residence, is
the deliverable item “the house” or is it “the certificate of occupancy”? In the planning stages of
a project (which can occur during the project as well as at the beginning), asking this question is
as important as getting the answer. Also, defining the project in terms of the deliverables tends to
Meridth-cases.indd 318 11/6/2015 5:21:33 PM
319Heublein: Project Management and Control System
reduce the number of items, which are forgotten. Thus, the Heublein PM&C concept of objectives
can be seen to be similar to a “statement of work” and is not meant to encompass specifications
(detailed descriptions of the attributes of a deliverable item) which can be included as appendices
to the objectives of the project.
Figure 4 shows the objectives stated for the Heublein PM&C program. It illustrates one of
the principles for objective statements: that they be hierarchically structured, starting with general
statements and moving to increasingly more detailed particular statements. When both particular
and general objectives are defined, it is imperative that there be a logical connection; the particu-
lar must be in support of the general.
Project Structure
Having a definition of deliverables, the project manager needs explicit structuring of the
project to:
• Relate the specific objectives to the general.
• Define the elements which comprise the deliverables.
• Define the activities which yield the elements and deliverables as their output.
• Show the hierarchical relationship among objectives, elements, and activities.
The work breakdown structure (WBS) is the tool used to meet these needs. While the WBS
may be represented in either indented (textual) or tree (graphical) formats, the graphic tree format
has the advantage of easy comprehension at all levels. The tree version of the WBS also has the
considerable advantage that entries may be made in the nodes (“boxes”) to indicate charge
account numbers, accountable staff, and so on.
Figure 5 is a portion of the indented WBS for the PM&C program, showing the nature of
the WBS in general and the structure of the PM&C program project in particular. At this point,
External and internal factors make it urgent to ensure most efficient use of capital funds.
Implementation of a project management and control (“PM&C”) system has been chosen
as one way to improve the use of capital funds. The Corporate Management Committee
defined this need.
Subsequently, Corporate Facilities and Manufacturing Planning performed a feasibility
study on this subject. A major conclusion of the study was to develop the system internally
rather than use a “canned” system. An internally developed system can be tailored to the
individual Groups, giving flexibility which is felt to be essential to success. Another con-
clusion of the study was to involve Group engineering managers in the design and imple-
mentation of the system for better understanding and acceptance. This is the detailed plan
for the design and implementation of a corporate‐wide PM&C system. The short‐term
target of the system is major capital projects; the long‐term target is other types of projects,
such as new product development and R&D projects. The schedule and cost are:
Completion Date: 1 year from approval.
Cost: $200,000, of which $60,000 is out of pocket.
FIGURE 3 Introduction
to PM&C Program
Project Plan
Meridth-cases.indd 319 11/6/2015 5:21:33 PM
320 Cases
we can identify the component elements and the activities necessary to achieve them. A hierar-
chical numbering system was applied to the elements of the WBS, which is always a convenience.
The 22 Design‐Phase Reports (2100 series in Figure 5) speak for themselves, but it is important
to note that this WBS is the original WBS: All of these reports, analyses, and determinations were
defined prior to starting the program, and there were no requirements for additional items.
Project Costs
The WBS provides a listing of the tasks to be performed to achieve the project objectives; with
only the WBS in hand, it is possible to assemble a preliminary project estimate. The estimates
based only on the WBS are preliminary because they reflect not only uncertainty (which varies
considerably among types of projects) but because the allocation of resources to meet schedule
difficulties cannot be determined until both the network and the schedule and resource evalua-
tions have been completed. However, at this time, the project planner can begin to hierarchically
assemble costs for use at any level. First, the lowest‐level activities of work (sometimes called
“work packages”) can be assigned values. These estimates can be aggregated in accordance with
the WBS tree structure to give higher‐level totals. At the root of the tree, there is only one
element—the project—and the total preliminary estimated cost is available.
General objectives
1. Enable better communication between Group and Corporate management with regard
to the progress of major projects.
2. Enable Group management to more closely monitor the progress of major projects.
3. Provide the capability for Group personnel to better manage and control major
projects.
Specific objectivesa
1. Reporting and control system
• For communication of project activity with Group and between Group and
Corporate.
• Initially for high‐cost capital projects, then for “critical,” then all others.
2. Procedures manual
• Document procedures and policies.
• Preliminary manual available by October 20, 1979, for use in general educational
seminars.
3. Computer support systems
• Survey with recommendations to establish need for and value of computer
support.
4. General educational package
• Provide basic project planning and control skills to personnel directly involved in
project management, to be conducted by academic authority in field.
• Technical seminars in construction, engineering, contract administration, and
financial aspects of project management.
a Defined at the PM&C Workshop, attended by representatives of Operating Groups.
FIGURE 4 Objectives of
PM&C Program
Meridth-cases.indd 320 11/6/2015 5:21:33 PM
321Heublein: Project Management and Control System
Figure 6 shows the costs as summarized for the PM&C program plan. This example is
supplied to give the reader an idea of the nature of the costs to be expected in carrying out such a
PM&C program in this type of situation. Since a project‐oriented cost accounting system does
not exist, out‐of‐pocket costs are the only incremental charges. Any organization wishing to cost
a similar PM&C program will have to do so within the framework of the organizational approach
to costing indirect labor. As a guide to such costs, it should be noted that in the Heublein PM&C
program, over 80 percent of the costs—both out of pocket and indirect—were in connection with
the General Training (WBS code 3000).
Seminars were limited to two and two‐and‐a‐half days to assure that the attendees per-
ceived the educational process as efficient, tight, and not unduly interfering with their work; it
was felt that it was much better to have them leaving with a feeling that they would have liked
more rather than the opposite. Knowing the number of attendees, it is possible to determine the
labor‐days devoted to travel and seminar attendance; consultant/lecturer’s fees can be obtained
(expect preparation costs) and the incidentals (travel expenses, subsistence, printing, etc.) are
easily estimated.
Work breakdown structure
HEUBLEIN PM&C PROGRAM
1000 Program plan
2000 PM&C system
2100 Design‐Phase reports
2101 Analyze project scope
2102 Define performance reports
2103 Define project planning
2104 Define revision procedure
2105 Define approval/signoff procedure
.
.
.
2121 Define record retention policy
2122 Define computer support systems requirements
2200 Procedures manual
2201 Procedures manual
2202 Final manual
2300 Reporting and control system
2400 Computer support survey
2401 PERT/CPM
2402 Scheduling
2403 Accounting
3000 General training
3100 Project planning and control seminar
3101 Objective setting
3102 WBS
.
.
.
FIGURE 5 Project
Structure
Meridth-cases.indd 321 11/6/2015 5:21:33 PM
322 Cases
Network
The PM&C system at Heublein requires networks only for major projects but encourages their use
for all projects. Figure 7 shows a segment of the precedence table (used to create the network) for
the PM&C plan. All the usual principles of network creation and analysis (e.g., for critical path)
may be applied by the project manager to the extent that it facilitates planning, implementation,
and control. Considerable emphasis was placed on network creation and analysis techniques in the
Labor costs
Development and design $40,000
Attendees’ time in sessions 60,000
Startup time of PM&C in group 40,000
Basic educational package
Consultants’ fees 20,000
Attendees’ travel and expenses 30,000
Miscellaneous 10,000
Total program cost $200,000
Out‐of‐pocket costs: $60,000FIGURE 6 Program
Costs
Act’y short descr. Time (weeks) Immediate predecessors
4000 prepare final rpt 2 2000,2122,3200
2000 monitor system 6 2000: hold group workshops
2000 hold group workshops 2 2000: obtain approval
2000 prepare final proc 2 2000: monitor system
2000 prepare final proc manual, revise syst 2 2116–2121: approvals
2000 monitor system 8 2000: hold group workshops
2000 prepares for implementation 2 3100: hold PM&C seminar
2122 get approval 2 2122: define com and supp needs
2122 def comp supp needs 4 3100: hold PM&C sem
3200 hold tech seminars 4 3200: prepare seminars
3200 prepare seminars 8 3200 : obtain approvals
3200 obtain approvals 2 3200: def tech sem needs
3200 def tech sem needs 2 3100: hold PM&C sem
3100 hold PM&C seminar 3 3100: integrate proc man in sem
2201: revise prel proc man
3100 int. proc man in sem 1 2201: prel. proc manual
2201 revise prel proc man 6 2201 ‐2300 : get approval
.
.
.
Note: Because of space limitations, the network is given in the form of a precedence table. An activity‐on‐
node diagram may be directly constructed from this table. Numerical designations refer to the WBS in
Figure 5.
FIGURE 7 Network of
PM&C Program
Meridth-cases.indd 322 11/6/2015 5:21:34 PM
323Heublein: Project Management and Control System
educational phases of the PM&C program because the network is the basis of the scheduling meth-
ods presented, is potentially of great value, and is one of the hardest concepts to communicate.
In the Heublein PM&C system, managerial networks are desired—networks which the
individual project managers will use in their own management process and which the staff of the
project can use to self‐direct where appropriate. For this reason, the view toward the network is
that no one network should exceed 50 nodes. The top‐level network represents the highest level
of aggregation. Each activity on that network may well represent someone else’s next lower‐level
network consisting of not more than 50 nodes. This is not to say that there are not thousands of
activities possible in a Heublein project, but that at the working managerial level, each manager
or project staff person responsible for a networked activity is expected to work from a single
network of a scope that can be easily comprehended. It is not an easy task to aggregate skillfully
to reduce network size, but the exercise of this discipline has value in planning and execution in
its own right.
The precedence table shown reflects the interdependencies of activities for Heublein’s
PM&C program; they are dependent on the design of the program and the needs of the
organization. Each organization must determine them for themselves. But what is important is
that institution of a PM&C program be planned this way. There is a great temptation in such
programs to put all activities on one path and not to take advantage of parallel activities and/or
not to see just what is the critical path and to focus efforts along it.
Schedule and Resource Allocation
The network defines the mandatory interdependency relationships among the tasks on a project;
the schedule is the realization of the intent of the project manager, as it shows when the manager
has determined that tasks are to be done. The schedule is constrained in a way that the network is
not, for the schedule must reflect calendar limitations (vacations, holidays, plant and vendor
shutdowns, etc.) and also the limitations on resources. It is with the schedule that the project
manager can develop the resource loadings and it is the schedule which ultimately is determined
by both calendar and resource constraints.
Organization and Accountability
Who is responsible for what? Without clear, unambiguous responses to this question there can be
no assurance that the task will be done. In general, committees do not finish projects and there
should be one organizational unit responsible for each element in the WBS and one person in that
organizational unit who holds final responsibility. Thus, responsibility implies a single name to
be mapped to the task or element of the WBS, and it is good practice to place the name of the
responsible entity or person in the appropriate node on the WBS.
However, accountability may have multiple levels below the top level of complete respon-
sibility. Some individuals or functions may have approval power, veto power without approval
power, others may be needed for information or advice, and so on. Often, such multilevel account-
ability crosses functional and/or geographical boundaries, and hence, communication becomes
of great importance.
A tool which has proved of considerable value to Heublein where multilevel accountability
and geographical dispersion of project staff is common is the “accountability matrix,” which is
shown in Figure 8.
The accountability matrix reflects considerable thought about the strategy of the program.
In fact, one of its great advantages is that it forces the originator (usually the project manager) to
think through the process of implementation. Some individuals must be involved because their
input is essential. For example, all engineering managers were essential inputs to establish the
exact nature of their needs. On the other hand, some individuals or departments are formally
involved to enlist their support, even though a satisfactory program could be defined without them.
Meridth-cases.indd 323 11/6/2015 5:21:34 PM
324 Cases
Control System
The basic loop of feedback for control is shown in Figure 9. This rationale underlies all approaches
to controlling projects. Given that a plan (or budget) exists, we then must know what is perfor-
mance (or actual); a comparison of the two may give a variance. If a variance exists, then the
cause of the variance must be sought. Note that any variance is a call for review; as experienced
project managers are well aware, underspending or early completions may be as unsatisfactory
as overspending and late completions.
The PM&C program did not involve large purchasing, or for that matter, many purchases.
Nor were large numbers of people working on different tasks to be kept track of and coordinated.
Thus, it was possible to control the PM&C program through the use of Gantt conventions using
schedule bars to show plan and filling them in to show performance. Progress was tracked on a
periodic basis, once a week.
Figure 10 shows the timing of the periodic reviews for control purpose and defines the
nature of the reports used.
Milestones and Schedule Subdivisions
Milestones and Schedule Subdivisions are a part of the control system. Of the set of events which
can be, milestones form a limited subset of events, in practice rarely exceeding 20 at any given
level. The milestones are predetermined times (or performance states) at which the feedback loop
Mgrs. of Eng.
Activity PM&C Mgr Consultant FS/F GPG Wines Spirits Dir F&MP
Program plan I P A
Design‐phase reports I P P P P P
Procedures manual I A
Reporting and control system I P P P P P
Computer support survey I P P
Project planning and control seminar A I P
Technical seminars I P P P A
Legend: I: Initiate/responsibility
A: Approve
P: Provide input
FIGURE 8 Accountability Matrix for PM&C Program
Plan Actual
Variance?
no yes
New
plan
Forecast
to complete
Corrective
action
Find
cause
FIGURE 9 The Basic
Feedback Loop of
Control
Meridth-cases.indd 324 11/6/2015 5:21:35 PM
325Heublein: Project Management and Control System
of control described above (Figure 9) should be exercised. Other subdivisions of the project are
possible, milestones simply being a subdivision by events. Periodic time subdivisions may be
made, or division into phases, one of the most common. Figure 11 shows the milestones for the
PM&C program.
Summary
The Heublein PM&C program met the conditions for a successful project in the sense that it was
completed on time and within the budgeted funds. As is so often the case, the existence of a for-
mal plan and continuing reference to it made it possible to deal with changes of scope. Initial
reaction to the educational package was so favorable that the population of attendees was
increased by Group executives and engineering managers.
To deliver on time and within budget but to deliver a product which does not serve the
client’s needs is also unsatisfactory. Did this PM&C program achieve the “General Objectives”
of Figure 5? As is so often the case in managerial systems and educational programs, we are
forced to rely on the perceptions of the clients. In this PM&C program, the clients are Corporate
Management, Group Management, and, most importantly, the Managers of Engineering and their
staffs. In the short run, the latter two operational clients are primary. In addition to informal feed-
back from them, formal feedback was obtained in the form of Impact Statements (item number
4000 in the WBS of Figure 5). The Impact Statements concerned the impact of the PM&C
1. Periodic status checking will be performed monthly.
2. Labor costs will be collected manually and estimated where necessary from discussion
with Group engineering management.
3. Out‐of‐pocket costs will be collected through commitments and/or invoice payment
records.
4. Monthly status reports will be issued by the PM&C program project manager including:
a. Cost to date summaries
b. Cost variances
c. Schedule performance relative to schedule in Gantt format
d. Changes in scope or other modifications to plan
5. Informal control will be exercised through milestone anticipation by the PM&C program
project manager. FIGURE 10 Control
System
Date Description
5 Feb Program plan approved by both Corporate and Groups
26 Feb Reporting and control system approved by Corporate and Groups
5 Mar Organizational impact analysis report issued
7 Apr Basic project planning and control seminars completed
24 Aug Final procedures manual approved Technical seminars completed
Computer support systems survey completed
30 Nov Final impact assessment report issued FIGURE 11 Milestones
Meridth-cases.indd 325 11/6/2015 5:21:35 PM
326 Cases
program on the concerned organization (“How many labor hours are expected to be devoted to
the PM&C system?”) and response to the PM&C program (“Has this been of value to you in
doing your job better?”).
Clearly, the response of perceived value from the operating personnel was positive. Can we
measure the improvement which we believe to be taking place in the implementation of capital
and other projects? It may be years before the impact (positive or negative) can be evaluated, and
even then there may be such confounding with internal and external variables that no unequivocal,
quantified response can be defined.
At this point, we base our belief in the value of the PM&C program on the continuing
flow—starting with Impact Statements—of positive perceptions. The following is an example of
such a response, occurring one year after the exposure of the respondent:
. . . find attached an R&D Project Tracking Diagram developed as a direct result of the [PM&C] semi-
nar . . . last year. [In the seminar we called it] a Network Analysis Diagram. The Product Development
Group has been using this exclusively to track projects. Its value has been immeasurable. Since its
inception, fifteen new products have gone through the sequence . . . .
Meridth-cases.indd 326 11/6/2015 5:21:35 PM
327
D. U. Singer Hospital Products Corp.4
Herbert F. Spirer
D. U. Singer Hospital Products Corp. has done sufficient new product development at the research
and development level to estimate a high likelihood of technical success for a product of assured
commercial success: a long‐term antiseptic. Management has instructed Singer’s Antiseptic
Division to make a market entry at the earliest possible time; they have requested a complete plan
up to the startup of production. Marketing and other plans following startup of production are to
be prepared separately after this plan has been completed.
Project responsibility is assigned to the division’s Research and Development Group; Mike
Richards, the project scientist who developed the product, is assigned responsibility for project
management. Assistance will be required from other parts of the company: Packaging Task Force,
R & D Group; Corporate Engineering; Corporate Purchasing; Hospital Products Manufacturing
Group; and Packaged Products Manufacturing Group.
Mike was concerned about the scope of the project. He knew from his own experience that
a final formula had yet to be developed, although such development was really a “routine” func-
tion. The remaining questions had to do with color, odor, and consistency additives rather than
any performance‐related modification. Fortunately, the major regulatory issues had been resolved,
and he believed that submission of regulatory documentation would be followed by rapid approval
as they already had a letter of approval contingent on final documentation.
But there were also issues in packaging that had to be resolved; development of the packag-
ing design was one of his primary concerns at this time. Ultimately, there will have to be manu-
facturing procedures in accordance with corporate policies and standards: capital equipment
selection and procurement, installation of this equipment, and startup.
Mike was concerned about defining the project unambiguously. To that end, he obtained an
interview with S. L. Mander, the group vice president.
When he asked Mander where his responsibility should end, the executive turned the ques-
tion back to him. Mike had been prepared for this and said that he would like to regard his part of
the project as done when the production process could be turned over to manufacturing. They
agreed that according to Singer practice, this would be when the manufacturing operation could
produce a 95 percent yield of product (fully packaged) at a level of 80 percent of the full produc-
tion goal of 10 million liters per year.
“But I want you to remember,” said Mander, “that you must meet all current FDA, EPA,
and OSHA regulations and you must be in compliance with our internal specification—the one
I’ve got is dated September and is RD78/965. And you know that manufacturing now—quite
rightly, I feel—insists on full written manufacturing procedures.”
After this discussion, Mike felt that he had enough information about this aspect to start to
pin down what had to be done to achieve these results. His first step in this effort was to meet with
P. H. Docent, the director of research.
“You are naive if you think that you can just start right in finalizing the formula,” said
Docent. “You must first develop a product rationale (a).5 This is a formally defined process
according to company policy. Marketing expects inputs at this stage, manufacturing expects their
voice to be heard, and you will have to have approvals from every unit of the company that is
involved; all of this is reviewed by the Executive Committee. You should have no trouble if you
do your homework, but expect to spend a good eight weeks to get this done.”
4 Reprinted with permission from Herbert F. Spirer.
5 Tasks which must be accounted for in a network plan are identified by lowercase alphabetic symbols in parentheses.
Refer to Exhibit 1.
Meridth-cases.indd 327 11/6/2015 5:21:35 PM
328 Cases
“That certainly stretches things out,” said Mike. “I expected to take 12 weeks to develop the
ingredient formula (b) and you know that I can’t start to establish product specifications (c) until
the formula is complete. That’s another three weeks.”
“Yes, but while you are working on the product specifications you can get going on the
regulatory documentation (d). Full internal specifications are not required for that work, but you
can’t start those documents until the formula is complete.”
“Yes, and I find it hard to believe that we can push through both preparation of documents
and getting approval in three weeks, but Environmental swears it can be done.”
“Oh, it can be done in this case because of the preparatory work. Of course, I won’t say that
this estimate of three weeks is as certain as our other time estimates. All we need is a change of
staff at the Agency and we are in trouble. But once you have both the specifications and the
approval, you can immediately start on developing the production processing system (g).”
“Yes, and how I wish we could get a lead on that, but the designers say that there is too
much uncertainty and they won’t move until they have both specifications and regulatory docu-
mentation and approval. They are offering pretty fast response; six weeks from start to finish for
the processing system.”
“They are a good crew, Mike. And of course, you know that you don’t have to delay on
starting the packaging segment of this project. You can start developing the packaging concept (e)
just as soon as the product rationale has been developed. If my experience is any judge, it will
take a full eight weeks; you’ll have to work to keep the process from running forever.”
“But as soon as that is finished we can start on the design of the package and its materials (f),
which usually takes about six weeks. Once that is done we can start developing the pack‐ aging
system (h), which shouldn’t take longer than eight weeks,” concluded Mike. At this point, he
realized that although Docent would have general knowledge, he needed to talk directly to the
Director of Manufacturing.
“The first step, which follows the completion of the development of processing and pack-
aging systems,” said the Director of Manufacturing, “is to do a complete study of the facilities
and equipment requirements (i). You won’t be able to get that done in less than four weeks. And
that must precede the preparation of the capital equipment list (j) which should take about three‐
quarters as long. Of course, as soon as the development of both the process system and packaging
system are completed, you could start on preparing the written manufacturing facilities proce-
dures (q).”
“But,” said Mike, “Can I really finish the procedures before I have installed the manufac-
turing facilities (p)?”
“No, quite right. What you can do is get the first phase done, but the last three of the ten
weeks it will take to do that will have to wait for the installation of the manufacturing
facilities.”
“Then this means that I really have two phases for the writing, that which can be completed
without the manufacturing facilities installation (q), and that which has to wait for them (q’).”
“True. Now you realize that the last thing you have to do after completing the procedures
and installing the equipment and facilities is to run a pilot test (r) which will show that you have
reached a satisfactory level?”
“Yes. Since that must include debugging, I’ve estimated a six‐week period as adequate.”
The director of manufacturing assented. Mike continued, “What I’m not sure of is whether we
can run all the installation tasks in parallel.”
“You can let the purchase orders and carry out the procurement of process equipment (k),
packaging equipment (I), and facilities (m) as soon as the capital equipment list is complete. The
installation of each of these types of equipment and facilities can start as soon as the goods are
on hand (n, o, p).”
Meridth-cases.indd 328 11/6/2015 5:21:35 PM
329D. U. Singer Hospital Products Corp.
“What do you estimate for the times to do these tasks?” asked Mike. The director of manu-
facturing estimated 18, 8, and 4 weeks for the purchasing phases for each of the subsystems in
that order and four weeks for each of the installations. “Then I can regard my job as done with
the delivery of the procedures and when I show my 95 percent yield,” said Mike, and the director
of manufacturing agreed, but reminded Mike that none of the purchasing cycles could start until
the capital equipment list had been prepared and approved (j), which he saw as a three‐week task.
The executive committee of D. U. Singer Hospital Products Corporation set a starting date
for the project of March 10 and asked Mike to project a completion date with his submission of
the plan. The committee’s request implied that whatever date Mike came up with was acceptable,
but Mike knew that he would be expected to show how to shorten the time to complete the
project. However, his task in making the schedule was clear; he had to establish the resource
requirements and deal with calendar constraints as best as he could.
To this end, Mike had to get an estimate of resources, which he decided to do by making a
list of the activities and asking each group involved what was their level of employee input. The
results of this survey are shown in Exhibit 1. For example, activity a takes 8 weeks and requires
12 worker‐weeks from R&D, or an average of 1.5 workers for the entire 8‐week duration of
activity.
For the purposes of overall planning, the accounting department told Mike that he could
estimate a cost of $600 per week per employee. This would enable him to provide a cash flow
forecast along with his plan, which the chief accountant said would be expected, something that
Mike had not realized.
■ EXHIBIT 1 Labor Requirements (Worker‐Weeks)
Activity
Packaging
task force R&D group Corp. eng.
H‐P
Manuf.
Pack. prod.
manuf Maint. Purchasing
Material and other
direct charges
a—prod. rationale 1 12 1 1 2 0 0 $0
b—dev. formula 0 16 4 2 0 0 0 500
c—prod. spec. 1 6 3 1 1 0 1 0
d—reg. document 0 12 4 2 0 0 0 0
e—dev. pkg. concept 12 8 4 2 8 0 2 4000
f—design pkg. 12 2 3 0 3 0 3 2000
g—dev. proces. sys. 0 18 12 12 0 0 0 0
h—dev. pkg. sys. 24 8 8 0 8 0 2 0
i—study facil./eqpt. req. 0 4 16 2 2 0 0 0
j—capital equip. list 0 1 3 0 0 0 1 0
k—procure proces. eqpt. 0 1 1 1 0 0 7 40,000
1—procure pkg. eqpt. 1 0 1 0 1 0 9 160,000
m—procure facil. 0 0 1 1 1 1 6 30,000
n—install proces. eqpt. 0 2 4 8 0 4 1 4000
o—install pkg. eqpt. 2 0 4 0 8 4 1 8000
p—install mfg. facil. 0 0 5 5 5 10 1 6000
q,q’—written procedures 5 5 5 10 15 10 0 5000
r—pilot test 3 6 6 6 6 6 0 0
Meridth-cases.indd 329 11/6/2015 5:21:36 PM
330 Cases
Mike knew that it was customary at D. U. Singer to provide the following inputs as parts of
a plan to be submitted to the executive committee:
A. WBS.
B. An activity‐on‐node (PERT) network.
C. A determination of the critical path(s) and the duration along the path.
D. An activity list, early‐start schedule, slack list, and master schedule. Assume that
every activity begins at its early start, regardless of resource constraints.
E. A period labor requirements table for each group and the project as a whole.
F. A cash flow requirements graph for the project, assuming that charges are uniformly
distributed throughout the activity.
Meridth-cases.indd 330 11/6/2015 5:21:36 PM
331
Automotive Builders, Inc.: The Stanhope Project
Jack Meredith
It was a cold, gray October day as Jim Wickes pulled his car into ABI’s corporate offices parking
lot in suburban Detroit. The leaves, in yellows and browns, swirled around his feet as he walked
into the wind toward the lobby. “Good morning, Mr. Wickes,” said his administrative assistant as
he came into the office. “That proposal on the Stanhope project just arrived a minute ago. It’s on
your desk.” “Good morning, Debbie. Thanks. I’ve been anxious to see it.”
This was the day Jim had scheduled to review the 2009 supplemental capital request, and
he didn’t want any interruptions as he scrutinized the details of the flexible manufacturing project
planned for Stanhope, Iowa. The Stanhope proposal, compiled by Ann Williamson, project man-
ager and managerial “champion” of this effort, looked like just the type of project to fit ABI’s new
strategic plan, but there was a large element of risk in the project. Before recommending the
project to Steve White, executive vice president of ABI, Jim wanted to review all the details one
more time.
History of ABI
ABI started operations as the Farm Equipment Company just after the First World War. Employing
new technology to produce diesel engine parts for tractors, the firm flourished with the growth of
farming and became a multimillion‐dollar company by 1940.
During the World War II, the firm switched to producing tank and truck parts in volume for
the military. At the war’s end, the firm converted its equipment IN to the production of automo-
tive parts for the expanding automobile industry. To reflect this major change in their product
line, the company was renamed Automotive Builders, Inc. (ABI), though they remained a major
supplier to the farm equipment market.
A Major Capital Project
The farm equipment industry had been doing well, but there were some disturbing trends.
Japanese manufacturers had entered the industry and were beginning to take a significant share
of the domestic market. More significantly, domestic labor costs were significantly higher than
costs overseas and resulted in price disadvantages that couldn’t be ignored any longer. Perhaps
most important of all, quality differences between American and Japanese farm equipment,
including tractors, were becoming quite noticeable.
To improve the quality and costs of their incoming materials, many of the domestic tractor
manufacturers were beginning to single source a number of their tractor components. This
allowed them better control over both quality and cost and made it easier to coordinate delivery
schedules at the same time.
In this vein, one of the major tractor engine manufacturers, code‐named “Big Red” within
ABI, let its suppliers know that it was interested in negotiating a contract for a possible 100 percent
sourcing of 17 versions of special piston heads destined for a new line of high‐efficiency tractor
engines expected to replace the current conventional engines in both new and existing tractors.
These were all six‐cylinder diesel engines and thus would require six pistons each.
This put ABI in an interesting situation. If they failed to bid on this contract, they would be
inviting competition into their very successful and profitable diesel engine parts business. Thus,
to protect their existing successful business and to pursue more such business, ABI seemed
required to bid on this contract. Should ABI be successful in their bid, this would result in
100 percent sourcing in both the original equipment market (OEM) as well as the replacement
market with its high margins. Furthermore, the high investment required to produce these special
pistons at ABI’s costs would virtually rule out future competition.
Meridth-cases.indd 331 11/6/2015 5:21:36 PM
332 Cases
ABI had two plants producing diesel engine components for other manufacturers and
believed that they had a competitive edge in engineering of this type. These plants, however,
could not accommodate the volume Big Red expected for the new engine. Big Red insisted at
their negotiations that a 100 percent supplier be able to meet peak capacity at their assembly plant
for this new line.
As Jim reviewed the proposal, he decided to refer back to the memos that restated their
business strategy and started them thinking about a new Iowa plant located in the heart of the
farm equipment industry for this project. In addition, Steve White had asked the following basic
yet rather difficult questions about the proposal at their last meeting, and Jim wanted to be sure
he had them clearly in mind as he reviewed the files:
• ABI is already achieving an excellent ROI. Won’t this investment simply tend to dilute it?
• Will the cost in new equipment be returned by an equivalent reduction in labor? Where’s the
payoff?
• What asset protection is there? This proposal requires an investment in new facilities before
knowing whether a long‐term contract will be procured to reimburse us for our investment.
• Does this proposal maximize ROI, sales potential, or total profit?
To address these questions adequately, Jim decided to recheck the expected after‐tax profits
and average rate of return (based on sales of 70,000 engines per year) when he reached the finan-
cial portion of the proposals. These figures should give a clear indication of the “quality” of the
investment. There were, however, other aspects of capital resource allocation to consider besides
the financial elements. One of these was the new business strategy of the firm, as recently articu-
lated by ABI’s executive committee.
The Business Strategy
A number of elements of ABI’s business strategy were directly relevant to this proposal. Jim took
out a notepad to jot down each of them and assign them a priority as follows:
1. Bid only on good margin products that have the potential for maintaining their margins over
a long term.
2. Pursue only new products whose design or production process is of a proprietary nature and
that exist in areas where our technical abilities enable us to maintain a long‐term position.
3. Employ, if at all possible, the most advanced technology in new projects that is either within
our experience or requires the next step up in experience.
4. Foster the “project champion” approach to innovation and creativity. The idea is to encourage
entrepreneurship by approving projects to which individual managers are committed and
that they have adopted as personal “causes” based on their belief that the idea, product, or
process is in our best interest.
5. Maintain small plants of no more than 480 employees. These have been found to be the most
efficient, and they enjoy the best labor relations.
With these in mind, Jim reopened the proposal and started reading critical sections.
Demand Forecasts and Scenarios
For this proposal, three scenarios were analyzed in terms of future demand and financial impacts.
The baseline Scenario I assumed that the new line would be successful. Scenario II assumed that
the Japanese would soon follow and compete successfully with Big Red in this line. Scenario III
Meridth-cases.indd 332 11/6/2015 5:21:36 PM
333Automotive Builders, Inc.: The Stanhope Project
assumed that the new line was a failure. The sales volume forecasts under these three scenarios
are shown in Table 1.
There was, however, little confidence in any of these forecasts. In the preceding few years,
Japan had become a formidable competitor, not only in price but also in more difficult areas of
competition, such as quality and reliability. Furthermore, the economic situation in 2009 was
taking a severe toll on American farmers and economic forecasts indicated there was no relief in
sight. Thus, as stated in the proposal:
The U.S. farm market will be a difficult battleground for world farm equipment manufacturers, and
any forecast of a particular engine’s potential in this market must be considered as particularly risky.
How much risk do we want to accept? Every effort should be made to minimize our exposure on this
investment and maximize our flexibility.
Manufacturing Plan
The proposal stressed two primary aspects of the manufacturing process. First, a learning curve
was employed in calculating production during the 1000‐unit ramp‐up implementation period in
order to not be overly optimistic. A learning rate of 80 percent was assumed. Second, an advanced
technology process using a flexible manufacturing system (FMS), based largely on turning
centers, was recommended since it came in at $1 million less than conventional equipment and
met the strategy guidelines of using sophisticated technology when appropriate.
Since ABI had closely monitored Big Red’s progress in the engine market, the request for
bids had been foreseen. In preparation for this, Jim had authorized a special manufacturing
process study to determine more efficient and effective ways of producing piston heads. The
study considered product design, process selection, quality considerations, productivity, and
manufacturing system planning. Three piston manufacturing methods were considered in the
study: (1) batch manufacture via computer numerically controlled (CNC) equipment, (2) an
FMS, and (3) a high‐volume, low‐unit‐cost transfer machine.
The resulting recommendation was to install a carefully designed FMS if it appeared that
additional flexibility might be required in the future for other versions or even other manufactur-
ers. Though such a system would be expensive, the volume of production over the FMS’s longer
lifetime would offset that expense. Four preferred machine builders were contacted for equip-
ment specifications and bids. It was ABI’s plan to work closely with the selected vendor in
designing and installing the equipment, thus building quality and reliability into both the product
and the process and learning about the equipment at the same time.
To add further flexibility for the expensive machinery, all design features that would facili-
tate retool or changeover to other products were incorporated. For example, the machining
centers would also be capable of machining other metals, such as aluminum or nodular iron, and
■ TABLE 1 Demand Forecasts (000s Engines)*
Year Baseline I Scenario II Scenario III
2010 69 69 69
2011 73 72 72
2012 90 81 77
2013 113 95 68
2014 125 87 62
2015 145 74 47
*Each engine requires six pistons.
Meridth-cases.indd 333 11/6/2015 5:21:36 PM
334 Cases
would be fitted with variable feed and speed motors, feed‐force monitors, pressure‐controlled
clamping of workpieces, and air‐leveling pallets. Also, fully interchangeable chucks, spindles,
pallets, tooling, and risers would be purchased to minimize the spare parts inventories.
Plant Operation and Organization
As stated in the proposal, many innovative practices were to be employed at the new plant:
• Machine operators will be trained to do almost all of their own machine maintenance.
• All employees will conduct their own statistical process control, and piston heads will be
subject to 100 percent inspection.
• There will only be four skill classes in the plant. Every employee in each of those classes will
be trained to do any work within that class.
• There will not be any time clocks in the plant.
The organizational structure for the 11 salaried workers in the new plant is shown in
Figure 1, and the complete labor summary is illustrated in Figure 2, including the shift break-
down. As can be seen, the plant will be relatively small, with 65 employees in the ratio of 1:5
salaried to hourly. The eight‐month acquisition of the employees during the ramp‐up is illustrated
in Figure 3, with full employment occurring by March 2010.
Financial Considerations
Financial aspects of new proposals at ABI were considered from a number of perspectives, in part
because of the interdependent nature of many proposals. The results of not investing in a proposal
are normally compared with the results of investing and the differences noted. Variations on the
investment assumptions are also tested, including errors in the forecast sales volumes, learning
rates, productivities, selling prices, and cancellations of both current and future orders for exist-
ing and potential business.
Plant
manager
Manufacturing
manager
Personnel
Clerk
Clerk
Shift 2
supervisor
Shift 3
supervisor
Engineer
Engineering/
quality
Quality
control
ClerkFIGURE 1 Stanhope
Organization
Meridth-cases.indd 334 11/6/2015 5:21:39 PM
335Automotive Builders, Inc.: The Stanhope Project
Total
Hourly
Salaried
80
60
40
20
0
Aug Sept Oct
2009
Nov Dec Jan Feb
2010
March FIGURE 3 Stanhope
Labor Buildup
FIGURE 2 Stanhope
Labor Summary
Salaried labor Number of staff
Plant manager 1
Manufacturing managers (three shifts) 3
Quality control manager 1
Engineering 2
Personnel manager 1
Clerical 3
11
Hourly labor Days Afternoons Night
Direct 14 14 10
Inspection 1 1 1
Maintenance 2 1 1
Tooling 2 2 1
Rec./shp./mtl. 2 1 1
Total 21 19 14
Summary
Salary 11
Hourly 54
Total 65
Meridth-cases.indd 335 11/6/2015 5:21:41 PM
336 Cases
For the Stanhope proposal, the site investment required is $3,012,000. The details of this
investment are shown in Table 2. The total investment required amounts to $7,108,000 (plus
required working capital of $1,380,000). The equipment is depreciated over an eight‐year life.
ABI, under the revised tax laws, is in the 34 percent tax bracket. The price of the piston heads has
been tentatively set at $25.45 apiece. ABI’s expected costs are shown in Table 3.
Some Concerns
Jim had spoken with some of his colleagues about the FMS concept after the preliminary finan-
cial results had been tabulated. Their concerns were what now interested him. For example, he
remembered one manager asking: “Suppose Big Red’s sales only reach 70 percent of our projec-
tions in the 2012–2013 time period, or say, perhaps as much as 150 percent; how would this affect
■ TABLE 2 Stanhope Site Capital Costs
Land and site preparation
Land $246,000
Access roads/parking lot 124,000
Landscaping 22,000
Building costs
Building (67,000 sq ft) 1,560,000
Air conditioning 226,000
Power 205,000
Employee services 177,000
Legal fees and permits 26,000
Auxiliary equipment
ABI company sign 25,000
Containers, racks, and so on 33,000
Flume 148,000
Coolant disposal 97,000
Furnishings 51,000
Forklift trucks 72,000
Total 3,012,000
■ TABLE 3 Piston Head Cost Summary
Material $8.47
Labor 1.06
Variable overhead 2.23
Fixed overhead 2.44
Freight 0.31
Total factory cost 14.51
General and administrative 1.43
Scrap 0.82
Testing 0.39
Total cost 17.15
Meridth-cases.indd 336 11/6/2015 5:21:41 PM
337Automotive Builders, Inc.: The Stanhope Project
the project? Does the FMS still apply or would you consider some other form of manufacturing
equipment, possibly conventional or CNC with potential aftermarket application in the former
case or a transfer machine in the latter case?”
Another manager wrote down his thoughts as a memo to forward to Jim. He had two major
concerns:
• Scenario II analysis assumes the loss of substantial volume to competition. This seems rather
unlikely.
• After‐tax margins seem unreasonably high. Can we get such margins on a sole‐source
contract?
Jim wondered what these changes in their assumptions would do to the ROI of the proposal
and its overall profitability.
Conclusion
Jim had concerns about the project also. He wondered how realistic the demand forecasts were,
given the weak economy and what the Japanese might do. If the demand didn’t materialize, ABI
might be sorry they had invested in such an expensive piece of equipment as an FMS.
Strategically, it seemed like ABI had to make this investment to protect its profitable posi-
tion in the diesel engine business. But how far should this argument be carried? Were they letting
their past investments color their judgment on new ones? He was also concerned about the memo
questioning the high profit margins. They did seem high in the midst of a sluggish economy.
Meridth-cases.indd 337 11/6/2015 5:21:41 PM
338
Glossary
This glossary lists the major key terms in the book followed by the chapter section where it is
mainly discussed. For other locations of the terms, please consult the Index.
3PL (6.2)— a third‐party logistics contractor that handles portions of or the entire supply chain
function.
Aggregate planning (5.3)— a preliminary, approximate schedule of an organization ’ s overall
operations that will satisfy the forecast of demand at minimum cost.
Balanced scorecard (7.2)— a method for monitoring the performance of an organization ’ s strat-
egy on multiple metrics.
Benchmarking (8.3)— comparing an organization ’ s processes to the best practices to be found.
Bias (5.2)— a measure of forecast accuracy that assesses the tendency of the forecast to under or
over estimate demand.
Blueprinting (4.3)— see process‐flow analysis.
Brainstorming (8.5)— a technique for generating solutions among a group.
Bullwhip effect (6.3)— a causal chain of contractors where small perturbations anywhere in the
chain are amplified along the chain to distort supplies.
Business process design (8.1)— see Reengineering.
Causal methods (5.2)— using related external data and factors to make a forecast.
Cause–effect diagram (8.5)— a method for determining factors that may impact the performance
of some process.
CCC (6.2)— cash conversion cycle.
Cellular production (3.1)— a production system that combines the advantages of the job shop and
flow shop to obtain the high variety possible with the job form and the reduced costs and short
response times associated with the flow form.
Chase demand (5.3)— a production strategy that uses hiring, layoffs, and overtime to exactly
meet demand in each period.
Closed‐loop supply chain (6.7)— see Reverse logistics.
Cloud computing (1.1)— storing and using information on a shared, external computer system.
Collaborative planning (5.3)— coordinating with supply chain partners to continuously update
forecasts.
Continuous‐flow manufacturing, CFM (9.3)— setting up a production system so that products
flow continuously at the same rate as that of customer demand.
Continuous process (3.1)— a transformation process used to produce standardized, fluidic products.
Contract manufacturer (6.4)— a third party who produces all of a firm ’ s outputs.
Control chart (7.3)— a tool for determining if a process has an assignable cause of variation.
Core capabilities (1.3)— the areas of knowledge and strength that distinguish an organization.
CPM (2.3)— critical path method (see Project network).
Critical chain (2.3)— an approach to project scheduling that considers three primary impediments
to project completion.
Critical path (2.3)— the longest path through a project network showing the earliest a project can
be completed.
Customer relationship management, CRM (6.6)— a system that collects customer data from
internal and external sources to help the firm provide better service for its customers.
Meridth-Gloss.indd 338 10/29/2015 3:48:31 PM
339Glossary
Cycle time (4.3)—the amount of time to produce one unit.
Delphi method (5.2)—a procedure for developing a forecast from a group of experts.
DMAIC (8.2)—design, measure, analyze, improve, control; the basic process for conducting Six
Sigma projects.
Earned value (2.4)—a technique for monitoring and controlling both cost and time in a project by
giving monetary credit for each activity in the project.
Economies of scale (4.1)—obtaining lower unit costs by using larger facilities to spread the fixed
costs over a greater volume.
Economies of scope (4.1)—obtaining economies of scale but through flexible equipment that can
produce greater variety to increase production volumes.
Efficiency (4.3)—the amount of output divided by amount of input, in the same units, expressed
as a percentage.
Enterprise resource planning, ERP (6.6)—a comprehensive computer system that provides seam-
less, real‐time information to all stakeholders that need it.
Exponential smoothing (5.2)—a forecasting method that uses a weighted average of the current
demand and the previous period’s demand.
Facilitating good (1.1)—the product portion of a service.
Fail‐safing (3.2)—installing preventive measures at likely service failure points.
Failure mode and effects analysis, FMEA (7.2)—a technique to identify and prioritize risks.
Fishbone chart (8.5)—see Cause–effect diagram.
Flow shop (3.1)—a transformation process used to produce discrete products or services, typi-
cally on a single, continuous production line.
Focus (1.3)—the one or two greatest areas of strength in an organization.
Historical analogy (5.2)—predicting demand for a new item through analysis of past demand for
a similar item.
Hollowed out (6.4)—when a supplier takes over a customer’s production or design process and
then goes into business competing with that customer.
House of quality (8.3)—see QFD.
ISO 9000, 14000 (7.2)—checklists of good business practices.
Job shop (3.1)—a transformation process used to produce unique products (or services) or
batches of such in separate functional areas.
Kaizen (9.5)—continuous improvement of a production system.
Kanban (9.4)—a card that authorizes materials for production, thereby “pulling” production
through the system.
Lean production (9.1)—see Toyota Production System.
Learning curve (4.3)—a mathematical model that captures the human learning showing the
decreasing amount of time required for each unit of additional production.
Level production (5.3)—a production strategy that uses inventory and stockouts to balance out
the demand. Not easily used for services.
Life‐cycle analysis (5.2)—forecasting demand based on the expected life cycle of the product
or service.
Mass customization (1.2)—making near‐custom products or services as inexpensively as mass‐
produced ones.
Mean absolute deviation, MAD (5.2)—a measure of forecast accuracy that gives the average
amount of error regardless of whether the error was high or low.
Mean absolute percentage error, MAPE (5.2)—similar to MAD but stated in terms of
percentages.
Metcalfe’s law (6.6)—the value of a network is proportional to the square of the number of
elements connected to it.
Moore’s law (6.6)—computing power doubles every 18–24 months.
Meridth-Gloss.indd 339 10/29/2015 3:48:31 PM
340 Glossary
Moving average forecast (5.2)—a method that averages the values of the last n periods.
Next‐shoring (6.4)—moving production close to, or next to, the end customer.
Optimistic time (2.3)—the soonest an activity may reasonably be completed, sometimes stated as
one chance in a hundred.
Outsourcing (6.4)—contracting with external suppliers for items that were formerly produced
internally.
Overbooking (4.2)—intentionally taking more orders than your service capacity to offset no‐
show customers.
Performance frontier (1.3)—the envelope showing the range of production possibilities given the
technology employed.
PERT (2.2)—program evaluation and review technique (see Project network).
Pessimistic time (2.3)—the longest estimated time an activity may reasonably be completed,
sometimes stated as one chance in a hundred.
Process capability analysis (8.5)—the extent to which a process can meet a customer’s
requirements.
Process‐flow analysis/mapping (4.3)—mapping the flows, waits, activities, and storages in a
product or service production process.
Product–process matrix (3.2)—a diagram showing the ranges of variety and batch size combina-
tions for alternate transformation processes.
Project charter (2.2)—an abbreviated description of a project used for information or funding
purposes and the basis for a final project plan.
Project life cycle (2.2)—the start, growth, and ending stages of a project, usually shaped like a
stretched S or a stretched J (exponential form).
Project network (2.2)—a diagram of nodes connected by arrows showing the tasks and their
precedences, usually of the PERT or CPM type.
Project portfolio (2.2)—all the projects an organization is involved in.
Quality function deployment, QFD (8.3)—a method to translate customer requirements into pro-
cess capabilities.
RACI matrix (2.2)—a table of the tasks versus human resources showing who is responsible,
who is accountable, who to consult, and who to inform.
Reengineering (8.1)—a process for making major rather than incremental improvements in a
process.
Reshoring (6.4)—moving production of an offshore product back home.
Revenue management (4.2)—see Yield management.
Reverse logistics (6.4)—flow back to the originating producer for reuse or disposal.
RFID (1.1)—radio‐frequency identification tags for attaching to inventory.
Sand cone (1.3)—when firms build on previous areas of strength rather than trading them off.
The usual order of strengths starts with quality and then adds delivery dependability, then
speed, and last cost. The order or strengths may vary.
Service level (5.1)—the percentage of demand served.
Servicescape (3.2)—the environment of a service.
Simple regression (5.2)—a statistical procedure used to forecast demand by fitting a linear trend
line to the previous n periods.
Six Sigma (8.2)—a comprehensive methodology for improving business performance. Also a
measure of process performance.
Slack time (2.3)—the amount of time an activity can be delayed before delaying the project’s
completion.
Sole sourcing (6.4)—working with only one supplier.
Stakeholders (2.1)—anyone with an interest in a project.
Meridth-Gloss.indd 340 10/29/2015 3:48:31 PM
341Glossary
Stockless purchasing (6.4)—items that are delivered directly to where they will be used rather
than to a storage facility.
Strategic sourcing (1.1)—selecting a source by considering the total cost of ownership.
Strategy map (7.2)—a map of the flows among four strategic perspectives to visualize the imple-
mentation of a strategy.
Suboptimization (1.1)—when one part of a system is improved to the detriment of other parts or
the whole system.
Supply chain (6.1)—all the activities involved in supplying an end user with a product or
service.
Supply chain operations reference, SCOR (6.7)—a model to help identify best supply chain
practices.
Sustainability (1.1)—reduction of waste to minimize the negative impact on the environment.
Takt time (9.3)—see Cycle time.
Taguchi methods (8.6)—a technique that focuses on the design phase to improve quality.
Theory of constraints (9.3)—an approach to help balance the work flows in a production system
by identifying and removing the bottlenecks.
Time series analysis (5.2)—making a forecast based on the past history of the relevant product or
service demand.
Toyota Production System, TPS (9.1)—a comprehensive approach for eliminating waste
(“muda”) in all forms.
Transformation process (1.1)—the portion of a production system where value is added to inputs
to create outputs by either alter, transport, store, or inspect.
Utilization (4.3)—the percentage of time a resource is used.
Value analysis (6.4)—evaluating the function of an item or service to reduce its cost.
Value Stream Map (9.2)—a diagram showing the process flows of a production system.
Voice of the customer, VOC (8.3)—a method to determine customer requirements.
Work breakdown structure, WBS (2.2)—the set of the tasks required to complete the project,
organized in some fashion.
Yield management (4.2)—a method of allocating fixed service capacity to the highest‐paying
customers first.
Meridth-Gloss.indd 341 10/29/2015 3:48:31 PM
Meridth-Gloss.indd 342 10/29/2015 3:48:31 PM
343
Index
A
Activity, defined, 47
Activity durations, 47
calculating, 51–52
Activity-on-arc (AOA), 48
Activity-on-node (AON), 48
Actual cost (AC), 59
Aggregate inventory value, average (AAIV),
166
Aggregate plan, 148, 153
planning strategies, 149
Aggregate project plan, 38–41
Air Canada, 216, 227, 228
Airtel, 97
Alaska Airlines, 97, 216
Amazon, 185
AmBev, 127
American Airlines, 108
American Express, 217, 227, 228
American Society for Quality, 252
American Standard, 227, 228
Analytics, 126
Organizational evolution with, 128
Anchor Brewery, 98
Analogical reasoning, 245
ANOVA, 253
Anticipation inventories, defined, 181
Anticyclic output, 102
Apple, Inc., 2, 3, 25, 157–158, 159
iPad, 135, 138, 158, 176
APICS, 189
Applied Materials, 159
Applied research, 12
As-is value stream map, 268, 270
Assembly line, 69, 71
Assemble-to-order, 17, 84, 85, 163
Assignable variation, 210, 214
Auto Industry, 3
Autodesk, 188
Automation, 68, 69
Available seat miles, 99
B
Backorders, 181
Balanced scorecard, 204–205
benefits of, 204
four major areas, 205
Bank of America, 226, 228, 231
Barcoding and scanning, 164, 279
Batch size, 84, 85
and flow, 275
Beer game, 168, 195–198
Benchmarking, 189, 205, 234, 235–236
Best Buy, 158–159, 168
Beta distribution, 51
Bias,
of forecast, 137, 147
of measurement system, 243
Big Data, 126
Binomial distribution, 216
Black and Decker, 28
Black belts, of six sigma, 251, 259
Blue Cross, 107
Blueprinting, 112
Boeing, 28
Bottlenecks, 100, 110, 112, 113,
273, 275, 280
defined, 110
in a sequential process, 110–112
Brainstorming, 234, 244–245, 246
guidelines, 244
Brainwriting, 245
Breakeven location model, 172–173
Breakthrough projects, 40
Bucyrus International, 159
Buffer inventories, 149, 181
Buffers, project and feeding, 58
Bullwhip effect, 168–169
business practices that contribute to,
168–169
Burger King, 84, 98
Business case, 43, 234
Business process design. See reengineering.
Meridth-Index.indd 343 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
344 Index
Business strategy, 21, 27, 28
categories of, 23
formulating, 21–30
C
c chart, 215–216
Capacity
defined, 98, 99
fixed, adding, 103—104, 158
long-term planning, 99–104
measures, 99
planning, 99
for multiple outputs, 102–103
for services, 117–118
strategies, 100–104
and scheduling, 104
short-run, techniques for increasing, 116
short-term alternatives, 115–117
short-term planning, 109–123
timing of increments, 103–104
Capital costs, 184
Carroll Hospital Center, 188
Carrying costs, 184
Cash conversion cycle, 165
Causal forecasting methods, 131,
141–146
Cause and effect diagrams, 225, 226,
233, 234, 246, 250, 253, 271
Cellular production, 66, 79–83, 85,
86, 264
advantages and disadvantages, 80–82
layout, 82–83
u-shaped cells, 264
Chase production, 149
Champions/sponsors, of six sigma, 252
Chance variation, 210
Change management, 36
Channel assembly, 189
Chase, Richard, 88, 185
Chrysler, 3, 230
Cisco Systems, 164, 176, 186
Coty of Springdale, AR, 258
Closed-loop supply chains, 188–189
Closeness preferences, in job form layout,
77–78
Coca-Cola Company, 2
Coefficient of determination, 145
Collaborative Planning, Forecasting, and
Replenishment (CFPR), 153
Collaborative software, 186
Columbia/HCA, 178
Commodities, 68, 162
Community, location decision and,
172–173
Compaq, 157
Competitiveness, 3
defined, 17
global trends, 19–20
Continental Air, 216
Continuous flow manufacturing,
and value, 272
Continuous transformation process, 68–69,
85, 86
Continuous process industries, 68–69
Contract manufacturers, 176, 171
Control, 9, 209, 266
Control charts, 201, 210–216, 233, 234
factors, 213
for attributes, 210, 215–216
constructing, 213–216
determining control limits, 210–211
for variables, 210–215
Control limits, defined, 211
Control system,
characteristics of, 209
Core capabilities, 5, 25, 28–30,
170, 203
strategically important parts of, 29
Core competencies, 28, 163, 176
Correlation coefficient, 145
Cost
and facility size, 101
of goods, 185
of inventory, 183–185
minimization, 23
reductions in, and responsiveness, 19
Costco, 24
Cost-schedule reconciliation charts, 59
Cost-volume-distance model, 78
Cost-volume-profit model, 172
CPM (critical path method), 46, 48
and project scheduling, 46–58
Creativity
enhancing team, 245
threats to, 244
Credit Crisis, 3, 19
Critical activities, 47, 52
Critical chain, 56–58
defined, 58
task-resource dependency, 58
Meridth-Index.indd 344 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
345Index
Critical path, 47, 50, 52, 57
defined, 47
project completion and, 47–49
Critical to quality trees, 226, 234
Cross-docking, 24, 188
Cross-training, 82, 116
Cummins, 227, 228
Cumulative capabilities model. See
Sand Cone Model
Customer performance, 205
Customer relationship management
(CRM), 188
Customer requirements, 229, 236
Customer satisfaction, 3, 226, 259
surveys, 216
Customer service, 229, 200
Customer value, 11–18
Customization, 15—18, 82
continuum of, 15
defined, 15
See also mass customization
CVD model, 78
Cyclical component, 134
Cycle inventories, defined, 182
Cycle time, 72, 73, 111, 270, 272
D
D&H Manufacturing Company, 159
Dana Corporation, 25
Days of supply, 166
Deal structure, 231
Decision support system (DDS), 231
Decoupling inventories, 182
Deere & Co., 258
Defects per million opportunities (DPMO),
226, 231, 232, 234, 239–241
Defects per opportunity, 239–240
Defects per unit, 239
Delayed differentiation, 188
Dell Computer, 165, 166, 188, 189
Deloitte Consulting, 128
Delphi method, 131
Demand
chain, 161, 162
forecast, 106
planning, 129–148
Dependability, competitiveness and, 18
Dependent variable, 141
Derivative projects, 39
Design for assembly (DFA), 264
Design for manufacturability (DFM), 264
Design for Six Sigma, 228, 234
Design of experiments, 234, 249–251, 280
considerations of, 250
Development, 13
DMAIC improvement process, 225,
231–235, 280
Dover Corp., 276
Downstream, in supply chain, 160
Drop shipping, 189
Drum-buffer-rope (DBR), 273
Dun and Bradstreet, 186
Dupont de Nemours, 13
Duracell, 2
Duty tours, 107
E
Early adopters, 12
Early finish times, 48
Early start times, 48
Earned value, 58–59
of projects, control and, 58–59
variances, 59
Earned value chart, 59
eBay, 185
E-commerce, 164
Economies of scale, 107
defined, 101
Economies of scope, defined, 101
Educational services, resource
scheduling, 108
Effectiviness, 12, 67
stages of operational, 203–204
Efficiency, 12, 16, 67, 73, 75, 82,
110—112, 128, 167
defined, 110–111
formula, 73, 111
Electronics industry, 158—159
Energizer, 2
Engineer-to-order, 84, 163
Enterprise resource planning (ERP), 164,
186–188
Environment, 5, 171, 201, 205
EOQ model. See Economic order quantity
(EOQ) model
Ericsson, 97, 164
Event, 47
Exchange rates, 19, 169
Expected completion time, 51
Expediting, 77
Meridth-Index.indd 345 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
346 Index
Experience curves, 119
Exponential smoothing, 136–138
Exports, 4, 19
Extranets, 186
F
Facebook, 8
Facilitating good, 7, 8
Facility
size, planning, 101
Fail safing, and service guarantees,
91–92
Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA),
208–209, 234, 280
Feeding buffer, 58
Finish times, and project completion,
47–49
Finished goods inventory, 183, 267
Finite loading, 106
Fire alarm distributions, 118
First-to-market, 23
Fishbone diagrams. See Cause and effect
diagrams 5S, 277
Flexibility, 16, 26, 75, 76, 79, 81, 82, 101,
116, 167, 175
advantages, 16
defined, 16
competitive advantages of, 16
Flextronics, 171, 176
Float, 50, 165
Floating bottlenecks, 110
Floating workers, 107
Flow analysis, for products and services,
112–115
Flow shops, 68, 69–75, 79, 80, 82, 85,
86, 87, 264
advantages and disadvantages, 69–71
defined, 69
layout of, 71–75
Focus, 3, 25–27, 86, 101
areas of, 26
defined, 25
reasons for loss of, 27
Focused factory, 67
Focused organization, 2, 25, 67
Ford, 2, 230
Forecasting
Assessing accuracy, 147–148
causal methods, 131, 141–146
demand, 106
error, 137, 141, 142
exponential smoothing, 136–138
method and influencing factors,
131–132
moving averages, 134–136
outliers, 143–144
purposes and methods, 130–131
qualitative, 130, 131
quantitative, 131
relationship between variables, 141
residual, 141
seasonal component, 140
tracking signal, 148
trend component, 139
weighted moving average, 135
with regression model, 138–141
Forward buying, 169
Fraction-defective (p) charts, 215–216
Fujitsu Microelectronics, 188
Functional organizations, 67, 230,
231, 271
Functional products, 167-168
Functionality, 14
G
Gantt chart, 45, 55, 105, 234
Garbage in, garbage out (GIGO), 293
General Electric (GE), 25, 226,
227, 230, 231, 186
General Motors (GM), 2, 3, 230
Global trends, 19–20
Goldratt, Eliyahu, 56—58, 245, 273
Green belts, of six sigma, 251, 259
Green movement, 68
Green revolution, 161
Green sourcing, 11, 164
Group technology, 79
H
Hammer, Michael, 4, 24, 229
Harley-Davidson, 25, 262
Harper Hospital, scheduling at, 107
Hayes, Bob, 84, 203
Henry Ford Hospital, 148–149
Hewitt Associates, 225
Hewlett-Packard (HP), 17, 41, 189,
238, 262, 276
Hill, Terry, 25
Historical analogy, 131
Holding costs, 184
Meridth-Index.indd 346 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
347Index
Hollowed out, 172, 175
defined, 29
Home Depot, 189
Honeywell, 226, 259–260, 280
Honda, 28
Hospitals, resource scheduling, 107
House of quality, 236, 237–238
Human resource outsourcing, 225
Hybrid shop, 83
Hybrid stage, in cellular production, 83
I
IBM, 25, 97, 172, 176, 186, 188, 200,
230–231
Idle time, 73
Imitation, 14
Immelt, Jeffrey, 227
Improvement curves, 119
Improvement trajectories, 24–25
Independent variable, 141
Infinite loading, 106
Information outputs, economics of, 9
Information technology
in supply chains, 185–188
Inc Magazine, 98
Innovation, defined, 22
product-process, 87
Innovative products, 167–168
Innovativeness, 12–14
In-process inventories, 77
Inputs
into transformation system, 6
Inspection for variables, 210
Inspection of attributes, 210
Intel, 66
Intensiva HealthCare, 25
International operations, location
decision and, 170–172
International Organization for
Standardization, 207
Intranets, 186
Inventory
considerations, 180–185
costs, 183–185
forms of, 182–183
functions of, 181–182
and lean, 264–265
turnover, 166
Inventory management, 161, 180–185
decisions in, 185
iPad, 135, 138
ISO 9000, 180, 207
ISO 14000, 207
J
Jabil Circuit, 171, 176
Japan
and lean, 261–262
JD Power and Associates, 216–217
JetBlue, 216
JIT. See Just-in-time
Job shop, 66, 67, 68, 75–78, 79, 80, 81, 82,
83, 85, 86, 87, 264
advantages and disadvantages, 75–77
layout, 77–78
Jobs, Steve, 2, 157
Johnson Controls, 166
Joy Global, 159
Just-in-time (JIT) systems, 168
in services, 276–277
See also Lean
JVC, 23
K
Kaizen blitz, 258, 271, 278
Kaizen event, see Kaizen blitz
Kanban, 270, 276
in services, 276–277
See also Pull systems
Kmart, 25
L
Late-to-market, 23
Latest finish time, 49
Latest start time, 49
Layout analysis, purposes of, 67
Layout, and lean, 264
Layout, service operations, 67–68
Lean
benefits of, 279
compared with traditional systems,
262–266
defined, 261
history and philosophy of, 261–266
principles, 261
Lean management, 4
Lean manufacturing, 161, 163
Lean organization, tools for perfection,
277–279
Lean production, 4, 161, 261
Meridth-Index.indd 347 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
348 Index
Lean Six Sigma, 228, 259, 280
Learning curve, 119–121
defined, 119
factors that affect learning rate, 119–120
typical learning-forgetting pattern, 121
Level production, 149
Lewis, Ken, 226
Life-cycle, 22, 26
analysis, 131
of anticyclic outputs, 102
curve, 22
multiple outputs, 102–103
product/process, 86–87
of projects, 41–422
Line balancing, 72–75, 270
Line of visibility, 114
Linear responsibility chart, 45–46
Linearity, of measurement system, 243
LINEST Excel function, 138, 143
LL Bean, 235
Location
and developing capabilities, 170
and logistics, 169
modeling, 170–175
planning strategies, 169–175
of services, 174–175
Logical cell, 81
Logistics, 167–175
defined, 167
Lot-size inventories, 182
Lot sizing rules, 271
Lou Dobbs, 175
Louis Vuitton, 66–67
Lower control limit (LCL), 211
Lucent, 164
M
Made-to-order customization, 76
Maintenance, repair, and operating (MRO)
supplies, 182–183
Make-to-order items, 84–85, 85, 163
Make-to-stock items, 84–85, 85,
86, 163
Malcolm Baldridge National Quality
Award, 232
Management by exception, 211
Mapping, 112
Market evolution, 27
Market segmentation, 23
Martin Marietta, 67
Mass customization, 16–17
Hewlett-Packard example, 17
strategies, 17
Master black belts, of six sigma, 251, 260
Mastercard, 2
Matrix organizations, 42
Mazak, 20
McDonalds, 4, 84, 87, 92, 217
McKinsey and Company, 25, 176
Mean absolute deviation (MAD), 147
Mean absolute percent error (MAPE), 147
Measurement systems analysis, 232, 234,
241–243, 280
Medicaid, 107
Medicare, 107
Mercedes-Benz, 170
Mecklenburg County, NC, 35–36
Merrill Lynch, 227
Metcalfe’s law, 185
Microsoft, 2, 185, 186
NetMeeting, 186
Microsoft Project, 55–56
Milestone points, 44
Miniplant, 81
Mission, 205
Modular design, 17
Monitoring and control, 9, 201–202
Monster.com, 227
Moore’s law, 185
Most likely time, 50
Motorola, 226, 231, 252
Moving averages, 134–136
Movistar, 200–201
MPS. See Master production schedule
Muda, 267
Multiple sourcing, 265
MySap modules, 186–187
N
NAFTA, 175
National Science Foundation, 18
Nemours Children’s Hospital, 34, 35
NetMeeting, 186
Network, 47
Newsvendor Problem, 150–152
Next-shoring, 11, 176
Nike, 2, 20, 175
Nokia, 97
Nominal cell, 81
Nominal Group Technique, 234, 245
Meridth-Index.indd 348 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
349Index
Normal distribution, 210
North Shore – Long Island Jewish Health
System, 201
Northshore University Hospital, 232–233
Number-of-defects (c) charts, 215–216
O
Off-diagonal transformation process, 85
Off-peak pricing, 107
Offshoring, 29, 164, 171, 176
Omni Hotels, 217
One factor at a time (OFAT), 249
Operation splitting, 105, 106
Operational effectiveness, 203–204
measures of, 204
Operational innovation, 4, 24, 28
Operations
activities, 9
defined, 4
trends in, 10–11
Operations strategy, 2
Opportunity costs, 184
Optimistic time, 50
Order qualifier, 25–26
Order winner, 25–26, 170
Ordering costs, 183
Osborn, Alex, 244
Outliers, 143–144
Output, 7–9
See also Product
Outsourcing, 29–30, 164, 171, 175
Sourcing strategies, 175–180
Overbooking, 109
Overlapping, 69
Owens Corning, 187
P
p chart, 200, 215–216
Paced line, 71, 182
Pareto analysis, 226, 234, 253
Parts,
organization into families, 79–80
Path, defined, 47
Path slack, 50
PepsiCo, 2–3
Performance frontier, 23–25
PERT (program evaluation and review
technique), 46, 48
chart, 56
and project scheduling, 46–58
Pessimistic time, 50
Pilot cell, 83
Pipeline inventories, defined, 181
Planned value (PV), 59
Planning
and control, and lean, 266
See also Aggregate plan
Platform projects, 40
Poisson distribution, 216
Poka yoke, 278
Population, 210
Postponement, 17, 189
Precedence graph, 72
Precedence relationships, 47
Preemption, 106
Prioritization matrices, 225
Process batch, 274
Process capability
analysis, 234, 246–249
index, 247–247
one-sided index, 249
Process centered organization, 230
Process control, 210–216
Process distributions, changes in, 212
Process flow analysis, 112
approaches for, 228
Process map, 114, 232, 234, 260
Process mapping, 201, 226, 227,
253, 258, 280
Process monitoring, 203–209
Process owners, 252
Process performance measures, 239
Process sigma, 227, 234
Process-flow analysis, 109–115
Procter and Gamble, 25
Procurement, defined, 177
Product, 7
characteristics, 7
development strategies, 23
families, 67
flows, 112–113
ideas, generating new, 12–13
life cycle, 22–23, 26—27, 98, 190
and process life cycle, 23, 86–87, 102
reseach, 12
Production line, 69, 71
balancing, 72–75
Production system, 4–5, 6, 86, 201,
202, 207
components of, 5
Meridth-Index.indd 349 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
350 Index
Productivity, 12, 97, 100, 115, 171, 225,
259, 262, 267
Product-process matrix, 84–85, 88
Product/Service design, and lean, 263–264
Project
categories of, 39–40
charter, 43, 225, 234
and critical paths, 47–50
defining a, 37–38, 83
examples of, 38
life cycle, 41–42
operations, 83
planning, 38–46
plans, 43–46
probabilities of completion, 52–53
as a process, 37
schedule, 44
scheduling, 44–58
scheduling, PERT and CPM, 46–68
simulating, 53–55
team organizing, 42–43
transformation system, 85, 86, 87
Project buffer, 57
Project management,
agile approach, 36
defined, 36
objectives, 45
software capabilities, 55–56
waterfall approach, 36
Project Management Body of
Knowledge (PMBOK), 43
Project Management Institute (PMI), 43
Project Management Professional (PMP), 43
Project manager
major attributes, 43
Project plan, 35
Project planning, 38–46
known activity times, 47–50
outputs, 47
unknown activity times, 50–55
Project portfolio, 21, 38–41
Projectized, 42
Psychology of waiting, 122–123
Pull systems defined, 162, 275–277
See also Kanban; Just-in-time systems
Purchase strategy, 14
Purchasing/procurement, 9, 177–179
effective practices, 178–179
Pure research, 12
Pure services, 7, 8, 100, 117, 169, 174–175
Q
QFD, 234, 236–238, 267
overview, 236–237
Quality
defining and measuring, 14–15
dimensions, 14–15
and lean, 266
in services, 216–218
statistical control of, 210–216
Quality function deployment. See QFD
Quebec City, relocating the blood bank, 174
Queue
formation process, 122–123
psychology of waiting, 122–123
Queuing theory, 68, 122–123
R
RACI matrix, 45–46
RAND Corporation, 131
R&D. See Research and development.
Rational subgrouping, 210
Random variation, 134
Raw materials, 6, 182, 267
Rebok, 2
Red Cross, 4, 174
Red Wing Shoes, 126–127
Reengineering, 228, 229–231, 251
concept keywords, 229
defined, 229
Region, location decision and, 170–172
Regression analysis, 225, 226, 234, 253
assumptions, 145
coefficient of determination, 145
correlation coefficient, 145
extrapolation, 146
linear trend multiplicative
model, 138–141
multiple regression model, 141
relationship between
variables, 141
simple regression, 141–146
transforming data, 141
using regression model, 146
Reliability, 15
Remainder cell, 80, 82
Remanufacturing, 177
Research
applied, 12
and development (R&D), 12–14
mortality curve of, 13–14
Meridth-Index.indd 350 11/6/2015 7:26:14 PM
351Index
product, 14
projects, 40
pure, 12
Reshoring, 11, 176
Reshoring Initiative, 176
Resources, scheduling in services, 106–108
Responsiveness, 18, 26, 128, 162, 167,
168, 175
Revenue management, 100, 108–109
Reverse auctions, 178
Reverse engineering, 29
Reverse logistics, 177, 189–190
RFID (radio frequency identification),
10, 279
Rickard Associates, 66, 67
Right-to-work laws, 171
Risk cost, 184
Risk management, 35, 44
Risk priority number, 208
Ritz-Carlton, 217
Roberts, Paul Craig, 175
Robotics, 4, 66
S
Safety stocks, 149, 168, 181, 275
Safeway, 17
Sales and Operations Planning (S&OP),
126, 148–153
Samsung, 158
Sand cone model, 27, 67, 98, 157
SAP, 186–187
SAS, 127
Scandinavian Airlines, overbooking, 109
Schedule management, 104–109
Scheduling
capacity and, 104, 129
projects, with PERT/CPM, 46–58
Schonberger, Richard J., 14
SCI Systems, 176
Scope, 45
ScottishPower, 252
Sears, 25
Seasonality, 102, 132–133, 139
Second-to-market, 14, 23
Selectron, 171
Sequential process, defined, 110
Sequential production system, 275
Service, 7
blueprint, 87, 114
capacity planning for, 117–118
characteristics, 7
controlling quality, 216–218
defections, 217–218
defined, 7
flows, 112–113
gaps, 90–91
guarantees & fail safing, 91–92
kanban/JIT in, 276–277
life cycle, 22–23
pure, 7, 8, 117
scheduling, 106–109
Service level, 129, 148, 150–152
Service level agreements, 91
Service matrix, 88–89
Service-oriented architecture (SOA), 186
Service organizations
layout, 67–68
locating, 174–175
process design in, 87–92
Servicescapes, 89
Setup costs, 183
7-Eleven, 17
Shewhart, Walter A., 210
Simulation, 127, 234
Single-sourcing, 265
Site, and location decision, 173–175
Six Sigma, 4
becoming certified, 252
common tools, 234
customizing programs, 252–252
defined, 231, 232
and DMAIC, 231–235
example project, 200, 201, 232–233
financial benefits, 227
history, 231
and lean, 261, 280
phases
analyze, 243–249, 280
control, 251, 280
define, 235–238, 280
improve, 249–251, 280
measure, 238–243, 280
in practice, 251–253
roles, 251–252
training and benefits, 227
tools and methodologies, 234
Slack time, 49—50, 52
Smith, Bill, 231
Sole-sourcing, 180
Solectron Corp., 164
Meridth-Index.indd 351 11/6/2015 7:26:15 PM
352 Index
Sony, 23, 28
Southside Hospital, 226, 228, 250
Southwest Airlines, 216
Spaghetti chart, 264
Speed. See Responsiveness
Sport Obermeyer, 189, 98
Spreadsheet analysis: simulating project
completion times, 53–55
Stability, of measurement system, 243
Stakeholder, 34, 37, 44, 201
Stakeholder analysis, 226, 234, 253
Standard operating procedure, 260
Stanton, Steven, 229
Starbucks, 175
Start times, and project completion, 47–49
Station task assignments, 74
Statistical quality (process) control, 210–216
Stockless purchasing, 180
Stockout costs, 184
Stockouts, 98, 181
Storage costs, 184
Strategic sourcing, 11
Strategy, 5, 36, 98, 205
formulation, 21
frameworks, 22–30
maps, 206–207, 216
of mass customization, 16–17
purchase, 14
second-to-market, 22
Stretch goals, 236
Stretched-S curve, 22, 41-42
Student syndrome, 57
Suboptimization, 6
Sun Microsystems, 227, 228
Supermarket, 270
Supplier
audits, 180
certification and audits, 180, 265
characteristics of good, 179
and lean, 265–266
management, 179–180
relationships, 179–180
selection, 179
Supplies, 6, 183
Supply chain,
closed-loop supply chains, 189–190
defined, 160
design, 166–175
disruptions, 11, 158
performance, measures, 165–166
processes, 189
simplified, 167
strategy, 162–166
Supply chain analytics, 127
Supply Chain Council, 189
Supply chain management (SCM), 9, 10, 20,
261, 100, 160–162, 279
benefits, 164–165
defined, 161
factors driving need for, 164
goal, 161
information technology, 185–188
problems with poor planning, 128–129
strategic need for, 163–165
success, 188–189
Supply chain operations reference (SCOR)
model, 189
Sustainability, 11, 68
Synchronous manufacturing, 261, 273
System, 4
See also Production system
System flow times, 75
Systems perspective, 5–6
T
Taguchi Methods, 251
Takt time, 72, 272
Taiwan Semiconductor
Manufacturing Company, 159
Teams, and cellular layout, 79
Technology, 3, 4, 10, 24, 25, 44, 66, 68, 101,
107, 161, 163, 169, 175, 229, 231, 279
Telefónica, 200–201
Tesco, 127–128
Theory of constraints, 56, 234, 245, 273–275
ten guidelines, 273–275
Third-party logistics (3PL), 163
Thompson, Leigh, 244
3M, 28, 227
Three R’s, 11
Throughput time, 55, 110–111
Time series analysis, 131, 132–141
components of, 132–134
To-be value stream map, 270–271
Toshiba, 158
Total cost of ownership, 11, 179
Total productive maintenance (TPM),
278–279
Total quality management (TQM), 163,
246, 251
Meridth-Index.indd 352 11/6/2015 7:26:15 PM
353Index
Toyota Motor Company, 161, 180, 238, 258,
260, 261, 272
kanban at, 276
Toyota Production System, 161, 260,
261–262
TQC. See Total quality management (TQM)
Trade deficit, 19
Trade promotions, 169
Transfer batch, 274
Transformation processes, 6
defining basic forms, 67
design considerations, 67
forms of, 68–83
selection of, 83–92
volume/variety considerations, 84–85
Transit inventories, defined, 181
Trend, 132
Excel function, 139, 143
Trends in operations management, 10-11
Triple bottom line, 11
TRW, 226–227
Turns, 166
Tyco International, 227, 228
U
United States Postal Service (USPS), 200
United States Veterans Health
Administration (VHA), 35, 36
Upper control limit (UCL), 211
Upstream, in supply chain, 160
Upton, David, 16
Urban alarm services, resource
scheduling, 107–108
Utilization, 8, 110, 238
V
Valley Baptist Hospital, 260
Value, 3, 4, 6, 11, 162, 266
defined, 11
Value, adding, 6, 268, 280
Value analysis, of purchases, 178
Value chain, 161–161
Value, defining, 266–267
Value, flow of, 271–275
Value proposition, 5
Value stream,
identifying, 268–271
map, 115, 268–271
symbols, 269–270
and pull systems, 275–277
Variables, control charts for, 211–215
Vendor analysis, 179–180
Vendor-managed inventory, 169
Virginia Mason Medical Center, 259,
261, 267
Virtual cell, 81, 82
Virtual organization, 67
Visa, 2
Visual factory, 277
Voice of the customer (VOC), 226,
227, 234, 236, 237, 267
W
Waiting line theory, 68, 97
Waiting, principles of, 122–123
Walgreens, 175
Wal-Mart, 153, 17, 25, 188
Waste, 11, 260, 261, 267, 275
categories of, 267
Waterfall approach, 36
Web. See World Wide Web
Webex, 186
Weighted moving average, 135
Weighted score location model,
173–174
Welch, Jack, 227
West Babylon school district, 246
Wheelwright, Steve, 84, 203
Whirlpool, 176
White elephant, 86
Work breakdown structure
(WBS), 45
Workforce, and lean, 264
Work-in-process, 69, 70, 81
inventory, 183, 267, 276
World Trade Organization
(WTO), 20, 175
World Wide Web (WWW), 4, 186
World-class suppliers, 180
X
Xerox, 235, 259, 280
Y
Yellow belts, of six sigma,
251, 259
Yield, 278, 100
Yield management, 100, 108–109
Z
Zoran Corp, 158
Meridth-Index.indd 353 11/6/2015 7:26:15 PM
Meridth-Index.indd 354 11/6/2015 7:26:15 PM
Area Under the Normal Distribution
Example: the area to the left of Z = 1.34 is found by following the left Z column down to 1.3 and moving right
to the 0.04 column. At the intersection read 0.9099. The area to the right of Z = 1.34 is 1 – 0.9099 = 0.0901.
The area between the mean (dashed line) and Z = 1.34 = 0.9099 – 0.5 = 0.4099.
Z‒∞ X
Z 0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
0.0 0.5000 0,5040 0.5080 0.5120 0.5160 0.5199 0.5239 0.5279 0.5319 0.5359
0.1 0.5398 0.5438 0.5478 0.5517 0.5557 0.5596 0.5639 0.5675 0.5714 0.5753
0.2 0.5793 0.5832 0.5871 0.5910 0.5948 0.5987 0.6026 0.6064 0.6103 0.6141
0.3 0.6179 0.6217 0.6255 0.6293 0.6331 0.6368 0.6406 0.6443 0.6480 0.6517
0.4 0.6554 0.6591 0.6628 0.6664 0.6700 0.6736 0.6772 0.6808 0.6844 0.6879
0.5 0.6915 0.6950 0.6985 0.7019 0.7054 0.7088 0.7123 0.7157 0.7190 0.7224
0.6 0.7257 0.7291 0.7324 0.7357 0.7389 0.7422 0.7454 0.7486 0.7517 0.7549
0.7 0.7580 0.7611 0.7642 0.7673 0.7704 0.7734 0.7764 0.7794 0.7823 0.7852
0.8 0.7881 0.7910 0.7939 0.7967 0.7995 0.8023 0.8051 0.8078 0.8106 0.8133
0.9 0.8159 0.8186 0.8212 0.8238 0.8264 0.8289 0.8315 0.8340 0.8365 0.8389
1.0 0.8413 0.8438 0.8461 0.8485 0.8508 0.8531 0.8554 0.8577 0.8599 0.8621
1.1 0.8643 0.8665 0.8686 0.8708 0.8729 0.8749 0.8770 0.8790 0.8810 0.8830
1.2 0.8849 0.8869 0.8888 0.8907 0.8925 0.8944 0.8962 0.8980 0.8997 0.9015
1.3 0.9032 0.9049 0.9066 0.9082 0.9099 0.9115 0.9131 0.9147 0.9162 0.9177
1.4 0.9192 0.9207 0.9222 0.9236 0.9251 0.9265 0.9279 0.9292 0.9306 0.9319
1.5 0.9332 0.9345 0.9357 0.9370 0.9382 0.9394 0.9406 0.9418 0.9329 0.9441
1.6 0.9452 0.9463 0.9474 0.9484 0.9495 0.9505 0.9515 0.9525 0.9535 0.9549
1.7 0.9554 0.9564 0.9573 0.9582 0.9591 0.9599 0.9608 0.9616 0.9625 0.9633
1.8 0.9641 0.9649 0.9656 0.9664 0.9671 0.9678 0.9686 0.9693 0.9696 0.9706
1.9 0.9713 0.9719 0.9726 0.9732 0.9738 0.9744 0.9750 0.9756 0.9761 0.9767
2.0 0.9772 0.9778 0.9783 0.9788 0.9793 0.9798 0.9803 0.9808 0.9812 0.9817
2.1 0.9821 0.9826 0.9830 0.9834 0.9838 0.9842 0.9846 0.9850 0.9854 0.9857
2.2 0.9861 0.9864 0.9868 0.9871 0.9875 0.9878 0.9881 0.9884 0.9887 0.9890
2.3 0.9893 0.9896 0.9898 0.9901 0.9904 0.9906 0.9909 0.9911 0.9913 0.9916
2.4 0.9918 0.9920 0.9922 0.9925 0.9927 0.9929 0.9931 0.9932 0.9934 0.9936
2.5 0.9938 0.9940 0.9941 0.9943 0.9945 0.9946 0.9948 0.9949 0.9951 0.9952
2.6 0.9953 0.9955 0.9956 0.9957 0.9959 0.9960 0.9961 0.9962 0.9963 0.9964
2.7 0.9965 0.9966 0.9967 0.9968 0.9969 0.9970 0.9971 0.9972 0.9973 0.9974
2.8 0.9974 0.9975 0.9976 0.9977 0.9977 0.9978 0.9979 0.9979 0.9980 0.9981
2.9 0.9981 0.9982 0.9982 0.9983 0.9984 0.9984 0.9985 0.9985 0.9986 0.9986
3.0 0.9987 0.9987 0.9987 0.9988 0.9988 0.9989 0.9989 0.9989 0.9990 0.9990
3.1 0.9990 0.9991 0.9991 0.9991 0.9992 0.9992 0.9992 0.9992 0.9993 0.9993
3.2 0.9993 0.9993 0.9994 0.9994 0.9994 0.9994 0.9994 0.9995 0.9995 0.9995
3.3 0.9995 0.9995 0.9995 0.9996 0.9996 0.9996 0.9996 0.9996 0.9996 0.9997
3.4 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9998
Meridth-bm-Table.indd 355 11/6/2015 5:53:15 PM
WILEY END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Go to www.wiley.com/go/eula to access Wiley’s ebook EULA.
- Cover������������
- Title Page�����������������
- Copyright����������������
- Contents���������������
- Part 1 Strategy and Execution������������������������������������
- Chapter 1 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy for Competitiveness�������������������������������������������������������������������������
- 1.1 Operations���������������������
- 1.1.1. Systems Perspective���������������������������������
- 1.1.2. Inputs��������������������
- 1.1.3. Transformation Processes��������������������������������������
- 1.1.4. Outputs���������������������
- 1.1.5. Control���������������������
- 1.1.6. Operations Activities�����������������������������������
- 1.1.7. Trends in Operations and Supply Chain Management��������������������������������������������������������������
- 1.2 Customer Value�������������������������
- 1.2.1. Costs�������������������
- 1.2.2. Benefits����������������������
- 1.2.3. Innovativeness����������������������������
- 1.2.4. Functionality���������������������������
- 1.2.5. Quality���������������������
- 1.2.6. Customization���������������������������
- 1.2.7. Responsiveness����������������������������
- 1.3 Strategy and Competitiveness���������������������������������������
- 1.3.1. Global Trends���������������������������
- 1.3.2. Strategy����������������������
- 1.3.3. Strategic Frameworks����������������������������������
- 1.3.4. Core Capabilities�������������������������������
- Chapter 2 Executing Strategy: Project Management�������������������������������������������������������
- 2.1 Defining a Project�����������������������������
- 2.2 Planning the Project�������������������������������
- 2.2.1. The Project Portfolio�����������������������������������
- 2.2.2. The Project Life Cycle������������������������������������
- 2.2.3. Projects in the Organizational Structure������������������������������������������������������
- 2.2.4. Organizing the Project Team�����������������������������������������
- 2.2.5 Project Plans��������������������������
- 2.3 Scheduling the Project���������������������������������
- 2.3.1. Project Scheduling with Certain Activity Times: A Process Improvement Example�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������
- 2.3.2. Project Scheduling with Uncertain Activity Times��������������������������������������������������������������
- 2.3.3. Project Management Software Capabilities������������������������������������������������������
- 2.3.4. Goldratt’s Critical Chain���������������������������������������
- 2.4 Controlling the Project: Earned Value������������������������������������������������
- Part 2 Process and Supply Chain Design���������������������������������������������
- Chapter 3 Process Planning���������������������������������
- 3.1 Forms of Transformation Systems������������������������������������������
- 3.1.1. Continuous Process��������������������������������
- 3.1.2. Flow Shop�����������������������
- 3.1.3. Job Shop����������������������
- 3.1.4. Cellular Production���������������������������������
- 3.1.5. Project Operations��������������������������������
- 3.2 Selection of a Transformation System�����������������������������������������������
- 3.2.1. Considerations of Volume and Variety��������������������������������������������������
- 3.2.2. Product and Process Life Cycle��������������������������������������������
- 3.2.3. Service Processes�������������������������������
- Chapter 4 Capacity and Scheduling����������������������������������������
- 4.1 Long-Term Capacity Planning��������������������������������������
- 4.1.1. Capacity Planning Strategies������������������������������������������
- 4.2 Effectively Utilizing Capacity Through Schedule Management���������������������������������������������������������������������
- 4.2.1. Scheduling Services���������������������������������
- 4.3 Short-Term Capacity Planning���������������������������������������
- 4.3.1. Process-Flow Analysis�����������������������������������
- 4.3.2. Short-Term Capacity Alternatives����������������������������������������������
- 4.3.3. Capacity Planning for Services��������������������������������������������
- 4.3.4. The Learning Curve��������������������������������
- 4.3.5. Queuing and the Psychology of Waiting���������������������������������������������������
- Chapter 5 Supply Chain Planning and Analytics����������������������������������������������������
- 5.1 Importance of Supply Chain Planning and Analytics������������������������������������������������������������
- 5.2 Demand Planning��������������������������
- 5.2.1. Forecasting Methods���������������������������������
- 5.2.2. Factors Influencing the Choice of Forecasting Method������������������������������������������������������������������
- 5.2.3. Time Series Analysis����������������������������������
- 5.2.4. Causal Forecasting with Regression������������������������������������������������
- 5.2.5. Assessing the Accuracy of Forecasting Models����������������������������������������������������������
- 5.3 Sales and Operations Planning����������������������������������������
- 5.3.1. Aggregate Planning Strategies�������������������������������������������
- 5.3.2. Determining the Service Level: An Example Using the Newsvendor Problem������������������������������������������������������������������������������������
- 5.3.3. Collaborative Planning, Forecasting, and Replenishment��������������������������������������������������������������������
- Chapter 6 Supply Chain Management����������������������������������������
- 6.1 Defining SCM�����������������������
- 6.2 Supply Chain Strategy��������������������������������
- 6.2.1. Strategic Need for SCM������������������������������������
- 6.2.2. Measures of Supply Chain Performance��������������������������������������������������
- 6.3 Supply Chain Design������������������������������
- 6.3.1. Logistics�����������������������
- 6.4 Sourcing Strategies and Outsourcing����������������������������������������������
- 6.4.1. Purchasing/Procurement������������������������������������
- 6.4.2. Supplier Management���������������������������������
- 6.5 Inventory and Supply Planning����������������������������������������
- 6.5.1. Functions of Inventories��������������������������������������
- 6.5.2. Forms of Inventories����������������������������������
- 6.5.3. Inventory-Related Costs�������������������������������������
- 6.5.4. Decisions in Inventory Management�����������������������������������������������
- 6.6 Role of Information Technology�����������������������������������������
- 6.6.1. ERP�����������������
- 6.6.2. Customer Relationship Management Systems������������������������������������������������������
- 6.7 Successful SCM�������������������������
- 6.7.1. Closed-Loop Supply Chains and Reverse Logistics�������������������������������������������������������������
- Supplement A—The Beer Game���������������������������������
- Part 3 Managing and Improving the Process������������������������������������������������
- Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling the Processes���������������������������������������������������������
- 7.1 Monitoring and Control���������������������������������
- 7.2 Process Monitoring�����������������������������
- 7.2.1. Stages of Operational Effectiveness�������������������������������������������������
- 7.2.2. Balanced Scorecard��������������������������������
- 7.2.3. The Strategy Map������������������������������
- 7.2.4. ISO 9000 and 14000��������������������������������
- 7.2.5. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)�����������������������������������������������������
- 7.3 Process Control��������������������������
- 7.3.1. Statistical Process Control�����������������������������������������
- 7.3.2. Constructing Control Charts�����������������������������������������
- 7.4 Controlling Service Quality��������������������������������������
- 7.4.1. Service Defections��������������������������������
- Chapter 8 Process Improvement: Six Sigma�����������������������������������������������
- 8.1 Approaches for Process Improvement���������������������������������������������
- 8.2 Business Process Design (Reengineering)��������������������������������������������������
- 8.3 Six Sigma and the DMAIC Improvement Process������������������������������������������������������
- 8.3.1. Example Six Sigma Project���������������������������������������
- 8.4 The Define Phase���������������������������
- 8.4.1. Benchmarking��������������������������
- 8.4.2. Quality Function Deployment�����������������������������������������
- 8.5 The Measure Phase����������������������������
- 8.5.1. Defects per Million Opportunities (DPMO)������������������������������������������������������
- 8.5.2. Measurement Systems Analysis������������������������������������������
- 8.6 The Analyze Phase����������������������������
- 8.6.1. Brainstorming���������������������������
- 8.6.2. Cause-and-Effect Diagrams���������������������������������������
- 8.6.3. Process Capability Analysis�����������������������������������������
- 8.7 The Improve Phase����������������������������
- 8.7.1. Design of Experiments�����������������������������������
- 8.8 The Control Phase����������������������������
- 8.9 Six Sigma in Practice��������������������������������
- 8.9.1. Six Sigma Roles�����������������������������
- 8.9.2. Becoming Certified��������������������������������
- 8.9.3. The Need to Customize Six Sigma Programs������������������������������������������������������
- Chapter 9 Process Improvement: Lean������������������������������������������
- 9.1 History and Philosophy of Lean�����������������������������������������
- 9.1.1. Traditional Systems Compared with Lean����������������������������������������������������
- 9.2 Specify Value and Identify the Value Stream������������������������������������������������������
- 9.2.1. Identify the Value Stream���������������������������������������
- 9.3 Make Value Flow��������������������������
- 9.3.1. Continuous Flow Manufacturing�������������������������������������������
- 9.3.2. The Theory of Constraints���������������������������������������
- 9.4 Pull Value through the Value Stream����������������������������������������������
- 9.4.1. Kanban/JIT in Services������������������������������������
- 9.5 Pursue Perfection����������������������������
- 9.5.1. 5S����������������
- 9.5.2. The Visual Factory��������������������������������
- 9.5.3. Kaizen��������������������
- 9.5.4. Poka Yoke�����������������������
- 9.5.5. Total Productive Maintenance������������������������������������������
- 9.6 Benefits of Lean and Lean Six Sigma����������������������������������������������
- 9.6.1. Lean Six Sigma����������������������������
- Cases������������
- BPO, Incorporated: Call Center Six Sigma Project�������������������������������������������������������
- Peerless Laser Processors��������������������������������
- General Micro Electronics, Inc.: Semiconductor Assembly Process����������������������������������������������������������������������
- Heublein: Project Management and Control System������������������������������������������������������
- D. U. Singer Hospital Products Corp.�������������������������������������������
- Automotive Builders, Inc.: The Stanhope Project������������������������������������������������������
- Glossary���������������
- Index������������
- EULA
-
- 2016-01-16T03:22:13+0000
- Preflight Ticket Signature
Are you stuck with another assignment? Use our paper writing service to score better grades and meet your deadlines. We are here to help!
Order a Similar Paper
Order a Different Paper
